Programming Manual

33032.mc-32 HoTT.2.en

mc-32

Pro
2 Table of contents

Code lock ...................................................... 31

Secret mode .................................................. 32

Display contrast ........................................ 32

Language selection

Voice update............................................. 32

Change of display language ..................... 33

Firmware update via SD card ................... 36

Joystick calibration ................................... 36

Telemetry data display ................................... 36

Commissioning the transmitter ................................ 42

Firmware update via PC ..................................... 43

Commissioning the receiver .................................... 46

Receiver system power supply ........................... 47

General charging notices ................................... 49

Firmware update ................................................ 50

Installation notices ................................................... 52

Term defi nitions ....................................................... 54

Assigning transmitter controls, switches 

and control switches ................................................ 56

Digital trim ............................................................... 58

Winged models ........................................................ 60

Receiver layout ................................................... 61

Helicopter models .................................................... 64

Receiver layout ................................................... 65

Program descriptions

Loading a new memory location .............................. 66

»Model select« ....................................................... 69

»Copy / Erase« ....................................................... 70

Erase model ....................................................... 70

Copy model  Model ......................................... 70

Export to SD card ............................................... 71

Import from SD card ........................................... 72

Copy fl ight phase ................................................ 72

Changes ............................................................. 73

»Suppress codes« ................................................. 74

»Suppress models« ............................................... 75

»Basic settings, model«

Winged model .................................................... 76

Binding receivers ........................................... 77

General notices

Table of contents ....................................................... 2

Environmental protection notices .............................. 3

Safety notices ............................................................ 4

Safety notices and handling regulations for 

Lithium-Ion (LiIo) and Lithium-Polymer 

(LiPo) batteries .......................................................... 7

Foreword .................................................................. 10

Remote control set description ................................ 11

Technical data .......................................................... 14

General operating notices

Transmitter ..........................................................16

Opening the transmitter housing ...................16

Transmitter power supply...............................16

Recommended chargers ...............................17

Battery operation timer in display .................. 18

Lithium battery, CR 2032 ............................... 18

Joystick length adjustment ............................18

Joystick conversions ......................................19

Holder bracket for transmitter straps ............. 20

Installing additional controls, switches, etc. ... 20

Aligning the antenna ...................................... 20

Transmitter description

Front side.......................................................21

Face-side connectors

Charger socket ......................................... 22

DSC (Direct Servo Control) ...................... 22

mini-USB connector ................................. 23

Data socket .............................................. 23

Card slot (data storage) ........................... 23

Headset connector ................................... 24

ext. PPM ................................................... 25

SPI ........................................................... 25

Inside the transmitter ..................................... 26

Display and key pads .................................... 28

Operating the "data terminal" ........................ 29

Shortcuts ....................................................... 30

Warnings in the display ................................. 30

Function fi elds in the display ......................... 31

Table of contents

Range test ..................................................... 80

Helicopter model ................................................ 84

Binding receivers ........................................... 85

Range test ..................................................... 88

»Model type« .......................................................... 94

»Helicopter type« ................................................... 98

»Servo adjustment« ............................................ 102

»Stick mode«

Winged model .................................................. 104

Helicopter model .............................................. 106

»Control adjust«

Winged model .................................................. 108

Helicopter model .............................................. 112

Throttle limit function ................................... 117

Idle setting ................................................... 117

Throttle limit in combination with AR

in the »Stick mode menu« ......................... 119

»Dual Rate / Expo«

Winged model .................................................. 120

Helicopter model .............................................. 124

»Channel 1 curve«

Winged model .................................................. 128

Helicopter model .............................................. 131

»Switch display« .................................................. 134

»Control switch« .................................................. 135

»Logical switches« .............................................. 138

How do I program a fl ight phase? .......................... 140

»Phase settings«

Winged model .................................................. 142

Helicopter model .............................................. 146

»Phase assignment« ........................................... 148

»Phase trim« (winged model) ............................... 150

»Non-delayed channels«..................................... 151

»Timers (general)« ............................................... 152

»Flight phase timers« .......................................... 156

What is a mixer ...................................................... 159

»Wing mixers« ..................................................... 160

1 aileron ............................................................163

1 aileron and 1 camber fl ap ..............................164

2 ailerons ..........................................................166
Table of contents 3

2/4 ailerons and 1/2/4 camber fl aps .................168

»Helicopter mixer« .............................................. 176

Adjusting the throttle and pitch curve ............... 187

Autorotation setting ........................................... 190

General remarks about freely progr. mixers .......... 192

»Free mixers« ...................................................... 193

Linear mixers .................................................... 197

Exponential mixers ........................................... 199

Examples .......................................................... 201

»MIX active/phase« .............................................. 204

»Mix only Channel« ............................................. 205

»Dual mixer« ........................................................ 206

»Swashplate mixer« ............................................ 208

»Fail Safe« ............................................................ 208

»Teacher/pupil« ................................................... 210

Connection schematic ...................................... 213

Wireless HoTT system ..................................... 214

»Transmitter output« ........................................... 218

»Profi -trim«

Winged model .................................................. 220

Helicopter model .............................................. 222

»Trim memory«

Winged model .................................................. 224

Helicopter model .............................................. 226

»Telemetry« .......................................................... 228

Setting & dataview ............................................ 229

Satellite mode of two receivers ................... 238

Sensor/s ...................................................... 239

Selecting sensor/s ............................................ 240

RF status view .................................................. 241

Select voice update .......................................... 242

»Channel sequence« ........................................... 244

»Multichannel« ..................................................... 246

»Ring Limiter« ...................................................... 250

»MP3-Player« ....................................................... 254

»General basic settings« .................................... 256

»Servo display« ................................................... 262

»Servo test« ......................................................... 263

»Code lock« ......................................................... 264

»Info display« ....................................................... 266

Environmental protection notices

The symbol on this product, its operating instructions 

or packaging gives notice that this product may not 

be discarded as common household waste at the end 

of its service life. It must be turned over to a recycling 

collection point for electric and electronic apparatus. 

The materials can be recycled according to their 

markings. You make an important contribution to 

protection of the environment by utilizing facilities for 

reuse, material recycling or other means of exploiting 

obsolete equipment. 

Batteries must be removed from the 

unit and disposed of separately at an 

appropriate collection point.

Please inquire with local authorities 

about the responsible waste collection 

locations.

This manual serves only as a source of information 

and can be changed without prior notifi cation. 

Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for 

errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in 

the information section of this manual.

Programming examples

Introduction ............................................................ 268

Winged model

First steps ......................................................... 270

Incorporating an electric drive .......................... 276

C1 joystick switchover between

Electric motor and butterfl y .......................... 279

Electric motor and airbrake ......................... 282

Timer activation by control or switch ................. 284

Parallel operating servos .................................. 286

Using fl ight phases

Example 1 ................................................... 288

Example 2 ................................................... 292

8-fl ap wings ...................................................... 298

Delta and fl ying wing models ............................ 301

F3A model ........................................................ 304

Helicopter model .................................................... 308

Appendix

FCC declaration ..................................................... 318

Conformity declaration ........................................... 319

Guarantee certifi cate ............................................. 320
4 Safety notices

In order to enjoy your modeling hobby for a long time, 

please read these instructions thoroughly and give 

particular attention to the safety notices. You should 

also register right away at https://www.graupner.de/

de/service/produktregistrierung.aspx since this is 

the only way for you to automatically receive current 

information about your product via email.

If you are a beginner with remote controlled model 

aircraft, ships or cars, you should really ask an 

experienced model pilot for assistance.

If this remote control system changes ownership, 

these instructions should surely be included with 

remote control system.

Intended usage

This remote control system may only be used for the 

purpose intended by the manufacturer, i.e. for the 

operation of unmanned remote controlled models. 

Any other usage is not permissible.

Safety notices

SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT

and

REMOTE CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT TOYS

... because even small models can cause substantial 

property damage and/or personal injuries if they are 

not handled properly - even if caused by third parties.

Technical defects of an electrical or mechanical 

nature can lead to unexpected startup of a motor and/

or parts being hurled through the air to pose a danger 

of injury to you and to others.

Short circuit conditions are to be avoided absolutely! 

A short circuit condition may not only destroy parts 

of the remote control system but, depending on 

the circumstances and the battery energy involved, 

may also pose acute danger of incineration or even 

explosion.

All motor-driven parts, such as aircraft or ship 

propellers, helicopter rotors, open gearboxes etc. 

represent a constant danger. Contact with these parts 

must be avoided. A rapidly turning aircraft propeller 

can, for example, sever a fi nger. Also pay attention 

that other objects do not come into contact with 

driven parts.

When a drive battery is connected or a motor is 

running: never get into the danger zone of driving 

mechanisms.

Be sure to pay attention that motors do not start 

up unintentionally while performing programming 

operations. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery 

terminals to motors before programming.

Protect all units from dust, dirt, moisture and other 

foreign parts. Never expose these units to vibrations 

or excessive hot or cold temperatures. Remote 

control operation may only be performed under 

"normal" outdoor temperatures, i.e. within a range of 

-15 °C to +55 °C.

Avoid mechanical jarring and pressure stresses. 

Always check units for damage to housings and 

cables. Do not use units which have been damaged 

or become wet, even after they are dry again. 

Only those components and accessories which 

we recommend may be used. Always use original 

Graupner plug and jack connectors which are made 

for one another out of the same materials. 

When routing cables, pay attention that they are 

not stressed, unduly kinked or broken. The sharp 

edges of adjacent parts also represent a hazard for 

insulated conductors.

Be sure that all plug and jack connections are fi rmly 

seated. Do not pull on the cable to disconnect a 

plugged connector.

No modifi cations whatsoever may be made to units. 

Modifi cations will void the operating permit and all 

insurance protection.

Installing the receiver

The receiver is to be installed with a cushion of foam 

rubber to afford protection against jarring; in aircraft 

models behind a strong rib, for a car or ship model 

the location must be protected against dust and 

spray water. 

The receiver may not be mounted in direct contact 

with the hull or chassis as this would allow motor 

vibrations and/or roadway jarring to be transferred 

directly to the receiver. When a receiver system is 

installed in a model with a combustion motor, all 

receiver parts should always be protected against the 

intrusion of exhaust gases and oil residue. Above all, 

this applies to the model's ON/OFF switch, which is 

typically built into the model's outer surface.

Position the receiver such that connecting cables to 

the servos and the power supply are routed with a 

bit of slack and that the receiver's antenna is at least 

5 cm away from any large metal parts or wiring except 

for other receiver wires/cables. In addition to steel, 

this also includes carbon fi ber parts, servos, electric 

motors, fuel pumps and all sorts of cables, etc. 

Optimally the receiver should be placed at a readily 

accessible location that is well away from all other 

equipment. Under no circumstances may a servo 

cable be wrapped around the antenna or routed close 

to it.

Make sure that cables near the antenna cannot move 

about during fl ight.

Routing the receiver's antenna

The receiver and its antennas must be positioned 

as far away as possible from drives of any kind. If 

the model's hull is made of carbon fi ber material, the 

ends of the antennas must extend outside of the hull.

The orientation of antennas is not critical. 

Nevertheless, a vertical (upright) installation of receiver 

antennas is advantageous. In the case of diversity 

antennas (two antennas), the second antenna should 

be oriented at a 90° angle to the fi rst antenna. 

Safety notices

Be sure to pay attention!
Safety notices 5

Pre-start checks

Before switching the receiver on, be sure the throttle 

control is at its Stop/Idle position.

Always switch the transmitter on fi rst 

and then the receiver.

Always switch the receiver off fi rst 

and then the transmitter.

If this sequence is not maintained, such that the 

receiver is still switched on when the corresponding 

transmitter is switched to "OFF", then the receiver 

may respond to other transmitters or general radio 

frequency noise. This can cause the model to 

execute uncontrolled operations that may cause 

personal injuries and/or property damage.

In particular, for models equipped with a mechanical 

gyro: 

before switching off the receiver, disconnect the 

model's power supply to prevent the motor from 

revving up unintentionally. 

The residual spin of a gyro often produces 

so much voltage that the receiver may falsely 

interpret a throttle signal! This will then cause the 

motor to start up unexpectedly.

Range test

Perform checks for proper operation and range 

before every session. Secure the model adequately 

in place and ensure that no one is in front of the 

model.

Perform a complete functional test on the ground 

and execute a complete simulated fl ight to exclude 

the possibility of system faults or problems with the 

model's programming. When doing this, be sure to 

follow the notices provided on pages 80 and 88.

Never operate the transmitter in Model mode, i.e. 

for fl ying or driving, without an antenna. Be sure the 

antenna is fi rmly seated in its socket. 

Operating a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or 

car

Never fl y over spectators or other pilots. Never 

endanger humans or animals. Never fl y in the vicinity 

of high-voltage wires. Do not operate the model in the 

vicinity of sluice locks or where real boats or ships 

are operating. Do not operate a model on public 

streets or highways, paths or plazas, etc.

Monitoring transmitter and receiver batteries

You must stop running the model to recharge 

the transmitter's battery no later than when low 

transmitter battery voltage triggers the "Batt must be 

recharged!!" display and acoustic signal.

Check the charge in batteries routinely, particularly 

the receiver's battery. Do not wait until the 

movements of controlled mechanisms are noticeably 

slower. Replace expended batteries before they 

cause problems.

The battery manufacturer's charging instructions 

are always to be followed, this includes mandatory 

adherence to the length of charging time. Never leave 

batteries being charged unattended.

Never attempt to charge primary batteries (nonrechargeable batteries) because they can explode.

All secondary batteries (rechargeable batteries) must 

be charged before every session. To avoid short 

circuit conditions, fi rst connect the charger cable's 

banana plugs, polarity correct, into the charger and 

thereafter connect the charger cable's plugs to the 

transmitter and receiver batteries. 

Disconnect all power sources from the model when it 

is not to be used for an extended period of time. 

Never attempt to use defective batteries, damaged 

batteries or mixed-type battery combinations as 

a single group. Do not use mixed combinations 

of old and new batteries or batteries of different 

manufacture.

Servo installation

Always mount servos with the provided rubber 

vibration-damper parts. Only in this manner can these 

parts be protected against excessively hard vibrations.

Installing control rods

Control rods must be installed such that they operate 

freely and smoothly. It is particularly important that 

all rudder levers are able to move to their full limits, 

i.e. not otherwise mechanically blocked.

In order to be able to stop a running motor at any 

time, control rods must be adjusted such that the 

carburetor tap is completely closed when the joystick 

and trim wheel are brought into their end idle position.

Pay attention that no metal parts, e.g. as a result of 

rudder actuation, vibration, rotating parts, etc., rub 

against one another. Metal-to-metal contact causes 

electrical "noise" which can interfere with the correct 

operation of the receiver.

Transmitter antenna orientation

Transmission fi eld strength is minimal in an imaginary 

line extending straight out from the end of the 

transmitter's antenna. This means that "pointing" 

the transmitter's antenna directly toward the model 

will not produce good reception but rather degrade 

reception.

When multiple remote controls are operating 

simultaneously, pilots should position themselves in 

a loose group. Pilots standing off to themselves not 

only endanger their own models but those of others 

as well. 

However, when 2 or more pilots using 2.4 GHz 

remote control systems are closer than 5 m to one 

another this can lead to return channel overdrive 

which, in turn, will trigger a range warning much too 

early. Increase your distance between one another 

until the range warning ceases.
6 Safety notices

Capacity and operating time

The rule: "capacity is reduced with every successive 

recharging", applies to all batteries. Internal resistance 

increases at low temperatures to further reduce 

capacity. As a consequence, the battery's ability to 

provide current and hold its voltage is reduced.

Frequent charging or the use of battery maintenance 

programs can also result in gradual loss of battery 

capacity. Therefore the capacity of batteries should 

be checked at regular intervals, not in excess of 

every six months, and replaced if performance is 

found to be signifi cantly defi cient.

Purchase only genuine Graupner batteries!

Interference suppression for electric motors

All conventional electric motors produce sparks 

between their collector and brushes. Depending on 

the type of motor involved, this may cause more or 

less interference with the functionality of the remote 

control system.

The electric motors of a properly built system should 

therefore have interference suppression features. 

For electric drive models it is particularly important 

that every one of its motors is provided with proper 

interference suppression. Interference fi lters 

extensively suppress such disturbances and should 

always be included. 

Follow the respective recommendations included in 

the motor's operating and installation notices.

For further details about interference fi lters, refer to 

the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at 

www.graupner.de.

Servo interference fi lters for extension cables

Order no. 1040

The servo interference fi lter is necessary when an 

extended-length servo cable is used. This fi lter is 

attached directly to the receiver output. In critical 

cases a second fi lter can be attached to the servo. 

Using electronic speed controllers

Choosing the right electronic controller is largely a 

matter of matching controller performance to the 

motor to be controlled.

In order to prevent an overload or damage to the 

speed controller, its current rating should be at least 

half of the maximum locked-rotor current draw of the 

motor to which it is connected.

Particular attention is appropriate for so-called "tuning 

motors". Because of their low-turns coils these 

motors can draw a multiple of their rated current 

in a locked-rotor condition and this can lead to the 

destruction of the speed controller.

Electric ignition systems

Combustion motor ignition systems also produce 

interference that can negatively infl uence remote 

control functionality.

Always supply power to an electric ignition system 

from a separate, dedicated battery.

Use only interference-suppressed spark plugs, spark 

caps and shielded ignition leads.

Mount the receiver suffi ciently far away from ignition 

system components.

Static charges

A remote control system will be destroyed by the 

magnetic shock waves produced by a lightning strike 

- even if the storm is miles away. Therefore ...

... stop fl ying right away if a storm is approaching. 

Static charging via the antenna also represents a 

lethal hazard.

Attention

• In order to fulfi ll FCC HF emission requirements 

for mobile transmitters, a distance of at least 

20 cm must be maintained between this system's 

antenna and other persons when this system is 

operating. Operation of this system at a lesser 

distance is therefore not recommended. 

• To avoid disturbance caused by the electrical 

characteristics and emissions of other transmitters, 

keep at least a 20 cm distance from other 

transmitters.

• Operation of the remote control system requires a 

correct program setting for the given country in the 

Safety notices
Safety notices 7

transmitter unit. This is necessary for compliance 

with diverse regulations like FCC, ETSI, CE etc. 

Follow the respective instructions provided for this 

with the transmitter and receiver.

• Prior to every fl ight, perform a complete functional 

test, range test and execute a complete simulated 

fl ight in order to exclude the possibility of system 

faults or problems with the model's programming.

• Never program the transmitter or receiver while 

the model is being operated. 

Care and maintenance

Never clean the housing, antenna, etc. with cleaning 

agents, gasoline, water or similar means. Use only a 

dry, soft cloth.

Components and accessories

As manufacturer of this equipment Graupner GmbH & 

Co. KG recommends only components and accessories 

which have been tested and approved by Graupner

for their suitability, functionality and safety. If this 

recommendation is followed, Graupner accepts 

responsibility for the product. 

Graupner cannot accept any responsibility for 

the parts or accessories of other manufacturers 

which have not been approved and Graupner 

cannot evaluate every individual product made by 

other companies to assess if they are safe to use.

Liability exclusion / damage compensation

This manual serves only as a source of information 

and can be changed without prior notifi cation. 

Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for 

errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in this 

manual.

Graupner cannot monitor compliance with the 

assembly instructions, the operating instructions or 

the conditions and methods under which remote 

control components are installed, operated, utilized 

or maintained. Therefore Graupner accepts no form 

Safety notices and handling regulations for Lithium-Ion 

(LiIo) and Lithium-Polymer (LiPo) batteries 

of liability for loss, damage or costs consequential 

to incorrect usage or operation or which can be 

attributed to same.

Unless otherwise prescribed by law, the obligation 

of Graupner to provide damage compensation, 

regardless of legal grounds, is limited to the invoice 

value of the quantity of Graupner goods contributing 

directly to the damage-inducing event. This does not 

apply if Graupner is found to be subject to unlimited 

liability pursuant to binding legal stipulations with 

respect to intent or gross negligence. As applicable 

for all highly technical products, observance of the 

following safety notices and handling instructions is 

essential for a long service life, fault-free operation, 

and harmless utilization of lithium/polymer batteries.

These instructions are to be safeguarded. If the unit is 

transferred to another user, these instructions should 

certainly be passed along to the new user.

General notices

• LiIo-/LiPo batteries require particularly attentive 

handling. This applies to charging, discharging as 

well as for storage and other handling. Adherence 

to the following special specifi cations is necessary:

• Incorrect handling can lead to explosions, fi re, 

smoke and poisoning hazards. Furthermore, 

disregard for instructions and warnings can lead to 

performance losses and other defects.

• The battery's capacity is reduced by every charge/

discharge cycle. Storing the battery at temperatures 

which are too high or too low can also lead to a 

gradual reduction in capacity. In model operation, 

battery capacity drops to about 50 ... 80 % of new 

battery capacity after about 50 charge/discharge 

cycles – even though all charge/discharge rules are 

followed. This is due in part to the high discharge 

currents and inductive currents caused by motors.

• Battery packs may only be connected in series or 

parallel in exceptional cases as cell capacities and 

charged state can differ too greatly. This is why the 

battery packs we deliver are selected. 

Special notices for charging LiIo-/LiPo batteries 

from Graupner

• Since Graupner GmbH & Co. KG cannot supervise 

the correct charging and discharging of cells, 

the entire guarantee is void in cases of improper 

charging or discharging. 

• Never leave batteries being charged unattended.

• Only approved chargers with appropriate charging 

cables may be used for charging LiIo-/LiPo 

batteries. Any manipulation to the charger or 

charger cables can lead to severe damage. 

• The maximum charging capacity must be limited 

to 1.05 times the battery's capacity.

Example: 700 mAh battery = 735 mAh max. 

charging capacity

• Use only the outlet-charger included with the set 

or a specially designed charger/discharger from 

Graupner to charge and discharge LiIo-/LiPo 

batteries, refer to page 17 or www.graupner.de.

• Ensure the settings for the number of cells or for 

fi nal charging voltage and fi nal discharge voltage 

are correct. Be sure to observe the operating 

instructions for your charger/discharger.

Other handling notices

• The battery to be charged must be placed on a 

non-combustible, heat resistant, non-conducting 

surface during the charging process. Combustible 

or readily ignited objects are to be kept away from 

the charging confi guration. Batteries may only be 

charged under supervision. 

• LiIo-/LiPo batteries connected in series within 

a pack may only be charged as a group if the 

voltage of individual cells do not differ by more 

than 0.05 V. The LiIo battery included with the 

set, order no. 33000.1 (changes reserved), is 

equipped with a special safety circuit such that 
8 Safety notices

• Discharging below 2.5 V per cell damages cells 

permanently and is therefore to be avoided 

absolutely. The mc-32 HoTT transmitter switches 

itself off when its power supply voltage reaches its 

lower limit of 3.3 V. Short circuit conditions are to be 

avoided absolutely. Permanent short circuits lead 

to destruction of the battery, high temperatures and 

perhaps even self-ignition may follow.

• During discharge, battery temperature must not 

rise, in any case, to over +70 °C. Otherwise, 

better cooling or a lower rate of discharge must 

be introduced. The temperature can easily be 

checked with the infrared thermometer, order no. 

1963. The battery must never be discharged via 

the transmitter's charging socket. This socket is 

not suitable for this purpose.

Other handling notices

• Never short-circuit the battery. A short-circuit 

allows very high current to fl ow and this heats up 

the cells. This will lead to loss of electrolyte, the 

production of gases and perhaps even explosions. 

In the vicinity of, or while handling, Graupner

LiIo-/LiPo batteries, avoid electrically conducting 

surfaces because of the danger of creating a 

short-circuit condition.

• Handling connectors:

These connectors are not as robust as for other 

batteries. This applies particularly to the plus pole 

connector. The connections can easily be broken 

off. Due to thermal transfer, the connector tabs 

may not be soldered directly. 

• Cell connection:

Direct soldering on battery cells is not permitted. 

The heat of direct soldering can damage battery 

components, such as separator or isolator.

Battery connections should only be made by 

industrial spot welding. A professional repair made 

by the manufacturer or distributor is necessary to 

replace missing or torn-off cables. 

• Replacing individual battery cells:

The replacement of battery cells may only be 

made by the manufacturer or distributor and never 

by the user himself.

• Damaged cell usage:

Damaged cells may never be used or returned to 

service.

• Characteristics of damaged cells include: 

damaged housing packing, deformed battery cells, 

electrolyte or leaking electrolyte. In these cases, 

further use of the battery is not permissible.

• Damaged or useless cells are hazardous waste 

items and must be appropriately disposed.

General warning notices

• Batteries must never be put in fi re or burned. 

• Battery cells must not be submerged in liquids, 

such as water, seawater or beverages. Any contact 

with liquids, of whatever nature, is to be avoided.

• Individual battery cells and batteries are not toys 

and must therefore not get into the hands of 

children. Batteries/cells must be kept out of the 

reach of children.

• Batteries must not get into the vicinity of babies or 

small children. If a battery is swallowed, immediately 

go to a doctor or emergency medical facility.

• Batteries must not be put in a microwave oven or 

put under pressure. Smoke, fi re and more can be 

the consequences.

• Never dismantle a LiIo-/LiPo battery. Dismantling 

a battery can cause internal short-circuits. Gas, 

fi re, explosions and other problems can result.

• The electrolyte and electrolytic vapors in LiIo-/LiPo 

batteries are harmful. Absolutely avoid all direct 

contact with electrolytes. If electrolytes come 

into contact with skin, eyes or other body parts, 

immediately wash out or rinse out with generous 

amounts of fresh water then be sure to consult 

"compensation" for voltage differences between 

individual cells, by way of an otherwise typical 

balancer plug connection, is not necessary.

• Under these conditions Graupner LiIo-/LiPo 

batteries can be charged with a maximum of 2C 

(the value 1C corresponds to the cell capacity) 

charging current. At a voltage of maximum 4.2 V 

per cell and above, charging must continue a 

constant voltage of 4.2 V per cell until charging 

current drops below 0.1 ... 0.2 A.

• Charging voltage over 4.20 V per cell must be 

avoided absolutely as the cell would otherwise be 

permanently damage and could cause a fi re. In 

order to prevent the over-charging of individual cells 

in a pack, a cut-off voltage between 4.1 V ... 4.15 V 

per cell should be set to increase service life.

• Never attempt to charge battery cells with the 

wrong polarity. Abnormal chemical reactions take 

place when batteries are charged with reversed 

polarity and the battery will be useless. This can 

cause breaks, smoke and fl ames.

• The permissible temperature range for charging 

and storing LiIo-/LiPo batteries is 0 ... +50 °C.

• Storage: LiIo-/LiPo cells should have a 10 ... 20 % 

charge capacity when stored. If cell voltage drops 

below 3 V, then LiIo-/LiPo cells must absolutely 

be recharged to a capacity of 10 ... 20 % of full 

capacity. Otherwise, further deep-discharging of 

the battery will make it useless during storage in a 

discharged state.

Special notices for discharging LiIo-/LiPo 

batteries from Graupner

• A continuous current rate of about 1C does not 

represent a major problem for Graupner LiIo-/LiPo 

batteries. For larger currents, please follow the 

catalog specifi cations. In any case, observe the 

maximum current rating for the connector system, 

see maximum discharge current on the battery.
Safety notices 9

a doctor.

• Batteries built into equipment must always be 

removed from that equipment when it is not 

currently in use. Alway switch off equipment after it 

is used to prevent deep discharging. Always charge 

batteries before it is too late. Store batteries on a 

non-combustible, heat resistant, non-conducting 

surface! Deep-discharged LiIo-/LiPo batteries are 

defective and may no longer be used!

Notice for remote control set mc-32HoTT

Order no. 32032

This remote control set is factory equipped with a 

Lilo transmitter battery (changes reserved). Once 

the factory preset voltage limit of 3.60 V has been 

reached, a warning will appear in the display. 

Disposal of used batteries:

Some countries have laws requiring that all used 

batteries be turned over to an authorized collection 

center.

Disposing of batteries along with common household 

garbage is forbidden. Old batteries can be turned into 

communal collection centers for disposal at no charge 

or they can be returned to one of our dealerships or 

anywhere else where batteries of that given type are 

sold. Used batteries we have delivered can also be 

sent back to us, at your cost, through the mail. Use 

the return address below:

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

Service: Used batteries

Henriettenstr. 94-96

D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck

This represents an essential contribution to 

environmental protection.

Caution:

Damaged batteries require among other things, 

special packaging, because they are very toxic!
10 Foreword

mc-32 the Newest Generation of Remote Control Technology

The technical advances across the entire spectrum 

of model building is an ever-present challenge to 

design engineers. This is why the introduction of 

new transmission technology in the 2.4 GHz band 

represents a new milestone. 

The HoTT-System (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) 

developed by Graupner is a synthesis of know-how, 

engineering and testing done around the world by 

professional pilots. 

Established Graupner HoTT techniques theoretically 

permit over 200 models to be operated at the same 

time. However, because of the interspersed radiofrequency utilization permitted by certifi cation for the 

2.4 GHz ISM band, this number is signifi cantly lower 

in practical application. Nevertheless, in general 

more models can be operated simultaneously in the 

2.4 GHz band than would be the case in conventional 

35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting 

factor is – as often before – is still likely to be the 

size of available operating space (i.e. airspace for 

aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary 

to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other 

pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite diffi cult 

in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) 

represents an enormous boost for remote control 

operating security.

Bidirectional communication between transmitter 

and receiver, by way of a return channel built into 

the receiver, permits convenient access to data and 

programming in the HoTT receiver. For example, 

this makes it possible to swap receiver outputs or to 

divide up control functions among multiple servos 

(channel mapping). Servo travel and servo rotation 

directions in the receiver can also be matched to 

one another with these facilities. Telemetry data, 

like VARIO and GPS data, can be called up from 

optionally available modules.

Based on the mc-24 Graupner/JR computerized 

remote control system, the mc-32 HoTT remote 

control system has been especially developed for 

experienced RC pilots All conventional model types 

can be readily operated with the mc-32 HoTT 

system, regardless of whether the model is a winged 

aircraft, helicopter, ship or land vehicle. 

Complex mixed-control functions of guiding surfaces 

are often necessary for winged aircraft (rudder, 

elevators) and helicopter models (swashplate). 

Thanks to modern computer technology, very diverse 

model requirements can be programmed in the 

simplest conceivable manner with touch-sensitive 

keys (CAP Touch). Simply select the given model 

type from the mc-32 HoTT program and its software 

will assemble all signifi cant mixer functions and 

coupling functions automatically. This eliminates 

the need for separate modules in the transmitter 

to implement complex coupled functions and also 

makes sophisticated mechanical mixer mechanisms 

in the model unnecessary. For example, this makes 

the mc-32 HoTT transmitter fully equipped with both 

software and hardware to operate the well-known 

NAUTIC modules on the receiver side. The "channel 

sequencer" is new. It permits the operation of up to 

three servos to be automated.

The mc-32 HoTT system offers optimal security and 

reliability without having to forgo great operating 

convenience. The mc-32 HoTT remote control 

system has 80 model memory locations. Additional 

fl ight-phase-specifi c settings can be stored in every 

model memory location. For example, such settings 

can be made for various parameters that can be 

called up to implement particular fl ight maneuvers at 

the "press of a button". Additional model memories 

can be stored on the SD card, which is included 

standard with the set. Even telemetry data can be 

recorded for subsequent evaluation on a PC.

Since the mc-32 HoTT is equipped with two 

displays, the lower display has been optimized for 

comprehensible, simple operation of the software. 

The graphic representation of mixer functions 

is particularly helpful. The upper display allows 

telemetry data to be called up from the receiver.

Functionally-related options are clearly arranged 

by content in a simple organization. The clear, 

comprehensible program structure permits a beginner 

to quickly become familiar with the various functions 

and able to use all options pertinent to his level of 

expertise with remote control models.

This handbook describes every menu in detail. There 

are tips, many notices and programming examples to 

supplement the descriptions and also explanations 

for model specifi c technical terms, like transmitter 

control, dual rate, butterfl y, and so on.

Please observe the safety notices and technical 

notices. Read through the instructions attentively. 

Before usage, test all functions by simply attaching 

servos to the receiver included in the set. While doing 

this, observe respective notes on page 68. This will 

help you learn the essential operating techniques and 

functions of the mc-32 HoTT.

Always handle your remote controlled model with a 

sense of responsibility so that you do not endanger 

yourself or others.

The Graupner team wishes you much pleasure 

and success with your mc-32 HoTT, the newest 

generation of remote control systems.

Kirchheim-Teck, December 2011
Remote control set description 11

Computer System mc-32

32 channel remote control set in 2.4 GHz-Graupner-HoTT technology 

(Hopping Telemetry Transmission)

Technology that enthralls

The superior functional security of Graupner 

HoTTTechnology accomplished with bidirectional 

communications between transmitter and 

receiver with integrated telemetry, freely 

programmable voice output via headset 

connector, and ultra-fast response times.

Programming is simplifi ed by a programming 

technique implemented with capacitive touch 

buttons.

High contrast, 8 line, graphic display for perfect 

presentation of all parameter settings. Switch 

on/off of blue back-lighting at will. A second, 

independent display for presentation of telemetry 

data. Storage of telemetry data on a micro 

SD memory card.

4096 steps of 12-bit resolution on the channel 

signal assures extreme control sensitivity.

USB connection to read and write the model's 

memories as well as for making fi rmware updates

• Integrated Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz transmission 

system

• Maximum interference immunity made possible b 

optimized frequency hopping through as many as 

75 channels and wider channel spread

• Intelligent data transfer with correction function

• Over 200 systems can be used simultaneously

• The HoTT technique of bidirectional 

communication between sender and receiver, 

as well as the fastest possible transmission rate 

(10 ms) assures extremely short reaction times.

• 5 different languages (German, English, French, 

Italian and Spanish) available per software 

update. For the availability of a given language, 

refer to the download area.

• 80 model memories with storage for all modelspecifi c programs and parameter settings

• Seven switches (two 3-way switches, three 2-way 

switches and two 2 pushbutton switches) as well 

as three digital actuators are already built-in and 

can be used as desired

• A function encoder with two touch-sensitive, 

four-way keys ("CAP Touch") permit simplifi ed 

programming and precise settings

• Key-lock function to prevent unintentional 

operation.

• Voice and, as applicable also MP3 fi le, output over 

headset output or loudspeaker

• Simple, very fast model-independent binding

• Extremely fast rebinding, even at maximum 

distance

• Range: test and warning function

• Under-voltage warning

• Extremely wide receiver operating voltage range 

of 3.6 V to 8.4 V (functional to 2.5 V)

• Fail-safe, free channel assignment (channel 

mapping), mixer functions and all servo settings 

are simple to program
12 Remote control set description

• Binding of any number of receivers to the channel 

expansion (32 channels maximum)

• As many as four servos can be controlled 

simultaneously as a block in the SAMEoperating 

mode with a servo cycle time of 10 ms (digital 

servos only).

• Thanks to cycle time reduced down to as little 

as 10 ms, extremely short response times are 

achieved.

• Real-time telemetry evaluation in the transmitter 

display Additionally, telemetry data can also be 

selectively displayed by the SMART-BOX.

Additional HoTT features of the mc-32

• Super-fast response time through use of a fast 

main processor for data transmission.

• Micro-SD card for storage of telemetry data and 

for additional functions

• Obsolescence-proof through update capability over 

USB interface as well as via the micro-SD card

• The included Lilo battery (changes reserved) 

has a capacity of over 6000 mAh. This makes 

extremely long fl ight times possible and also 

reduces the number of charging repetitions.

• Modulation changeover per software: e.g. from 

"EXT. PPM" (e.g. Weatronic) to HoTT at the press 

of a button.

• Swashplate limiting: This function limits the 

swashplate's tilt angle to prevent the potential for 

mechanical collision in helicopter 3D operation at 

full-limit roll and pitch-axis

• functions similar to swashplate Ring-limiter: 

limitation but is used for control of up to three 

Voith-Schneider drives in ship models

• Channel sequencer for automating servo motion 

sequences of up to three servos, e.g. to automate 

the lowering of landing gear or to extend/retract 

drives in self-launching gliders

• Multi-channel function for operating Graupner

product line NAUTIC modules

• Digital trimming with pseudo »analog« endless 

pinions, effective per specifi c fl ight-phase

• Auto-trim function. The current joystick positions 

for trimming fi xed-wing or helicopter models will 

be stored in trim memory at the press of a button. 

(Model »compensation«, activate switch and 

release joystick. The correction will be blended in 

»gently« upon return of the joystick.

• C1 changeover, brake/elec. motor: This 

changeover can be implemented very easily via 

enhanced fl ight phase programming. The pilot 

determines the joystick positions (forward/rear) at 

which the motor is to switched off or the airbrakes 

are to be retracted.

• 16 control functions maximum

• Simplifi ed arrangement of operating elements, 

such as joysticks, external switches, proportional 

controls and trim levers as control functions

• Protection against obsolescence is provided 

by virtue of a fast 32-bit operating system with 

modern fl ash memory that can be updated.

• Blue back-lighted MULTI-DATA-GRAPHIK-LCD 

monitor with signifi cantly better legibility under 

unfavorable light conditions

• CONVENIENCE MODE SELECTOR to simplify 

changeovers between operating modes 1 ... 4 

(e.g. throttle left/throttle right)

• Two freely programmable mixers for fi xed-wing 

or helicopter models, each with freely selectable 

input and output functions; four curve mixers 

with innovative 8-point curve technology for 

easy to set and adjust curve values at up to 

eight points for throttle, pitch, tail or other nonlinear characteristics. The arithmetic unit in the 

CPU employs an ingenious method of calculating 

polynomial approximations for truly-rounded, ideal 

MPC (multi-point curve) mixer curves

Bi di f b f i t th h l d t li NAUTIC d l

Computer System mc-32

32 channel remote control set in 2.4 GHz Graupner-HoTT technology 

(Hopping Telemetry Transmission)

• Shifting curve mixer points can be done along 

both axes with the CAP touch pad keys 

• Eight fl ight-phase programs can be individually 

adapted for each model and given a name. The 

switchover time is programmable separately.

• SUPER SERVO menu with a perfect overview 

of all servo setting data and simple parameter 

correction at four "levels": direction of rotation, 

mid-point setting, separate servo travel on both 

sides and separate travel limiting on both sides for 

16 servos with a total of 96 setting options

• SUPER-DUAL-RATE, EXPO and EXPO/DUALRATE menu with 36 potential setting variants for 

three servo functions and six fl ight phases

• Practice-optimized multi-function menu for 

aerofoils and helicopter models. Entry of the 

number of aileron and fl ap servos automatically 

programs all necessary mixer functions in the 

multi-function "Wing mixers" menu. Differential 

aileron mixer, butterfl y mixer, dual-fl ap mixer, 

automatic gyro set function and other special 

functions

• Helicopter swashplate mixer for 1, 2, 3, or 4 point 

steering.

• Selectable cycle time: 10 ms or 20 ms/30 ms, 

depending on receiver and operating mode

• A convenient timers menu with a system of eight 

stopwatches, alarm timer, countdown timer, laps 

counter and so on. Two running timers and one 

lap timer can be displayed at the same time in 

large characters.

• Stopwatch with history: In addition to the lap 

counter there is a "Time 1" which captures the 

switch-on time and a "Time 2" which records the 

ON and OFF times separately

• in the receiver allows free Channel mapping

distribution of control functions.

• The travel distance and rotation direction settings 
Remote control set description 13

integrated into the receiver make it possible, for 

example, to match up mapped servos with one 

another

• The programmable fail-safe functions »Hold«, 

»Off« and »Move to preset positions« that are built 

into the receiver for every individual servo channel 

can be set separately

• A slot for FAT or FAT32 formatted SD and SDHC 

memory cards is available on the transmitter for 

log fi les and model programs

Model programs

• Transmitter operating time timer

• Flight phase switch assignments: six switches, two 

with a priority function. Every switch combination 

can be named freely. This makes the number of 

fl ight phases independent of the number of fl ight 

phase switches.

• Tail type normal, V-tail, Delta/fl ying-wing and 2 HR 

Sv 3+8 (which immediately makes two coupled 

elevator servos available without using free mixers 

or dual mixers)

• Flap count 4 AIL/4 FL: Full support of eight wing 

servos, even without use of free mixers

• Flight phase switching cutoff delay: 

the delay time can be switched off for individual 

channels on a fl ight-phase basis (e.g. for motor 

off in electric models or to activate/deactivate 

helicopter head lock).

Ten additional, user defi nable phase names: aside 

from the prescribed fl ight phase names, the user 

can also freely assign up to ten phase names of 

his own choice.

• Enhanced transmitter control menu: option to 

assign input-side mid-point setting for C1 control + 

trim as a transmitter control. A single input can be 

assigned to two switches for a true 3-way switch 

function.

• Wing mixers: New concept for the multi-fl ap menu 

to simplify settings of one to eight wing servos on 

a fl ight-phase specifi c basis in a comprehensible 

manner without requiring the use of free mixers

• »Info« sub-option in the Base setup model menu 

Any kind of additional information about every 

model can be entered here. This additional 

information will then appear in the newly designed 

model select function

• »Logical switches«: this function permits two 

switches to be coupled as »and« or »or« logic 

functions. The result can be employed as a 

virtual switch. Typical application: The activation 

of certain functions should only be possible in 

conjunction with other functions, e.g. wheel brake 

can only be activated when the landing gear is 

down. A number of functions which are normally 

independent of one another, are to be put in their 

base settings by way of an »Emergency switch«. 

This program automation can be activated by 

multiple switches that also select the appropriate 

program.

• Servo-middle setting range extended to ±125 %

• Number of fl ight phases: (fi xed-wing: 8, helicopter: 

7 + AR)

• Settable »Throttle too high« warning threshold 

in the helicopter menu, programmable switch-on 

warning

• Time-frame can only be stopped, and thus also 

erased, (if the timer switch is in its OFF position) 

by touching the center ESC key while the  or 

 selection keys are also being touched.

• Phase trim for all axes of fi xed-wing models 

possible

• Hotkey for servo display: one tap on the  and 

 keys of the left CAP touch pad (touch sensitive 

keys) will call up the servo display directly from 

virtually all menus.

• Servo occupancy swap on the receiver output

• CAP TOUCH operating elements with key lock 

function to prevent unintentional operation.

• CAP TOUCH display change from the main menu 

to the telemetry main menu via ESC.

• Numerous telemetry displays, programming 

functions and evaluation functions are presented 

directly in the transmitter's screen

• Graphic presentation of model icons for the model 

type display (fi xed-wing/helicopter)

• Built-in connector sockets for PC-USB interface, 

headset, SMART BOX, external RF module, 

DSC system. Prepared for teacher/pupil operation.

• Teacher/pupil system with or without cable for 

complete transfer; all settings are made on the 

teacher transmitter.

• Additional functions are planned for 

implementation via software update. 
14 Remote control set description

Technical data for the mc-32 HoTT transmitter

Frequency band 2.4 ... 2.4835 GHz

Modulation FHSS

Region EURO or FRANCE, 

see page 261

Control functions 16 functions, 4 of these can be 

trimmed

Temperature range -10 ... +55 °C

Antenna collapsible

Operating voltage 3.2 ... 4.8 V

Current draw about 500 mA

Range up to about 4 000 m

Dimensions about 252 x 252 x 60 mm

Weight about 1,685 g with transmitter 

battery

Receiver GR-32 Dual HoTT

Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology gives the dualreceiver a new Hopping Telemetry Transmission highfrequency section with state-of-the-art components 

and software. The dual-receiver has two complete 

receiver sections and additional hardware antenna 

diversity. Reception is always switched over to 

the better antenna signal and, for transmitting, 

the antenna last used for receiving will always be 

used. Thus it is assured that return channel data 

is transmitted via the better positioned antenna. 

Parameters for receiver supply voltage, receiver 

temperature and signal strength are transmitted 

without any additional sensors.

The receiver has a connector for telemetry sensors 

and one for sum signal input or output.

The receiver has six battery inputs to make it an 

excellent power source for even high-load servos.

Accessories

Order No. Description

71.26 Transmitter straps, Graupner HoTT

72.40 Transmitter straps, deluxe

 Teacher/pupil cable for mc-32 HoTT 

see page 213

Replacement parts

Order No. Description

3080 Aluminum transmitter case, HoTT, 

400x300x150 mm

33000.1 Transmitter battery, fl at LiIo, single cell sixpack/6000 3.7 V TX

33002.1 Micro-SD card, 2 GB for HoTT transmitter 

33032.2 Transmitter metal hanger for mc-32

33032.3 Hand rests for mc-32 (2 piece)

33801 HoTT transmitter antenna

Technical data for the GR-32 Dual HoTT receiver

Order no. 33516

Operating voltage 3.6 ... 8.4 V*

Current draw about 140 mA

Frequency band 2.4 ... 2.4835 GHz

Modulation FHSS

Antenna 2 x 2 diversity antennas, 

about 145 mm long, about 

115 mm of this length 

encapsulated and about 

30 mm active

Plug-in servos 16

Plug-in sensors up to four sensors

Temperature range about -10 ... +55 °C

Range up to about 5 000 m

Dimensions about 63 x 30 x 14 mm

Antenna length 4 x wire 145 mm (active 

antennae 30 mm)

Weight about 24 g

* The specifi cation for permissible operating voltage range applies 

only to the receiver. Please note in this context that receiver 

input voltage is applied without regulation to connected servos 

but the voltage range for most connectible servos (speed 

controls, gyros, etc.) is only 4.8 to 6 V.

The set, order no. 33032, includes

• Microcomputer transmitter mc-32 HoTT with 

built-in LiIo single cell six-pack/6000 mAh/3.7 V 

transmitter battery (change reserved)

• Electric outlet charger (4.2 V, 500 mA)

• bidirectional receiver, GR-32 Dual Graupner

HoTT (order no. 33516) for connection of up to 16 

servos

• USB adapter/interface (order no. 7186.6) including 

suitable USB cable for connection to a PC and an 

adapter cable for receiver updates

• Micro-SD card (2 GB) with an adapter for a card 

reader

• Sturdy aluminum transmitter case with foam 

cushioning (order no. 3080)

Other accessories in Internet at www.graupner.de. 

Contact or visit your local dealer. He will be glad to 

provide advice.

Th t d 33032 i l d T h i l d t f th mc 32 H TT t itt T hi l

Computer System mc-32

32 channel remote control set in 2.4 GHz Graupner-HoTT technology 

(Hopping Telemetry Transmission)
For your notes 15
16 General operating notices

General operating notices

Transmitter

Transmitter power supply

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter is equipped with 

a high-capacity, rechargeable LiIo 1s6p/6000 

3.7V TX battery (order no. 33000.1) as standard 

equipment. (changes reserved) However, the 

standard built-in battery is not charged upon 

delivery of the transmitter.

When the transmitter is used, its battery voltage 

should be monitored by way of the indicators provided 

in the LCD display. If the voltage level preset in the 

"Battery warning" line of the »General basic settings« 

menu, page 260, (default setting 3.60 V) is underrun, 

an acoustic signal will be sounded and a warning 

message will appear in the display. 

#01 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

3.5V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Batt must 

be recharged!!

No later than now, operation must be terminated so 

the battery can be charged again. 

Note:

Be sure the correct battery type is set in the »General 

basic settings« menu, page 260! 

The standard setting for this is "Lith.".

Charge the transmitter battery with the plug-in 

charger.

The transmitter's rechargeable LiIo battery can be 

charged by way of the charger socket located behind 

a cover on the left, front side of the transmitter – as 

viewed from the front – with the included plug-in 

charger (order no. 32032.4).

Depending on the state of discharge, the included 

plug-in charger (4.2 V/500 mA) requires up to about 

15 hours to fully recharge the transmitter battery.

Never use plug-in chargers from other manufacturers 

or chargers intended for other battery types. Charger 

output voltage which is too high or possibly even 

different plug polarity, see further below, can cause 

immense damage. We recommend that this plug-in 

charger be appropriately labeled.

Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 

4 ... 7.

The transmitter must be switched "OFF" during 

the entire charging procedure. Never switch on the 

transmitter when it is connected to the charger. Even 

a brief interruption to charging can cause charging 

voltage to rise to a level that will immediately damage 

the transmitter with over-voltage. Also for this reason, 

be sure all connectors are always plugged in securely 

and have good contact. 

Opening the transmitter housing

Switch off the transmitter before opening it (power 

switch to »OFF«). Push both housing base latches in 

the opposite the direction of the arrow marks, toward 

the inside, to their limits. Now tilt the transmitter 

somewhat to the rear so the housing base can fl ip 

open and can be unhooked. Close the transmitter's 

housing base by fi rst hooking it to the underside, fl ip 

the base closed then push both latches toward the 

outside. When closing the base, pay attention that no 

cables are pinched.

Notes:

• Make no modifi cations of any kind to the 

circuit boards as this will void the guarantee 

as well as the unit's offi cial permit.

• Be sure not to touch the circuit boards with 

any metallic objects. Do not touch contacts 

with your fi ngers.

• Before performing any tasks inside the 

transmitter, disconnect the transmitter's battery 

(see next page) to avoid potential short circuit 

damage to the transmitter's circuit boards.
General operating notices 17

Charging with automatic chargers

To achieve quicker recharging of the single cell LiIo 

battery, Graupner automatic chargers can also be 

used. The table below shows a selection of these 

chargers.

Recommended chargers (accessory)

Order

No. Designation

Input voltage 220 VInput voltage 12 V

suitable for 

battery types NiCd NiMH LiPo/LiIo lead battery

integr. balancer

6411 Ultramat 8 x x x x x

6463 Ultramat 12 plus x x xxxx

6464 Ultramat 14 plus x x x xxxx

6466 Ultra Trio plus 14 x x x xxxx

6468 Ultramat 16S x x x xxxx

6469 Ultra Trio Plus 16 x x x x x x

6470 Ultramat 18 x x x xxxx

6475 Ultra Duo Plus 45 x x x xxxx

6478 Ultra Duo Plus 60 x x x xxxx

6480 Ultra Duo Plus 80 x x x xxxx

Charger cable, order no. 3022 is additionally needed for the 

transmitter and charger cable, order no. 3021 is additionally 

needed for the receiver.

Other charger units and details about the listed chargers can 

be found in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at 

www.graupner.de.

The charger socket is equipped standard with a 

diode to protect against reversed polarity. Original 

Graupner automatic chargers also detect battery 

voltage polarity. 

Observe the confi guration notices for the charger 

used.

First connect the charger cable's banana 

plugs to the charger and only then connect 

the cable's other end into the charging jack 

on the transmitter. Never allow the bare ends 

of the banana plugs to come into contact with 

one another when the other end of the cable is 

plugged into the transmitter. 

Charging current may not exceed 1.5 A as 

otherwise the diode, and perhaps other 

components, could be damaged. If necessary, 

limit the current at the charger.

mc-32 HoTT charging jack polarity

The charger cables on the market from other 

manufacturers often have different polarities. 

Therefore use only an original Graupner charger 

cable, order no. 3022.

Removing the transmitter's battery

To remove the transmitter's battery, fi rst unlatch the 

cover of the battery compartment on the rear side of 

the transmitter housing then remove the cover.

Take out the transmitter's battery then disconnect the 

transmitter battery's connector by carefully pulling on 

the supply line cable. 

Inserting the transmitter's battery

The battery connector is protected against a 

reverse polarity connection by two slanted edges, 

see illustration. When correctly plugged in, the 

unconnected pin of the connector is at the bottom, 

as shown in the illustration. The plus 

pole (red lead) is in the middle and 

the minus pole (brown or black lead) 

is toward the antenna side. 

Never try to force the connector 

onto its circuit-board socket. 

Place the battery into its 

compartment and close the transmitter's cover.

Transmitter 

connector polarity

Battery connector attery connector
18 General operating notices

Battery operation timer at the bottom left of the 

screen

This timer shows the transmitter's cumulative operating 

time since the transmitter's battery was last charged. 

This timer is automatically reset to "0:00" when the 

transmitter is switched on and its battery voltage is 

signifi cantly higher than when the transmitter was last 

used, e.g. because the battery was charged.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Lithium battery, CR 2032

On the side of the transmitter board opposite the 

transmitter battery there is a fi xture containing a 

lithium battery, type CR 2032, which can be replaced 

by the user.

This battery maintains the date and time settings 

during a transmitter power supply outage, for 

example when the transmitter's main battery is being 

replaced.

Joystick length adjustment

The length of both joysticks can be continuously 

adjusted to adapt these transmitter controls to the 

pilot's preference.

Hold the lower half of the knurled grip in place then 

turn the upper section to release its counter-locked 

threads. 

Now pull up or push down on the joystick's end to the 

desired length. When the length is suitable, tighten 

the counter-locked threads of the upper and lower 

sections again.

Lithium battery ithium battery
General operating notices 19

Joystick restoring force

The joystick's restoring force can also be adjusted 

to the pilot's preference. The adjustment is located 

next to the return springs, see markings in the fi gure 

below.

Spring force for the given direction of motion can 

be adjusted by turning the respective screw with a 

Phillips screwdriver.

• clockwise = stronger return,

• counter-clockwise = weaker return.

Note:

The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image 

of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the 

right joystick are located to the right of the middle.

Joystick conversions

Neutralization

Both the left and the right joystick can be confi gured 

for neutralized or non-neutralized operation. Open the 

transmitter.

To change the joystick's factory setting, locate the 

screw shown in the fi gure below enclosed in a white 

circle. 

Note:

The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image 

of the left joystick so the corresponding screw for the 

right joystick is on the right side just below the middle.

Now turn this screw down until the respective joystick 

is free to move from limit to limit - or turn the screw 

out until the joystick again completely self-restoring. 

Brake spring and ratchet

The outboard screw of the two marked in the next 

fi gure adjusts the braking force and the inboard screw 

adjusts the strength of the ratchet for the respective 

joystick. 

Note:

The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image 

of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the 

right joystick are located at the top left.

vertical ertical

horizontal orizontal
20 General operating notices

Holder bracket for transmitter straps

A stable transmitter hanger for fastening neck 

straps is standard equipment on the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter.

To unfold the holder brackets, fi rst press both 

brackets inward a bit near where they are lettered 

then turn them upward by 90 °. The brackets will 

automatically lock into position. 

If you have a neck strap fastened to the holder 

bracket with key-rings, fi rst press lightly on the right 

holder bracket to release its latch so it can be folded 

down then do the same with the left holder bracket. 

Afterward, press both brackets SIMULTANEOUSLY 

into the recess.

The following straps are available as accessories:

Order no. Description

71.26 Transmitter straps, Graupner HoTT

72.40 Transmitter straps, deluxe

Installation of switches, switch modules and knob 

modules

There are a total of 20 holes in the transmitter's 

housing available for mounting accessory modules.

To be safe, always disconnect the transmitter battery 

before installation to avoid short circuit conditions. 

Be sure to pay attention that soldered points on the 

transmitter board do not come into contact with metal 

objects!

Unoccupied holes in the transmitter's housing are 

closed with blind plugs. These can easily be pulled 

out from the outside with one's fi ngernails.

Insert the accessory switch, etc. through a hole in the 

housing from the inside.

Accessory switches, potentiometers, etc. are 

fastened into place by screwing a nut onto the 

threaded shaft protruding though the housing and 

tightening it with a suitable wrench. If the control has 

a knob, it can be reattached after the nut is tightened 

down. Trim nut wrench (order no. 5733) is well suited 

for tightening down these nuts.

Trim nut wrench (order no. 5733) is well suited 

for tightening down switch element trim nuts. 

Aligning the antenna

The removable, articulated antenna is to be screwed 

into the ball-joint connector then aligned by hand. 

The antenna exhibits very limited fi eld strength 

straight out from its end, pointing it directly toward the 

model is wrong.

When screwing in the antenna, pay attention that the 

center pin in the antenna socket does not get bent or 

pressed back in the socket. 
General operating notices 21

Transmitter description

Front side

Antenna

removable antenna, with kink and twist joint

Option locations

for retrofi tting the transmitter with switches and knob 

modules 8 switches included as standard equipment

Function modules

three sliders, "SR1", "SR2", "SR3"

Digital trim

For the fi ne-tuning of servo positions 

(travel neutralization). When turned, each click 

produces an increment of adjustment (position 

indicator in display). A press on the trim wheel 

will reset the trim adjustment.

LC Display (more details available on page 28.)

Contrast adjustment: a simultaneous tap on 

() + "SET" of the right touch pad = change 

to "secret options"

Warning indicators:

• for underrun of preset battery voltage threshold

• for fault function of the teacher/pupil system

• C1 joystick too far toward full throttle when 

transmitter is switched on

• ...

ON/OFF switch (ON/OFF with LED display)

Note:

Always switch on the transmitter then the receiver. 

When switching off, fi rst switch off the receiver then 

the transmitter.

Joystick

Two joysticks for a total of four independent 

control functions. The length of the joysticks can 

be adjusted. The correlation of control functions 

1 ... 4 can be set on a model type basis by 

way of the »Basic settings, model« and 

»Control adjust« menus, e.g. throttle left or 

right. The throttle joystick can be converted from 

neutralizing to non-neutralizing, see page 19.

touch sensitive keys, left and right

LC Display (more details available on page 28.)

Telemetry indicators: receiver parameters, 

standard. Other indicators dependent on the 

data from the optional sensors connected.

LED indicators

BATTERY: illuminates when voltage is suffi cient

RF: illuminates during RF radiation

WARNING: blinks, for example, when "Throttle too 

high", "no pupil signal", "Transmitter 

battery voltage too low", ...

Function module

rotary control: left-side "SD2", 

 right-side "SD1"

Function modules

Drum roller control: left "DG5", top "DG3", right "DG1"

Function modules

Knob control (depressible): left "DG4", right "DG2"

Loudspeaker

left touch pad:

+

SET = select/confi rm

SET touched for about 1 s: Changeover between 

telemetry menu and basic display

 = scroll in one of the four directions with every 

tap (, , , )

 simultaneous horizontal tap ()

 = changeover between basic display and servo 

display

simultaneous vertical tap of the left 

() keys + "SET" of the right touch 

pad = changeover to the "secret 

options", see page 32.

SET = select/confi rm

 = scroll or change value with every touch of one 

of the four direction

symbols (, , , ) 

Circle with the fi nger around the circumference 

 = scroll/change values. Alternative values

selection with the left touch pad (, , , )

simultaneous tap on 

or  = CLEAR

right touch pad:

or

y (more

Digital trim

F ti d l

LE

BA

R

W

eft touch pad

Function modules

g pp g

battery voltage too low", ...

1 ... 4 can be set on a model type basis by

way of the »Basic settings, model« and

»Control adjust« menus, e.g. throttle left or

right. The throttle joystick can be converted from 

neutralizing to non-neutralizing, see page 19.

standard. Other indicators

data from the optional sen

Loudspeaker

Function modules

Drum roller control: left "DG5", top "DG3", right "DG1"

Knob control (depressible): left "DG4", right "DG2"

Function modules

K b l (d ibl ) l f "DG " i h "DG "

Connector sockets

on the face side, protected by a cover, see beginning 

page 22 
22 General operating notices - Face-side connections

telemetry data and symbols will be suppressed.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

DSC

The transmitter's upper display will show the 

message "CANNOT RECEIVE DATA" during this 

time.

Thus the transmitter is ready for operation. 

In contrast, the mc-32 HoTT transmitter in teacher 

mode is to be switched on prior to plugging in the 

respective cable.

3. Connect the other end of the cable to the desired 

unit in compliance with the given operating 

instructions for that unit.

Important:

Pay attention that all plugs are inserted 

securely into their respective sockets and 

use only the prescribed 2-pole TRS connector 

plugs on the DSC-side.

4. In the line "DSC Output" in the »Basic settings, 

model«, page 81 or 88 or the line "Pre-set DSC 

Output" in the »General basic settings«, page 

258, – depending on the number of functions 

transferred – one of the following modes can be 

set: PPM10, PPM16, PPM18 or PPM24. Default 

setting: PPM10.

Notice about fl ight simulators:

Because of the myriad of fl ight simulators available 

on the market, it may be necessary to have the 

contact layout of the audio plug or DSC module 

appropriately modifi ed by Graupner Service. 

DSC / Direct Servo Control

The acronym "DSC" is a carryover which stands for 

the original "Direct Servo Control" function. However, 

in HoTT systems the "direct servo control" function 

is no longer available via a diagnose cable due to 

technical reasons.

Once the left face-side cover has been moved 

away, the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's DSC socket is 

accessible:

The standard two-pole DSC jack in the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter is used as the teacher or pupil jack as well 

as an interface to fl ight simulators.

To ensure a proper DSC connection, please 

observe:

1. Make any necessary menu changes.

Refer to the section beginning on page 210 to 

adapt the mc-32 HoTT transmitter to a teacher/

pupil system.

2. When operating a fl ight simulator or when 

operating the mc-32 HoTT transmitter as a pupil

transmitter, ALWAYS leave the transmitter's ON/

OFF switch in the "OFF" position as only in this 

position does the transmitter's RF module remain 

inactive after the DSC cable is inserted. This also 

reduces the transmitter's power consumption 

somewhat.

Only the "Battery" LED should remain constantly 

illuminated and the transmitter's basic display 

should show the character string "DSC" below the 

operating time clock. At this time, the display of 

Face-side connections

Charger jack

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter's charger jack becomes 

accessible after turning the left face-side cover away.

The transmitter's rechargeable LiIo battery can be 

charged by way of the charger socket located behind 

a cover on the left, front side of the transmitter – as 

viewed from the front – with the included plug-in 

charger (order no. 32032.4).

Maximum permissible charging current with Graupner 

automatic chargers: 1.5 A.

Never use plug-in chargers from other manufacturers 

or chargers intended for other battery types. Charger 

output voltage which is too high or possibly even 

different plug polarity, see further below, can cause 

immense damage. 

More information about charging the transmitter's 

battery can be found on page 16. Observe the 

safety notices on pages 7 ... 9 when handling lithium 

batteries.
General operating notices - Face-side connections 23

Card slot

micro SD and micro SDHC

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter's card slot for type 

micro-SD and micro-SDHC memory cards becomes 

accessible once the right face-side cover has been 

turned away. 

All conventional micro SD memory cards up to 

2 GB and micro SDHC cards up to 32 GB storage 

capacity can be used. However, as a manufacturer we 

recommend the use of memory cards no larger than 

4 GB as this is completely adequate for all normal 

situations.

The type of memory card to be used in the transmitter 

is that known in conjunction with digital cameras and 

cell phones. It is to be pushed into the slot, contacts 

up, until it latches, see photos above. 

Once the memory card has been inserted, the 

transmitter's cover fl ap can be closed again. 

The stylized image of a memory card will appear in 

the basic setup screen to indicate the presence of the 

inserted memory card.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V RX VOLT 4.8V

Removing the memory card 

Press the SC card a bit further into the card slot to 

The so-called "DATA jack" is located at the right of 

this group of connector sockets.

This jack is intended for connection of the optional 

Smart-Box, order no. 33700.

Details about the Smart-Box can be found with the 

given product in the Graupner RC main catalog or in 

Internet at www.graupner.de.

Data jack

Connector jack for software updates as well as 

for changing date and time from a PC with a 

Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system.

The USB cable, order no. 32032, which is included 

with the set is to be connected to this jack. The 

procedure for carrying out a software update via 

a PC is described on page 43.

The PC software required, as well as the suitable 

USB driver, can be found on the download page for 

the given product on the Graupner website at 

www.graupner.de.

Once the necessary driver and software is installed 

on the PC, this USB connection can be used 

to update the transmitter or even just to set the 

transmitter's date and time.

To set the transmitter's date and time by way of this 

jack, refer to the »Info display« menu, beginning 

page 266. 

Mini-USB connector
24 General operating notices - Face-side connections

voice packet of a different language at any time. More 

information about this can be found in the section 

»SECRET MODE« beginning on page 32.

Importing/exporting model memories

Any model memory can be stored to an inserted 

memory card or from an inserted card into the 

transmitter. This feature is intended to support data 

exchange between identical transmitters or even use 

as data backup. More information about this can be 

found in the section »Copy / Erase« beginning on 

page 71. 

Note:

Some special symbols that can be used in model 

names are subject to specifi c restrictions associated 

with the FAT or FAT32 fi le system used by the 

memory cards and these special symbols will be 

replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).

Once the right face-side cover has been moved away, 

the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's headset connector is 

accessible:

The jack is intended for connecting conventional 

earplugs or a headset by way of a 3.5 mm TRS 

plug. (not included in the set) An appropriate symbol 

will appear in the basic display when a headset is 

connected.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V RX VOLT:4.8V

The transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those 

signals associated with the telemetry menu are 

output via this connection. These announcements 

are made in German language by default. More 

about this can be found under "Voice output" in the 

section »SECRET MODE« beginning on page 32 and 

»Telemetry« beginning on page 228.

The volume of signals and voice output sent to 

the headset can be adjusted individually in the 

lines "Voice volume", "Vario volume", and "Touchbeeps vol." of the »General basic settings« menu, 

page 259.

Headset connector

release the slot's latch then pull out the memory card.

Data acquisition / storage

The storage of data on the SD card is coupled to the 

fl ight timer. If this timer is started – when a suitable 

memory card is inserted in the card slot and a 

telemetry link to the receiver exists – data acquisition 

is also started. Data acquisition will stop again when 

the fl ight timer is stopped. The fl ight timer is started 

and stopped as described in the section "Timers 

(general)" on page 153. 

While data acquisition is ongoing, the on-screen card 

image will blink continuously at a slow rate. 

The amount of data written on the memory card is 

presented as a black bar graph which grows from left 

to right as data fi lls the memory card.

After a data acquisition session is fi nished, there 

will be an (empty) folder "Models" and a "LogData" 

folder on the memory card. Within the "LogData" 

folder there will be log fi les in sub-folders that are 

designated with names in the format 0001_yearmonth-day.bin, 0002_year-month-day.bin, etc. If a 

model memory folder is still "unnamed" when the 

memory card is removed from the transmitter and 

inserted into the card slot of a PC or laptop, the 

respective log fi les can be found in a sub-folder 

designated "NoName". There is a PC program 

available on the transmitter's download web page at 

www.graupner.de with which the stored data can be 

evaluated on a compatible PC.

Importing voice fi les

As mentioned in section "Headsets", here at the right, 

the transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those 

signals and announcements associated with the 

telemetry menu can be output by way of the headset 

connector. These announcements are made in 

German language by default. These announcements 

are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a 

transmitter-internal memory but can be replaced by a 
General operating notices - Face-side connections 25

An external RF module, for example a WEATRONIC 

module, can be connected to this jack, see illustration 

below.

An external RF module, for example a WEATRONIC 

module, can be connected to this jack. 

If an external RF module is attached, then switching 

between the external module and the internal HoTT 

RF module is accomplished in the "Module" line 

of the »Basic settings, model« menu, page 77 

or 85, by selecting either "HoTT" or "EXT.PPM". If 

necessary, the signal provided on this connection 

can be inverted by selecting the appropriate option 

for the line "ext. PPM signal" in this same menu, see 

page 83 or 92.

Note:

The "INT PPM" socket located inside the transmitter 

is also suitable for this purpose. However, a 

connecting cable must be passed through to the 

outside of the transmitter housing by way of one of 

the module openings originally intended for a switch.

EXT.PPM

The designation "SPI" stands for an interface for 

future applications. This socket is currently nonfunctional and may not be connected.

SPI
26 General operating notices - Face-side connections

Bottom side transmitter interior

Notes:

Disconnect the transmitter battery at its 

connector when performing any type of work 

inside the transmitter. Never allow solder points 

to come into contact with objects as this can 

create short circuit conditions.

All jacks and plugs not described are to be left 

unconnected.

Transmitter battery plug

For charging the battery and a list of 

suitable automatic chargers, see page 17

Lithium battery CR2032

(not rechargeable) 

Independent backup for the transmitter's 

date and time settings, see »Info display« 

menu on page 266.

Transmitter battery

Observe charging rules, see page 16

Plug-in locations

Six free plug-in locations for additional 

switches are standard, see page 21

These switch plug-in locations can 

be used in any sequence.

Plug-in location

One free plug-in location for a proportional 

rotary control module, order no. 33001.11

INT PPM plug-in location

One free plug-in location for connecting 

an additional – internal – RF module

Lithium battery CR2032

(not rechargeable)

Independent backup for the transmitter's

date and time settings, see »Info display« 

menu on page 266.

Plug-in locations (UVR, 5-pole)

eight free plug-in locations for future 

rotary control installations.
For your notes 27
28 Transmitter description - Display and keypad

Display and keypad

Stopwatch in min:s

(upward/downward)

Flight timer in min:s

Model memory location 1 ... 80

Transmitter battery voltage with dynamic bar indicator. If the 

lithium battery voltage underruns the 3.60 V (adjustable) 

threshold a warning message will appear and an acoustic 

warning will sound. (switchover for NiMH batteries.)

Transmitter operating time This will automatically be reset to zero after a 

charging process.

Model type indicator 

winged model, helicopter

Display diagram for all four digital trim levers with numeric indicator and 

direction indicator

Graupner|SJ logo or 

fl ight phase name

Model name

Operating mode 

HoTT/PPM

Receiver battery 

voltage RX-SPG

de

Model operating time

Owner name

micro-SD card inserted

Signal strength

M=Model

operation

P = Pupil

(pupil transmitter)

=M

No

pupil

signal!

Throttle

too

high!

Batt. must

be recharged!!

Fail Safe

setup

t.b.d.

A selection of potential warnings and notices. More about this on page 30.

left touch pad:

+

SET = select/confi rm

SET touched for about 1 s: Changeover between 

telemetry menu and basic display

 = scroll one of the four directions with every tap: 

(, , , )

 simultaneous horizontal tap ()

 = changeover between basic display and servo 

display

simultaneous vertical tap of the left 

() keys + "SET" of the right touch 

pad = changeover to the "secret 

options", see page 32.

SET = select/confi rm

 = scroll or change value with every touch of one 

of the four direction symbols (, , , )

Circle with the fi nger around the circumference 

 = scroll/change values. Alternative values 

selection with the left touch pad (, , , )

simultaneous tap on 

or  = CLEAR

right touch pad:

or

Model type indicator

winged model, helicopter

mod

me

ating m

T/PPM

era

TT

ating tim

Model name

Ope

HoT

Model oper

Owner name

Transmitter battery voltage with dynamic bar in

ithium battery voltage underruns the 3.60 V (a

threshold a warning message will appear and 

warning will sound. (switchover for NiMH batte

Transmitter operating time This will automatically be reset to zero after a

charging process.

Display diagram for all four digital trim levers with numeric indicator and 

direction indicator

ndicator. If the

adjustable) 

an acoustic

ries.)

micro-SD card inserted

S

M

o

P

(p

m

Graupne

flight pha

er|SJ logo or

se name

al strength

Model

ation

Pupil

il transer)

Model
Transmitter description - Display and keypad 29

Operating the "data terminal"

Entry keys ESC and SET

Display symbols

Displayed telemetry symbols

 the active model memory has not yet been 

"bound" to a HoTT receiver. More about the 

"Binding" process can be found on page 77 

and 85.

 Switched off on RF transmitter side

blinking antenna symbol: 

The last receiver bound to the active model is 

inactive or out of range

M x no telemetry signal to receive

M signal strength indicator of the connection to 

the model

P signal strength indicator of the connection to the 

pupil transmitter in the display of the teacher 

transmitter for wireless teacher/pupil operation

Keys left of the display

• key ESC

each brief tap on the ESC key will cause a 

stepwise return in function selection or even 

further to the base screen. Any changes made to 

settings remain.

Momentarily touching the ESC key for about 1 s 

while in the base screen will open and close the 

Telemetry menu.

• Selection keys  

1. A tap on one of these keys will scroll, 

appropriate for the given arrow direction, 

through lists, such as through the model 

selection list or the multi-function list or within 

menus though the menu's lines. 

2. A brief simultaneous tap on the  keys will 

cause a switch from the transmitters base 

screen, as well as from almost any menu 

position, into the »Servo display« menu.

Keys to the right of the display

• SET key

1. After switching the transmitter on, a brief tap 

on the SET key will cause a jump from the 

displayed base screen to the Multi-function 

menu. In the same manner, a selected menu 

can now be called up with the SET key. 

2. Within menus having settings, activate / 

deactivate (confi rm) the given setting fi elds with 

a tap on the SET key.

• Selection keys  

1. "Scrolling" through the Multi-function menu 

and menu lines within the Basic Settings menu 

analogous to the selection keys of the left touch 

pad or by "circling" over the four selection keys.

2. Select or set parameters in setting fi elds after 

their activation with a tap on the SET key, 

whereby the  and  keys will have the 

same given function. In this case it is completely 

irrelevant which of these two keys are used.

3. A brief simultaneous tap on the  or  keys 

will set a changed parameter value in the entry 

fi eld back to its default value (CLEAR).

Notes:

• Touching the given touch pad does not itself 

initiate the given action but rather the end of the 

touch.

• In the event the touch pads do not exhibit any 

functionality immediately after switching the 

transmitter off and then on again right away, this 

is not a fault. Just switch the transmitter off again 

then wait for several seconds before switching it 

on again.
30 Transmitter description - Shortcuts and warning notices

Shortcuts

The following key combinations can be used to 

directly call up certain menus and options:

• CLEAR

A brief simultaneous tap on the  or 

keys of the right touch pad will reset a changed 

parameter value in the active entry fi eld back to its 

default value.

• »Servo display«

A brief simultaneous tap on the  keys of the 

left touch pad will change from the transmitter's 

base screen or from almost any menu position to 

the »Servo display« menu, see page 262.

• »Telemetry« menu

Tap the center ESC key of the left touch pad for 

about 1 s to call up the »Telemetry« menu from 

the transmitter's base screen or return to the base 

screen again, see text beginning on page 228.

• Graphic display of telemetry data

Briefl y touching one of the selection keys of the 

left or right touch pad will cause a jump from the 

base screen directly to the transmitter's graphic 

display of telemetry data or will allow paging back 

and forth between individual graphic displays. 

A brief tap on the center ESC or SET key will 

cause a return back to the base screen.

• »SECRET MODE« 

(language selection and contrast)

Touch and hold the  selection keys of the left 

touch pad then momentarily touch the SET key of 

the right touch pad, see text beginning on the next 

double-page.

• Entry lockout

Entry lockout is activated and deactivated from the 

base screen by simultaneously touching the ESC

and SET keys for about 2 s.

• Quick-Select

From the multi-function list, a jump can be made 

into a "Structure overview" by way of a brief, 

simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad. Menus are arranged in clear 

groups in this overview.

Memory

Base servo sett. Transm. controls

Switches Flight phases

Timers Mixers

Special funct. Global functions

All codes

Now the desired group can be selected with the 

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad ... 

Memory

Base servo sett. Transm. controls

Switches Flight phases

Timers Mixers

Special funct. Global functions

All codes

... then fi nally tap the center SET key of the right 

touch pad briefl y. As soon as the key is released, 

only the respective generic term for the given 

menu will remain listed. For example:

Copy / Erase

Supress codes Supress models

Model select

Warning notices

BIND. N/A

OK

"Bind not available"

A receiver has not yet been 

bound to the currently 

active model memory. A 

brief tap on the SET key 

will cause a direct jump to 

the appropriate option.

CAN‘T

RECEIVE 

DATA

No bound receiver in 

range

ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off? Only for a receiver that 

has already been bound:

Please select RF "on" or 

"off"?

RF

MUST BE

OFF

OK

Prompt to switch off RF 

transmission

(A bound receiver can 

only be replaced by 

another receiver when RF 

transmission is switched off.)

ACT

TRAINER

Wireless Link

INH

Is the "wireless teacher/

pupil connection" that 

was active when the 

transmitter was last used 

to be continued, ACT

(active, i.e. continue) or 

switched off INH (inhibit, 

i.e. discontinue)?

Batt. must

be recharged!!

Operating voltage is 

too low

Warning notices
Transmitter description - Function fi elds and entry lockout 31

Fail Safe

 setup

 t.b.d.

Failsafe has not yet been 

activated

Throttle

 too

 high!

Helicopter throttle joystick 

or limiter too high

No

 pupil

 signal

Connection between 

teacher and pupil is 

interrupted

SD-CARD

INSERT

OK

No SD or SDHC memory 

card in the card slot or 

card is not legible

• The transmitter has not been operated within 

the time period specifi ed by the "Stick warning" 

line of the »General basic settings« menu, see 

page 260. The message ...

!Stick!

..., die "WARNING" LED at the right next to the 

on/off switch will blink and an acoustic warning will 

sound. If the transmitter is not operated within the 

next minute, the transmitter will switch itself off.

• If battery voltage is too low, a model switch is 

blocked for reasons of safety. An appropriate 

message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

A lockout for the touch keys, and thus protection 

against inadvertent use of all setting options, can be 

established by touching and holding the ESC and 

SET keys simultaneously for about two seconds while 

the mc-32 HoTT transmitter is in its basic display. 

This lockout condition is indicated by a key symbol, 

located at the intersection point of the trim bars, 

which is displayed in reverse video.

#01 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V 

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Unlock by

ESC

and SET

RX VOLT:4.9V

The lockout is effective immediately but controls 

remains operationally ready. 

This lockout can be removed by again touching 

and holding the ESC and SET keys for about two 

seconds. A lockout condition is also removed the next 

time the transmitter is switched on.

Entry lockout 

Depending on the given menu, certain function fi elds 

will appear on the bottom display line.

CLR SEL SET STO SYM ASY 

A marked function is activated with a tap on the 

SET key.

Function fi elds

• (clear) erase CLR

• SEL (select): selection

• (set) "set" or adjust a value SET

• STO (store): store (e.g. control position)

• SYM set values symmetrically 

• ASY set values asymmetrically 

• switch fi eld symbol 

(assignment of all types of switches)

•  within a menu, change to the 

second page, (menu continuation)

Function fi elds in the display

SEL, STO, SYM, ASY, , 
32 Transmitter description - Secret mode

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter's »SECRET MODE« 

menu can be called up from almost any menu 

position by touching and holding the  selection 

keys of the left touch pad and the SET key of the right 

touch pad for at least 3 seconds. This will produce 

the display shown below.

 SECRET MODE 

TOP LCD CONTRAST

VOICE UPDATE

0

FIRMWARE UPDATE

CALIBRATION

BOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0

TOP / BOTTOM LCD CONTRAST

Following a tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, a selected "... CONTRAST" line can be 

used to adjust the contrast of the given display to 

meet personal preference with the selection keys, as 

described in more detail on page 259. Another tap on 

the SET or ESC key will return to line selection.

The line ...

VOICE UPDATE

As mentioned in section "Headsets" on page 24, 

the transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those 

signals and announcements associated with the 

telemetry menu can be output by way of the headset 

connector. These announcements are made in 

German language by default. These announcements 

are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a 

transmitter-internal memory but they can be replaced 

by a voice packet of a different language at any time.

At the time of this manual's printing, the standard 

SECRET MODE

Language selection and display contrast

SD card delivered with the set includes the following 

languages: 

• German

• English

• French

• Italian

• Spanish

The given active language packet can be swapped out 

either with the PC program available as a download 

from the transmitter's web page at www.graupner.de 

or with the SD card, as described below. If not 

already done, insert the SD card or SDHC card into 

the transmitter as described on page 23. Once the 

memory card is inserted in the transmitter, switch the 

transmitter on with RF switched off.

ON

Please select

RF on/off?

OFF

Language change

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

select the line "VOICE UPDATE" line. 

 SECRET MODE 

TOP LCD CONTRAST

VOICE UPDATE

0

FIRMWARE UPDATE

BOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0

Use the center SET key of the right touch pad to 

switch to the selection page for the "VOICE UPDATE" 

line.

FILE LIST

VOICE_FRANCE.VDF

VOICE_GERMAN.VDF

VOICE_ITALIANO.VDF

VOICE_SPAIN.VDF

VOICE_ENGLISH.VDF

Now use the  keys of the left or right touch pad to 

choose the desired language, for example:

FILE LIST

VOICE_FRANCE.VDF

VOICE_ITALIANO.VDF

VOICE_SPAIN.VDF

VOICE_ENGLISH.VDF

VOICE_GERMAN.VDF

Confi rm the choice with another tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad. The selected language 

packet will be loaded into the transmitter's memory.

 SECRET MODE 

TOP LCD CONTRAST

VOICE UPDATE

0

FIRMWARE UPDATE

BOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0

22/100%

I

The loading process is fi nished as soon as the 

progress bar at the lower edge of the display 

disappears.
Transmitter description - Secret mode 33

 SECRET MODE 

TOP LCD CONTRAST

VOICE UPDATE

0

FIRMWARE UPDATE

BOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0

When this process is fi nished, switch off the transmitter. 

All settings stored in the transmitter remain intact 

after a change of language has been made.

Notes:

• If the warning ...

RF

MUST BE

OFF

OK

... appears, then the transmitter's RF radiation 

is still active. Jump to the »Base setup model« 

menu, select the "RF transmit" line, select its 

"OFF" option then repeat the procedure

• If the warning ...

SD-CARD

INSERT

OK

... appears then the transmitter does not detect 

a memory card in its card slot or the card found 

cannot be read.

• If the selection window is empty ...

FILE LIST

... then the transmitter could not fi nd an 

appropriate fi le on the inserted memory card. 

Check the contents of the SD card's "VoiceFile" 

directory on a PC or laptop.

FIRMWARE UPDATE

Change display language

Important notice:

Be sure to check the charge status of your 

transmitter's battery or charge its battery as a 

precaution before every update. Also backup 

all occupied model memories so they can be 

restored if that should become necessary. 

 SECRET MODE 

TOP LCD CONTRAST

VOICE UPDATE

0

FIRMWARE UPDATE

BOTTOM LCD CONTRAST 0

In the same manner as described above in the 

section "VOICE UPDATE", this menu item can be 

used to update or change the transmitter's fi rmware, 

including its display language. At the time of this 

manual's printing, the standard SD card delivered 

with the set includes the following languages: 

• German

• English

A French, Italian and Spanish version are to be 

implemented at a later point in time. 

Appropriate updates and information can be found on 

the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's product page under the 

Download link at www.graupner.de. 

FILE LIST

MC-32_1V234_ENGLISH.BIN

MC-32_1V234_FRENCH.BIN

MC-32_1V234_DEUTSCH.BIN

Now use the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to choose the desired fi rmware version, for 

example:

FILE LIST

MC-32_1V234_FRENCH.BIN

MC-32_1V234_DEUTSCH.BIN

MC-32_1V234_ENGLISH.BIN

Confi rm the choice with another tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad. The loading of 

fi rmware into the transmitter's memory will be started 

and following two displays, visible only very briefl y, 

which only make reference to the fi rmware update ...
34 Transmitter description - Secret mode













Firmware Download

Prozess Start

Please Wait....













Boot Download

Success!!!

Please Wait....

..., the message:













Firmware

Downloading...

Progress 023/275

... will appear in the display. As soon as the counter 

to the left of the "/" character reaches the value 

shown on the right as the volume to be loaded, the 

message ...









Firmware Upgrade

Success!!!

... will appear. After a few seconds this message 

will be erased and the transmitter will automatically 

restart. The transmitter is now again operational.

Notes:

• If the warning ...

SD-CARD

INSERT

OK

... appears then the transmitter does not detect 

a memory card in its card slot or the card found 

cannot be read.

• If the selection window is empty ...

FILE LIST

... then the transmitter could not fi nd a suitable 

fi rmware fi le on the inserted memory card. Check 

the contents of the SD card's "Firmware" directory 

on a PC or laptop.

JOYSTICK CALIBRATION

If you feel the neutral position of your self-calibrating 

joysticks (controls 1 ... 4) are not exactly 0 % of 

their control travel, then this can be checked and, if 

necessary, corrected as follows.

Jump to the »Model select« menu and initialize 

a free model memory as described on page 69. 

Whether the model to be initialized is a winged 

aircraft or a helicopter is irrelevant. 

Wait for the notices which typically appear in the 

transmitter's base screen following a model change 

then jump to the »Servo display« menu, for example 

by simultaneously touching the  keys of the left 

touch pad (WITHOUT any interim changes to trim 

settings or other program settings). 

If all four of your transmitter's joystick functions are 

still self-neutralizing, this display should ideally look 

like the one shown below.

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Otherwise the graph bars show current setting 

percentages for joystick control functions which are 

not self-neutralizing – typically for the "C1" throttle/

brake or throttle/pitch joystick. For example, if the 

throttle/brake joystick is in its "quarter-throttle" 

position, the display would appear as shown below.

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

–50

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

One after the other, put both joysticks into each 

of their four possible limit positions without

exerting force at the limit position. In each of 

these eight possible limit positions, the – side 

dependent – indication for exactly -100 % or +100 % 

should be displayed. For example, if transmitter 

control 2 is at its right limit and the other three joystick 

functions are in their respective middle positions 

then the transmitter's display should look like the one 

shown below.
Transmitter description - Secret mode 35

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

–100

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Regardless of the number of self-neutralizing joystick 

functions available on your transmitter, if these 

checks produce four 0 % results and eight 100 % 

results then your transmitter's joysticks are optimally 

calibrated. You can terminate this process then, if 

appropriate, delete the model memory just created.

Otherwise jump (as described at the outset of the 

previous double page) to the "Stick calibration" line 

in the »SECRET MODE« menu then briefl y touch the 

center SET key of the right touch pad.

STICK CALIBRATION

 0%



The  selection keys of the right touch pad will 

now allow you to cyclically select the four calibrated 

joystick planes, e.g. the left/right plane of the right 

joystick.

STICK CALIBRATION

0%





Now position the right joystick – without exerting extra 

force – to its left limit corresponding with the onscreen blinking arrow pointing to the left.

STICK CALIBRATION

+102%





... and briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. This concludes this example calibration of the 

right joystick's left limit. The circle in the middle of the 

stylized joystick plane will now blink as confi rmation of 

the calibration.

STICK CALIBRATION

+100%





Now release the self-neutralizing joystick so it can 

return to its center position and then tap again on the 

center SET key to calibrate the joystick's centered 

position. The right triangle marker will begin to blink.

STICK CALIBRATION

0%





Repeat the calibration process for the right limit of the 

right joystick. The other joystick planes are calibrated 

analogously.

Proceed similarly to calibrate the three sliders 

mounted in the middle console and the two 

proportional rotary controls on the sides of the 

transmitter. The calibration options for these fi ve 

proportional controls can be reached by repeatedly 

tapping on the  or  selection keys of the right 

touch pad until the desired calibration position is 

reached, e.g..:

LEVER CALIBRATION

0% 



Notes:

• Correct any bad calibrations by repeating the 

respective process.

• Within a given joystick plane, each of the three 

calibration positions can be selected directly with 

the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad.

Briefl y touching the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad will terminate the process and return to the submenu "Stick calibration".
36 Transmitter description - Telemetry data display

The mc-32 transmitter has two independent displays; 

a large display for operating the transmitter and a 

smaller display just below the antenna socket for 

the graphic display of telemetry data. The telemetry 

display is activated automatically as soon as the 

transmitter receives telemetry data from the receiver 

via the return channel.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V 

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

If however, at the lower edge of the base display, only 

"X" – as shown in the fi gure above – is displayed at 

two locations instead of " " then the telemetry display 

will show the warning ...

CAN‘T

RECEIVE 

DATA

... which will be replaced shortly thereafter with the 

Graupner|SJ logo and the transmitter names ...

mc32

... to indicate there is no receiver with a responding 

telemetry connection within range. Switch on the 

model's receiver system or bind a receiver to the 

active model memory as described in detail on 

page 77 and 85.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00

4.1V 

0:00

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V RX VOLT:4.8V

When a telemetry connection exists, the upper display 

will automatically present the "Receiver" screen ...

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP

L–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE R-LOW V:4.6 +22°C

... which is described in more detail in a section by 

the same name on the next page.

Sensor Select

Up to four sensors can be connected, in any 

combination, to a telemetry-capable receiver. 

However, the data output by these sensors must be 

(as described on page 240) selected in the »SENSOR 

SELECT« sub-menu of the »Telemetry« menu ...

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER

GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE

ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

... in order to activate their display. This data from 

the selected sensors is then appropriately prepared 

for illustration by the graphic indicators as described 

below. Furthermore, only sensors activated in 

the »SETTING & DATAVIEW« sub-menu of the 

»Telemetry« menu, beginning page 229, according 

to the instructions included with the given sensor will 

be responsive.

To switch between the screens for activated sensors 

in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu of the 

»Telemetry« menu, tap briefl y on one of the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S ST : 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–SPG.:4.8 TMP

V–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

GENERAL

ELECT. AIR

VARIO

GPS

RECEIVER

... and, after the selected screen has been displayed, 

use one of the  two keys to select the line of 

the desired sensor. If no sensor is activated, then 

all display lines and sensors described in the next 

column, except for the "RECEIVER" line, are blended 

out of the display and the selection list:

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S ST : 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–SPG.:4.8 TMP

V–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

GENERAL

ELECT. AIR

VARIO

GPS

RECEIVER

The selection can be confi rmed right away by 

activating the center SET key of the right touch pad 

or by simply waiting until, after a brief pause, the 

main display of the given selected sensor appears 

automatically. 

Note:

The sequence of the below described displays 

is a consequence – starting from the given main 

display – of taps on the  key.

More details about the following named modules 

can be found in the appendix and in Internet at 

Telemetry data display
Transmitter description - Telemetry data display 37

www.graupner.de in the web page for the given 

product.

RECEIVER 

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP

L–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE R-LOW V:4.6 +22°C

This screen presents the »RX DATAVIEW« of the 

Telemetry menu's »SETTING & DATAVIEW« submenu, see page 229, with data processed and 

displayed graphically. 

The displayed items are as follows:

Value Explanation

RX-S QUA signal quality in %

RX-S ST signal strength in %

RX-dBm Reception power in dBm

TX-dBm transmit power in dBm

V PACK Indicates the longest time span in ms 

in which data packages are lost in the 

transmission from the transmitter to the 

receiver.

RX-VOLT current operating voltage of the 

receiver's power supply in volts

M-RX V Lowest receiver operating voltage since 

last startup, in volts

TMP the thermometer depicts the receiver's 

current operating temperature

GENERAL MODULE

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S ST : 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–SPG.:4.8 TMP

V–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

RECEIVER

GENERAL

ELECT. AIR

VARIO

GPS

0.0V

BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C

 T1 0°C

E FUEL F

CELL.V

1:0.00

2:0.00

3:0.00

4:0.00

5:0.00

6:0.00

0

0.0V

BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C

 T1 0°C

E FUEL F

 ALT 

0m

 0m1

 0m3

 0.0A

POWER

 0.0V

0

If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the 

data acquired by a General-Engine module, order no. 

33610, , or a General-Air module, order no. 33611. 

More details about these modules can be found in 

the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the 

web page for the given product.

Depending on how this module is equipped with 

sensors, this screen can permanently display the 

data shown in the table below.

The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 

and BAT2), the measurement results of up to two 

temperature sensors (T1 and T2) and a fi ll level gage 

for the fuel tank.

An alternating display along the screen's right edge 

will display a list of current cell voltages for a LiPo 

battery with up to six cells or operational data (current 

altitude with respect to the starting location, ascent/

decent m/1 s and m/3 s, current current being 

drawn in amperes and current voltage of the battery 

connected to the sensor). 

The displayed items are as follows:

Value Explanation

BAT1 / 

BAT2

battery 1 or 2

FUEL fuel level / tank gage

E / F empty / full

T1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2

CELL V cell voltage of cells 1 ... max. 6

ALT current altitude

0m1 m/1 s ascent/decent rate

0m3 m/3 s ascent/decent rate

A current draw i amperes

V battery voltage

Battery and load indicators

0.0V

0.0A

0mAh

0ml

This display depicts current voltage, current current 

draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of 

"Batt 1" connected to the General-Engine module 

(order no. 33610) or General-Air (order no. 33611) 

module as well as the fuel consumed in ml.
38 Transmitter description - Telemetry data display

SENSOR 1

0.0V

0°C

SENSOR 1

If attached, this display depicts currently measured 

voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage 

sensor, order no. 33612 or 33613, connected 

to "T(EMP)1" of the General-Engine module 

(order no. 33610) or the General-Air module (order 

no. 33611).

SENSOR 2

0.0V

0°C

SENSOR 2

If attached, this display depicts currently measured 

voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage 

sensor, order no. 33612 or 33613, connected to 

"T(EMP)2" of the General-Engine module (order 

no. 33610) or the General-Air module (order no. 

33611).

Rotary speed sensor

U/min

0

0 0

If attached, this display depicts the measured 

rotary speed of a speed sensor (order no. 33615

or 33616) attached to a General-Engine module 

(order no. 33610) or a General-Air module (order no. 

33611).

Note:

The appropriate blade count must fi rst be set in the 

module's telemetry menu before the correct speed 

can be displayed.

Vario

0.0

0m

m

s

If attached, this display will depict the altitude (in 

m) relative to location, starting location as well as 

the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) data 

originating from a Vario integrated into a GeneralEngine module (order no. 33610) or General-Air 

module (order no. 33611).

ELECTRIC AIR MODULE

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S ST : 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–SPG.:4.8 TMP

V–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

RECEIVER

GENERAL

ELECT. AIR

VARIO

GPS

0.0V 0m/3s

BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C

T1 0°C

0

1L0.00

2L0.00

3L0.00

4L0.00

5L0.00

6L0.00

 ALT 0m

7L0.00

 0.0V 0A

0.0V 0m/3s

BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C

T1 0°C

0

1H0.00

2H0.00

3H0.00

4H0.00

5H0.00

6H0.00

 ALT 0m

7H0.00

 0.0V 0A

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the 

data acquired by an Electric-Air module, order no. 

33620. More details about this module can be found 

in the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in 

the web page for the given product.

Depending on how this module is equipped with 

sensors, this screen can permanently display the 

data shown in the adjacent table.

The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and 

BAT2), up to two temperature measurements (T1 

and T2), current altitude with respect to the starting 

location, the model's ascent/decent rate in m/1 s and 

m/3 s and, in the middle of the screen, the current 

draw currently being taken from a power source.

Along the right edge of the screen is a table of 

alternating values for cell voltages at balancer 

connections (L) or voltages for up to 7 attached 

battery cell packs (H). 

The displayed items are as follows:

Value Explanation

V current voltage

A current current

BAT1 / 

BAT2

battery 1 or 2

ALT current altitude

m/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent rate

m/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent rate

T1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2
Transmitter description - Telemetry data display 39

L or H cell voltage of cells 1 ... max. 14

L = balancer connection 1

H = balancer connection 2

AKKU 1

0.0V

0.0A

0mAh

This display depicts current voltage, current current 

draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of 

"Batt 1" connected to the Electric-Air module (order 

no. 33620).

SENSOR 1

0.0V

0°C

SENSOR 1

If attached, this display depicts currently measured 

voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage 

sensor (order no. 33612 or 33613) connected 

to "T(EMP)1" of the Electric-Air module (order 

no. 33620).

SENSOR 2

0.0V

0°C

SENSOR 2

If attached, this display depicts currently measured 

voltage and temperature from a temperature/voltage 

sensor (order no. 33612 or 33613) connected 

to "T(EMP)2" of the Electric-Air module (order 

no. 33620).

Vario

0.0

0m

m

s

If attached, this display will depict the altitude 

(in m) relative to location, starting location as well 

as the current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) data

originating from a Vario integrated into a ElectricAir module (order no. 33620).

VARIO 

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S ST : 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–SPG.:4.8 TMP

V–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

RECEIVER

GENERAL

ELECT. AIR

VARIO

GPS

RXSQ

 0

 MAX

 0m

 MIN

 0m

 ALT

 0

H

L

m/1s

0.0

m/3s

0.0

m/10s

0.0

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the 

data acquired by a Vario module, order no. 33601. 

The displayed items are as follows:

Value Explanation

ALT current altitude

RXSQ Signal strength of the signal received 

by the receiver in %, see page 230.

MAX the preset maximum altitude limit 

relative to starting location at which, 

when exceeded, will cause an audible 

warning to be sounded

MIN the preset minimum altitude limit 

relative to the starting location at which, 

when underrun, will cause an audible 

warning to be sounded

m/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent rate

m/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent rate

m/10 s m/10 s ascent/decent rate

Vario 

0.0

0m

m

s

If attached, this display will depict altitude relative 

to location or starting location (in m) as well as the 

current rate of ascent/decent (in m/s) from data 

acquired by a Vario module (order no. 33601).
40 Transmitter description - Telemetry data display

GPS

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S ST : 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–SPG.:4.8 TMP

V–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

RECEIVER

GENERAL

ELECT. AIR

VARIO

GPS

N RXSQ 0 

DIS 0m

ALT 0m

0.0m/1s 

0m/3s 

0m/10s

N 0°00.0000

O 0°00.0000

W E

S

Kmh

0

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the 

data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order 

No. 33600. 

Aside from the model's current position and speed, 

the center section of this screen will also display 

current altitude with respect to the starting location 

as well as the model's current ascent/decent rate in 

m/1 s, m/3 s and m/10 s, current reception quality 

and the model's distance from its starting location.

The displayed items are as follows:

Value Explanation

W / N / O / S west / north / east / south

Kmh speed

RXSQ return channel signal strength

DIS distance

ALT current altitude with respect to starting

m/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent rate

m/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent rate

m/10 s m/10 s ascent/decent rate

GPS

N

W O

S

Kmh

0

km/h

DIS 

m 

m/s 

ALT 

m 

0

0

0.0

0

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the 

data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order 

No. 33600. 

The displayed items are as follows:

Value Explanation

km/h speed 

DIS horizontal distance in m

m/s ascent/decent rate in m/s

ALT altitude relative to starting location in m

Vario

0.0

0m

m

s

If attached, this display will depict the altitude (in m) 

relative to location, starting location as well as the 

current rate of ascent/descent (in m/s) from data 

originating from the Vario integrated into the 

GPS-/Vario module (order no. 33600).
For your notes 41
42 Commissioning the transmitter

Preliminary remarks

The Graupner HoTT system theoretically permits 

simultaneous operation of more than 200 models. 

However, because of the interspersed radiofrequency utilization permitted by certifi cation for the 

2.4 GHz ISM band, this number is signifi cantly lower 

in practical application. Nevertheless, in general 

more models can be operated simultaneously in the 

2.4 GHz band than would be the case in conventional 

35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting 

factor is – as often before – is still likely to be the 

size of available operating space (i.e. airspace for 

aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary 

to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other 

pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite diffi cult 

in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) 

represents an enormous boost for remote control 

operating security.

Battery charged?

Since the transmitter is delivered with an empty (not 

charged) battery, the battery must fi rst be charged 

according to the charging instructions on page 16. 

Otherwise a warning tone will be sounded and an 

appropriate message will be blended into the basic 

display if the low voltage threshold set in the 

"Battery warning" line of the 

»General basic settings« menu 

(see page 260) is underrun. 

Transmitter startup

After being switched on, the message shown below 

will appear in the transmitter's screen for about two 

seconds. 

ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off?

Within this brief period there is an opportunity to switch 

RF transmission off by using the  or  key of the 

right touch pad to shift the position of the fi eld shown 

in inverse video to the right so that ON is in standard 

video and OFF is presented in inverse video.

ON

Please select

RF on/off?

OFF

Now switch the RF module off by tapping on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. 

The telemetry display just below the antenna socket 

will then briefl y show the message ...

CAN‘T

RECEIVE 

DATA

... and in parallel to this, the transmitter's basic 

display will appear similar to that shown below:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

00:00h

M

V

The symbol combination means that the currently 

active model memory has already "bonded " with a 

Batt. must

be recharged!!

Commissioning the transmitter

Preliminary remarks about the mc-32 HoTT transmitter

Graupner-HoTT receiver but there is no connection 

to that receiver at the moment. (In this example, 

RF transmission has been switched off.) 

If, however, the transmitter is switched on without

switching RF transmission off, the symbolic antenna 

mast will blink. At the same time, an acoustic warning 

will sound until a connection is established with the 

respective receiver. As soon as the connection is 

established, the "X" at the base of the symbolic antenna 

will be replace with a fi eld strength indicator, for 

example , and the visual and acoustic warnings will 

cease. 

If a telemetry connection has also been established 

for the incoming signal, that is output by the receiver 

in the model, then the right side of this same screen 

line will display a similar indication of signal strength 

for this reception of the receiver's transmitted signal 

(M ) as well as the current voltage of the receiver's 

power supply. 

On the other hand, if the symbol combination 

appears in in the display and the front display shows 

the message "Can't receive data" then the currently 

active model memory is not "bound" to any receiver 

at the moment.

Under-voltage warning

If the transmitter's voltage drops below a certain 

value set in the »General basic settings« menu 

(page 260), 4.7 V by default, there will be visual and 

acoustic under-voltage warnings issued.

Important notices:

• The transmitter in the set is already preset, 

as delivered, with default values which are 

correct for operation in most European 

countries (except France). 

If the remote control system is to be operated 

in France then the transmitter's "Region" 

setting MUST be changed over to "FRANCE" 

mode, see page 261. IN NO CASE may the 
Commissioning the transmitter 43

Universal/EUROPE mode be used IN FRANCE.

• As many as 16 servos can be attached to the 

standard receiver included with the mc-32

HoTT 2.4 Set. The specifi c receiver included 

in the set has already been bound to the set's 

transmitter at the factory.

In order to achieve the greatest possible 

fl exibility but still preclude unnecessary 

inadvertent operator errors, control channels 

5 ... 16 have not been assigned to any 

controls. This means that servos connected 

by way of these channels will remain in their 

middle positions until an operator element 

has been assigned. Practically all mixers are 

initially inactive for this same reason. More 

about this can be found on page 108 (winged 

aircraft) or 112 (helicopter models).

• The fundamental procedure for initial 

programming of a new model memory location 

can be found on page ?? and the programming 

examples that begin on page 268. 

• When the remote control system is switched 

on, being bonded or when making settings, 

that the transmitter's antenna is always far 

enough away from the receiver's antennas. 

If the transmitter's antenna is brought too 

close to the receiver's antennas this will cause 

receiver over-modulation and its red LED will 

illuminate. At the same time the return channel 

will drop out and, as a consequence, the fi eld 

strength indicator in the transmitter's screen 

will be replaced by an "x" and the receiver's 

current battery voltage display will show 0.0 V. 

The remote control is then in Fail-Save mode, 

see page 208, i.e. servos will remain in their 

current positions until a new, valid signal 

can be received. In such a case, increase 

the distance (between the transmitter and 

the model containing the receiver) until the 

indicators are again "normal".

Transmitter fi rmware updates are carried out either 

as described under "FIRMWARE UPDATE / Change 

display language" in the section »Secret mode« on 

page 33 or as described below with the help of a PC 

running a Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system. This 

second method connects the transmitter to the PC via its 

5-pole mini-USB interface connector, located behind the 

transmitter's left front cover – as viewed from the front – 

and, if this method is chosen, it is done at one's own risk. 

Current software and information is available in 

Internet at www.graupner.de under the Download link 

for the given product.

Note:

You will automatically be notifi ed of new updates 

per email after registering your transmitter at 

https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung. 

The aforementioned "given product page" is most 

easily reached by entering "www.graupner.de" into 

your Internet browser's address line then pressing the 

ENTER key on your PC or laptop keyboard.

On the so-called "homepage" for Graupner, click on 

one of the "fl ags" to switch the website to a language of 

your choice, e.g. the British fl ag for English. Afterwards 

locate the entry fi eld with the title "Search".

Place the cursor in this fi eld with a mouse click then 

enter a search keyword, e.g. the article number 

printed on the type plate located on the rear side of 

the transmitter.

Another press of the ENTER key on the PC or laptop 

will open the sought page:

Transmitter fi rmware updates
44 Commissioning the transmitter

Now use your Internet browser's vertical scroll 

bar to move down the page a bit until the tabs 

"Characteristics", "Spare parts" "Accessories" and 

"Downloads" appear. Because the "Downloads" tab is 

still missing on the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's page at 

the time of this manual's printing:

Now search here for the necessary fi le/s and start 

the download with a double-click on the "Download" 

control button beneath the selected fi le.

Store the fi le on your computer in a directory of your 

choice.

Updating mc-32 HoTT software

The USB interface cable, order no. 7168.6

(included with the set), will be needed to update the 

transmitter's software via the transmitter's face-side 

USB interface connector. This cable's connector 

is to be directly plugged into the 5-pole mini-USB 

connector socket on the rear side of the transmitter.

Note:

Be sure to check the charge status of your 

transmitter's battery or charge its battery as a 

precaution before every update. Also backup 

all occupied model memories so they can be 

restored if that should become necessary. 

1. Installing drivers

Install the required driver software, included in the 

"USB Drivers" folder of the program packet, onto 

your PC or laptop so your computer can handle 

the transmitter's integrated USB interface.

Start driver installation with a double-click on 

the respective fi le and follow the on-screen 

instructions. Once this software has been 

successfully installed, the computer must be restarted. Drivers only need to be installed once. 

2. Installing the software up-loader

Unpack the fi le "Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_

Ver-XX.zip" in a suitable directory then execute 

the "Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-XX.exe" 

program fi le with a double-click on its fi lename. 

Follow the instructions provided by the installation 

wizard. 

3. Establishing a transmitter-to-PC connection

With the transmitter switched off, connect the 

USB cable by way of its 5-pole mini-USB socket to 

the rear side of the transmitter.

4. Updating mc-32 HoTT transmitter software

Start the "Firmware_Upgrade_grStudio_Ver-X.X" 

program from the directory where it is located.

Use the selection sequence "Menu", "Port Setup" 

or open the "Controller Menu" and click on "Port 

select".

Now in the "Port select" window, select the COM 

port connected to the USB interface. The correct 

port can be recognized by its designation "Silicon 

Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge" in the "Device 

Name" column. In the above example this would 
Commissioning the transmitter 45

be the "COM 3" port.

Now call up menu option "Firmware Upgrade" 

from "Menu" or open the "Controller Menu" and 

click on "Firmware Upgrade".

Click on the button labeled "File Browse" and 

select the desired fi rmware update fi le with a ".bin" 

fi lename extension from the "Open fi le" window.

Firmware fi les are product-specifi cally coded, 

i.e. if you should accidentally select a fi le which 

does not correspond to the product (e.g. receiver 

update fi le instead of a transmitter update fi le), the 

"Product code error" popup window will appear 

and the block the update process from starting.

Now switch on the transmitter then start the 

transmitter update by clicking on the "Download 

Start" button. 

After a brief period a warning will appear stating 

that the transmitter's RF transmission will now be 

interrupted and that, because of this, any receiver 

system currently in operation should be switched 

off. Switch off your receiver system if it is switched 

on then click on "Yes".

This will start the actual update process. A progress 

bar will begin to operate above a sequence of 

running text lines.

Do not terminate the update process before the 

progress bar has reached its right end and the 

"Firmware Download Success" message appears.

Click on "OK". Subsequently switch off the 

transmitter and disconnect the USB cable 

between the transmitter and the PC or Laptop.

If the progress bar hangs up without showing any 

further progress, close the program and repeat 

the update process. Be sure to watch for any error 

messages that may appear.
46 Receiver initialization

Receiver initialization

Preliminary remarks about the GR-32 DUAL receiver

Receiver system

The mc-32 HoTT remote control set includes a type 

GR-32 DUAL, 2.4 GHz bidirectional receiver for 

connecting up to 16 servos.

After switching on this HoTT receiver, should "its" 

transmitter not be within range or switched off, then 

the receiver's red LED will illuminate continuously for 

about 1 s then begin to blink slowly. This indicates the 

receiver has not (yet) established a link to a Graupner

HoTT transmitter. If a link has been established, the 

green LED will illuminate continuously and the red 

LED will extinguish. 

In order to establish a link to the transmitter, the 

Graupner HoTT receiver must fi rst be "bound" to 

"its" particular model memory in "its" Graupner

HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as 

"binding". This "binding" linkage is only necessary 

once for each receiver/model memory combination. 

Refer to pages 77 or 85. The "binding" procedure 

has been done at the factory for model memory 

1 of the units delivered together as a set so this 

"binding" procedure will only be necessary to link 

additional receivers or if a memory location change 

becomes necessary (and – e.g. after a change of 

transmitter – can be repeated anytime).

On-board voltage display

The current voltage of the receiver's power supply will 

be shown in the right side of the transmitter's screen 

if a telemetry link exists between the receiver and 

transmitter. 

Temperature warning

Should the receiver's temperature sink below an 

adjustable threshold (default value -10 °C) or rise 

above an adjustable threshold (default value +55 °C) 

, an acoustic warning will be issued by the transmitter 

in the form of a uniform beep of about 1 s duration. 

The aforementioned threshold limits are stored and 

adjusted in the receiver.

Servo connections and polarity

Graupner HoTT receiver servo connections are 

numbered. The connectors used are keyed against 

polarity reversal. Pay attention to the small side 

chamfers when plugging in these connectors. Never 

use force. 

The four outer, vertical connectors, designated with 

"B + -" are intended for battery connections.

Do not reverse the polarity of this connection. 

Reversed polarity could destroy the receiver and 

devices attached to it.

The supply voltage is bussed across (i.e. common 

for) all numbered connections. The function of 

every individual channel is determined by the 

transmitter used, not by the receiver. It is not only 

the throttle servo connection which is different for 

every manufacturer and model type. For example, in 

Graupner remote control systems the throttle servo is 

on channel 1 for winged aircraft and on channel 6 for 

helicopter models. 

Concluding notices:

• The signifi cantly greater servo resolution 

characteristic of the HoTT system produces a 

noticeably fi rmer response behavior in comparison 

to previous technology. Please take the time to 

familiarize yourself with this sensitive behavior.

• If you have a speed controller with integrated 

BEC* arranged in parallel with the receiver battery, 

its positive pole (red cable) may to be removed 

from the 3-pole connector. Be sure to look for 

notices about this in the instructions for the speed 

controller used.

With a small screwdriver, carefully lift up the the 

connector's center latch (1) just a bit then pull out 

the red lead (2) and tape it up 

with insulation tape to prevent 

possible short circuits (3).

Follow the installation instructions on page 52 for the 

receiver, the receiver antenna and for mounting the 

servo.

Reset

To execute a reset of the receiver, press and hold the 

SET button on the receiver's top-side while switching 

the power supply on. 

If a receiver reset is done while the transmitter is 

switched off or on a receiver which is not bound, 

the receiver's LED will slowly blink red for about 

2 or 3 seconds. Now release the button again. The 

binding process can now be initiated right away on the 

transmitter-side. 

If reset is done on a bound receiver and the 

corresponding model memory is active in the 

powered on transmitter, the LED will illuminate in 

green after 2 or 3 seconds as an indication that 

the transmitter/receiver system is again ready for 

operation. Now release the button again.

Please note the following: 

A receiver RESET will cause ALL receiver 

settings, except for binding information, to return 

to their factory settings. 

Therefore if a RESET is triggered unintentionally, 

any custom settings that had been present in 

the receiver before the reset will have to be 

established again by way of the Telemetry menu.

A deliberate RESET is recommended, especially 

if a receiver is to be "transferred" into another 

model. This is a rather simple method to eliminate 

settings which are no longer applicable.

* Battery Elimination Circuit

rot

1

2 3
Receiver initialization 47

Receiver power supply

Among other aspects, the safe operation of a model 

depends on a reliable power supply. In the event 

that, despite smooth operating rods, fully charged 

battery, battery leads with adequate cross-section, 

minimum contact resistances at connectors, etc., 

the transmitter indicates repeated receiver voltage 

collapses or is receiver voltage is generally too low; 

please give attention to the following notices.

Give primary attention to fully charged batteries when 

model operation is to be started. Be sure that the 

contact surfaces of connectors and switches really 

are low resistance. If necessary, measure the voltage 

drop across installed switch cables when they are 

under load because even new heavy-duty switches 

can cause a voltage drop of up to 0.2 V. This value 

can increase in contacts by factors as a consequence 

of aging and oxidation. The constant vibrations and 

jarring also takes its toll on contacts to produce a 

creeping increase of contact resistance. 

Servos present another possible problem source. 

Even rather small servos like a Graupner/JR DS-281 

can draw up to 0.75 A of current when it is blocks 

under load. Just four of these servos in a "foam" 

model can therefore load down the on-board power 

supply by as much as 3 A ...

Therefore you should choose a power supply which 

will not break down under greater loads but rather 

always deliver suffi cient voltage. To "calculate" 

necessary battery capacity you should always fi gure 

on at least 350 mAh for every analog servo and at 

least 500 mAh for every digital servo. 

For example, from this point of view a battery with 

1400 mAh would be the absolute minimum to power 

a receiver system with a total of 4 analog servos. But 

be sure to also consider the receiver itself into the 

calculation because its bidirectional functionality will 

draw about 70 mA of current too.

In any case, it is recommended that several of the six 

available connections designated "- +/B" be used for 

the supply of power. (These connections are ONLY 

intended for battery connections.) 

Connect the power supply preferably by way of 

the socket/s which are close to connectors of 

attached servos. Where only high-power servos are 

connected, it may be necessary to use all receiver 

battery connections to connect as many as three 

PRX receiver power supplies (depending on battery 

power). Even where only two batteries are used via 1 

PRX it is preferable to use the receiver connections 

closest to the servos which draw the most current. 

The fi gure below shows an example of a stabilized 

receiver power supply (PRX-5A, order no. 4136) for 

the connection of two batteries. As an alternative 

solution, a switch could be inserted with power supply 

cables to two receiver connectors. Such a double 

connection not only reduces the risks associated with 

a cable break but also ensures a more uniform supply 

of power to attached servos.

If a separate battery is connected to each receiver 

battery connection, be absolutely sure the batteries 

have the same voltage and power rating. Never 

connect different battery types or batteries charged 

to signifi cantly different levels to the receiver. This 

can lead to effects similar to short circuit conditions. 

In such cases, insert voltage stabilizers, such as the 

PRX-5A receiver power supply, between the batteries 

and the receiver.

PRX receiver power 

supply, stabilized

Order No. 4136

For reasons of safety, do not use battery boxes or dry 

cell batteries.

The voltage of the on-board power supply will be 

displayed at the bottom right of the transmitter's 

screen while the model is in operation.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V RX VOLT:4.8V

If the adjustable warning threshold (default value 

3.60 V) set in the Telemetry menu, see page 260, 

is underrun, a visual and an acoustic under-voltage 

warning will be issued.

Despite this feature, be sure to check the condition 

of the battery at regular intervals. Do not wait for 

the warning to be issued before recharging the 

battery.

Note:

An overview of available batteries, chargers and 

current source test instruments can be found in 

the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at 

www.graupner.de. A selection of suitable Compter 

chargers are listed in the table on page 17.

Receiver power supply
48 Receiver initialization

Charging the receiver battery

Charger cable, order no. 3021, can be plugged 

directly onto the receiver's battery for charging. If 

the battery in the model is connected by way of 

an order no. 3046, 3934, 3934.1 or 3934.3 power 

supply cable, then charging can be accomplished 

via the charging jack or special charging connector 

integrated into the switch. The switch in the power 

supply cable must be in its "OFF" position for 

charging.

Receiver battery 

connection polarity

Receiver system power supply

NiMH 4-cell battery packs

In compliance with the aforementioned conditions, 

your Graupner HoTT receiver system can be readily 

operated with traditional 4-cell battery packs as long as 

the packs have adequate capacity and voltage level.

NiMH 5-cell battery packs

Five-cell battery packs offer a greater voltage 

tolerance than do 4-cell packs. 

However, be aware that not every servo available on 

the market is able to tolerate the voltage level output 

by a 5-cell pack over the long term, this is particularly 

true when the battery pack is freshly charged. Some of 

these servos react to this with a noticeable "grinding" 

sound. 

Therefore pay attention to the specifi cations of the 

servos you use before making a choice for a 5-cell 

battery pack..

LiFe 6.6 V batteries with 2 cells

From a contemporary perspective, these new cells 

are the very best choice. 

LiFe cells are also available in hard plastic casings 

to protect them from mechanical damage. Like LiPo 

cells, LiFe cells can be quick charged in suitable 

chargers and they are comparatively robust.

This type of secondary cell battery is also rated for 

a signifi cantly greater number of charge/discharge 

cycles than, for example, LiPo batteries The nominal 

6.6 V output of a 2-cell LiFe battery pack does 

not present a problem for either Graupner HoTT 

receivers nor for those servos, speed controllers, 

gyros and other devices which have been specifi cally 

approved for operation in this – higher – voltage range. 

Please note however that practically all servos, 

speed controllers, gyros and other devices built 

in the past and most such devices currently still 

offered on the market have only a permissible 

voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V. Use of these batteries 

in conjunction with these devices demand use of 

a stabilized voltage regulator, e.g. the PRX, Order 

No. 4136, see appendix. Otherwise there is danger 

that attached devices will incur damage within a short 

period of time.

LiPo 2-cell packs

For a given capacity, LiPo batteries are lighter than, 

for example, NiMH batteries. LiPo batteries are also 

available in hard plastic casings to protect them from 

mechanical damage.

The comparatively high nominal voltage, 7.4 V, for 

a 2-cell LiPo pack does not present a problem for 

either Graupner HoTT receivers nor for those servos, 

speed controllers, gyros and other devices which 

have been specifi cally approved for operation in 

this – higher – voltage range. Please note however 

that practically all servos, speed controllers, 

gyros and other devices built in the past and 

most such devices currently still offered on the 

market have only a permissible voltage range 

of 4.8 to 6 V. Use of these batteries in conjunction 

with these devices demand use of a stabilized 

voltage regulator, e.g. the PRX, Order No. 4136, see 

appendix. Otherwise there is danger that attached 

devices will incur damage within a short period of 

time.
Receiver initialization 49

General charging notices

• The charging instructions for the charger as well 

as for the battery from its manufacturer to be 

observed.

• Pay attention to the maximum permissible 

charging current specifi ed by the battery's 

manufacturer. In order to prevent damage to the 

transmitter, charging current should never exceed 

1 A. If necessary, limit the current at the charger.

• If the transmitter battery is nevertheless to be 

charged at a current rate in excess of 1 A, then it is 

imperative that this is done outside the transmitter. 

Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the 

transmitter's board due to overloading its printed 

circuit paths and/or overheating of the battery.

• If an automatic charger is to be used for charging, 

perform several test charging procedures to ensure 

the fl awless functionality of its automatic shut-off. 

This applies particularly if you want to charge the 

standard installed NiMH battery with an automatic 

charger unit intended for NiCd batteries Monitor the 

charger's shut-off behavior if it has that option.

• Do not execute a battery discharge or battery 

maintenance program through the charger jack. 

The charger jack is not suitable for this purpose.

• Alway connect the charger cable to the charger 

fi rst and then to the receiver or transmitter battery. 

This avoids the possibility of shorting the bare 

banana plug ends together.

• If the battery heats up signifi cantly, check the 

battery's condition, replace the battery or reduce 

the charging current.

• Never leave a charging battery unattended.

• Follow the safety notices and handling 

instructions provided on page 7.
50 Receiver initialization

Receiver fi rmware updates are made by way of the 

connector located on the side of the receiver and 

the help of a PC running under Windows XP, Vista 

or Windows 7. The optional USB interface cable 

needed for this is order no.7168.6 along with adapter 

cable, order no.7168.6A. The programs and fi les also 

needed can be found in Internet on the Graupner 

website at www.graupner.de under the downloads for 

the particular product.

Note:

After registering your receiver at 

https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung, 

you will automatically receive notifi cation of future 

updates per email. 

Updating receiver fi rmware

Note:

Before any update procedure, be sure to check the 

charged status of the receiver's battery. If necessary, 

charge the battery before beginning with an update.

1. Installing drivers

If not already done, install the required driver 

software for the USB interface, order no. 7168.6, 

as described on page 43.

2. Establishing a receiver / PC connection

Connect the USB interface cable, order no. 

7168.6, via the adapter cable, order no. 7168.6A, 

with the "- + T" connector on the receiver. These 

connectors are protected against polarity reversal 

so pay attention to the small chamfers on the 

sides of connectors. Do not use brute force, these 

connectors should latch in rather easily.

Adaptor cable 

Order No. 7168.6A

if available: 

disconnect the central, red braid

Receiver fi rmware updates

Caution: 

If the adapter cable is still has wires for all 

three poles, cut the red insulated wire for the 

middle connector pin of the adapter cable, 

Order No. 7168.6A.

Afterward, connect the USB interface with the 

included USB cable to the PC or laptop (PC USB/

mini-USB interface connector). A red LED on 

the interface board should illuminate for a few 

seconds even though the connection is made 

correctly.

If not already off, now switch the receiver off.

3. Firmware update utility program

On the PC, start the "Graupner_Firmware_Update_

Utility_VerX.XX.exe" program with a double-click. 

This program is located among the fi les in the 

"Firmware-Updater" folder. (At the time of printing 

for this manual, this program's current version 

is 1.18 and it can be started without fi rst being 

installed.)

In the "COM Port Setup" group box, select the 

COM port to which the USB interface is connected. 

If you are not sure whic h selection is correct, press 

the "Search" control, choose the connection labeled 

"Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge" from 

the popup window and then activate "OK". The 

"Baud Rate" setting should be "19200".

Afterwards, click on the "Signal 2:Vcc3:Gnd" radio 

button in the "Interface Type" group box.

Now click on the control labeled "Browse" that is 

located at the top right corner of the window. From 

the "Open fi le" window which appears, select the 

appropriate fi rmware update fi le for your receiver. 

Such fi les always have the ".bin" fi lename extension. 

Typically this fi le can be found in the folder whose 

name is prefi xed with the order number of the 

receiver to be updated. This folder should contain 

the ZIP fi le that was downloaded and unpacked. 

Its fi lename should also be prefi xed with the order 

number of the receiver to be updated. For the 

standard GR-32 DUAL receiver included in this set, 

the directory would be designated "33516_16CH_

RX". The fi lename will appear in the corresponding 

window.

Firmware fi les are product-specifi cally coded, i.e. 

if a wrong fi le is accidentally selected which does 
Receiver initialization 51

not correspond to the product (e.g. a transmitter 

update fi le instead of a receiver update fi le), the 

"Product code error" popup window will appear 

and the update process will not start.

Activate the control labeled "Program". Wait for 

the progress bar to start. Depending on the speed 

of the computer being used, this may take several 

seconds. Now switch on the receiver while holding 

its SET button down. After a few seconds the 

"Found target device ..." message will appear 

in the status display. Now you can release the 

receiver's button. The actual fi rmware update 

will begin autonomously after this message has 

appeared.

However, if the receiver is not detected, the "Target 

device ID not found" popup window will appear.

If this process terminates before reaching the 

100 % mark, switch off your receiver's power supply 

then try to start the update process all over again. 

Do this by performing the above steps again.

The status display and progress bar will show you 

the progress of the fi rmware update. The update 

is concluded when the text "Complete ... 100 %“ 

or "Complete!!" appears in the bottom line of the 

status display.

Both LEDs on the receiver will illuminate during 

the update process. Upon successful conclusion 

of the update process, the green LED will 

extinguish and the red LED will begin to blink.

Switch the receiver off and remove the interface 

cable. Repeat this procedure for any other 

receivers present.

4. Receiver initialization

Following a successful update process you MUST 

perform a receiver initialization procedure before 

using the receiver again. This is necessary for 

reasons of safety.

Do this by pressing and holding the receiver's SET

button then switching the receiver's power supply 

on. Now release the SET button again. When you 

subsequently switch the receiver on again, the 

receiver's green LED will illuminate continuously 

for about 2 or 3 seconds. Except for binding 

information, all other settings that may have been 

programmed into the receiver will now be reset 

to factory defaults and will have to be re-entered 

again if they are needed.
52 Installation notices

In order to prevent uncontrolled movements of servos 

connected to the receiver during startup

always fi rst switch on the transmitter 

and then the receiver

and when fi nished with operation 

fi rst switch off the receiver 

and then the transmitter.

When programming the transmitter, be sure that 

electric motors cannot start running without control 

or that a combustion motor equipped with automatic 

starting cannot start up unintentionally. To be safe, 

disconnect the receiver's drive battery or, in the case 

of a combustion motor, disconnect the fuel supply.

Several notices and suggestions for installing 

remote control components into a model are 

provided below.

1. Wrap the receiver in a foam rubber pad that is at 

least 6 mm thick. Attach the foam rubber to the 

receiver with rubber bands so it will be protected 

against vibration and/or the jars of a hard landing. 

2. All switches must be installed such that they are 

not affected by exhaust gases or vibration. The 

switch knob must be freely accessible over its 

entire range of movement.

3. Mount servos on rubber bushes/spacers with 

hollow brass bearings to protect them from 

vibration. Do not tighten the fastening screws 

down too tight as this would negate the vibration 

protection to be provided by the rubber bush/

spacer. Only when servo fastening screws are 

properly tightened will this arrangement provide 

security and vibration protection for your servos. 

The fi gure below shows how a servo is mounted 

properly. The brass bearings are to be pushed into 

the rubber bushes/spacers from below.

Servo mounting lug

Retaining screw

Rubber grommet

Tubular brass spacer

4. Servo arms must be free to move throughout their 

entire range of motion. Pay attention that there are 

no objects which could hinder servo arm motion.

The sequence in which servos are connected to the 

receiver depends on the type of model. Follow the 

connection layouts provided for this on pages 61 and 65.

Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 ... 9.

Installation notices

Receiver installation

Regardless of which Graupner receiver system you 

use, the procedure is always the same.

Please pay attention that the receiver's antennas 

must be mounted at least 5 cm away from all large 

metal parts or any wiring that is not directly routed 

out of the receiver itself. In addition to steel parts, this 

also includes carbon fi ber parts, servos, fuel pumps 

and all kinds of cables etc. Optimally the receiver 

should be placed at a readily accessible location 

that is well away from all other equipment. Under no 

circumstances may servo cables be wrapped around 

the antennas or routed close to it.

Please note that cables are subject to the 

acceleration forces which occur during fl ight and 

these forces may cause such cables, to shift in 

position. Therefore be sure the cables in the vicinity 

of the antennas are not able to move. Such moving 

cables can cause reception disturbances.

Tests have shown that vertical (upright) antennas 

provide the best results during wide-range fl ights. In 

the case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the 

second antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to 

the fi rst antenna.

The connectors designated "B + -" on the GR32 DUAL HoTT receiver are intended for battery 

connections. The power supply is bussed across 

all numbered connections so it can be attached 

at any of these 16 connectors. However, due to 

additional voltage losses associated with the traverse 

connectors, connections 13 through 16 should not be 

used for connecting the receiver's battery.

The function of every individual channel is determined 

by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. However, 

channel assignments can be changed in the receiver 

by programming done in the »Telemetry« menu. 

Nevertheless, it is recommended this be done on the 

transmitter side via the "Transmitter output" option, 

see page 218.
For your notes 53
54 Term defi nitions

Term defi nitions

Control function, control, function input, control channel, mixer, switch, control switch, fi xed switch

To make use of this mc-32 HoTT manual easier, a 

number of the terms used repeatedly throughout this 

manual have been defi ned below.

Control function

A "control function" is to be perceived – initially 

independent of its signal path – as a signal intended 

to affect a given control function. For example, this 

could be for throttle, rudder or aileron in a winged 

aircraft or pitch, roll or crow for a helicopter. 

A control function signal can be applied directly over 

a single control channel or also through a mixer and 

then applied over multiple control channels. A typical 

example of multiple control channels is separately 

operated aileron servos or the use of two roll or crow 

servos in helicopters. The control function explicitly 

includes the infl uence of the control's mechanical 

travel on the respective servo. This can not only 

be spread or compressed by software but even the 

travel characteristic can be modifi ed from linear to 

extremely exponential.

Control

"Controls" include all operating elements on the 

transmitter, which are directly activated by the pilot, 

that impose an effect on servos, speed controllers 

etc. connected to the receiver. This includes: 

• both joysticks for control functions 1 through 

4, whereby these four functions can be freely 

swapped around for both model types ("winged 

aircraft" and "helicopters") by way of software 

"Mode" settings, e.g. throttle left or right. The 

joystick function for throttle/airbrake control is often 

also referred to as the C1 control (channel 1).

• both proportional controls located on the 

transmitter's sides, which are, for example, 

given the designations SD1 (right-side "rotary 

slider") and SD2 (left-side "rotary slider") in the 

»Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112.

• proportional sliders in the middle console the three 

designated SR1 ... 3, for example as shown in the 

»Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,

• proportional rotary controls on the all fi ve 

transmitter's front side, which are, for example, 

given the designations DR1 ... 5 in the 

»Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,

• the switches present, if they are assigned to a 

control channel in the »Control adjust« menu.

The proportional operating elements produce a direct 

effect on servos which is commensurate with the 

control's position whereas switch modules can only 

effect a two or three increment change.

Just which of these controls and switches operate which 

of the servos 5 ... 16 (max.) is freely programmable.

Important notice:

Inputs 5 ... 15 for helicopters and 5 ... 16 for 

winged aircraft are generally "free", i.e. not 

assigned, in the transmitter's basic programming.

Function input

This is an imaginary point in the signal path and 

must not be considered the same as the point on 

the circuit board where the transmitter control is 

connected. The choice of "Stick mode" and settings 

in the »Control adjust« menu have their effect 

"downstream" of these imaginary connection points. 

Thus differences between the physical control's 

number and the number of the downstream control 

channel can indeed emerge.

Control channel

From the point at which a signal contains all control 

information necessary for a particular servo – whether 

directly from the physical control or indirectly by way 

of a mixer – the term "control channel" is used. This 

signal is only yet to be infl uenced by settings made in 

the menus »Servo adjustment« and »Transmitter 

output« before it leaves the transmitter's RF module. 

Once it arrives at the receiver, this signal may still 

be modifi ed by settings made in the telemetry menu 

before fi nally being applied as a control quantity for 

the respective servo.

Mixer

The transmitter's software contains a variety of mixer 

functions. These can be used to apply one control 

function to multiple servos or, conversely, to apply 

multiple control functions to a single servo. Please 

look over the numerous mixer functions in the text 

beginning on page 159 of this manual.

Switches

The four standard toggle switches, the two 3-way 

switches and both push-button switches can also 

be incorporated into control programming. However, 

these switches are generally intended for switching 

program options, e.g. to start and stop timers, to 

switch mixers on and off, or as a teacher/pupil 

switchover, etc. Each of these switches can be 

assigned any number of functions.

Appropriate examples are detailed in the manual.

Control switches

Since it is very practical to have some functions 

automatically switched on or off for a certain control's 

position (e.g. switch on/off of a stopwatch for 

acquisition of model run time, automatic extension of 

spoilers and other possibilities), eight control switches 

have been integrated into mc-32 HoTT software.

These software switches, designated "C1 ... C8", are 

merely defi ned by virtue of their contact state along 

the physical control's course of travel by the touch of 

a key. The switching action can be correlated to the 

physical control's travel direction by software.

Of course control switches can also be freely 

combined with the aforementioned physical switches 

to solve even more complex problems.

There is a series of instructive examples which make 
Term defi nitions 55

this programming child's play. Learn about this by 

taking advantage of the programming examples 

beginning on page 268.

Logical switches

These functions permit two switches, control switches 

and/or logical switches or any combination of these to 

be combined with one another to create logical "AND" 

and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches, 

"L1 ... L8" can be programmed, see page 138.

Fixed switches FXI and FX

This type of switch turns a function, e.g. a timer, 

permanently on (closed fi xed switch) or off (open fi xed 

switch) or they can provide a fi xed input signal for a 

control function, e.g. FXI = + 100 % and FX = -100 %. 

For example, in fl ight phase programming, these 

fi xed switches can be used to switch a servo or speed 

controller between two settings. 
56 Physical control, switch and control switch assignments

Physical control, switch and control switch assignments

Principle procedure

Maximum fl exibility is offered by the mc-32 Hott 

system when it comes to assigning standard 

equipment operating elements to certain functions.

Since the assignment of controls and switches is 

done in the same way, even though different menus 

may be involved, it is appropriate at this point to 

explain the fundamental programming technique so 

that users can concentrate on the particular contents 

when reading the detailed menu descriptions.

Physical control and switch assignments

The third column of the »Control adjust« menu 

can be used to assign transmitter inputs 5 ... 16 to 

operate servos, both in any given joystick direction 

(C1 ... C4) as well as to assign any present control 

or switch. After tapping on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, the window shown below will appear 

in the display.

 Move desired

control adj.

Now simply move the desired control or switch.

Notes:

The control will only be recognized beyond a certain 

amount of travel. Therefore these controls can be 

moved back and forth until the correct assignment 

is shown in the display. If adjustment travel is 

insuffi cient, activate the control in the other direction.

On the other hand, if the »Control switch« menu, 

page 135, is used to assign a control, the message 

shown below will appear:

 Move desired

control adj.

Important notice:

Controls to be assigned MUST be pre-assigned in 

the »Control adjust« menu to one of the inputs 5 

through 16!

Switch assignment

Wherever programming permits a switch to be 

assigned, a switch symbol will appear in the screen's 

bottom display line.

Use the selection keys in the left or right touch pad to 

select the appropriate column.

How to assign a switch

1. Briefl y touch the SET key of the right touch pad. 

The message shown below will appear in the 

screen.

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

2. Now it is only necessary to put the selected switch 

into the desired "ON" position or, as described 

at the right in "Assignment of external switches", 

to select a switch from the list of "External 

switches". This concludes the assignment. The 

switch symbol to the right of the switch's number 

indicates the current state of the particular switch.

Changing switch action

If the activation of a switch is to result in the opposite 

action, put the switch or joystick in the desired OFF 

position, again activate the switch assignment and 

reassign the switch again so it will respond with the 

desired action.

Clear switch

A switch which has been assigned as described 

under point 1 can be cleared with a brief 

simultaneous tap on the  or  key combination 

in the right key pad (CLEAR).

Assignment from the "external switch" list

Those menus in which the message ...

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

... appears permit the assignment of switches 

belonging to the so-called "external switches".

Do this by confi rming the message text with the 

SET key. A new window will appear with a list of the 

eight control switches "C1 ... C8", followed by two 

so-called "FX" fi xed switches and the eight inverted 

switches "L1 ... L8".

M wünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

Use the selection keys in the left or right key pad to 

select the desired switch then assign it with a brief 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Notes:

• Switching for some special functions may 

be better implemented from a certain freely 

programmable control position rather than 

switching them manually with a normal switch.

To this end, there are a total of 8 so-called "control 

switches", C1 ... C8, available whose switching 

direction can be established, even inverted, in the 

»Control switch« menu, page 135.

• Two switches and/or also control switches can be 

combined with one another to form the logical "AND" 

or "OR" functions via the »Logical switch« menu, 

see page 138. A total of 8 logical switches "L1 ... L8" 

(as well as another 8 inverted logical switches with 

inverted switching direction) are available.

The result of a logical switch function can also 

be used as an input for another logical switch 

function. Refer to the appropriate menu for more 

details about this.
Physical control, switch and control switch assignments 57

• The two FX switches switch a function on "FXI" or 

off "FX " permanently.

• All other switches mentioned can have multiple 

assignments. Pay attention that you do not 

UNINTENTIONALLY assign reciprocally confl icting 

functions to a single switch. If necessary, note 

down the given switch functions.

Typical applications:

• Shut-off of an on-board glow plug heater upon 

underrun or overrun of an idle threshold point 

programmed for the C1 joystick. In this case 

the glow plug heater switch is controlled by a 

transmitter mixer.

• Automatic switch on/off of the timer to measure 

pure "fl ight time" for a helicopter by way of a 

control switch on the throttle limiter.

• Automatic switch off of the "AI  Rud" when 

brake fl aps are extended, for example to adapt 

the roll of a model to the ground when making a 

landing on a slope without inducing a change of 

fl ight direction due to infl uence on the rudder.

• Extending landing fl aps with elevator trim adjustment 

during a landing as soon as the throttle stick is 

moved beyond its switch point. 

• Switch on/off of the timer for measuring the 

operating time of electric motors.
58 Digital trimming

Digital trimming

Functional description and description of C1 cut-off

Digital trim with visible and audible indicators

Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. By 

default, turning trim wheels will offset the joystick's 

neutral position by 4 increments (out of a possible 

100 steps per side). This offset is also reported 

acoustically. A brief press on the trim wheel will 

reset an existing trim offset back to "0". Any other 

"zero points" can be specifi ed with the help of the 

»Trim memory« menu. If fl ight phases have been 

created and each assigned with a fi tting name in 

the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« 

menus, then these names will appear at the bottom 

left in the »Trim memory« menu and their trim values 

will be stored on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis.

The default 4-steps per click increment range placed 

in every new model memory upon initialization can 

be changed at any time in the »Stick mode« menu, 

page 104 or 106, separately for each joystick plane, 

in a range of 1 ... 10 for fi xed-wing models and in 

a range of 0 ... 10 for helicopter models. (A trim 

function can be deactivated by selecting "0" steps, 

which can be advantageous in helicopters with 

certain gyro systems.)

Current trim values are automatically stored 

when a model memory change is made. 

Furthermore, – except for the trim of the throttle/

airbrake joystick, the so-called "C1"(channel 1) 

control function – digital trim can be set to operate 

globally or on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis within a 

memory location. This choice is made, separate for 

each joystick plane, in the second column of the 

»Stick mode« menu, page 104 or 106.

Notes:

• Finding the mid-point position during a fl ight is 

easy and can be done without even looking at the 

display. A brief press on the trim wheel will reset 

trim to "0" or, in the »Trim memory« menu, will 

reset a stored fl ight-phase specifi c trim value. 

• The "cut-off trim" function, known from other 

Graupner remote control systems in the mc and 

mx series, and typically described in this section 

can be realized with the help of the "Thr. CutOff" 

option in the »Basic settings, model« menu, 

see page 81 and 90.
For your notes 59
60 Winged models 

Winged models 

Convenient support is provided for up to four aileron 

servos and four fl ap servos on normal models or, for 

V tail and fl ying wing/delta models, up to two aileron/

elevator servos plus four fl ap servos. 

The majority of motorized and glider models belong 

to the tail unit type "normal" and are equipped with 

one servo each for elevator, rudder and ailerons 

in addition to a motor throttle or electronic speed 

controller (or for brake fl aps in the case of a glider 

model). Beyond this, tail unit type "2 HR Sv 3+8" 

permits the connection of two elevator servos to 

receiver outputs 3 and 8.

"V-tail" is to be selected from the »Model type« menu 

if the model has a V-tail instead of a "normal" tail. 

This V-tail option provides coupled control functions 

for elevator and rudder such that both tail fl aps – each 

controlled by a separate servo – are able to handle 

both elevator and rudder functionality.

For delta and fl ying wing aircraft models, aileron and 

elevator functionality is affected by way of a common 

rudder fl ap on the trailing edge of each side (right and 

left) of the wing. The program contains appropriate 

mixer functions for both servos.

If ailerons, and conditionally the fl aps, are each 

actuated with two separate servos then settings can 

be made for differentiated control of all aileron and 

fl ap pairs in the »Wing mixers« menu, i.e. settings 

for downward rudder throw independent of upward 

throw. And fi nally, the positioning of fl aps can also 

be controlled by one or even more of the three 

proportional sliders or the seven proportional rotary 

controls. 

Alternatively, there is a phase-dependent trim function 

available for fl aps, ailerons and elevators in the 

»Phase trim« menu.

Up to 8 fl ight phases can be programmed into each of 

the 80 model memory locations. 

Except for C1 trim, digital trim will be stored on a 

fl ight-phase basis. C1 trim permits easy location of a 

carburetor idle setting.

Two timers are always available for fl ight operation. 

The transmitter operating time expired since the last 

battery charge is also displayed.

All transmitter controls and switches can be assigned 

in the »Control adjust« menu to inputs 5 ... 16 with 

almost no restrictions.

The "Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions for 

ailerons, rudder and elevators are separately 

programmable and each are convertible between the 

two variations on a specifi c fl ight-phase basis.

In addition to 8 freely allocatable linear mixers, 4 curve 

mixers (»Free mixers« menu) and 4 dual mixers 

(»Dual mixer« menu) there are also fl ight-phase 

dependent 8-point curves available to control channel 

1 (throttle/brake), see »Channel 1 curve« menu).

Depending on the number of wing servos, fi xeddefi nition mix and coupling functions can be selected 

from a list in the »Wing mixers« menu.

• Multi-fl ap menu: control of fl aps as ailerons, 

the infl uence aileron trim on fl aps controlled as 

ailerons, fl ap differentiation, fl ap function throw 

magnitude for all aileron and fl ap pairs, ailerons 

controlled as fl aps, elevator mixer  fl aps

• Brake settings: butterfl y, differential reduction, 

elevator curves

• aileron  rudder mixer

• fl aps  elevator mixer

Elevator Flap

Flap Elevator

F l a p Aileron

A il eron Flap

Aileron Rudder

Elevator Aileron

left

right Eel vator Flap

F al p Ele

A

vator ileron Rudder

Ailero n Flap

Airbrake Flap

Airbrake Elevator

Airbrake-Function 1

left

right

Rudder/Elevator

V-Tail

AI

FL

FL

AI

Brake FL, FL2

Brake Elevator

Brake AI, AI2 AI

FL

FL2

AI

FL

FL2

AI2

FL  AI

FL  AI

EL  FL

RU  AI

EL  AI

EL  FL

AI2

AI  FL

AI  FL
Winged models / Receiver layout 61

Installation notices 

Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the 

sequence illustrated here. 

Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. Also 

be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.

Winged aircraft with and without motor having up 

to 2 aileron servos and up to 4 fl ap servos ...

... and tail plane type " normal" or "2 elevator 

servos"

Receiver power supply

free or AIL2 left or aux. function

free or AIL2 right or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron

Elevator or 1st elevator

free or 2nd Elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

Right aileron or aux. function

Flap or left flap

Right flap or free or aux. function

free or left flap2 or aux. function

free or flap2 right or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

... and tail plane type " V tail unit"

Receiver power supply

free or left AIL2 or aux. function

free or right AIL2 or aux. function

Aileron or left aileron

free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake- or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

Right aileron or aux. function

Flap or left flap

Right flap or free or aux. function

free or left flap2 or aux. function

free or right flap2 or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

Left elevator/rudder

Right elevator/rudder

Delta/fl ying wing aircraft models with and without 

motor having up to two aileron/elevator servos 

and up to 2 fl ap/elevator servos

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

Airbrake- or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL 

free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL 

free or aux. function

free or flap / left elevator

free or flap / right elevator

free or aux. function or flap2 / left EL

free or aux. function or flap2 / right EL

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

AIL / elevator left

AIL / elevator right

free or aux. function

free or rudder
62 Winged models - Servo direction wrong

Because of orientation differences for installed servos 

and their rudder linkages, the actuating direction of 

some servos may be initially backward. The table 

below provides remedies.

Model 

type

Servo

direction

wrong

Remedy

V tail Rudder and 

elevator reversed

Reverse polarity of 

servos 3 & 4 in the 

»Servo adjustment« 

menu

Rudder correct, 

elevators reversed

Swap servos 3 & 4 on 

the receiver

Elevators correct,

rudder reversed

Reverse polarity of 

servos 3 & 4 in the 

»Servo adjustment« 

menu AND swap them 

on the receiver

Delta,

fl ying 

wing

Elevator and aileron 

reversed

Reverse the polarity 

of servos 2 & 3 in the 

»Servo adjustment« 

menu

Elevator correct, 

aileron reversed

Reverse polarity of 

servos 2 & 3 in the 

»Servo adjustment« 

menu AND swap them 

on the receiver

Aileron correct, 

elevators reversed

Swap servos 2 & 3 on 

the receiver

All "program descriptions" for menus relevant to a 

winged aircraft model are marked with a winged 

aircraft symbol ...

... so only these menus need to be dealt with to 

program a winged aircraft model.
For your notes 63
64 Helicopter models

Helicopter models

The advanced developments incorporated into the 

transmitter as well as those now in helicopter models 

and their components like gyros, speed regulators, 

rotor blades, etc. make it possible to master a 

helicopter even in 3D acrobatic fl ight. On the other 

hand, a beginner needs only a few settings to get 

started with hovered fl ight training then, step-bystep, take advantage of mc-32 HoTT features with 

increasing expertise.

The mc-32 HoTT program can operate all 

conventional helicopters having 1 ... 4 servos for 

pitch control.

Seven fl ight phases plus autorotation are available 

within a model memory, see menus »Control adjust«, 

»Phase settings« and »Phase assignment«.

As with winged aircraft, here too, in addition to the 

basic screen's standard timers there are additional 

timers as well as a lap counter with fl ight-phasedependent stopwatch functionality which are available 

for selection (menus »Timers (general)« and »Fl. 

phase timers«).

Except for pitch/throttle trimming, digital trimming can 

be stored as "global" for all fl ight phases or as "fl ight 

phase specifi c". C1 trim permits easy location of an 

idle setting.

The control assignments for inputs 5 ... 16 is made 

separately for each fl ight phase (»Control adjust«

menu).

A fl ight phase copy function is helpful during fl ight 

trials (»Copy / Erase« menu).

"Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions can be 

coupled for roll, nick and tail rotor and programmable 

in two variations in every fl ight phase.

There are 8 freely assignable linear mixers. There 

are also 4 curve mixers that can be programed and 

these can also be switched on or off, depending on 

the fl ight phase, in the »MIX active/phase« menu. 

Beyond this, there are also 4 dual mixers available.

The »Helicopter mixer« menu provides fl ightphase-dependent 8-point curves for the non-linear 

characteristics pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixer as 

well as two independent swashplate mixers each for 

roll and nick. Independent of this, the control curve 

of the channel 1 joystick can be defi ned with up to a 

total of 8 points in every fl ight phase. The beginner 

will initially only adapt the hover fl ight point to the 

control middle for the non-linear characteristics. 

Pre-programmed mixers in the »Helicopter mixer« 

menu:

1. Pitch curve (8-point curve)

2. C1  throttle (8-point curve)

3. Channel 1  tail rotor (8-point curve)

4. Tail rotor  throttle

5. Roll  throttle

6. Roll  tail rotor

7. Pitch-axis  throttle

8. Pitch-axis  tail rotor

9. Gyro suppression

10. Swashplate rotation

11. Swashplate limiter

The "Throttle limit" function (input Tl16 in the 

»Control adjust« menu) allows the motor to be 

started in any fl ight phase. The right-side proportional 

rotary slider is assigned to input "Tl16" by default. 

This "throttle limiter" establishes – depending on its 

given position – the maximum possible throttle servo 

position. This makes it possible for the motor to be 

controlled in the idle range, if necessary even by the 

proportional regulator. The throttle curves become 

effective only when the proportional regulator is 

pushed toward the full throttle direction.

Collective 

Pitch Curve

Swashplate 

Rotation

Roll Throttle

Pitch-Axis Throttle

Channel 1 Throttle

Roll Tail Rotor

Pitch-Axis Tail Rotor

Channel 1 Tail Rotor

Channel 1 Tail Rotor

Tail Rotor Throttle
Helicopters / Receiver layout 65

Notice for those transitioning from older 

Graupner systems:

In comparison to previous receiver layouts, servo 

connector 1 (pitch servo) and servo connector 6 

(throttle servo) have exchanged places. Servos must

be connected to receiver outputs as illustrated at the 

right in the bottom fi gure. Outputs which are not used 

are simply left empty. More details about respective 

swashplate types can be found on page 98 in the 

»Helicopter type« menu.

Installation notices

Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the 

sequence illustrated here. 

Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. 

Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.

Note:

A speed control is also to be connected to receiver 

output "6" in order to take full advantage of the 

throttle limiter's convenience and safety features, see 

text beginning on page 117. See page 181 about this.

Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 

1 to 3 swashplate servos

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll-1 servo

Pitch-axis 1 servo

frei or speed governor or aux. function

Collective pitch or roll 2 or pitch-axis 2 servo

free or aux. function

Throttle servo or speed controller

Gyro gain

Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 

4 swashplate servos

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or speed governor or aux. function

Throttle servo or speed controller

Gyro gain

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo

Pitch-axis 1 servo

Roll 2 servo

Pitch-axis 2 servo

All menus relevant to helicopter models are marked 

in the "program descriptions" section with a helicopter 

symbol ...

... so only these menus need to be dealt with to 

program a helicopter model.
66 Detail program description - Loading a new memory location

Anyone who has worked through to this part of 

the manual has certainly already tried out a bit of 

programming. Nevertheless a detailed description of 

every menu should not be left out. 

This section begins with the loading of a "free" 

memory location, a procedure which would be 

performed if a new model was being "programmed".

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

RX VOLT:0.0v

0 0 0 0

00:00h

M

V

From the basic display, a jump to the "Multi-function 

list" is made with a tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad. (The center ESC key of the left touch 

pad will cause a jump back to the basic display.) 

By default, when the multi-function list is called for 

the fi rst time after switching on the transmitter, the 

»Model select« menu option will be active and 

displayed in inverse video. Otherwise use the 

or  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

select the »Model select« menu option , whereby the 

upper of the two following fi gures shows a selection 

list for a fi xed-wing model and the lower shows the 

selection list for a helicopter model.

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Detail program description

Loading a new memory location

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

03

04

05

02  free 

01

06

E16

 free 

 free 

 free 

 free 

00:12h

In the transmitter's delivered state, the fi rst model 

memory is initialized to the "fi xed-wing model" type 

and the receiver in the delivery is "bound" to this 

model. The time display located near the line's middle 

indicates the overall operating time of the respective 

model memory. 

The remaining memory locations, marked with 

"free", are still unoccupied and therefore 

also "non-bound". If you wish to program a fi xed-wing 

model then, after leaving the »Model select« menu 

with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad, 

programming of the model can begin right away ... or 

now use the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad 

to select one of the free memory locations ...

03

04

05

01

06

R16

 free 

 free 

 free 

 free 

00:12h

02  free 

... and then tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad to confi rm the choice.

Afterward you will be prompted to select the basic 

model type, i.e. either "winged model" or "helicopter 

model".

Select model type ( free model memory )

Use the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad to 

select the basic model type then tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad. This initializes the 

selected model memory with the selected model type 

and the display will return to the base screen. The 

memory location is now accordingly occupied. 

However, if you wish to begin with a helicopter, 

select one of the memory locations marked 

"free" with the  or  keys of the left or 

right touch pad then confi rm the selection with a brief 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. You 

will be now be prompted to specify the basic model 

type, in this case the "helicopter model". Select the 

appropriate symbol with the  or  keys of the left 

or right touch pad then again tap briefl y on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to confi rm the choice. 

This initializes the selected model memory with the 
Detail program description - Loading a new memory location 67

Further details about binding a receiver can be 

found on page 77 or 85.

• At the right and above the aforementioned "BIND. 

N/A" warning message, the warning ...

Fail Safe

 setup

 t.b.d.

... will appear (also for just a few seconds) to 

indicate that no no failsafe settings have yet been 

made. More about this can be found on page 208. 

• If the screen should display the warning ...

Throttle

 too

 high!

... then move the throttle joystick, or the limiter for 

a helicopter, (by default this is rotary slider SD1) 

into its idle position.

Whether or not this warning appears also depends 

on the settings selected for the "Motor on C1" 

and "Pitch min." options in the »Model type« 

menu, see page 94, or »Helicopter type« menu, 

see page 98. For winged aircraft models, select 

"None" to deactivate this message if you have no 

motor 

to enter.

• If the transmitter already has occupied model 

memories then sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« 

menu will display a pictograph of the selected 

model type at the respective memory location 

followed by a blank line or the model name which 

was entered in the »Basic settings, model« 

menu, page 76 or 84. To the right of this will be as 

display of the model operating time and, if present, 

"Info" about the model.

• If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover 

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An 

selected model type and you can now program your 

model into this model memory.

Changing over to another model type is still possible 

if you fi rst erase this memory location (»Copy / 

Erase« menu, page 70).

Notes:

• If, from the base screen, the currently active model 

memory is to be erased then immediately after the 

erase action one of the two model types, "Winged" 

or "Heli" must be defi ned. You cannot avoid this 

selection even if you switch the transmitter off. 

When the transmitter is switched on again the 

undesired occupation of the that model memory will 

have to be erased from another memory location.

If a non-active memory location is erased, it will 

subsequently be marked as "free" in the 

"Model select" menu.

• After the selected model memory is initialized with 

the desired model type, the display will switch to 

the base screen of the freshly occupied model 

memory. At this time the warning ...

BIND. N/A

OK

... will appear for several seconds as notifi cation 

that a binding connection to a receiver is "not 

available". A brief tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad will cause a direct jump to the 

appropriate option.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

As a basic principle, there are four different ways to 

assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, 

rudder and throttle or brake fl aps for winged models 

as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/

pitch for helicopter models, to the two joysticks. Just 

which of these methods is used depends on the 

preferences of the individual model pilot. This function 

is set for the currently active model memory in the 

"Stick mode" line of the »Basic settings, model« 

menu, page 76 or 84.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

SEL

If this setting is desired as a default for future models, 

the setting can also be entered into the »General 

basic settings« menu, page 258:

Owners name

Pre-set stick mode

Pre-set DSC Output

1

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

PPM10

SEL

Pre-set modulation HoTT

It should be noted here once again that, in the interest 

of greatest fl exibility in combination with the prevention 

of unintentional operating errors, no controls are 

preassigned to control channels 5 ... 16 by default.

This means that, in the system's delivered state, 
68 Detail program description - Loading a new memory location

only servos attached to receiver outputs 1 ... 

4 can typically be operated by the two joysticks 

and that any servos attached to receiver 

connectors 5 ... 16 (max) will remain in their 

middle positions. A newly initialized helicopter 

model is also able to more-or-less move servo 

6 – depending on the position of the right-side 

proportional rotary slider, which is the default throttle 

limiter control. With either model type, this situation 

will only change after appropriate assignments have 

been made in the »Control adjust« menu.

On the other hand, if a newly initialized model 

memory is to be put into operation then it MUST 

fi rst be appropriately "connected" with one or more 

receivers before the servos attached to the receiver/s 

can be operated. More about this can be found in the 

section "Binding" on page 77 or 85. 

A fundamental description of programming steps 

for a winged aircraft model can be found in the 

programming examples section beginning on 268, 

or for helicopter models beginning on page 308.

The menu descriptions below are arranged in the 

sequence individual menus are listed in the multifunction list.
Detail program description - Model select 69

Model select

Call up model 1 ... 80

The basic operation of the transmitters keys was 

explained on pages 28 and 29 and, on the previous 

double-page, explanations were provided for 

navigating to the multifunction list and about how 

to make allocations for a new model memory. At 

this point we now wish to begin with the "normal" 

description of individual menu items in the sequence 

they are arranged in the transmitter. Therefore we will 

begin with the menu ...

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

As many as 80 complete model settings, including 

digital trim values for the trim wheel, can be stored. 

Trimming is stored automatically such that a 

switchover from one model to another does not cause 

a loss of current trim settings. To the right of the 

model number, each occupied model memory line in 

this display shows a pictograph of the model type as 

well as the model's name entered for the model in its 

»Basic settings, model« menu, page 76 or 84. The 

code, if present, for the receiver "bound" to the model 

memory location will appear after the model number.

Select the »Model select« menu with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tap on 

the SET key of the right touch pad.

Attention!

Switch-OFF

the Receiver first!

If this message appears, there is a telemetry connection 

to an operationally ready receiver system. Switch that 

receiver system off.

03

04

02 Ultimate 00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

 free

 free

05

06

01 Graubele 1234g/080811 01:23hR16

Now, with the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad, select the desired model memory from the 

list and activate it with a tap on the SET key. A tap on 

the ESC key will cause a return to the previous menu 

page without activating a model change.

Notes:

• If, after a model change, the "Throttle too high" 

warning appears, the throttle/pitch joystick (C1) 

or the throttle limiter – by default, the right-side 

proportional rotary slider – is too far in the full 

throttle direction.

• If a model change causes the message ...

BIND. N/A

OK

... to appear then binding settings should be 

checked.

• If a model change causes the message ...

Fail Safe

 setup

 t.b.d.

... to appear then respective failsafe settings 

should be checked.

• If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover 

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An 

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low
70 Detail program description - Copy / Erase

Copy model  model

Select the »Copy model  model« sub-menu with 

the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

then tap the SET key.

Copy flight en kopieren

Erase model

Copy modelodell –> Modell

Export to SD-Karte

Import fromn von SD-Karte

=>



ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the 

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF 

module off as described on page 80 then also, if a 

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off 

that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of 

safety. 

Choose the model to be copied with the  selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad ...

03

04

05

01

free

01:23hR16

02 Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Copy from model:

... then, following the change into the "Copy to 

model" window caused by another tap on the SET

key of the right touch pad, the destination memory 

can be selected with the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad. Yet another tap on the SET key 

will then confi rm the copy process or a tap on ESC

key will cause the copy to be canceled. A memory 

location which is already occupied can be overwritten.

03

04

01 01:23hR16

02 Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Select model to be erased :

... whereby another tap on the SET key will cause the 

confi rmation request ...

Model really

Ultimate

to be erased?

 NO YES

02

... to appear. A NO response will cause the process 

to be canceled and a return to the previous screen. 

Selecting the YES response with the  selection key 

of the left or right touch pad followed by confi rmation 

of the selection with a brief tap on the SET key will 

erase the selected model memory.

Caution:

This erase process cannot be undone. All data 

in the selected model memory will be erased 

completely.

Note:

If the currently active model memory is to be 

erased, a model type "Winged" or "Heli" must be 

defi ned immediately after the erase process. If, 

however, an inactive memory location is erased, it 

will subsequently appear in "Model select" list as 

"free".

Copy / Erase

Erase or copy model  model, copy from or to SD card, copy fl ight phases, store/cancel changes 

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the »Copy / Erase« menu ...

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Model select Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

... then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right 

touch pad.

Erase model

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD

=>



Select the "Erase model" sub-menu with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad then 

briefl y tap on the SET key.

Choose the model to be erased with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...
Detail program description - Copy / Erase 71

03

04

01 01:23hR16

02 Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Copy to model:

05 free 

After confi rming the selected model memory with 

a tap on the SET key, a confi rmation request will 

appear:

Model really

Ultimate

to be copied?

NO YES

02 05  free 

A NO response will cancel the process and return 

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on 

the SET key then the selected source model will be 

copied into the selected model memory destination. 

Note:

In addition to model data, binding data is also copied 

by this process. This means that a receiver system 

which was/is bound to the original model memory can 

also be operated by its copy without establishing the 

bond again.

Exporting to SD card

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the »Export to SD« sub-menu then tap 

on the SET key.

Copy flight sen kopieren

Erase model

Copy modeModell –> Modell

Export to SDach SD-Karte

Import from von SD-Karte

=>



ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the 

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the 

RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a 

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that 

receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. 

Choose the model to be exported with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...

03

04

05

01

free

01:23hR16

02 Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

export to SD-Card:

After confi rming the selected model memory with a tap 

on the SET key, a confi rmation request will appear:

Model really

Ultimate

export?

NO YES

02

A NO response will cancel the process and return 

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected then confi rmed with a tap on the 

SET key, the selected model will be copied to the SD 

card.

Notes:

• Should the notice ...

SD-CARD

INSERT

OK

... appears instead of a screen for model 

selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's 

card slot, see page 23.

• In addition to model data, binding data is also 

copied by this process. This means that a receiver 

system which was/is bound to the original model 

memory can also be operated in the SAME 

transmitter by its copy without establishing the 

bond again.

• An exported fi xed-wing model will be stored on 

the memory card in the \\Models\mc-32 folder 

with a fi lename format of "aModelname.mdl" 

and a helicopter model with a fi lename format 

of "hModelname.mdl". On the other hand, if a 

"nameless" model is exported, its data will be 

stored on the memory card under "ahNoName.

mdl" or "hNoName.mdl", as appropriate.

• Some special characters that can be used in 

model names are subject to specifi c restrictions 

associated with the FAT or FAT32 fi le system used 

by the memory cards and these special characters 

will be replaced during the copy process with a 

tilde (~).

• A model fi le already on the memory having 

the same name as the fi le to be copied will be 

overwritten without warning.
72 Detail program description - Copy / Erase

pad then confi rmed with a tap on the SET key, or the 

process can be canceled with a tap on the ESC key. 

A memory location which is already occupied can be 

overwritten.

03

04

01 01:23hR16

02 Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Import to model:

05 free 

After confi rming the selected model memory with a tap 

on the SET key, a confi rmation request will appear:

model

Extra 300

import?

NO YES

05  free 

A NO response will cancel the process and return 

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on 

the SET key then the selected source model will be 

imported into the selected destination model memory. 

Notes:

• If the message ...

SD-CARD

INSERT

OK

... appears instead of a screen for model 

selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's 

Importing from SD card

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the »Import from SD« sub-menu then 

tap on the SET key.

Copy flight sen kopieren

Erase model

Copy modell –> Modell

Export to mnach SD-Karte

Import from von SD-Karte

=>



ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the 

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF 

module off as described on page 80 then also, if a 

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that 

receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. 

Select the model to be imported from the SD memory 

card with the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad.

03

04

01 11/06/06 06:06

02 Extra 300

Soarmaster

11/07/07 07:07

T-Rex 250

BellCobra

11/08/08 08:08

11/09/09 09:09

import from SD-CARD:

Note:

The export date posted at the right end of each model 

name line is represented in the format "year/month/

day".

After another tap on the SET key of the right touch 

pad, the "import from SD-CARD" window will appear. 

Now the destination memory location can be selected 

with the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

card slot, see page 23.

• In addition to model data, binding data is also 

imported by this process. This means that a 

receiver system which was/is bound to the original 

model memory can also be operated in the SAME 

transmitter by its copy without establishing the 

bond again.

Copy fl ight phase

Select the »Copy fl ight phase« sub-menu with the 

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad then 

tap on the SET key.

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD

=>



In the "Copy fl ight phase" sub-menu ...

7

Copy from phase:

3

5

=>

=>

2

4

6

1

8

... the fl ight phase to be copied (1 ... 8 for fi xed-wing 

models or 1 ... 7 for helicopter models) is selected 

with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

then confi rmed with a brief tap on the SET key of the 

right touch pad. In the next window to appear ... 
Detail program description - Copy / Erase 73

7

Copy to phase:

3

5

=>

=>

2

4

6

1

8

... a destination must be selected and it must be 

confi rmed too. Another confi rmation request will follow:

Phase to:

to be copied?

NO YES

1 normal 2 Thermik

A NO response will cancel the process and return 

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on 

the SET key then the selected source model will be 

imported into the selected destination model memory. 

Storing changes permanently 

Undoing changes

These two sub-menus permit programming changes 

to be backed up immediately or to be undone 

(restored) to the state when the model was called up 

or the state of the last backup.

Copy flight en kopieren

Export to SD

Import fromvon SD-Karte

=>



Store changes ft speichern

Undo changesgig machen ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off?

If the message shown above should appear, the 

transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF 

module off as described on page 80 then also, if a 

receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that 

receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. 

Data is only backed up by "Store change" or a 

switch from one model to another in the »Model 

select« menu. Switching the transmitter on or off 

will not store the permanently. To store changes 

permanently, select the appropriate line then briefl y 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The 

confi rmation request shown below will appear:

Programming changes to be

NO YES

store permanently?

A NO response will cancel the process and return 

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on 

the SET key then the changes made since the last 

backup or model change will be stored permanently.

If, however, the changes made since the last 

backup or model change are to be canceled, then 

select the line "Undo change". Following a brief tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the 

confi rmation request shown below will appear:

Programming changes to be

NO YES

reset to original?

A NO response will cancel the process and return 

the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES

response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on 

the SET key then the changes made since the last 

backup or model change will be stored permanently.

Note:

When the transmitter is switched off, any changes 

made will not be lose but they are not permanently 

stored either. This means that a subsequent "cancel 

changes" would reset memory to the state of the last 

"permanent backup" (or model change).
74 Detail program description - Suppress menus

Suppress menus

Suppression of menus in the multifunction list

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the »Suppress codes« menu ...

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

... then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right 

touch pad.

Model select Copy / Erase

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Model type

Suppress : SET

Model select Copy / Erase

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Helicopter type

Suppress : SET

In the menu which then appears, menu items which 

are no longer needed or those which should not 

be changed, can be blocked from appearing in th 

multifunction list.

The option to be suppressed/displayed is selected 

with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

then its status is switched over with a tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad.

Model select Copy / Erase

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Model type

Suppress : SET

Model select Copy / Erase

Servo adjustment

Stick mode Control adjust

Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Suppress models Base setup model

Helicopter type

Suppress : SET

This can reduce the multi-function list considerably, in 

some cases to only a few menus, thus substantially 

improving clarity of the multi-function list. Options are 

not deactivated by being suppressed. They will simply 

no longer appear in the list. This also blocks direct 

access to these functions.

Tip:

If you wish to forgo access-blockage to the multifunction list altogether, suppress the »Code lock«

menu in the multi-function list by way of this menu as 

a precautionary measure. It is then not so easy for an 

unauthorized person to lock up the transmitter.
Detail program description - Suppress models 75

Suppress models

Suppression of model memory locations

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the »Suppress models« menu ...

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress Models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

... then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right 

touch pad.

Model memories which are rarely needed or to 

which access is to be blocked for other reasons can 

be hidden from the model selection list. This also 

clarifi es the overview layout for model selection.

The model to be suppressed/displayed is selected 

with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

then its status is switched over with a tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad.

03

04

05

01

free 

01:23hR16

02 Ultimate

Graubele 1234g/080811

00:44hR12

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

Test

trim needed

Suppress : SET

A model memory which is "stricken through" will no 

longer appear in the »Model select« menu.

03

04

Starlet

BELL47G

00:33hR08

00:22hR08

trim needed



free





free



05

06

01 Graubele 1234g/080811 01:23hR16

07  free 
76 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Base setup model

Model-specifi c base settings for winged aircraft models

Before programming specifi c parameters, there are 

some basic settings to be made which effect the 

currently active model memory.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

select the »Basic settings, model« menu ... 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

... then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Model name 

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a n/a



Module HoTT bind

Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on 

the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a 

screen of characters for entry of the model's name. 

A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify 

a model name.

 !"#$%&’()

Model name Graub

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

+,–./0123456789:; ?

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

Now the desired characters can be selected with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next 

position to select the next character with a tap on the 

 selection key of the right touch pad or its center 

SET key. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space 

character at the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry fi eld 

can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad.

A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished 

with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad.

A model name entered in this manner will appear in 

the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in 

the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Info 

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a n/a



Module HoTT bind

Graubele

Every model can be given a supplementary note of 

up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same 

procedure as already described for creating a "Model 

name". This info note will appear as a supplement in 

the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of 

the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Stick mode 

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

full throttle

left rudder

right rudder

idle

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

Motor Vollgas

idle

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

There are four fundamental options for assigning 

the four control functions (aileron, elevator, rudder 

and throttle/brake fl ap) for a winged aircraft model 

to the two joysticks. Just which of these options is 

chosen depends on the individual preferences of the 

individual model pilot. 

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option fi eld 

will be framed.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

SEL

Graubele

1234g/111111

Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick 

mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the 

selection keys of the right touch pad to select from 

among options 1 through 4.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to stick 

mode "1".
Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models 77

to the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode 

during the transmitter-side "binding" period.

"Binding" multiple receivers per model

Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, 

whereby respective mc-32 HoTT programs offer the 

potential for managing up to four receivers directly 

and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control 

channels (max) in any arrangement among these 

receivers under menu control. Refer to additional 

details further down in this section. First bind the 

receivers individually as described below. 

However, in subsequent operation only one of 

these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to 

the transmitter; the one which was activated in the 

"TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry« menu.

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the 

model should therefore be connected to this receiver 

because the transmitter only receives and evaluates 

data from the return channel of the receiver activated on 

this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in 

parallel but are fully independent in slave mode.

"Binding" transmitter and receiver

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame 

will be positioned by default to the column for the next 

free binding channel. In the example shown in the 

figure below, the marker frame is positioned above the 

column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the 

column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for 

the receiver which was delivered with the set.

Another tap on the SET key will again deactivate 

option selection so a change to another line can be 

affected.

Module 

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

The mc-32 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as 

standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module, 

there is a connector for an external RF module 

behind one of the two front cover fl aps (see page 25) 

and a switchover to an external module connected 

there can be affected per software. To do this, use the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move 

the marker frame left to the "Module" selection fi eld 

above the "SEL" column label.

HoTT

Graupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" 

to communicate exclusively with a certain model 

(memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This 

procedure is known as "binding" and must only be 

done once for every new receiver/model-memorylocation combination (and can be repeated anytime).

Important notices:

• During the binding procedure be sure the 

transmitter's antenna is always far enough 

away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the 

safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. 

Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to 

the return channel and malfunctions will result.

• When binding additional receivers, note that any 

other –switched on– receivers already bound 

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red 

LED on the receiver will blink.

Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while 

the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds 

then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink 

red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now 

be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the 

receiver is in bind mode.

Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called 

"receiver binding" process for the receiver to the 

currently active model memory with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time, 

the screen's display will blend in a message window 

for the duration of the "binding" process.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

FINDING...

If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes 

within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination 

in green, the binding process has been successfully 

completed. Your model-memory to receiver 

combination is now operationally ready. At this time 

the screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of 

"n/a" (not attached).
78 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Model name

Stick mode 1

bind

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver 

blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the 

binding process has failed. In this case the screen 

will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should 

happen, try changing the position of antennas then 

repeat the entire procedure.

Binding other receivers

The binding channel you have chosen is already 

bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with 

another binding channel. After initiating the RF 

bind process, instead of displaying "BINDING", the 

message shown below appears.

Model name

Stick mode 1

geb.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT geb. n/a n/a

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

 RF

 off

OK

 is turned 

Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the 

RF module as described on the page in section "RF 

module". Afterward, return again to the "Module" line 

and restart the binding process as described above.

Alternatively, the transmitter can be switched off 

briefl y then, after switching it back on again, respond 

to the message window that appears ...

ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off?

... with "OFF" ...

ON

Please select

RF on/off?

OFF

... then confi rm the selection with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. From the 

base screen jump again into the "Module" line of 

the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the 

binding process.

Dissolving a bond

Proceed as described above to initiate the binding 

process but WITHOUT fi rst putting a receiver in 

binding readiness.

EXT. PPM

Important notice:

With the activation of the value fi eld in the context 

of the following described changeover, any 

existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be 

effective for the currently active model memory 

will be lost.

Activate the fi rst value fi eld in the "Module" line with a 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then 

use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead 

of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT. 

PPM", the other four value fi elds will be replaced by 

the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC 

Output«, see page 81.

Model name

Stick mode 1

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module

Graubele

1234g/111111

SEL

EXT. PPM PPM10

This change also suppresses the lines for the options 

(described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF 

module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic 

display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

RX VOLT:0.0v

0 0 0 0

00:00h

M

V

PPM

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Receiver channel mapping 

As long as there is at least one "bound" receiver in 

the "Module" line, the next line down will be the "Rcv 

Ch map" line.

Model name

Stick mode 1

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Graubele

1234g/111111

SET SET SET SET

Rcv Ch map R16 R08 n/a n/a

As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding 

receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-32 HoTT 

offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the 

transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well 

as the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16 
Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models 79

control channels across as many as four receivers. 

This redistribution is subsequently referred to as 

"mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). 

Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad then tap briefl y on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Channel mapping within a receiver

Analogous to the channel correlation function in 

the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as 

"Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu 

item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels 

present on the receiver's inputs to any specifi c 

receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound 

receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1

Rx Input Ch 1

Rx Input Ch 2

Rx Input Ch 3

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad, the appropriate 

value fi eld will be framed. Briefl y tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting 

will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the 

selection keys of the right touch pad to select the 

desired input channel's respective transmitter output, 

see page 218.

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs) 

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which 

can be attached to the given receiver.

BUT CAUTION: If, for example, "2AIL" has been 

specifi ed in the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the 

»Model type« menu then the transmitter will have 

allocated control function 2 (ailerons) to control 

channels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons. The 

corresponding receiver inputs to be assigned in this 

case would be channels 2 & 5, refer to the example 

below.

Examples:

• You would like to control each aileron of a large 

model with two or more servos. 

Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo 

connections) to one and the same input (control 

channel). In this case, depending on left or right 

wing, as the respective input to one of the two 

default aileron control channels (2 or 5).

• You would like to control the rudder of a large 

model with two or more servos. 

Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo 

connections) to one and the same input (control 

channel). In this case, the default rudder channel 

(4), see fi gure bottom right.

Important notice:

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap« 

option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions 

to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even 

permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same 

control function. To keep controls manageable, 

however, we strongly recommend using only one of 

the options at a time. 

Channel assignment on other receivers

As already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu 

option can be used to freely distribute the mc-32

HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across up 

to four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs 

(servo connections) as well as the maximum number 

of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the 

maximum number of servo connections available on 

the given receiver.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input 

fi eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed 

in inverse video. Now select the desired input 

channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad. 

For example, suitable to the above rudder example.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Input Ch 4 

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs) 

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which 

can be attached to the given receiver.

RF transmit 

This menu line provides an option for manually 

switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and 

off to specifi c models while the transmitter is in 

operation. For example, to save power while a model 

is being programmed. If this line option was set to 

OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next 

time the transmitter is switched on.

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad to move into the " RF transmit " line 
80 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

then activate the option with a brief tap on the center 

SET button of the right touch pad.

Stick mode

Module

1

HoTT bind bind n/a n/a

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

RF transmit on

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

The right selection keys can now be used to choose 

between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.

Range test 

The built-in range test reduces transmission power 

to an extent that a functional test can be carried out 

even within a distance of less than 100 m.

Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system 

according to the following instructions. If necessary, 

have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.

1. Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 

transmitter should be installed into the model in its 

intended position.

2. Switch remote control on and wait for the green 

LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo 

movements can be observed.

3. Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 

low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver 

antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. 

It may be necessary to put something under the 

model to raise it up enough for this.

4. Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 

distance from one's body. Do not point the 

antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/

or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented 

vertically during the test.

5. If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line 

in the menu then start range test mode with a tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Module HoTT bind bind n/a n/a

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

When the range test has been initiated, 

the transmitter's transmission power will be 

signifi cantly reduced and the LED just to the right 

of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, 

will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by 

acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the 

transmitter's display will start counting down and 

every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound. 

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test 

a three-frequency tone will sound once every 

second. After expiration of the range test's 99th 

second the transmitter will again be switched to 

full output power and the LED just to the right 

of the main switch on the transmitter will again 

illuminate constantly.

6. Move away from the model while manipulating 

the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an 

interruption anytime while still within a distance of 

about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.

7. If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary 

to switch it on to further check noise immunity.

8. Continue moving away from the model until 

perfect control is no longer possible. 

9. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 

period with the still-operationally-ready model 

to expire. After the range test is ended it should 

again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this 

is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. 

Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG 

service partner.

10. Perform the range test before each fl ight and, in 

doing so, simulate all servo movements which 

also take place during fl ight. The range must 

always be at 50 m on the ground in order to 

assure safe model operation.

Caution:

Never start the range test on the transmitter 

during normal operation of the model.

DSC output 

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line 

then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, activate the value window:

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Now you can use the right selection keys to choose 

between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16", 

"PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of 

the right touch pad again to complete the entry.

This choice primarily infl uences the maximum 

number of control channels which can be attached to 

the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also 

available to a fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. 

By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 

1 ... 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 ... 8, for "PPM18" 

channels 1 ... 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 ... 12.
Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models 81

Motor cutoff (Thr. CutOff) 

Note:

This menu line is suppressed if "None" or "None/inv" 

is selected for the "Motor on C1" line.

Depending on the "idle forward or back" choice 

made in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« 

menu, this motor "cut off" option can be coupled to 

a switch for throttling down a speed controller or to 

move a servo on the carburetor of a motor to the OFF 

position. This option not only replaces the"Cut-off 

trim" function known from other Graupner mc and 

mx transmitters but also serves as an EmergencyOFF function at the same time, which was not 

possible with the"Cut-off trim" function.

This motor OFF position (Thr. CutOff) is specifi ed in 

the left column fi eld over the column label SEL and 

its value is to be established through trial and error.

A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on 

this preset position when a certain servo position 

or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. 

This is done by setting the desired servo position 

(threshold value) into the middle column fi eld, directly 

over the column label STO, then selecting the 

appropriate 

ON/OFF switch function in the right column.

• If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle 

column is greater than the current servo position, 

i.e. the current servo position lies below the 

threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the 

switch is put into its ON position.

• If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle 

column is less than the current servo position, i.e. 

the current servo position is above the threshold, 

the speed controller will initially reduce motor 

speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo 

only to the extent dictated by the value in the 

left column as soon as the servo's position once 

underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the 

switch is changed over to its ON position.

The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in 

this cut-off position only until the selected switch is 

again changed over followed by a one-time throttle 

servo or speed controller movement beyond the 

preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick 

control.

The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for 

the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of 

+150 % servo position setting in the middle column.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Thr. CutOff –100% +150% –––

Programming procedure

To change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off" 

position, tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse 

video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably 

"off". If a combustion motor is involved, be sure the 

throttle servo does not perform mechanical runout, 

e.g. -125 %.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Thr. CutOff –125% +150% –––

The – upper – preset value in the middle column 

ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the 

maximum possible positioning range of the servo or 

speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned 

in the right column. 

However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by 

which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or 

speed controller with closed switch to switch into 

the cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel 

from +150 % by placing the throttle servo or speed 

controller into the desired position with the throttle/

brake joystick then touch the center SET key of the 

right touch pad.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Thr. CutOff –125% +150% –––

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a 

switch with which you can cut off the motor directly 

(emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold. 

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SEL SET STO SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Thr. CutOff –125% +100% 8

Notes:

• Be sure the throttle servo does not run out 

mechanically when the cut-off function is 

activated.

• A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily 

increasing the travel for servo 1 in the »Servo 

adjustment« menu to over 100 % then, after 

storing the threshold, change servo travel back to 
82 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

the original value.

Power-on warning 

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Motor Stop –125% +100% 8

Thr. CutOff –––

When a switch, a control switch or a logical switch 

is assigned in this line as described in the section 

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control 

switches" on page 56, the respective switch or control 

position will be polled and an appropriate warning 

will be blended into the basic display under some 

conditions. In combination with logical switches, 

almost any switch setting can be called up for 

transmitter switch on.

#01 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

00:00h

M

V

!Warning!

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Auto trim

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

Thr. CutOff –125% +100% 8

Power on warning L1

Auto trim –––

The "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a 

model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the 

context of a fi rst-fl ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.

Typically such test fl ights are initially fl own with joysticks 

counter operated until the desired state of fl ight is 

achieved. This generally involves working the trim 

controls during the fl ight to "unburden" the joysticks.

This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for. 

After the desired fl ight attitude has been achieved 

via control functions 2 ... 4 (aileron, elevator and 

rudder), the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally 

one of the standard-equipment momentary switches 

in the switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the 

instant the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from 

their neutral positions will be determined and adopted 

as trim values. However, this does not take place 

instantaneously but rather within about 1 second. 

During this period after the switch has been activated, 

the joysticks should be returned to their normal 

positions.

Notes:

• Due to the complex interaction inherent to multifl ap models, the Auto trim function for ailerons 

is deactivated if "2AIL 2FL" and "2AIL 4FL" or 

"4AIL 2FL" and "4AIL 4FL" is selected in the 

"Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Model type« 

menu.

• Be sure that during the switch assignment, the 

joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in 

their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets 

from neutral will be adopted right away in trim 

memory as the trim value.

• Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch 

has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto 

trim" fl ight, the assigned auto trim switch should 

be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise 

there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim" 

function could be activated accidentally. 

ext. PPM signal

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Thr. CutOff –125% +100% 8

Power on warning L1

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Some RF modules which can be connected to the 

external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors 

for other RF modules require an inverted input signal. 

Be sure to follow the respective module's installation 

instructions for this.

The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset 

"normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the 

provided PPM signal.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to 

"normal".
For your notes 83

Auto timer reset

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Power on warning L1

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Auto timer reset yes

The "yes/no" setting made in this line determines 

whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except 

for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time") are 

automatically reset to their given starting values when 

the transmitter is switched on.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right 

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "yes".
84 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Before programming specifi c parameters, there are 

some basic settings to be made which effect the 

currently active model memory. 

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

select the »Basic settings, model« menu ... 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

... then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Model name

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a n/a



Module HoTT bind

Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on 

the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a 

screen of characters for entry of the model's name. 

A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify 

a model name.

 !"#$%&’()

Model name Starle

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

+,–./0123456789:; ?

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

Now the desired characters can be selected with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next 

position to select the next character with a tap on 

the  of the right touch pad or its center SET key. A 

simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right 

touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at 

the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry 

fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch 

pad.

A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished 

with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad.

A model name entered in this manner will appear in 

the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in 

the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Info

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a n/a



Module HoTT bind

Starlet

Every model can be given a supplementary note of 

up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same 

procedure as already described for creating a "Model 

name". This info note will appear as a supplement in 

the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of 

the »Copy / Erase« menu item.

Stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

pitch axis

tail rotor

pitch axis

tail rotor

throttle

roll

roll

throttle

tail rotor

tail rotor

throttle throttle

pitch axis

pitch axis

roll

roll

pitch axis

pitch axis

roll

roll

Motor/Pitch

throttle

tail rotor

tail rotor

throttle

throttle

roll

roll

pitch axis

pitch axis

tail rotor

tail rotor

Basically there are four different ways to assign the 

four helicopter control functions, roll, nick, tail rotor 

and throttle/pitch to the two joysticks. Just which of 

these is used depends on the preferences of the 

individual model pilot.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option fi eld 

will be framed.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

SEL

Starlet

1234g/111111

Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick 

mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the 

selection keys of the right touch pad to select from 

among options 1 through 4.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to 

stick mode "1".

Base setup model

Model-specifi c base settings for helicopter models
Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models 85

Another tap on the SET key will again deactivate 

option selection so a change to another line can be 

affected.

Module

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

The mc-32 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as 

standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module, 

there is a connector for an external RF module 

behind one of the two front cover fl aps (see page 25) 

and a switchover to an external module connected 

there can be affected per software. To do this, use the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move 

the marker frame left to the "Module" selection fi eld 

above the "SEL" column label.

HoTT system

Graupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" 

to communicate exclusively with a certain model 

(memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This 

procedure is known as "binding" and must only be 

done once for every new receiver/model-memorylocation combination (and can be repeated anytime).

Important notices:

• During the binding procedure be sure the 

transmitter's antenna is always far enough 

away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the 

safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. 

Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection 

to the return channel and malfunctions will 

result.

• When binding additional receivers, note that any 

other –switched on– receivers already bound 

to the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode 

during the transmitter-side "binding" period.

"Binding" multiple receivers per model

Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, 

whereby respective mc-32 HoTT programs offer the 

potential for managing up to four receivers directly 

and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control 

channels (max) in any arrangement among these 

receivers under menu control. Refer to additional 

details further down in this section. First bind the 

receivers individually as described below. 

However, in subsequent operation only one of 

these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to 

the transmitter; the one which was activated in 

the "TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry« 

menu, for example:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the 

model should therefore be connected to this receiver 

because the transmitter only receives and evaluates 

data from the return channel of the receiver activated on 

this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in 

parallel but are fully independent in slave mode.

"Binding" transmitter and receiver

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame 

will be positioned by default to the column for the next 

free binding channel. In the example shown in the 

fi gure below, the marker frame is positioned above the 

column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the 

column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for 

the receiver which was delivered with the set.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red 

LED on the receiver will blink.

Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while 

the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds 

then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink 

red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now 

be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the 

receiver is in bind mode.

Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called 

"receiver binding" process for the receiver to the 

currently active model memory with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time, 

the screen's display will blend in a message window 

for the duration of the "binding" process.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

FINDING...

If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes 

within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination 

in green, the binding process has been successfully 
86 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

completed. Your model-memory to receiver 

combination is now operationally ready. At this time the 

screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of "n/a" 

(not attached).

Model name

Stick mode 1

bind

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT bind n/a n/a

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver 

blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the 

binding process has failed. In this case the screen 

will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should 

happen, try changing the position of antennas then 

repeat the entire procedure.

Binding other receivers

The binding channel you have chosen is already 

bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with 

another binding channel. If, after initiating the RF bind 

process, the message shown below appears in the 

screen instead of displaying "BINDING"

Model name

Stick mode 1

geb.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module HoTT geb. n/a n/a

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

 RF

 off

OK

 is turned 

Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the 

RF module, as described several columns further 

below in the section "RF module". Afterward, return 

again to the "Module" line and restart the binding 

process as described on the previous page.

Alternatively you can briefl y switch off the transmitter 

then, after switching it back on again, respond to the 

message window that appears ...

ON OFF

Please select

RF on/off?

... with "OFF" ...

ON

Please select

RF on/off?

OFF

... then confi rm the selection with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. From the 

base screen jump again into the "Module" line of 

the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the 

binding process.

Dissolving a bond

Proceed as described above to initiate the binding 

process but WITHOUT fi rst putting a receiver in 

binding readiness.

EXT. PPM

Important notice:

With the activation of the value fi eld in the context 

of the following described changeover, any 

existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be 

effective for the currently active model memory 

will be lost.

Activate the fi rst value fi eld in the "Module" line with a 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then 

use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead 

of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT. 

PPM", the other four value fi elds will be replaced by 

the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC 

Output«, see page 88.

Model name

Stick mode 1

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Info

Module

Starlet

1234g/111111

SEL

EXT. PPM PPM10

This change also suppresses the lines for the options 

(described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF 

module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic 

display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".

#02 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

00:00h

M

V

Starlet

PPM

H-J Sandbrunner

Receiver channel mapping

Stick Mode

Module

1

bind

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

bind

Info

HoTT n/a n/a

SET SET SET SET

2345g/090911

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding 

receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-32 HoTT 

offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the 

transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well 
Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models 87

as the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16 

control channels across as many as four receivers. 

This redistribution is subsequently referred to as 

"mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). 

Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad then tap briefl y on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Channel mapping within a receiver

Analogous to the channel correlation function in 

the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as 

"Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu 

item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels 

present on the receiver's inputs to any specifi c 

receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound 

receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1

Rx Input Ch 1

Rx Input Ch 2

Rx Input Ch 3

Rx Input Ch 4

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective 

input fi eld will be framed. Briefl y tap the center SET

key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be 

displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection 

keys of the right touch pad to select the desired input 

channel's respective transmitter output, see page 218.

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs) 

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which 

can be attached to the given receiver.

BUT CAUTION: If you wish to operate two servos 

with one control function, for example such as 

transmitter control function 2 (roll) which is divided 

up into control channels 1 & 2 for left and right roll 

servos for the "3Sv(2Roll)" option in the »Heli type« 

menu; then "map" the corresponding transmitter 

outputs, in this case for channels 1 & 2 (= inputs to 

the receiver) accordingly.

Important notice:

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap« 

option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions 

to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even 

permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same 

control function. To keep controls manageable, 

however, we strongly recommend using only one of 

the options at a time. 

Channel assignment on other receivers

As already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu 

option can be used to freely distribute the mc-32

HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across up 

to four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs 

(servo connections) as well as the maximum number 

of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the 

maximum number of servo connections available on 

the given receiver.

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input 

fi eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed 

in inverse video. Now select the desired input 

channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad. 

For example, appropriate for the above example with 

roll servos:

RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2

Rx Input Ch 1

Rx Input Ch 2

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Input Ch 16

Rx Output Ch 1

Rx Output Ch 2

Rx Output Ch 3

Rx Output Ch 4

Note:

The number of lines available in the list (outputs) 

corresponds to the maximum number of servos which 

can be attached to the given receiver.

RF transmit

This menu line provides an option for manually 

switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and 

off to specifi c models while the transmitter is in 

operation. For example, to save power while a model 

is being programmed. If this line option was set to 

OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next 

time the transmitter is switched on.

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad to switch to the "RF module" line then, 

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, activate the value window:

Stick mode

Module

1

HoTT bind bind n/a n/a

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

RF transmit on

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

The right selection keys can now be used to choose 

between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.
88 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, 

will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by 

acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the 

transmitter's display will start counting down and 

every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound. 

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test 

a three-frequency tone will sound once every 

second. After expiration of the range test's 99th 

second the transmitter will again be switched to 

full output power and the LED just to the right 

of the main switch on the transmitter will again 

illuminate constantly.

6. Move away from the model while manipulating 

the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an 

interruption anytime while still within a distance of 

about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.

7. If there is a motor in the model, it may be 

necessary to switch it on to further check noise 

immunity.

8. Continue moving away from the model until 

perfect control is no longer possible. 

9. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 

period with the still-operationally-ready model 

to expire. After the range test is ended it should 

again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this 

is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. 

Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG 

service partner.

10. Perform the range test before each fl ight and, in 

doing so, simulate all servo movements which 

also take place during fl ight. The range must 

always be at 50 m on the ground in order to 

assure safe model operation.

Caution:

Never start the range test on the transmitter 

during normal operation of the model.

DSC output

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line 

then, with a tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, activate the value window:

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

Now you can use the right selection keys to choose 

between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16", 

"PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of 

the right touch pad again to complete the entry.

This choice primarily infl uences the maximum 

number of control channels which can be attached to 

the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also 

available to a fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. 

By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 

1 ... 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 ... 8, for "PPM18" 

channels 1 ... 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 ... 12.

Autorotation

Autorotation is that state of descending fl ight in 

which the pitch of main rotor blades are set such that 

the rotor's speed matches the natural forces of air 

fl owing through, like a windmill. This built-up energy 

can be used for "recovery" lift to brake a descent by 

appropriate blade pitch adjustment.

Autorotation is a means by which real and model 

helicopters are able to land safely in emergency 

situations, e.g. in the event of a motor failure. However, 

the prerequisite for this is a well-trained pilot familiar 

with the helicopter's characteristics. Quick reaction and 

good perceptiveness are necessary because the rotor's 

inertia can only be used once to generate recovery lift.

Range test

The built-in range test reduces transmission power 

to an extent that a functional test can be carried out 

even within a distance of less than 100 m.

Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system 

according to the following instructions. If necessary, 

have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.

1. Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 

transmitter should be installed into the model in its 

intended position.

2. Switch remote control on and wait for the green 

LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo 

movements can be observed.

3. Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 

low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver 

antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. 

It may be necessary to put something under the 

model to raise it up enough for this.

4. Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 

distance from one's body. Do not point the 

antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/

or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented 

vertically during the test.

5. If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line 

in the menu then start range test mode with a tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Module HoTT bind bind n/a n/a

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

When the range test has been initiated, 

the transmitter's transmission power will be 

signifi cantly reduced and the LED just to the right 
Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models 89

When this technique is evaluated during 

competitions, the motor must be switched off for 

autorotation. On the other hand, for training mode 

it is advantageous to keep the motor at idle for 

autorotation.

The Autorotation switch causes a switchover to the 

autorotation fl ight phase in which control of "throttle" 

and "pitch" are separate and all mixers which have 

an effect on the throttle servo are switched off. 

Corresponding parameter settings are made in the 

»Helicopter mixer« (see text beginning page 176); 

refer also to the "Principle of the Auto. C1 Pos." topic 

which follows.

The "Autorotation" name is permanently assigned to 

phase 1 and it is included in the base screen of all 

fl ight phase dependent menus. This name can NOT be 

changed. It is only possible to assign a switch to this 

option at the right of this display, as described on page 

56. If a switch is assigned, it will have absolute 

priority over all other fl ight-phase switches.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

More about fl ight-phase programming can be found 

in the text beginning on page 176 in the»Helicopter 

mixer« section.

Autorotation C1 position

The autorotation fl ight-phase can alternatively be 

activated by a threshold point for the C1 throttle/pitch 

joystick. To do this, use the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad to move into the "Autorot. C1-Pos." 

line. 

As soon as this display line has been selected, its 

value fi eld, located above the column label STO will 

be framed.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

STO SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

Move the C1 joystick into the desired threshold 

switchover position then tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad. The current value will be displayed, 

e.g.:

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

STO SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. -55% –––

After this has been done, use the selection keys to 

move into the column above the switch symbol then 

assign a switch to this fi eld, as described on page 56 

in section "Switches, controls and control switches". 

Preferably one of the two self-restoring switches

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

STO SET

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. –55% 4I

Once this activation switch is closed, the fi rst 

occurrence of a threshold underrun will cause the 

program to switch over to "Autorotation" and then 

remain independent of C1 position in this fl ight phase 

until the activating switch, in this example switch 4, is 

again "OFF".

"Autorot. C1-Pos." has precedence over all other 

fl ight-phase switches.

Corresponding parameter settings for ...

• pitch servos

• throttle servo

• tail rotor servo

• swashplate rotation, if available

• gyro setting

... are made in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, 

page 176.

Cut-off

Within the framework of autorotation settings for 

the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's helicopter program, 

there are parameters for an emergency "Thr. CutOff" 

of the throttle servo or motor actuator, refer to the 

programming proposal on page 314. However, this 

option is not available if an idle position is specifi ed 

in the "Throttle position AR" line of the »Helicopter 

mixer« menu instead of an (emergency) OFF 

position; for example, to avoid restarting the motor 

after every landing during autorotation practice. 

This option not only replaces the"Cut-off trim" function 

known from other Graupner mc and mx transmitters 

but also serves as an Emergency-OFF function at the 

same time, which was not possible with the"Cut-off 

trim" function.

Depending on the "forw./rear" choice made for the 

"Pitch min" line of the »Helicopter type« menu, this 

"Thr. CutOff" option can be coupled to a switch for 

throttling down a speed controller or a carburetor 

servo to the motor OFF (or idle) position. 

This cut-off (or idle) position is specifi ed in the left 

column's fi eld, above the SEL column label, and its 

value is to be established through trial and error.
90 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on 

this preset position when a certain servo position 

or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. 

This is done by setting the desired servo position 

(threshold value) into the middle column fi eld, 

directly over the column label STO, then selecting 

the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right 

column.

• If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle 

column is greater than the current servo position, 

i.e. the current servo position lies below the 

threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the 

switch is put into its ON position.

• If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle 

column is less than the current servo position, i.e. 

the current servo position is above the threshold, 

the speed controller will initially reduce motor 

speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo 

only to the extent dictated by the value in the 

left column as soon as the servo's position once 

underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the 

switch is changed over to its ON position.

The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in 

this cut-off position only until the selected switch is 

again changed over followed by a one-time throttle 

servo or speed controller movement beyond the 

preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick 

control.

The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for 

the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of 

+150 % servo position setting in the middle column.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff –100% +150% –––

Programming procedure

To change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off" position, 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The 

current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now 

use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

set a value at which the motor is reliably "off" without 

a startup of the throttle servo. For example -125 %:

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff –125% +150% –––

The – upper – preset value in the middle column 

ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the 

maximum possible positioning range of the servo or 

speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned 

in the right column. 

However, if a lower threshold is preferred, at which 

an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed 

controller with closed switch to enter the throttle cutoff position for a closed switch condition – by default 

the right-side proportional rotary slider – put the 

throttle/pitch joystick into the desired position then tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff –125% +150% –––

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a 

switch with which you can cut off the motor directly 

(emergency) or which will be activated by the 

threshold. 

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff –125% +100% 8

Notes:

• Be sure the throttle servo does not run out 

mechanically when the cut-off function is 

activated.

• A threshold over +100 % is reached by 

temporarily increasing the travel for servo 1 in the 

»Servo adjustment« menu to over 100 % then, 

after storing the threshold, change servo travel 

back to the original value.
Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models 91

Marking

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Autorotation –––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff –125% +100% 8

Marker key –––

When activated, the "Marker key" will place a marker 

in the "Pitch" curve, as well as in the "Channel 1 

Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rotor" mixer curves 

of the »Helicopter mixer« menu, to mark the current 

pitch joystick position of the pitch joystick and it takes 

on the form of a vertical dashed line. This marker 

is helpful for setting curve points at the right places 

during fl ight testing, e.g. the hovering point

One of the two standard momentary contact switches 

mounted into the switch panels should be the 

preferred choice of switch assignment.

Example:

The hovering point is to be placed at the midpoint of 

the throttle/pitch joystick for the «Hover» fl ight phase 

but it is found to be still located above control middle 

during fl ight testing. Press the switch in this position 

and, after the landing, examine, for example, the 

Pitch curve in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 

176.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –30%

–30%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

The continuous vertical line shows the joystick's 

current position. Its position in this example lies at 

-30 % (= input) of control travel and, because of its 

(still) linear control curve, produces an output signal 

which is also -30 % (= output).

On the other hand, the dashed vertical line represents 

the joystick position at which the marker switch was 

pushed.

Move the joystick to this marker line to read the input 

and output values for the found hovering point. The 

marker points of the other two mixer curves are read 

similarly. Now these three curves can be alternately 

modifi ed as necessary in order to correct the hovering 

point. Curve point "1" in this simple example can be 

raised at the curve's midpoint to the output value that 

was determined to be the hovering point in the Pitch 

graph.

Power-on warning 

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

–––

Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff –125% +100% 8

Marker key –––

Power on warning

When a switch, a control switch or a logical switch is 

assigned in this line, as described on page 56 in the 

section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and 

control switches", the respective switch or control 

position will be polled when the transmitter is switched 

on and an appropriate warning will be blended into the 

basic display under some conditions. In combination 

with logical switches, almost any switch setting can be 

called up for transmitter switch on.

#02 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

00:00h

M

V

!Warning!

Starlet

H-J Sandbrunner

Auto trim

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

–––

–––

SEL STO

Thr. CutOff –125% +100% 8

Marker key

Power on warning –––

Auto trim

The "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a 

model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the 

context of a fi rst-fl ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.

Typically such test fl ights are initially fl own with 

joysticks counter operated until the desired state of 

fl ight is achieved. This generally involves working 

the trim controls during the fl ight to "unburden" the 

joysticks.

This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for. 

After the desired fl ight attitude has been achieved via 

control functions 2 ... 4 (aileron, elevator and rudder), 

the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally one of 

the standard-equipment momentary switches in the 

switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the instant 

the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from their 

neutral positions will be determined and adopted 

as trim values. However, this does not take place 

instantaneously but rather within about 1 second. 

During this period after the switch has been activated, 

the joysticks should be returned to their normal 

positions.
92 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models

Notes:

• Be sure that during the switch assignment, the 

joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in 

their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets 

from neutral will be adopted right away in trim 

memory as the trim value.

• Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch 

has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto 

trim" fl ight, the assigned auto trim switch should 

be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise 

there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim" 

function could be activated accidentally. 

ext. PPM signal

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Power on warning –––

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Marker key –––

Some RF modules which can be connected to the 

external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors 

for other RF modules require an inverted input signal. 

Be sure to follow the respective module's installation 

instructions for this.

The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset 

"normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the 

provided PPM signal.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to 

"normal".

Auto timer reset

BASIC SETTING,MODEL

SET SET

Power on warning –––

Auto trim –––

ext. PPM signal normal

SEL

Auto timer reset yes

The "yes/no" setting made in this line determines 

whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except 

for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time") 

are automatically reset to their given starting values 

when the transmitter is switched on.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to 

"yes".
For your notes 93
94 Detail program description - Model type | Winged models

This "Model type" menu is used to establish the type 

of model to be programmed. This also activates 

all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. 

in preparation for subsequent programming of the 

specifi ed model type.

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Motor at C1

After selecting the "Motor at C1" line with the 

selection keys of the left and right touch pad, the 

corresponding entry fi eld will be framed. 

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: 

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. 

Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to 

select from among the following four options: 

"none" For operation of a model without a 

propulsion.

 The warning "Throttle too high", 

see page 30, is deactivated and 

the "Brake settings" sub-menu of 

the »Wing mixers« (beginning 

page 172) is available without any 

restrictions.

"Thr. min. rear": The idle position for the throttle/

brake fl aps joystick (C1) is to the 

rear, i.e. toward the pilot.

 The warning "Throttle too high", see 

page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff" 

option in the »Basic settings, 

model« menu, see page 81, are 

activated and the "Brake settings" 

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« 

menu, beginning page 172, will be 

available if the entry in the "Motor" 

column of the »Phase settings« 

menu, page 142, for the currently 

active fl ight phase is "none".

"Thr. min. fwd.": The idle position for the throttle/

brake fl aps control stick (C1) is at 

the front, i.e. away from the pilot.

 The warning "Throttle too high", see 

page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff" 

option in the »Basic settings, 

model« menu, see page 90, are 

activated and the "Brake settings" 

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« 

menu, beginning page 172, will be 

available if the entry in the "Motor" 

column of the »Phase settings« 

menu, page 142, for the currently 

active fl ight phase is "none".

Notes:

• Be sure to pay attention during the 

programming procedures that motors do not 

start up unintentionally. Disconnect the fuel 

supply or battery terminals to motors before 

programming.

• C1 trimming will operate according to the choice 

made between "normal" or only "back" or "fwd.", 

that is, either over the control's entire travel path 

or only in the respective idle direction.

Tail type

After selecting the »Tail type« line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the 

corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: 

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. 

Now select the type appropriate for the model with 

the selection keys of the right touch pad.

"normal": Elevators and rudder are each 

operated by a single servo.

"V-tail": Elevator and rudder control is 

affected by way of two separate, 

articulated, V-shaped rudders. The 

coupling function for rudder and 

elevator control will be automatically 

taken over by the program. The 

relationship of rudder-to-elevator 

proportion is set in the »Dual Rate / 

Expo« menu, page 120, and servo 

travel in the »Servo adjustment« 

menu, page 102.

If, beyond this, there is a desire to 

also make differentiation for rudder 

throw then the V-tail should be 

alternatively controlled via the »Dual 

mixer« menu, page 206. In this case 

however, the tail type entry specifi ed 

here must be "normal". 

"ELEVON": Aileron and elevator control is 

operated by one or two servos 

Model type

Establishing winged aircraft model type
Detail program description - Model type | Winged models 95

per wing half. However, elevator 

trimming is also affected by 

selecting the "2AIL 2FL" option – see 

below – but only on servos 2 & 3. 

"2ELSv3+8": This option is intended for models 

with two elevator servos. The servo 

connected to output 8 will operate 

in parallel with servo 3 to actuate 

elevators. Elevator trim affects both 

servos.

Note on "2ELSv3+8":

One control, which assigns input 8 by 

way of the »Control adjust« menu, is 

then disconnected from servo "8" by 

software for reasons of safety i.e. it is 

made ineffective.

Aileron/camber fl aps

After selecting the »Aileron/camber fl aps« line with 

the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, 

the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: 

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. 

Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to 

select the number of wing servos to be programmed 

for the model.

Available Control channel used

1AIL 2

1AIL 1FL 2 | 6

In the majority of cases the default setting for 

"input 1" will remain as it is and the brake will be 

operated by way of the non-neutralizing C1 joystick.

However, use of input 7, 8 or 9 makes it possible to 

operate the brake in an alternative manner, even by 

way of a supplementary control, if the C1 stick is to 

be used for something else.

The neutral point (offset) can be set to any desired 

position. This is done by placing the control for input 1, 

7, 8 or 9 into the position at which the landing fl aps are 

to be retracted, i.e. closed, then setting this "Offset" 

point in the column above the column label STO.

The selection of this offset point in this context 

determines not only the control position at which the 

brake system is to be retracted, i.e. closed, but also 

also the activation direction of the C1 joystick for 

extending the brake system.

• Brake offset values with a "+" prefi x will cause 

fl aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of 

the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when 

the C1 joystick is moved from front to rear, in the 

direction of the pilot.

• Brake offset values with a "-" prefi x will cause 

fl aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of 

the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when 

the C1 joystick is moved from rear to front, in the 

direction away from the pilot.

If the offset point is not set at the far end of control 

element travel, the remainder of travel to the end 

point will be "free travel", i.e. this "free travel" will 

no longer infl uence any mixer available for "Brake 

settings" in the »Wing mixers« menu. This idle path 

ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral", 

even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake 

fl ap control. At the same time, the effective control 

path is automatically spread to 100 %.

2AIL 2 & 5

2AIL 1FL 2 & 5 | 6

2AIL 2FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7

2AIL 4FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10

4QR 2WK 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7

4AIL 4FL 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10

Depending on the option selected here, the given 

mixers needed and their settings will be activated in 

the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 172.

Tips:

• Settings for all wing fl ap pairs (Al and Al2, FL and 

FL2) can be trimmed on a fl ight-phase basis in 

both the »Phase trim« menu as well as in the 

Wing mixers« menu, page 172.

• The functionality of all wing fl ap pairs (Al and Al2, 

FL and FL2) can also be operated by way of the 

"Throttle/brake-fl ap joystick" if this stick has not 

been assigned to other use, e.g. for certain brake 

settings, see »Wing mixers« menu, page 172. 

To confi gure this it is only necessary to assign 

"Control 1" to input 6 in the »Control adjust« 

menu, page 108. (If it is preferable to operate fl aps 

with switches, one of the transmitter's two or three 

position switches are good for this purpose.)

Brake Offset

This function not only has potential for gliders and 

electric models but also for models with combustion 

motors and landing fl aps.

The mixers described in the »Brake settings« line of 

the »Wing mixers« menu can be operated by the C1 

joystick ("input 1") or another transmitter operating 

element which has been assigned to input 7, 8 or 9 in 

the »Control adjust« menu. In this latter case, retain 

the "GL" default setting for the "Type" column in the 

»Control adjust« menu so the selected control can 

operate independent of fl ight phase.
96 Detail program description - Model type | Winged models

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +90%

SEL

Tip:

Preferably, the servo intended for operating any 

airbrake fl aps that may be on the model should be 

connected to the receiver output operated by the 

brake input channel, e.g. connect airbrake servo onto 

(free) receiver output 8 if input 8 has been chosen 

for the "brake", etc. A second airbrake servo is most 

conveniently operated by way of a free mixer.
For your notes 97
98 Detail program description - Helicopter type

Helicopter type

Establishing helicopter model type

This "Model type" menu is used to establish the type 

of model to be programmed. This also activates 

all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. 

in preparation for subsequent programming of the 

specifi ed model type.

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Swashplate type

Control of the swashplate will require an appropriate 

program variant which corresponds to the number of 

servos operating pitch control.

In the meantime this selection is also infl uenced 

by the type of control exercised on swashplate 

servos. Since Flybar systems generally do not 

require transmitter-side swashplate mixers, when 

such a system is in use, "1 Servo" is generally to be 

selected as the swashplate type, regardless of the 

actual number of swashplate servos present. In this 

context, be sure the Flybar system complies with 

the included adjustment instructions as otherwise 

there is a risk the helicopter will not fl y.

After selecting the »Swashplate type« line with the 

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the 

entry fi eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

no

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. 

The current setting for number of pitch servos will be 

displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant 

needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad. 

"1 Servo": A Flybar system is in use or the 

swashplate is tipped with one servo 

each for roll and pitch-axis. Pitch 

control will be affected by one

separate servo.

 (Since helicopter models, like Flybar 

systems, which are operated with only 

1 pitch servo, neither need any of the 

three swashplate servos for pitch, 

pitch-axis and roll NOR the transmitter's 

mixer functions for pitch, pitch-axis and 

roll, the »Swashplate mixer« menu 

option will be suppressed in the Multifunction menu.)

"2 Servo": Two roll servos will displace the 

swashplate axially to affect pitch 

control; nick control will be decoupled 

by a mechanical compensation rocker.

"3Sv(2Roll)": Symmetric three-point control of 

the swashplate with three, radially 

offset articulation points, each offset 

by 120 °, connected to one pitchaxis servo (front or rear) and two 

roll servos (left and right). All three 

servos push the swashplate axially to 

affect pitch control.

"3Sv (140°)": Asymmetrical three-point control of 

the swashplate is affected at three 

articulation points connected to one 

nick servo (rear) and two roll servos 

(front left and right). All three servos 

push the swashplate axially to affect 

pitch control.

"3Sv (2Nick)": Symmetric three-point control as 

described above but radially offset 

by 90°, one lateral roll servo and two 

pitch-axis servos, front and rear.

"4Sv (90°)": Four-point swashplate control 

affected by two roll servos and two 

nick servos.

Simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to 

"1 Servo".

Swashplate type: 1 Servo

2

Swashplate type: 2 Servos

2

1
Detail program description - Helicopter type 99

Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Roll)

3

1

2

Swashplate type: 3 Servos (140°)

3

1

2

Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Nick)

3

2

1

Swashplate type: 4 Servos (90°) 2 Nick / 2 Roll

2

5

1

3

Note:

Except for the "1 Servo" choice, swashplate mixer 

proportions must also be set in the»Swashplate 

mixer« menu, page 208.

Swashplate linearizion

After selecting the »Linearis. swashpl.« line with the 

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the 

entry fi eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

no

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

The "yes" entry will prevent undesired side effects 

such as pitch change due to a roll function or tension 

between swashplate servo rods.

This type of tension can arise when effected servos 

strain for different displacement positions due to 

travel which deviates from one another.

Linearizing will require a bit of familiarization on the 

part of the pilot because, in order to linearize the 

entire rotation travel of the servo arm, servo travel 

is reduced in small control movements – similar to a 

pronounced exponential setting.

Rotor direction

After selecting the »Rotor direction« line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry 

fi eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

no

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

After a tap on the center SET key, the main rotor's 

direction of rotation is entered in the »Rotor direction« 

line with the selection keys of the right touch pad:

"right": The main rotor turns clockwise when 

viewed from above.

"left": The main rotor turns counter-clockwise 

when viewed from above.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will set the option to "right". 

rightturning

leftturning

This entry is necessary for the correct orientation of 

torque and power compensation mixer settings made 

in the »Helicopter mixer« menu:

 Pitch,

 Channel 1  Throttle,

 Channel 1  Tail rot.,

 Tail rotor  Throttle

 Roll  Throttle

 Roll  Tail rot.

 Pitch  Throttle,

 Pitch-axis  Throttle

 Pitch-axis  Tail rotor
100 Detail program description - Helicopter type

Pitch min

After selecting the »Pitch min.« (pitch minimum) line

with the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad, the entry fi eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

no

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

The »Pitch min.« line is used to adapt the actuation 

direction of the throttle/pitch joystick to personal 

control preferences. All other helicopter program 

options which involve throttle and pitch functions, e.g. 

throttle curve, idle trimming, tail rotor mixer, etc., are 

dependent on this setting. 

Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The 

operating direction of the throttle/pitch joystick will be 

displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant 

needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

Pitch

These mean: 

"fwd.": minimum pitch setting when the pitch 

joystick (C1) is "forward", i.e. away from 

the pilot.

"rear": minimum pitch setting when the pitch 

joystick (C1) is "back", i.e. toward the pilot.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".

Notes:

• C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo. 

• The so-called "throttle limit" is set by default, see 

text beginning page 117, by way of input "GL16" in 

the »Control adjust« menu with which the throttle 

servo can be limited, independent of the pitch 

servo, in the full throttle direction.

• Since a given user's models will typically be 

operated with the same pitch-min direction, this 

specifi cation can be conveniently preselected 

in the "transmitter-specifi c" »General basic 

settings« menu, page 259. This specifi cation will 

then be adopted automatically when a new model 

memory is created in the »Helicopter type« menu 

but, if desired, can be adapted on a model-specifi c 

basis as described.

Expo throttle limit

After selecting the »Expo throttle lim.« line with the 

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the 

entry fi eld will be framed.

Linearis. swashpl. no

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Expo throttle lim. 0%

The "Throttle limit" function described in the »Control 

adjust« menu, see page 117, can be assigned an 

exponential characteristic curve.

A pitch progression rate between -100 % and +100 % 

can be set with the selection keys.

For example, it is practical to have the throttle 

limit – by default, the right-side proportional rotary 

slider – also regulate the idle setting. Further details 

about the throttle limit can be found in the text for the 

»Control adjust« menu beginning page 112.

An example of two exponential 

throttle limit curve characteristics 

for 100 % servo travel.

continuous line:

negative exponential values;

dashed line:

positive exponential values











 

 

	

 	

Throttle limit warning

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Expo throttle lim. 0%

Thr. limit warning –70%

If the carburetor is open too far when the transmitter 

is switched on, an acoustic warning will be sounded 

and a warning will be presented in the display.

Throttle

 too

 high!

The »Thr. limit warning« option permits the setting of 

a variable for the critical position of the throttle servo 

between 0 % and -100 %, above which the warning 

will be issued. The reference point for this option is 

the "fwd." or "rear" Pitch min. joystick position set in 

this menu. 
Detail program description - Helicopter type 101

A default value of -70 % control travel is provided.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

back to the default value.
102 Detail program description - Servo adjustment

normal

reversed

normal

reversed

Column 3 "cent."

The servo midpoint (center) setting is intended for 

adapting a non-standard servo (a servo whose 

midpoint position does not correspond to a pulse 

length of 1.5 ms, i.e. 1500 μs), as well as for minor

adjustments, e.g. for the fi ne tuning of the neutral 

position of model rudders.

Independent of trim wheels and any mixer settings, 

the neutral point can be shifted in a range of -125 bis 

+125 % within a maximum servo travel of ± 150 %. 

Independent of all other trim and mixer settings, this 

setting is always based directly on the respective 

servo. 

Note that extreme offsets of 

the neutral point can lead 

to one-sided restrictions of 

servo travel because overall 

travel is limited by both 

electronic and mechanical 

aspects to a maximum of 

±150 %.

A simultaneous tap on the 

 or  keys of the right 

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld value 

displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

3. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown 

highlighted.

4. Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 

the desired value.

5. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to complete data entry.

6. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made 

back to its respective default value.

Important:

Servo designation numerals are based on the 

respective receiver outputs to which they are 

connected, provided that no swapping of transmitter 

and/or receiver outputs has been specifi ed. This 

means that even a change of stick mode will not 

effect the numbering of servos.

Column 2 "rev"

The direction in which a servo turns is adapted to 

the practical reality of the given model so that the 

assembly of control rods and joints do not need to 

accommodate a specifi c servo rotation direction. 

Rotation direction is symbolized by the "=>" and "<=" 

character combinations. Servo rotation direction must 

be specifi ed before making settings for the options 

which follow below.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset rotation direction 

back to "=>". 

This menu is used to set the direction, neutralization, 

travel and limit parameters for a given selected servo 

exclusively. 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

Begin setting servo parameters in the left column.

Basic procedure:

1. Select the desired servo, 1 ... 16, with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad. 

2. If necessary, use the  selection keys of the 

left or right touch pad to reach the desired column 

then, if desired, move the respective control out of 

its midpoint to make an asymmetric setting.

Servo adjustment

Servo direction, midpoint, travel and limit
Detail program description - Servo adjustment 103

Column 4, "–travel+"

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically 

or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 

0 ... 150 % of normal servo travel. The values set are 

based on the settings that have been made for the 

"midpoint" column. 

To create a symmetric travel path, i.e. control-side 

independent travel, the respective control (joystick, 

proportional control or switch) is to be put into a 

position which covers travel to both sides of the 

marked frame. 

Note:

It may be necessary to fi rst assign a control attached 

to one of the control channels 5 ... 16. If necessary, 

this is to be done in the »Control adjust« menu, see 

page 108 or 112.

To set asymmetric travel, the respective control 

(joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be 

moved to the side on which the marked frame only 

includes the value to be changed.

The value setting is activated with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. The value fi eld 

is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with 

the selection keys of the right touch pad. Complete 

the entry with a tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed 

parameter displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".

Important:

In contrast to settings made with the »Control 

adjust« menu, all settings made in this menu affect 

exclusively the respective servo, independent of 

how the control signal for this servo is produced, i.e. 

directly by a joystick or by way of any mixer functions.

The adjacent fi gure shows 

and example of a sidedependent servo setting, 

-50 % and +150 %. Transmitter control travel Servo travel

Column 5 "–limit+"

The "– limit +" column is reached by moving the 

marker frame, with the  selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad, to the right beyond the "– travel +" 

column.

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

To create a symmetric limit, i.e. control-side 

independent limit, the respective control (joystick, 

proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position 

such that the marker frame covers both sides of the 

travel setting.

To set asymmetric travel, the respective control 

(joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be 

moved to the side where it is to be set such that the 

marker frame only includes the value to be changed.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld 

value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

Example:

A servo is controlled separately by two controls over 

a mixer and but, for model-specifi c reasons, must 

only be operated over a servo travel path of 100 % 

because, for example, the rudder would mechanically 

collide with the elevator if moved more than 100 %.

As long as only one control is used at a time, this is 

no problem. But this does become a problem when 

the signals are summed by the simultaneous use of 

both controls (e.g. aileron and rudder) to total travel 

in excess of 100 %. The linkage and servos could be 

strained excessively ...

To prevent this, the travel should certainly be limited 

by way of an individual travel limit. In the case of the 

rudder used in the example, this would be a value 

slightly less than 100 % – because it is assumed the 

rudder would collide at 100 %.
104 Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged models

Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. 

When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the 

joystick's neutral position by a certain value. 

The current position is shown on the screen and 

the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic 

tones. This makes fi nding the mid-point during fl ight 

easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is 

overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.

Current trim values are automatically stored when a 

model memory change is made.

Furthermore – except for global control 

function trimming of the throttle/brake joystick, 

commonly referred to as control function "C1" 

(channel 1) – digital trimming is effective within a 

model memory location selectively as either a global 

parameter (i.e. consistent in all fl ight phases) or as 

a fl ight-phase specifi c parameter. This specifi cation 

as "global" or "phase" is made in the »Stick mode« 

menu described here, whereas software-side C1 

trimming is generally set to "global", i.e. independent 

of fl ight phases.

This setting is visualized in the base screen by a 

"shadow" on trim bars:

• shadow present = global,

• no shadow = fl ight phase dependent.

In two corresponding fi gures below, elevator 

trim – shown in the middle text column with its default 

setting "global" – then in the right column set to fl ight 

"Phase" specifi c.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

RX VOLT:4.9V

Joystick setting 

Setting stick mode 1 through 4

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multifunction menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

This menu, adapted for winged models, permits the 

four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim effects 

to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration" factor 

to control functions 1 through 4.

The desired line can be reached by using the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the 

appropriate function fi eld has been selected and then 

the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched 

briefl y, the fi eld will appear in inverse video and the 

desired setting can be made with the selection keys 

of the right touch pad.

Trim

Except for "Channel 1", this column can be used to 

switchover trim effect from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" 

and vice versa. 

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

"Global": The position of the respective trim wheel 

is effective "globally" for all fl ight-phases 

programmed for the given model, page 140.

"Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel 

is effective on a phase-specifi c basis and 

will be automatically stored upon change 

of fl ight phase so that the setting is again 

available following a return to this fl ight 

phase.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to 

"Global".

Trim steps

The four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of 

the respective joystick in the given direction by one 

adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click". 

This is where the increment size (step) can be 

adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim 

travel, independent of the selected number of trim 

steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.

After selecting the "Tr. step" column (trim steps) and 

the desired trim control with the  selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry 

fi eld will be framed. 
Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged models 105

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. 

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. 

Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10, 

with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For 

example:

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

8

4

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made 

to the active fi eld back to "4".

Time

The rate of control signal change with respect to the 

speed of joystick motion can be infl uenced by the 

entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick 

movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels 

1 through 4, can be set individually. This means 

that respective servos will then follow rapid control 

position changes only at an accordingly delayed 

rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control 

function and therefore also any servos controlled by 

this function.

The time can be programmed symmetrically for both 

sides or separate for each control direction. This 

setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In 

the case of side-separate settings, the joystick is to 

be moved to the respective side so that the inverse 

video fi eld will switch between sides to the one for 

which the change is to be made – for example, even 

to ensure gentle rev-up of the propulsion motor 

despite a (too) fast motion of the C1 stick.

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

1.1s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

8

4

On the other hand, for reasons of safety, the motor 

cut-off should always be "immediate".

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made 

to the active fi eld back to "0.0 s".
106 Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopters

Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. 

When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the 

joystick's neutral position by a certain value. 

The current position is shown on the screen and 

the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic 

tones. This makes fi nding the mid-point during fl ight 

easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is 

overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.

Current trim values are automatically stored when a 

model memory change is made. 

Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake 

joystick – digital trimming is effective selectively either 

as a global parameter, i.e. consistent in all fl ight 

phases, or as a fl ight-phase specifi c parameter. This 

specifi cation as "Global" or "Phase" is made in the 

»Stick mode« menu described here, whereas throttle 

trimming is always made "global" by software, i.e. 

independent of fl ight phases.

This setting is visualized in the base screen by a 

"shadow" on trim bars:

• shadow present = global,

• no shadow = fl ight phase dependent.

In the following fi gure, pitch-axis trimming is used as 

an example of fl ight-phase dependence – presented 

at the left in its default Mode 1.

0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

#02

Starlet

RX VOLT:4.9V

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multifunction menu: 

Joystick setting

Setting stick mode 1 through 4

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Pitch/thr Thr trim

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

This menu, adapted for helicopter models, permits 

the four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim 

effects to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration" 

factor to control functions 1 through 4.

The desired line can be reached by using the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the 

appropriate function fi eld has been selected and then 

the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched 

briefl y, the fi eld will appear in inverse video and the 

desired setting can be made with the selection keys 

of the right touch pad.

Trim

These setting variations are confi gured to 

accommodate the needs of helicopter models, which 

is why the following alternative options are available 

for the "Thr." line:

Pitch/thr Thr trim

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

"Thr trim": (throttle limit)

 C1 trimming operates as idle trimming 

when the "throttle limit" function 

regulates the motor for starting, see 

»Control adjust« menu, page 117.

"Throttle AR": (Throttle Autorotation)

 C1 trim operates as idle trim exclusively 

in the «Autorot» fl ight phase.

 This makes it possible to assign a 

principle (fi xed) preset AR throttle 

position in the »Helicopter mixer« 

menu, page 176, e.g. during 

autorotation practice with the trim 

wheel "varied".

 A simultaneous tap on the  or 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) 

will reset the option back to "Thr trim".

"Pitch": Due to internal coupling, C1 trimming 

acts equally on all pitch servos available 

without infl uencing the throttle servo.

On the other hand, the trim effects of respective 

digital trim controls for the lines "Roll", "Pitch ax" 

and "Tail rot." can be switched over from "Gobal" to 

"Phase" and vice versa.
Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopters 107

Pitch/thr Thr trim

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

"Global": The position of the respective trim 

wheel is effective "globally" for all fl ightphases programmed for the given model, 

page 140.

"Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel 

is effective on a phase-specifi c basis and 

will be automatically stored upon change 

of fl ight phase so that the setting is again 

available following a return to this fl ight 

phase.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to 

"Global".

Trim steps

The four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of 

the respective joystick in the given direction by one 

adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click". 

This is where the increment size (step) can be 

adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim 

travel, independent of the selected number of trim 

steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.

After selecting the "Tr. step" column and the desired 

trim control with the  selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be 

framed.

Pitch/thr Thr trim

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. 

The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. 

Now select the desired value, between 0 and 10, 

with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For 

example:

Pitch/thr Thr trim

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

0

4

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made 

to the active fi eld back to "4".

Time

The rate of control signal change with respect to the 

speed of joystick motion can be infl uenced by the 

entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick 

movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels 

1 through 4, can be set individually. This means 

that respective servos will then follow rapid control 

position changes only at an accordingly delayed 

rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control 

signal and therefore also commensurately on any 

servos controlled by the effected controls.

The time can be programmed symmetrically for both 

sides or separate for each control direction. This 

setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In 

this latter case, the given stick control is to be moved 

to the respective side so that the inverse video fi eld 

will switch between sides to the one for which the 

change is to be made. 

Example:

All three servos are to be actuated for swashplate 

pitch control, e g. a "Pitch" control movement for a 

"3Sv (2Roll)" swashplate. However, travel for the 

middle servo is greater than that of the other two 

servos on the shorter lever.

A rash "Pitch" control movement would not operate 

the nick servo in the middle as quickly as it would 

the two roll servos on the shorter lever. This would 

cause a momentary control motion in the "nick" 

direction. However, if response time for the "pitch" 

control function were to be reduced by at least the 

positioning time for the servo in the middle then all 

three servos would reach their proper positions at 

the same time. The necessary delay times typically 

amount to only a few tenths of a second. For 

example:

Pitch/thr Thr trim

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

4.4s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

Phase 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

0

4

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made 

to the active fi eld back to "0.0 s".
108 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models

Control adjust 

Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multifunction menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

In addition to the two joysticks for control functions 

1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter also has other controls as standard 

equipment:

• two 3-way switches

• two 2-way switches

• two unlockable 2-way switches

• two self-restoring 2-way switches

• three proportional sliders on the middle console, 

designated SR 1 ... 3 in the menu

• two side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 

and 2 in the menu

• two depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 

and 4 in the menu

• three roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as 

DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menu

In contrast to the two joysticks which, when initialized 

for a new model memory as a "Winged aircraft" 

model type will already be confi gured to operate the 

servos connected to receiver outputs 1 ... 4, these 

"other" operating elements initially remain inactive. 

Thus, at least in the system's delivered state – as 

already mentioned on page 68 – or even after 

initialization of a new model memory with an "aircraft" 

model type and its "binding" to the receiver intended 

for installation, only those servos connected to 

the two joysticks by way of receiver outputs 1 ... 4 

are able to be operated; any servos which may be 

connected to receiver outputs 5 ... 16 will initially 

remain inactive in their middle positions.

While this may appear a bit awkward at fi rst glance 

... this is the only way to ensure a completely 

free selection from among "additional" operating 

elements while, at the same time, not requiring the 

"deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is 

because 

the only way to ensure an unused operating 

element can have no effect on the model, even if 

operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. 

not assigned to any function.

All of the aforementioned operating elements can be 

freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see 

page 54, to any function input just to accommodate 

personal requirements. Equally, this also means 

that each of these operating elements can also be 

assigned to to multiple functions at the same time, 

as needed. For example: the exact same toggle 

switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the 

same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers 

(general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.

Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global

or fl ight-phase specifi c operation if they have been 

defi ned for fl ight-phases in the »Phase settings« 

menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu, 

page 148. The names assigned to given fl ight phases 

then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display 

line, e.g. «Normal».

Basic procedure

1. Use the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to select the desired input, "I5 ... I16". 

2. If necessary, use the  selection keys of the 

left or right touch pad to change to the desired 

column.

3. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown 

highlighted.

4. Operate the chosen operating element or set the 

desired value with the selection keys of the right 

touch pad.

5. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to complete data entry.

6. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made 

back to its respective default value.

Column 2, "TYP"

Similar to the previously described »Stick mode« 

menu, this column can be used to defi ne whether 

further settings for the given input are to have a 

"GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-specifi c)" effect. Do this by 

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column 

labeled "TYP". 

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

EI

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal
Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models 109

"GL": The settings for the input in question affect 

all fl ight phases programmed (if any) and 

thus act "globally" on the model memory in 

question.

"PH": The settings for this input take effect per 

fl ight phase and must therefore be confi gured 

separately for each fl ight phase.

Note:

See page 140 for more information about fl ight 

phases.

Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch 

assignment"

Select an input, 5 through 16, with the  selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad.

Transmitter control assignment 

Use the selection keys to move into the column 

labeled SEL. After completing the activation of 

transmitter control assignment by tapping the center 

SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown 

below will appear in the display:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Move desired

control adj.

Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The 

notice window will disappear and the designation 

of the selected transmitter control will appear in the 

transmitter control assignment window.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

EI

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

S11 ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch 

pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice 

window, see above, is still on the display:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

EI

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to select the desired input out of the list if the respective 

plug-in location on the transmitter board is occupied or 

switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to be decoupled 

from a transmitter control. In this case, or even when a 

non-existent transmitter control is assigned, the servo 

corresponding to this input will be in its neutral position 

and can only be controlled via mixers.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

EI

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

S11 ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Switch assignment 

If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the 

input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.

A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth 

between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.

A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix, 

achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch 

module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. 

Use the selection keys to move into the column 

above the switch symbol label. Briefl y tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the 

option for assigning a switch.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL fr

Normal

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF" 

to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch, 

beginning from its middle position, assign a switch 

direction – preferably the "second" direction. This 

means, if a function is to be switched on by moving 

the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the 

pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and 

move the switch away from the pilot. 

The display will then present the switch number 

together with a symbol indicating the given switch 

direction. At the same time, the column label in the 

footer line will change from SEL into another switch 

symbol.
110 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL ---

Normal

7

Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. 

Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into 

the column labeled with the new switch symbol, briefl y 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then 

assign the switch's other switch direction by once 

again starting from the middle position but this time 

move the switch in the other direction.

The display will now present the given switch number 

together with a symbol indicating the given switch 

direction.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

Erasing a transmitter control or switch 

assignment

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of 

the right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input 

line with an active transmitter control or switch 

assignment – see above fi gures – will reset the given 

input back to "fr" and "---".

Tips:

• When assigning switches, pay attention to the 

desired switching direction and also that all 

unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to 

"free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent 

actuations of these unused controls cannot cause 

malfunctions.

• The travel setting described below allows the 

appropriate end state to be established for an 

assigned switch.

Column 4, "Offset"

The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero 

point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment 

range lies between -125 % and +125 %.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld 

value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

Column 5, "– travel +"

This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically 

or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 

±125 % of normal servo travel.

Select an input, 5 through 16, with the  selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad.

To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent 

travel, the respective operating element (transmitter 

control or switch) is to be put into a position in which 

the travel setting will be covered on both sides by the 

marker frame.

E5 0% +100%

E6

E7

E8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

To set asymmetric travel, the respective operating 

element (transmitter control or switch) is to be moved 

to the side to be set such that the marker frame only 

includes the value to be changed.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

The value setting is activated by briefl y touching the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. The value 

fi eld/s will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be 

changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.

I5 0% +111%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7
Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models 111

I5 0% +88%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad will complete the entry.

Negative and positive parameter values are possible 

in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction 

or effect.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed 

parameter displayed in inverse video back to 

"+100 %".

Important:

In contrast to servo travel settings, changing the 

control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer 

and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos actuated 

by the given transmitter control.

Column 6, "–time+"

Each of the function inputs 5 ... 16 can be assigned 

a symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0 

and 9.9 s.

Move the marker frame to the right beyond the 

column labeled "– travel +" with the  selection key 

of the left or right touch pad.

To set a symmetric, i.e. control-side independent, 

time delay, the respective operating element 

(transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a 

position in which the time setting is covered on both 

sides by the marker frame.

I5 0% +111%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

To set an asymmetric time delay, move the given 

transmitter control (proportional control or switch) 

as necessary to the side to be set such that only the 

value to be changed is covered.

I5 0% +111%

I6

I7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to activate value setting. The value fi eld will be 

displayed in inverse video. Use the selection keys of 

the right touch pad to change the value in a range of 

0.0 to 9.9 s.

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad will complete the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed 

parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.
112 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

Control adjust

Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multifunction menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

I15 GL fr --- 0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

Tl16 GL Lv1 --- 0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

In addition to the two joysticks for control functions 

1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter also has other controls as standard 

equipment:

• two 3-way switches

• two 2-way switches

• two unlockable 2-way switches

• two self-restoring 2-way switches

• three proportional sliders on the middle console, 

designated SR 1 ... 3 in the menu

• two side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 

and 2 in the menu

• two depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 

and 4 in the menu

• three roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as 

DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menu 

In contrast to the two joysticks which, even for 

a newly initialized "Helicopter" model type will 

automatically use the servos attached to receiver 

outputs 1 ... 4 and 6, the aforementioned "other" 

operating elements – except for the standard 

assignment of servo 6 to the right-side proportional 

slider, designated in this menu as SD1 (throttle 

limiter) – are initially inactive. 

One of the effects of this is that (as already 

mentioned on page 68) with a factory-fresh 

system – as with a newly initialized model memory 

for a "Helicopter" model type following its "binding" to 

the intended receiver – only those servos connected 

to receiver outputs 1 ... 4 and – depending on the 

position of the throttle limiter – servo 6 can be moved 

by the two joysticks. Any servos connected to plug-in 

locations 5 and 7 through 15, on the other hand, will 

simply remain at their center positions.

While this may appear a bit awkward at fi rst glance 

... this is the only way to ensure a completely 

free selection from among "additional" operating 

elements while, at the same time, not requiring the 

"deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is 

because 

the only way to ensure an unused operating 

element can have no effect on the model, even if 

operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. 

not assigned to any function.

All of the aforementioned operating elements can be 

freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see 

page 54, to any function input just to accommodate 

personal requirements. Equally, this also means 

that each of these operating elements can also be 

assigned to to multiple functions at the same time, 

as needed. For example: the exact same toggle 

switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the 

same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers 

(general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.

Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global

or fl ight-phase specifi c operation if they have been 

defi ned for fl ight-phases in the »Phase settings« 

menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu, 

page 148. The names assigned to given fl ight phases 

then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display 

line, e.g. «Normal».

Note:

As a rule, input 6 must kept "free" for a helicopter 

model. On this, see "Throttle" on the next double 

page.

Basic procedure

1. Use the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to select the desired input: I5, Thr6, 

Gyr7, I8 ... 15 or Tl16. 

2. If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad to select the desired column.

3. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown 

highlighted.

4. Operate the chosen operating element or set the 

desired value with the selection keys of the right 

touch pad.

5. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to complete data entry.

6. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made 

back to its respective default value.
Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters 113

in its neutral position and can only be controlled via 

mixers.

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

S11 ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Switch assignment 

If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the 

input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.

A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth 

between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.

A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix, 

achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch 

module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. 

Use the selection keys to move into the column 

above the switch symbol label. Briefl y tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the 

option for assigning a switch.

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL fr

Normal

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF" 

to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch, 

beginning from its middle position, assign a switch 

direction – preferably the "second" direction. This 

means, if a function is to be switched on by moving 

the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the 

pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and 

move the switch away from the pilot. 

Column 2, "typ"

Similar to the previously described »Stick mode« 

menu, this column can be used to defi ne whether 

further settings for the given input are to have a 

"GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-specifi c)" effect. Do this by 

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column 

labeled "TYP".

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

"GL": The settings for the input in question affect 

all fl ight phases programmed (if any) and 

thus act "globally" on the model memory in 

question.

"PH": The settings for this input take effect per 

fl ight phase and must therefore be confi gured 

separately for each fl ight phase.

Note:

See page 142 for more information about fl ight 

phases.

Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch 

assignment"

Using the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 ... 15 or 

Tl16.

Transmitter control assignment

Use the selection keys to move into the column 

labeled SEL. After completing the activation of 

transmitter control assignment by tapping the center 

SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown 

below will appear in the display:

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Move desired

control adj.

Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The 

notice window will disappear and the designation 

of the selected transmitter control will appear in the 

transmitter control assignment window.

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

S11 ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch 

pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice 

window, see above, is still on the display:

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

E8

TYP SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the desired input out of the list if the 

respective plug-in location on the transmitter board 

is occupied or switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to 

be decoupled from a transmitter control. In this case, 

or even when a non-existent transmitter control is 

assigned, the servo corresponding to this input will be 
114 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

The display will then present the switch number 

together with a symbol indicating the given switch 

direction. At the same time, the column label in the 

footer line will change from SEL into another switch 

symbol.

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL ---

Normal

7

Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. 

Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into 

the column labeled with the new switch symbol, briefl y 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then 

assign the switch's other switch direction by once 

again starting from the middle position but this time 

move the switch in the other direction.

The display will now present the given switch number 

together with a symbol indicating the given switch 

direction.

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input line with 

an active transmitter switch assignment – see above 

fi gure – will reset the input back to "fr" and "---".

Tips:

• When assigning switches, pay attention to the 

desired switching direction and also that all 

unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to 

"free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent 

actuations of these unused controls cannot cause 

malfunctions.

• The travel setting described below allows the 

appropriate end state to be established for an 

assigned switch.

Column 4, "offset"

The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero 

point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment 

range lies between -125 % and +125 %.

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld 

value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".

Column 5, "–travel+"

This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically 

or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 

±125 % of normal servo travel.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 ... 15 or 

Tl16.

To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent, 

put the respective operating element (proportional 

control or switch) into a position where the marker 

frame encloses both sides of the travel setting.

I5 0% +88%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

To set asymmetric travel, the respective control 

(proportional control or switch) is to be moved to 

the side to be set such that the marker frame only 

encloses the value to be changed.

I5 0% +100%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to activate value setting. The value fi eld is shown 

highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection 

keys of the right touch pad.

I5 0% +111%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7
Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters 115

Thr6

I5 0% +88%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

In principle, the helicopter program also permits 

the individual inputs to be assigned to any existing 

transmitter control (proportional controls and 

switches).

However, please note here that some of the inputs 

available on this menu are already assigned to 

helicopter-specifi c functions, and therefore cannot be 

re-assigned in this way.

Nevertheless, the receiver layout on page 65 indicates 

that the throttle servo or the speed controller of an 

electrically-powered helicopter must be connected 

to receiver output "6", since control channel "6" is 

reserved for motor power regulation.

Unlike a fi xed-wing model aircraft, the throttle servo 

or speed controller is not directly controlled by the 

joystick or other transmitter control but rather by a 

complex mixer system, see »Helicopter mixer« menu 

beginning page 176. Furthermore, the "Throttle limit 

function" described on the next page also infl uences 

this mixer system.

Assigning a transmitter control or switch on the 

"Throttle" line, or to its supplementary control signal, 

would unnecessarily "confuse" this complex mixer 

system. For this reason the "Throttle" input MUST 

be left "free".

I5 0% +88%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad will complete the entry.

Negative and positive parameter values are possible 

in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction 

or effect.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed 

parameter displayed in inverse video back to 

"+100 %".

Important:

In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the 

control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer 

and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos that could 

be actuated by the transmitter controls concerned.

Column 6, "– time +"

Each of the function inputs, I5 ... 16, can be assigned 

a symmetric or asymmetric time delay of between 0 

and 9.9 s.

Move the marker frame to the right beyond the 

column labeled "– travel +" with the  selection key 

of the left or right touch pad.

To set a symmetric time delay, i.e. control-side 

independent, move the affected transmitter control 

(proportional control or switch) as necessary to a 

position such that the marker frame encloses both 

sides of the time setting.

I5 0% +111%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

To set an asymmetric time delay, move the affected 

operating element (transmitter control or switch) as 

necessary to a position such that the marker frame 

encloses only the value to be changed.

I5 0% +111%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to activate value setting. The value fi eld is shown 

highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection 

keys of the right touch pad.

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad will complete the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed 

parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.
116 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

" Gyr7"

I5 0% +88%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

TYP

+111% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

8 7

Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature 

infi nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but 

also offer a choice of two separate types of gain 

mode on the transmitter. 

If the gyro in use also has this feature then this menu 

option provides the opportunity to specify both a 

"normal" gyro effect as well as a "heading-lock mode" 

in the "Offset" column within a range of ±125 %. 

Such a specifi cation can include a certain effect to 

fl y normal, slow fl ights with maximum stability or the 

reduction of the gyro effect for fast circuit fl ights and 

aerobatics.

To proceed as described above, use fl ight phase 

switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro" line.

Important notice:

The value of this option is identical to the offset 

value set in the "Gyro offset" option of the 

»Helicopter mixer« menu, page 185. For this 

reason, any changes made always affect the 

other menu directly, and vice versa.

Beginning with these preset – static – fl ight phasespecifi c settings, a transmitter control assigned to the 

"Gyr7" line, for example one of the middle console 

sliders, can be used to vary the gyro effect around 

the respective "offset point". The center point of the 

control corresponds to the setting specifi ed by the 

offset. If the transmitter control is moved from this 

center point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain 

increases proportionally; it diminishes when moved 

in the opposite direction. This provides a fast and 

straightforward method of adjusting gyro effect even 

in fl ight – e.g. to suit changing weather conditions – or 

to test-fl y optimal settings. Furthermore, the range 

of the gyro's effect within transmitter control travel in 

both directions can be restricted by software. 

In this context, be sure to comply with the 

instructions accompanying the gyro, otherwise 

there is a risk the helicopter will be impossible to fl y.

Adjusting the gyro sensor

To achieve the maximum possible level of 

stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the 

vertical axis, observe the following:

• The controls should have as little friction and 

"play" as possible.

• There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.

• Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo. 

When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the 

faster its response – a corresponding corrective 

change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further 

the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing 

the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better 

the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the 

response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail 

will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. 

Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be 

made – either by using the default value under "Gyro" 

or the associated transmitter control – to eliminate the 

oscillation.

If the model is fl ying forward at high speed or 

hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the 

stabilizing effect of the vertical fi n combined with the 

gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again 

manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve 

optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, make 

use of the option to adapt gyro effect with one of the 

transmitter's proportional controls.
Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters 117

not only provides a convenient means to start and 

stop the motor but may also prove to be more than 

an insignifi cant safety improvement! For example, 

just imagine what could happen if, while carrying the 

helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running, 

the C1 joystick were to be inadvertently operated ... 

If the carburetor or speed controller is open too 

far when the transmitter is switched on, an audible 

warning will be sounded and the basic display will 

show the message:

Throttle

 too

 high!

Tip:

Take advantage of the »Servo display« to observe 

the infl uence of the throttle limit control. The »Servo 

display« screen can be reached from almost any 

menu position with a simultaneous tap on the 

selection keys of the left touch pad, Bear in mind that 

servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mc32 HoTT!

Basic idle setting

Put the throttle limit into its "full throttle" position by 

pushing the throttle limit regulator – by default, the 

right side proportional slider SD1 – all the way to its 

forward position limit. Set the throttle/pitch joystick to 

the maximum pitch position and also check the submenu "Channel 1 CURVE" of the menu ...

»Helicopter mixer« (page 176 ... 191)

... to ensure that a standard throttle curve is active. If, 

for example, the standard throttle curve has already 

been changed following the initialization of a model 

memory then this must be at least temporarily reset 

to the values "Point L = -100 %", "Point 1 = 0 %" and 

"Point H = +100 %":

"Tl16"

The proportional slider SD1, mounted on the right 

side of the transmitter, is assigned by default to input 

"Tl16".

I13 +100% 0%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

Lv1

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

fr --- 0.0 0.0

SET

This pre-assignment makes it unnecessary to 

program the two fl ight phases as may be familiar from 

use of other remote control systems – one "with idleup" and one "without idle-up" – because the mc-32

HoTT program offers a much more fl exible approach 

to fi ne-tuning and optimizing increases to system 

rotational speed below the hover point than the socalled "idle-up". If it is nevertheless preferable for 

the helicopter to be programmed "with idle-up", then 

deactivate the "throttle limit" function described below 

by setting input "Tl16" to "fr".

Meaning and application of "throttle limit"

As already mentioned under "Throttle", and in 

contrast to fi xed-wing models, the power output of 

a helicopter's drive system is not controlled directly 

with the C1 joystick, but only indirectly via the throttle 

curve settings in the »Helicopter mixer« menu 

or – if the model features a speed controller – via that 

mechanism.

Note:

Of course for different fl ight phases, fl ight phase 

programming can be used to set individual throttle 

curves.

Nevertheless, both methods of output control de facto 

result in the helicopter carburetor never approaching 

Throttle limit function

anything near its idle speed under "normal" fl ight 

conditions, and that the motor can therefore neither 

be started or stopped cleanly without some other 

means of intervention. 

The "throttle limit" feature resolves this problem 

elegantly by using a separate transmitter control – by 

default the SD1 proportional slider mounted on the 

right side of the transmitter – to limit the throttle servo 

or the output level of a speed controller. In this way, 

it is possible to "throttle back" with the throttle limit 

control, even as far as the idle setting, at which point 

the trim control for the throttle/pitch joystick takes 

over or directly shuts off an electric drive. Conversely, 

the throttle servo or speed controller can only open 

up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit control 

has also released the full servo travel path.

The value set on the (right-hand) plus side of the 

"travel" column must therefore always be set high 

enough to ensure that the maximum setting of the 

throttle limit control never restricts the full-throttle 

position achievable with throttle curve settings – which 

typically means setting a value in the range +100 % to 

125 %. 

I13 +100% 0%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +125% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

Lv1

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

fr --- 0.0 0.0

SET

The value on the (left-hand) minus side of the 

"travel" column should be set so that the throttle limit 

control can safely cut off an electric drive or close a 

carburetor suffi ciently to cut off a combustion motor 

in conjunction with – digital – C1 trim. Because of this, 

leave this value (initially) at +100 %.

Furthermore, this variable "limitation" of throttle travel 
118 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters

Channel 1 CURVE

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

+100%

H – + 100

 O U T P U T

+100% 0%

Note:

Since throttle trim has no effect if the throttle limiter is 

open, its position here is meaningless.

Now – without starting the combustion motor – adjust 

the throttle servo, preferably mechanically and, 

if necessary, also by way of the servo 6 travel 

adjustment option in the »Servo adjustment« menu, 

so that the carburetor is completely open. 

Now close the throttle limiter completely by moving 

the side proportional slider all the way to its rear limit. 

Use the trim wheel of the Throttle/Pitch joystick to 

place the trim position marker into the motor OFF 

position or actuate the "Thr. CutOff" option, see 

page 90.

Note:

In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, 

the position of the throttle/collective pitch stick is 

meaningless. It can therefore remain at the maximum 

collective pitch position so that, when adjusting 

carburetor linkages, the throttle limiter alone can be 

used to switch between full throttle (throttle limiter 

open) and "Motor OFF" (throttle limiter closed).

Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the 

carburetor linkages so that the carburetor is (just) 

completely closed. Take extreme care to ensure that 

the throttle servo does not become mechanically 

blocked in either of its end positions (full throttle/

motor OFF).

To complete this basic confi guration, the idle trim 

adjustment range must now be matched against point 

"L" on the throttle curve. Do this by setting Point "L" 

of the "Channel 1 CURVE" mixer, in the »Helicopter 

mixer« menu, to about -65 to -70 %.

Channel 1 CURVE

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

–66%

L – + 100

 O U T P U T

–66% 0%

To confi gure a smooth transition from the idle trim 

to the throttle curve exactly, the collective pitch stick 

should be moved to and fro slightly at its minimum 

position with the throttle limiter closed and the idle 

trim fully open. The throttle servo must not move as 

well! Any further adjustments to the throttle curve 

must of course be made later in fl ight.

The motor is always started with the throttle limiter 

fully closed, whereby idle is set exclusively by using 

the trim wheel of the throttle/pitch joystick and the 

motor is shut off by the "Thr. CutOff" option. 

Notes:

• Take advantage of the »Servo display« to 

observe the infl uence of the throttle limit control. 

The »Servo display« screen can be reached from 

almost any menu position with a simultaneous 

tap on the  selection keys of the left touch 

pad, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the 

throttle servo on the mc-32 HoTT!

• A servo connected to output 16 can be used, 

independently of this, for other purposes by 

means of mixers, provided that this servo is 

decoupled from the operating element specifi ed 

by function input 16 via the »Mix only channel« 

menu; see page 205.

• The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter 

is shown as a horizontal bar in the throttle curve 

diagram on the second display page of the 

"Channel 1 CURVE" option in the »Helicopter 

mixer« menu (see page 180). The output signal 

for the throttle servo cannot be higher than the 

level set by the horizontal bar:

Channel 1 CURVE

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%0%

actual

position of the

Throttle limiter

The above diagram shows precisely this scenario: 

in the above example, the throttle limit control 

is set to about -60 % and thus restricts the 

movement of the throttle servo to about -60 % of 

full travel.
Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters 119

Time delay for the throttle limiter

To safely prevent the carburetor from opening too 

rapidly, assign the throttle limiter input "Tl16" to a 

time delay that takes effect only in the direction of full 

throttle. This applies especially if the throttle limiter is 

controlled by a switch rather than, as preset, with the 

right-side proportional rotary slider.

To set a delay time, push the throttle limit control to 

its forward limit or move the switch into its full-throttle 

position then use the selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to select the "–time+" column.

I13 +100% 0%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

Lv1

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

fr --- 0.0 0.0

0.0

SET

After a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, the selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad can be used to select the desired time delay, e.g. 

5 seconds.

I13 +100% 0%

I14

I15

Tl16

TYP

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

Lv1

---

---

---

Offset

GL

Normal

fr --- 0.0 0.0

5.0

SET

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will complete 

the entry.

As already explained on page 106, when "Thr AR" is 

selected in the "Pitch/thr" line of the ...

»Stick mode« (page 106)

Pitch/thr

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

Thr AR

... menu then digital trim of the throttle/pitch joystick 

is only active for the «Autorotation» fl ight phase. As 

a consequence, the motor's idle speed cannot be 

regulated in the "normal" fl ight phases with the C1 

trim control. To ensure the availability of suffi cient 

setting options, use of the "Expo throttle limiter" is 

recommended.

The exponential curve characteristic offered by the ...

»Helicopter type« (page 98)

Linearis. swashpl. no

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Expo throttle lim. 0%

... menu's sub-menu can be used to alter the control 

behavior of the throttle limit control such that the latter 

provides suffi ciently sensitive regulation of the idle 

setting and can also stop the motor.

In this case, with a completely closed throttle 

limiter – in contrast to the previously described 

setting – use the »Control adjust« menu set the "-" 

side of the column labeled "- travel +" for the "Tl16" 

Throttle limit in combination with "Thr AR" in the »Stick mode« 

menu

line such that the throttle limiter fully closes the 

carburetor, i.e. the motor is safely switched off at this 

control position.

Following this, move the throttle limit control to its 

center point and change the % value of the "Expo 

thro lim." line in the »Helicopter type« menu, page 

98, until the carburetor is in a position suitable for 

starting the motor. Now start the motor, and adjust the 

value if necessary until the motor idles reliably in this 

throttle limit control position.

The value for the plus side of the "- travel +" column 

should be increased, as described before, to +125 % 

so that the full-throttle position of the throttle servo is 

also reliably released from the throttle limiter.

Finally, set an asymmetrical time delay of, say 

4.0 seconds, so the motor also picks up speed 

gradually even if the side proportional slider is pushed 

forward too quickly. Select the time preset to correlate 

to how far the carburetor opens up at the minimum 

collective pitch position. The value set is to be 

optimized by testing. 
120 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models

Dual Rate / Expo

Confi gurable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the 

Multi-function menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––– –––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

The Dual-Rate-/Expo function permits fl ight-phase 

dependent switching and control over the defl ection 

and characteristics of the aileron (Ail), elevator (Ele) 

and rudder (Rud) (control functions 2 ... 4) by way of 

switches. 

The »Channel 1 curve« menu, see text beginning 

page 128, can be used to set an individual curve 

characteristic for control function 1 (throttle/brake) 

with up to 8 separately programmable points.

Similar to control travel settings in the »Control 

adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the 

respective control function, independent of whether 

it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected 

via complex mixer and coupling functions. 

The control travel for each switch position can be set 

to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel. 

Expo, on the other hand, enables fi ner-grained 

control of the model for values larger than 0 % around 

the center position of the primary control function 

(aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full 

movement at the end-points of joystick travel. For 

values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control 

increases around the neutral position and diminishes 

towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" 

can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % 

to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear 

control characteristics.

Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, 

offer another application. This is because the actual 

control surface movement is not linear: as the 

rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, 

the control surface rate of travel over the control 

linkage continually decreases – depending on the 

position of the linkage point on the output disc. This 

effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater 

than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases 

over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.

The Expo setting also affects the relevant control 

function directly, whether this controls a single servo 

or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and 

coupling functions.

For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch 

assignment can be set up in any way desired, which 

therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions 

using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers 

the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and 

Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many 

advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.

The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics 

directly. After selecting the appropriate line, the dotted 

vertical line will follow the movement of the respective 

joystick so a better evaluation of the transmittercontrol-travel dependent curve value can be made.

Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo 

settings

If fl ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings« 

and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned 

a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will 

be displayed at the bottom left of the display. Just 

actuate the respective switch to switch between fl ight 

phases.

Basic procedure

1. Switch to the desired fl ight phase then use the 

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to select the desired line: "Aileron", "Elevator" or 

"Rudder".

2. Use the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to change into the column labeled 

"EXPO".

3. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The 

corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted.

4. Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 

the desired value.

5. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to 

complete the entry.

6. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made 

back to its respective default value.

Dual Rate function

If a switchover between two variants is desired, 

assign a switch in the column labeled with the 

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning 

transmitter controls, switches and control switches" 

on page 56).
Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models 121

bottom edge of the display in order to separately 

change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video 

for each of the two switch positions.

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

3

Normal

111%

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

3

Normal

88%

At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be 

presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the 

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will 

reset a changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse 

video back to "100 %".

Caution:

For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should 

not be less than 20 %.

Some examples of Dual Rate values: Servo travel Servo travel Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––– –––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter 

control switches C1 ... C8 or C1i ... C8i or one of the 

logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of 

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display, 

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's 

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or 

another transmitter control or a certain switching 

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a 

control switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a 

logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned ... the 

respective switch will appear in the display together 

with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction 

if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» fl ight phase.

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

3

Normal

Once the value fi eld has been activated with a brief 

tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move 

into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the 

Exponential function

If a switchover between two variants is desired, 

assign a switch in the column labeled with the 

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning 

transmitter controls, switches and control switches" 

on page 56).

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

3

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter 

control switches C1 ... C8 or C1i ... C8i or one of the 

logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of 

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display, 

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's 

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or 

another transmitter control or a certain switching 

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a 

control switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a 

logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned ... the 

respective switch appears on the display together 

with a switch icon that indicates the switch's 

respective direction when moved.
122 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

3

Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the 

display marked with SEL and activate the value fi eld 

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown 

in the highlighted fi eld, separately for each of the two 

switch positions.

Now, for example, there is an opportunity to fl y with 

a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one 

direction, and to preset a value other than 0 % for the 

other switch direction:

+50%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

3

At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented 

in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a 

changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video 

back to "0 %".

Some examples of Expo values: Servo travel Servo travel

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value 

equals 100 %.

Combining Dual Rate and Expo

If values have been entered for both the Dual Rate 

and the Expo function, the effects of both functions 

will overlap, for example, as follows: Servo travel Servo travel

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo

To make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate 

or Expo setting dependent on the direction of 

the respective joystick, fi rst access the »Control 

switch« menu and assign one of the C1 ... C8 

control switches – "C3", for example – to the desired 

transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the elevator 

function. Do not change the switching point for 

the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return 

to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the 

corresponding control function ("Elevator" in this 

example). 

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, activate the switch assignment 

and change to the expanded switches then use the 

selection keys to move on to the previously defi ned 

"C3" control switch.

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––– –––

–––

SEL

–––

–t– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Moewünschten Schalter

toe die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Normal

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will confi rm the assignment of this switch.

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––– –––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

G3

Normal

Now use one of the selection keys to move into the 

right column then move the elevator joystick into its 

appropriate end-point to enter a separate Dual Rate 

value for each direction, e.g. for "Up elevator" ... 

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––– –––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

77%

100%

EXPO

SEL

G3

Normal

... and "Down elevator":
Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models 123

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––– –––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

111%

100%

EXPO

SEL

G3

Normal

The vertical dashed line shows the current elevator 

joystick position.

Set the Expo values as necessary in the same 

manner.
124 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters

Dual Rate / Expo

Confi gurable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the 

Multi-function menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––– –––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

The Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or 

controlling of control travels and characteristics for 

the control functions roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor, i.e. 

control functions 2 ... 4; it is switch-driven and fl ightphase independent. 

An individual curve characteristic for control function 

1 (motor/collective pitch), featuring up to 8 separately 

programmable points, can be set either in the 

»Channel 1 curve« menu or separately for throttle 

and pitch in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, see text 

beginning page 176 and 312.

Similar to control travel settings in the »Control 

adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the 

respective control function, independent of whether 

it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected 

via complex mixer and coupling functions. 

The control travel for each switch position can be set 

to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel. 

Expo, on the other hand, enables fi ner-grained 

control of the model for values larger than 0 % 

around the center position of the primary control 

function (roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor), without forfeiting 

full movement at the end-points of joystick travel. 

For values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control 

increases around the neutral position and diminishes 

towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" 

can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % 

to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear 

control characteristics.

Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, 

offer another application. This is because the actual 

control surface movement is not linear: as the 

rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, 

the control surface rate of travel over the control 

linkage continually decreases – depending on the 

position of the linkage point on the output disc. This 

effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater 

than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases 

over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.

The Expo setting also affects the relevant control 

function directly, whether this controls a single servo 

or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and 

coupling functions.

For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch 

assignment can be set up in any way desired, which 

therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions 

using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers 

the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and 

Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many 

advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.

The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics 

directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted 

vertical line follows the movement of the respective 

joystick, so you can clearly see the dependency of 

the curve value on the transmitter control.

Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo 

settings

If fl ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings« 

and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned 

a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will be 

displayed at the bottom left of the display. In this 

scenario, you can operate the corresponding switch 

to switch between fl ight phases.

Basic procedure

1. Switch to the desired fl ight phase then use the 

 selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to select the desired line: "Roll", "Pitch ax" or 

"Tail rot".

2. Use the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to change into the column labeled 

"EXPO".

3. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The 

corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted.

4. Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 

the desired value.

5. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to 

complete the entry.

6. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made 

back to its respective default value.

Dual Rate function

If a switchover between two variants is desired, 

assign a switch in the column labeled with the 

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning 

transmitter controls, switches and control switches" 

on page 56).
Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters 125

Exponential function

If a switchover between two variants is desired, 

assign a switch in the column labeled with the 

switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning 

transmitter controls, switches and control switches" 

on page 56). 

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

3

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter 

control switches C1 ... C8 or C1i ... C8i or one of the 

logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of 

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display, 

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's 

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or 

another transmitter control or a certain switching 

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a 

control switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a 

logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned ... the 

respective switch appears on the display together 

with a switch icon that indicates the switch's 

respective direction when moved.

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––– –––

–––

SEL

–––

– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter 

control switches C1 ... C8 or C1i ... C8i or one of the 

logical switches L1 ... L8 or L1i ... L8i from the list of 

"expanded switches".

The switch so assigned appears on the display, 

together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's 

switching direction.

In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or 

another transmitter control or a certain switching 

logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a 

control switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a 

logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned 

in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.

Whichever switch has been assigned ... the 

respective switch will appear in the display together 

with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction 

if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» fl ight phase.

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

3

Normal

Once the value fi eld has been activated with a brief 

tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move 

into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the 

bottom edge of the display in order to separately 

change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video 

for each of the two switch positions.

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

3

Normal

111%

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

3

Normal

88%

At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be 

presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the 

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will 

reset a changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse 

video back to "100 %".

Caution:

For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should 

not be less than 20 %.

Some examples of Dual Rate values: Servo travel Servo travel Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%
126 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

3

Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the 

display marked with SEL and activate the value fi eld 

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown 

in the highlighted fi eld, separately for each of the two 

switch positions.

Now, for example, you have the opportunity to fl y with 

a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one 

direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0 % in the 

other switching direction:

+50%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

3

At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented 

in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a 

changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video 

back to "0 %".

Some examples of Expo values: Servo travel Servo travel

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value 

equals 100 %.

Combining Dual Rate and Expo

If you have entered values for both the Dual Rate 

and the Expo function, the effect from on function 

is superimposed on the other, as shown in these 

examples: Servo travel

Servo travel

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo

To make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate 

or Expo setting dependent on the direction of 

the respective joystick, fi rst access the »Control 

switch« menu and assign one of the C1 ... C4 

control switches – "C3" for example – to the desired 

transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the pitch 

function. Do not change the switching point for 

the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return 

to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the 

corresponding control function ("Pitch ax" in this 

example). 

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, activate the switch assignment 

and change to the expanded switches then use the 

selection keys to move on to the previously defi ned 

"C3" control switch.

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––– –––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Moünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Normal

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will confi rm the assignment of this switch.

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––– –––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

G3

Normal

Now use one of the selection keys to move into the 

right column then move the pitch-axis joystick to the 

appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual 

Rate value for each direction, e.g. for "Pitch-axis up" ... 

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot

DUAL

––– –––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

77%

100%

EXPO

SEL

G3

Normal

and "Pitch-axis down":
Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters 127

0%

0%

0%

Roll

Nick

Tail

DUAL

––– –––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

111%

100%

EXPO

SEL

C3

Normal

The vertical dashed line shows the current pitch axis 

joystick position. 

Set the Expo values as necessary in the same 

manner.
128 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models

Channel 1 curve

Control characteristics for throttle/spoiler joystick

Using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, 

scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the 

Multi-function menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Since the carburetor response or the effect of the 

airbrakes or spoilers is often non-linear, you can make 

compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. 

The menu therefore enables you to change the 

control characteristics of the throttle / airbrake 

joystick, regardless of whether this control function 

affects the servo connected to control channel 1 

directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.

If fl ight phases have been specifi ed in the »Phase 

settings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see 

pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on 

a fl ight-phase basis. The given fl ight phase name, 

e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of 

the screen.

The control curve can be defi ned by up to 8 points 

(termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere 

along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen 

graph considerably simplifi es the process of setting 

and adjusting the reference points, we recommend 

that you set fewer reference points to begin with.

In the basic software set-up, 2 reference 

points – namely the end-points at the bottom end 

of joystick travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and 

the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100 % 

travel) – defi ne a linear characteristic curve.

First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, if necessary.

Setting reference points

By moving the transmitter control (throttle/airbrake 

joystick), you can reposition the vertical line in the 

graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The 

current joystick position is also displayed in numerical 

form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point 

at which this line crosses the curve is termed the 

"Output", and can be varied at the reference points 

within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal 

altered in this way will then affect all subsequent 

mixer and coupling functions. 

In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control 

travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, 

since the characteristic curve is linear.

Up to 6 additional reference points can be set 

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the 

distance between neighboring reference points must 

not be less than approx. 25 %.

Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in 

the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be 

set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number 

and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point 

number will be shown in inverse video.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+50%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

+50%

Normal

2

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 6 

reference points between the end-points "L" and 

"H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are 

continuously renumbered automatically from left to 

right as they are entered.

Erasing reference points

To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), 

use the joystick to move the vertical line into the 

vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon 

as the reference point number and its corresponding 

value on the "Point" line are displayed in inverse 

video, see fi gure above, these can be erased with a 

simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right 

touch pad (CLEAR). Complete the operation with a 

brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad.

Changing reference point values

Move the joystick into the range of the reference point 

that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 ... 6 or "H" (high). 

The number and current curve value of this point are 

displayed. The reference point value displayed in 

inverse video can be changed in a range of -125 % to 

+125 % without infl uencing the neighboring reference 

points.
Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models 129

Example:

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

–75%

Normal

2

In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has 

been set to -75 %.

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact 

reference point, please note that the percentage 

value on the "Output" line always relates to the 

current joystick position.

Trim point function 

Alternatively, jumping through active reference points, 

in ascending or descending order, can be done with 

the  selection keys of the left touch pad. Note 

that "active" reference points are those which have 

already been set. When a jump is made from one to 

another, the point value fi eld for the jump's destination 

reference point in the screen's Point line will be 

displayed in inverse video and its position in the graph 

will be marked with the point's number (L, 1 ... max. 

6 and H) in inverse video and a small triangle. The 

selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used 

to change the reference point jumped to as described 

above, entirely independently of the control position.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0% 2

Normal

Trim point

1

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad terminates this trim point function.

Trim offset function 

When a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is 

not only possible, as previously described, to jump to 

and change a reference point already set with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing 

curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys 

of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–50%

1

Normal

Trim offset

2

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–100%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–100%

1

Normal

Trim offset

2

A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will 

also terminate this function.

Trim x-axis function 

This function is activated by tapping the left () or 

right () selection key of the right touch pad with 

an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can 

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as 

you wish.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–83%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–100%

1

Normal

Trim X-axis

2

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned horizontally further 

away from the current control position than 

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line 

Point. This question mark does not refer to the 

repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es 

that a further point can be set at the current 

control position.

• Please note that the percentage value on the 

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick 

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the Channel 1 curve

In the example below, sample reference points have 

been set: 

reference point 1 to 0 %,

reference point 2 to +25 % and

reference point 3 to -75 %

as described in the last section.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

2

3

Normal

1

This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed 

automatically simply by pressing a button. 
130 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models

Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief 

tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This 

will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) 

on" (or vice versa).

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

on Point

Output

Input –50%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Normal

2

3

1

Note:

The curves shown here are for demonstration 

purposes only and are not at all representative of 

real throttle or airbrake curves. A specifi c application 

example can be found in the programming examples 

on page 274.
Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters 131

Channel 1 curve

Control characteristics for throttle/collective pitch stick

Using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, 

scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the 

Multi-function menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Since the carburetor response or the effect of 

collective pitch is often non-linear, you can make 

compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. 

The menu therefore enables modifi cation of the 

control characteristics of the motor/collective pitch 

joystick, regardless of whether this control function 

affects the servo connected to control channel 1 

directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.

If fl ight phases have been specifi ed in the »Phase 

settings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see 

pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on 

a fl ight-phase basis. The given fl ight phase name, 

e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of 

the screen.

The control curve can be defi ned by up to 8 points 

(termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere 

along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen 

graph considerably simplifi es the process of setting 

and adjusting the reference points, we recommend 

that you set fewer reference points to begin with.

Please note that the curve characteristic you set 

here acts as the input signal for specifi c mixers in the 

»Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176.

»Heli-Mixer«

C1 

C1  Tail rotor

C-1-

curve

Pitch

Thr

Pitchstick

In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points–

namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick 

travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and the top end of 

joystick travel ("H", high = +100 % travel)–defi ne a 

linear characteristic curve.

First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, if necessary.

Setting reference points

By moving the transmitter control (motor/collective 

pitch stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the 

graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The 

current joystick position is also displayed in numerical 

form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point 

at which this line crosses the curve is termed the 

"Output", and can be varied at the reference points 

within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal 

altered in this way will then affect all subsequent 

mixer and coupling functions. 

In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control 

travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, 

since the characteristic curve is linear.

Up to 6 additional reference points can be set 

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the 

distance between neighboring reference points must 

not be less than approx. 25 %. 

Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in 

the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be 

set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number 

and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point 

number will be shown in inverse video.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+50%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

+50%

Normal

2

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 8 

reference points between the end-points "L" and 

"H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are 

continuously renumbered automatically from left to 

right as they are entered.

Erasing reference points

To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use 

the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity 

of the reference point in question. As soon as the 

reference point number and its associated value is 

shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), 

following activation of the value fi eld on the "Point" 

line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on 

the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it 

can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap 

on the center key ESC of the left touch pad.

Changing reference point values

Move the joystick into the range of the reference point 

that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 ... 6 or "H" (high). 

The number and current curve value of this point are 

displayed. Activate the value fi eld with a brief tap on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad. The point 

value fi eld is now highlighted and can be set within 
132 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters

the range -125 % to +125 %, and without infl uencing 

the neighboring reference points.

Example:

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

–75%

Normal

2

In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has 

been set to -75 %.

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact 

reference point, please note that the percentage 

value on the "Output" line always relates to the 

current joystick position.

Trim point function 

Alternatively, jumping through set reference points can 

be done with the  selection keys of the left touch 

pad in either ascending or descending order, whereby 

the number of the jump's destination reference point 

in the graph will be marked with the point's number, 

1 ... max. 6, in inverse video. The selection keys on 

the right touch pad can then be used to change the 

reference point jumped to as described above, entirely 

independently of the control position.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0% 2

Normal

Trim point

1

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad terminates this trim point function.

Trim offset function 

When a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is 

not only possible, as previously described, to jump to 

and change a reference point already set with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing 

curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys 

of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–50%

1

Normal

Trim offset

2

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–100%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–100%

1

Normal

Trim offset

2

A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will 

also terminate this function.

Trim x-axis function 

This function is activated by tapping the left () or 

right () selection key of the right touch pad with 

an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can 

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as 

you wish.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–83%

2 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–100%

1

Normal

Trim X-axis

2

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned horizontally further 

away from the current control position than 

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line 

Point. This question mark does not refer to the 

repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es 

that a further point can be set at the current 

control position.

• Please note that the percentage value on the 

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick 

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the Channel 1 curve

In the example below, sample reference points have 

been set: 

reference point 1 to 0 %,

reference point 2 to +25 % and

reference point 3 to -75 %

as described in the last section.

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

2

3

Normal

1

This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed 

automatically simply by pressing a button. 
Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters 133

Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief 

tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This 

will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) 

on" (or vice versa).

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

on Point

Output

Input –50%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Normal

2

3

1

Note:

The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes 

only and are not at all representative of real throttle 

curves. For real-world application examples, see the 

programming examples on pages 274 and 313.
134 Detail program description - Switch display

Switch display

Displaying switch positions

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Switch display« option in the multifunction menu: 

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Model select

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Copy / Erase

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Switch

Contrl

1

C1 C2 C3 C8

2345678 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16

switch

C4 C5 C6 C7

This feature is used to check the functions and 

give an overview of switches 1 ... 16 and the 

programmable control switches C1... C8.

If a switch is pressed, the switch number is revealed 

by one of the display items changing from an OFF 

to an ON symbol (or vice versa). To improve the 

legibility of this screen, a closed switch fi eld is also 

shown in inverse video (i.e. on a dark background).

For control switches C1 ... C8, activation of the 

corresponding transmitter control – which must have 

been previously assigned on the »Control switch« 

menu – will reveal the control switch number and 

direction.

Note:

Switch numbering 1 to 16 as shown here corresponds 

to the labeling of switch plug-in locations on the 

transmitter's circuit board. The numbering of the 

switches has no effect on the programming of the 

transmitter, however.
Detail program description - Control switches 135

Control switches

Programming the control switches

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multifunction menu: 

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch Display

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

Geb. 1

0%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

free

free

With many functions, it makes sense not to trigger 

their actuation by using one of the normal switches, 

but to trigger them automatically by the specifi c, 

freely programmable position of a transmitter control 

or joystick.

Typical applications:

• On/Off switching of an on-board glow plug in 

conjunction with the carburetor setting and/or 

motor speed. (The glow plug heater switch for this 

will be controlled by a transmitter-side mixer.)

• Switching a stopwatch on or off to measure the 

simple running time of electric motors

• Automated switch-off of a combi "aileron  rudder" 

mixer when extending the airbrakes, e.g. so as to 

match the bank attitude of the model to the ground 

slope when landing on a ridge, without the direction 

of fl ight also being affected by the rudder (if the 

mixer were active).

• Lowering landing fl aps, adjusting elevator trim 

and/or executing specifi c Dual Rate, Exponential 

and Differential switchings when coming in to land, 

as soon as the throttle joystick is moved beyond 

the switching point. If required, a control switch 

can be overridden using a separately assigned 

switch in the 5th column.

The mc-32 HoTT program is equipped with a total of 

eight so-called control switches ("C1" to "C8").

Accordingly, anywhere where switches can be 

assigned you have the option not only of using 

the 16 possible transmitter switches, but also of 

choosing and assigning one of the "C1" ... "C8" 

control switches from the list of expanded switches 

– as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

Furthermore, combining a control switch with an 

additional switch (as described later) also permits 

more complex switching permutations.

Basic procedure:

1. If no transmitter control is assigned, the 

corresponding input fi eld of the column labeled 

SEL (second column from the left) will be empty.

2. Use the selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the line for the desired control switch 

(1 to 8).

3. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad.

4. Move your selected transmitter control.

The associated transmitter control number 

appears in the input fi eld of the column above the 

left switch icon.

5. Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to move to the right into the column labeled STO.

6. Move the transmitter control to the desired switching 

point then briefl y tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad to save the switching point.

7. Complete the remaining settings such as 

switching direction, etc.

8. Exit from the menu with a tap on the center ESC

key of the left touch pad.

Assigning a transmitter control to a control switch

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad, select your chosen line (1 to 8). Following a fi nal 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to 

activate the control assignment, the message shown 

below will appear in the display:

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

0%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

frei

free

free

frei Move desired

control adj.

For example, the right-side proportional slider is now 

to be assigned to control switch "C1", the default 

throttle limiter for a helicopter model memory. So just 

move this control in any direction. As soon as this is 

detected, the control name appears on the display:
136 Detail program description - Control switches

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

0%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

Resetting a control switch back to "free"

To reset a control switch back to "free", make sure 

the display is as below ...

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

0%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

Move desired

control adj.

... then, with a brief simultaneous tap on the  or 

 keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the entry 

for a control will be erased.

Defi ning the switching point

Using the  selection key of the left or right touch 

pad to move the marker frame into the column 

labeled STO (store).

Move the selected transmitter control to the position 

at which the switching point, i.e. the switch between 

OFF/ON, should trigger and briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad. The current position 

is displayed, for example "+85 %":

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

The switching point can be altered at any time with 

another tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad.

Note:

Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter 

control's travel end-point, since this makes reliable 

switching impossible. If a 2-way or 3-way switch is 

used to operate a control switch, the switch point 

should be programmed in advance with one of the 

transmitter's proportional controls.

First, assign the corresponding proportional control 

in the 2nd column and set the switching point in such 

a way that will ensure the subsequent confi guration 

for the 2-way or 3-way switch will reliably exceed 

this value. If you do not, the switching function will 

be unreliable, since the control switch triggers only 

if a value unambiguously fails to meet or exceeds 

the value set! To complete the procedure, cancel the 

transmitter control assignment then assign the 2-way 

or 3-way switch.

Setting the switching direction

The switching direction of the control switch is 

changed as required in the 4th column. Use the 

selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the 

marker frame into the column labeled SEL (select). 

Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, the switch direction can by changed 

back-and-forth between "normal" and "reversed" with 

the selection keys of the left or right touch pad.

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of 

the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the switch 

direction back to "=>".

The current switch position of the control switch is 

displayed in the leftmost column by the switch icon 

next to the number of the control switch.

Notes:

• In this example control switch"C1" is open as long 

as transmitter control "Lever 1" (the throttle limiter 

for a helicopter) is less than +85 % of control travel. 

It closes once the switching point is exceeded, i.e. 

by a value over +85 % and up to the upper limit.

• In the above example with the switching direction 

reversed, control switch "C1" remains closed while 

the transmitter control is at less than +85 % of full 

travel. As soon as the switching point is exceeded, 

in this example a value between +85 % and the 

upper travel end-point , "C3" will open.

• If a control switch – e.g. "C1" – has multiple 

assignments, you should bear in mind that the 

switching direction set here applies to all C3 

switches.
Detail program description - Control switches 137

• The switch state can also be inverted by reversing 

the control in the »Control adjust« menu.

Combining a control switch with a switch

The control switch can be overridden by a further 

switch, so that e.g. in certain fl ight situations 

the function to be triggered can be activated 

independently of the control position and thus the 

position of the control switch.

Change to the value fi eld in the 5th column, the 

column above the rightmost switch symbol. In the 

simplest case, select one of the switches mounted 

in the two switch panels, as described in the section 

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control 

switches" on page 56. The number of this switch, 

e.g. "10", appears on the display in the next-to-the 

last column at the right, together with a switch icon 

indicating the switch's current state.

While this switch is open, the "C1" control switch 

is active, i.e. it triggers at the switching point; if the 

switch is closed, the control switch now remains 

permanently closed as well, independently of the 

control position and switching direction:

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Lever1

free

+85%

STO

–––

–––

10

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

Combining two control switches

For more complex applications, however, it can 

prove necessary to override this control switch with a 

second control switch.

Example:

Control switch "C1" will now be assigned to control 

function 3 (= control 3) instead of its previous 

assignment "Lever1". The switching point is at its 

center point, i.e. at 0 %. The switch chosen in the 

next-to-the-last right column is "C2" from the list of 

expanded switches. This "C2" control switch will now 

be allocated in its own line to the middle proportional 

slider "Slide2", whose switch-point is +50 % liege:

SEL

+50%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Cnt. 1

Slide2

0%

STO

–––

–––

C2

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

The switching directions indicated in the fourth column 

from the left will now show control switch "C2" as being 

closed as long as joystick (control 3) and/or "Slide 2" 

are located on the other side of their switch-points.

This diversity of switching options certainly offers you 

enough scope for specialized applications to suit any 

type of model.
138 Detail program description - Logical switches

Logical switches

Programming logical switches

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multifunction menu: 

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch Display

Suppress codes Suppress models 

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

AND

AND

AND

L1

L2

L3

L4 –––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

AND

–––

–––

–––

SEL

L1

L2

L3

––– L4

–––

–––

–––

These functions permit two switches, control switches 

and/or logical switches or any combination of these to 

be combined with one another to create logical "AND" 

and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches, 

"L1 ... L8" can be programmed.

The result of such a logical switch function – shown 

in the display's rightmost column – can be used as 

another switch function. Allocation of a switch to 

a logical function is done in the familiar manner in 

the columns labeled by the two switch symbols, 

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" on page56. 

That is, by moving the respective switch from OFF to 

ON or, after a tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, by selecting one of the expanded switches 

with the selection keys.

UND

UND

AND

L1

L2

L3

L4 –––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

UND

–––

–––

–––

SEL

L1

L2

L3

––– L4

–––

–––

–––Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

UND

UND

UND

L1

L2

L3

L4 –––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

UND

–––

–––

–––

SEL

G1

G2

G3

––– L4

–––

–––

–––Mowünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

Potential applications for this:

• Multiple functions, which are normally independent 

of one another, are to be put into a defi ned state 

by way of an »Emergency switch«.

• The establishment of dependencies for initiating a 

switch-on warning, see »Basic settings, model« 

menu.

"AND" / "OR"

Once a given value fi eld has been activated in the 

column labeled SEL, the "AND" and "OR" logic 

operator can be selected with the selection keys.

"AND" function: The logical switch is only closed 

when both input switches are 

closed.

"OR" function: The logical switch is closed 

when at least one of the input 

switches is closed.

Note:

The difference between AND and OR logic switches 

is made clear by the settings and input states of the 

display fi gure below.

OR

AND

AND

L1

L2

L3

L4 –––

LOGICAL SWITCHES

AND

L2I

4I

2

SEL

L1

L2I

L3

––– L4

L1

3

1

"L3" is only closed when both the "L1" and "L2" 

switches are closed. This means that both switches, 

1 and 2, must be closed and, at the same time, either 

3 or 4.

In order to make these logical switches usable, they 

can be specifi ed in those menus which use switches 

by calling them up via the additional "expanded 

switches" selection menu.

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will afford access to the expanded switches.

M wünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

Now use the selection keys to pick the desired control 

switch "C1 ... C8", fi xed switch "FX" or logical switch 

"L1 ... L8" or the respected inverted switch "C1i ... 

C8i", "FXi" or "L1i ... L8i", for example, "L3i":
Detail program description - Logical switches 139

Moewünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C8i L2i L4i

L5i L6i L7i L1 L2

C7i L1i

L8i

L3i

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will adopt the selected switch into the menu.

Model time

Batt. time

Top :

Centr:

Stop watch

Flight time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s

L3I

L3I

Timer Alarm

Remark about inverted switches:

Selection of an inverted switch for a switch 

assignment, e.g "L1i" instead of "L1", simply specifi es 

the opposite switch direction (state), i.e. non-inverted 

usage results in a certain switch activating a particular 

function when it is in its switched-on state but 

inverted usage results in a certain switch activating a 

particular function when it is in its switched-off state. 

Such applications arise when, for example, one and 

the same switch is to switch one function on but, at 

the same time, it is to switch a second function off, 

and vice versa. Logical switches permit other, quite 

complex, switching options to be created.
140 How is a fl ight phase programmed?

How is a fl ight phase programmed?

The concept of fl ight phase programming

General information on fl ight phase programming

During a fl ight, you will often want to apply different 

settings – e.g. fl ap or trim settings for a fi xed-wing 

aircraft or collective pitch and throttle servo settings 

for a helicopter – at particular times in the fl ight (e.g. 

take-off, approach, hover, auto-rotate, etc.). With mc32 HoTT, you can access such presets automatically 

using switches or control switches.

Flight phases are also of great utility during fl ight 

testing. You can confi gure various set-ups and then 

switch between them during the fl ight: this enables 

you to identify the most appropriate program set-up 

for your model quickly and easily.

The basic programming procedure is a threestage process

1. First, you have to set up the different fl ight phases, 

i.e. you assign names to phases 1 ... max. 8. 

Each name is then shown in all phase-specifi c 

menus and also on the basic display. To avoid 

abrupt transitions when switching between the 

various phases, you can also program a period 

of time during which a "soft" transition to the next 

phase takes place.

For fi xed-wing aircraft programs, these settings 

are made in the »Phase settings« menu. The 

programming of helicopters begins with either 

the »Basic settings, model« menu, if you wish 

to set up autorotation or, otherwise, with the 

»Phase settings« menu.

2. In the second stage, you use the »Phase 

assignment« menu to set up the required "phase 

switches".

3. Once these are set, you can then move to the 

fl ight phase-dependent menus (see the tables 

below) to start programming the settings for the 

individual fl ight phases.

List of fl ight phase-relevant menus for fi xed-wing 

programs:

Menu Page

»Control adjust« 108

»Dual Rate / Expo« 120

»Channel 1 curve« 128

»Phase settings« 142

»Phase assignment« 148

»Phase trim« 150

»Non-delayed channels« 151

»Flight phase timers« 156

»Wing mixers« 160

»MIX active/phase« 204

»Trim memory« 224

List of fl ight phase-relevant menus for helicopter 

programs:

Menu Page

»Control adjust« 112

»Dual Rate / Expo« 124

»Channel 1 curve« 131

»Phase settings« 146

»Phase assignment« 148

»Non-delayed channels« 151

»Flight phase timers« 156

»Helicopter mixer« 176

»MIX active/phase« 204

»Trim memory« 226

All other menus are model-specifi c and thus cannot 

be programmed separately for each fl ight phase. 

Accordingly, changes you make in all other menus 

apply uniformly to all fl ight phases for that specifi c 

model. In some cases it may be desirable to use the 

»Suppress codes« menu (see page 74) to remove 

non-alterable menus from the multi-function list 

while programming fl ight phases. Two examples of 

fl ight phase programming can be found in the text 

beginning on page 288.
How is a fl ight phase programmed? 141
142 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models

Phase settings 

Setting up fl ight phases

Setting up fl ight phases

When you set up fl ight phases for fi xed-wing 

aircraft models, you start with this menu. You 

assign individual phases a name and also assign 

a period of time for a (soft) transition into each 

phase. Note that – depending on your model and 

your settings – switch times much longer than the 

default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up 

several phases with names and transition times even 

if you don't currently have a use for them, since the 

decision as to which of the "occupied" phases you 

activate is made only on the »Phase assignment« 

menu (page 148) when setting "phase switches".

Whether or not one of the phases 1 ... 8 currently has 

an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be 

seen in the "status" column at the far right.

Symbol Meaning

– No switch assigned

+ Phase can be accessed via switch

 Indicates the phase currently active

Note:

The "Copy fl ight phase" option on the »Copy / Erase« 

menu is a useful aid when programming the various 

fl ight phases. First, you need to determine the 

parameters for a specifi c fl ight phase; these are then 

copied to the next fl ight phase, where they can then be 

modifi ed as appropriate.

"Name" column

Briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad then assign the needed phases (phase 1 up to 

maximum of 8 phases) by picking their names from 

the selection list with the selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad. In addition to this standard pool of 

names, the »General basic settings« menu, page 

261, permits up to 10 names of personal preference 

to be defi ned.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the 

multi-function menu: 

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Within one model memory, the mc-32 HoTT lets 

you program up to 8 discrete groups of settings for 

various conditions met during the fl ight. The grouped 

settings are typically termed "fl ight phases" and are 

programmed in the corresponding menus.

Depending on the setting "Throttle min. forward/

back" or "None" in the "Motor on C1" line of the 

»Model type« menu, calling up the »Phase settings« 

menu option will cause the transmitter's display to look 

like one of the two variants shown below ...

• Motor on C1 "none"

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

–

–

–

–



• Motor on C1 "Throttle min front/rear"

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw. time

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–



The order in which phases 1 to max. 8 are assigned is 

entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. 

Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", 

the "Normal phase", which is always active if ...

• ... no phase switch is set in the »Phase 

assignment« menu or if

• no phase has been assigned to specifi c 

combinations of switches.

The defi nition of the phase name "Normal" could 

therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". 

The names themselves have absolutely no technical 

signifi cance for programming; their only purpose is to 

help you to identify which phase is active at any time 

and are thus displayed in all fl ight phase-dependent 

menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.

Column "Fl.ph.Tim" or "Timer"

In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen 

display, other timers are also available whose settings 

are confi gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu, 

page 156.

Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2

The fl ight phase timers "Clk 1 ... 3" plus "Time1" 

and "Time2" run only in the fl ight phase to which 

they have been assigned in this menu. During other 

fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the 

assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.

The lap counter, once started, continues to run 

through changes of phase, however, although it can 

be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center 

ESC key of the left touch pad.

While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" 

and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" 

have the following meaning:

Time 1This timer will only measure time during which 

the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap 

time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase timers« 

menu, page 156, is "closed". The frequency at 

which the switch is activated is shown on the 
Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models 143

basic display. This counter fi eld is highlighted 

as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is 

"opened", i.e. the timer is stopped:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 00 0.0s

RX VOLT:4.9V

 When necessary, the selection keys can be 

used to access and read the sequence of 

switching times.

Application:

Measurement of e.g. motor switch-on times, if 

the same switch also actuates the motor.

Time 2 This timer stores both the "off" and the "on" 

periods for the associated switch, i.e. every 

switch actuation in either direction will cause a 

record to be written for the timer, the timer will 

be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again 

as time passes.

 Each time count can be suspended with the 

center ESC key of the right touch pad, without 

actuating the switch itself. Activating the 

switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and 

restarts the "Time 2" timer.

 In order to read out the time memory with the 

selection keys, the "Time 2" timer must fi rst be 

suspended by using the ESC key of the right 

touch pad.

Application:

In addition to the motor runtimes, for example, 

the unpowered glide times between these 

could also be recorded.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers 

shown in the basic display.

"Motor" column

Note:

This column is only available if "forward/back" is 

present in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« 

menu. 

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw. time

0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–

Normal 

Launch

Dist.

yes

"yes" The motor connected to receiver output 1 will 

be controlled by the C1 joystick (throttle/brake 

stick).

 The brake system to be set up on the »Wing 

mixers« menu is deactivated:

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

off

The motor connected to receiver output 1 is 

decoupled from the C1 joystick (throttle/brake 

stick) and is held in its OFF position – as 

specifi ed by the setting "Throttle min. forward 

/ back" – automatically.

 The brake system to be set up in the »Wing 

mixers« menu is activated and is actuated by 

the C1 joystick.

Elevator curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

0%

WK2

0%

WK

0%

Diff.- reduct

Note:

The settings available depend on the number 

of control surface servos selected on the 

line "Ailerons/Camber-changing fl aps in the 

»Model type« menu.

"Sw. time" column

When you switch between fl ight phases, it is 

advisable to use this column to program a switch time 

for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. 

Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a 

different time for the switchover from any phase to, 

for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 

1.

Use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad 

to move the marker frame to the right beyond the 

column labeled "Timer" and, if applicable, also the 

column labeled "Motor".

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw. time

0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–

Normal 

Launch

Dist.

yes

Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, the switchover time value in the fi eld 

displayed in inverse video can be changed within a 

range of 0 and 9.9 s. 
144 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models

Example:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw. time

0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 1.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–

Normal 

Launch

Dist.

yes

The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 

«normal» will take 2.2 s. 

The time for a switchover from, for example, Phase 1 

to Phase 3, is set to 1.1 s and the time for a switchover 

from Phase 1 or 3 to Phase 2 "Launch" is 1.5 s.

Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when, 

e.g. switching between extremely different fl ight 

phases, such as between aerobatics and normal fl ight.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the 

currently active value fi eld back to 0.1.

Note:

The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all 

settings that are specifi c to fl ight phases, and thus 

to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, 

see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between 

fl ight phase-specifi c mixers does not occur abruptly. 

However, if individual servos are to be switched 

without a delay then these can be defi ned accordingly 

in the »Non-delayed chan« menu (see page 151).
For your notes 145
146 Detail program description - Phase settings | Helicopters

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the 

multi-function menu:

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

–

–

–

–

Autorot Autorot 

Within one model memory, the mc-32 HoTT lets 

you program up to 7 discrete groups of settings for 

various conditions met during the fl ight. These are in 

addition to the auto-rotation fl ight phase that can be 

set up in the »Basic settings, model« menu. The 

grouped settings are typically termed "fl ight phases" 

and are programmed in appropriate menus.

Setting up fl ight phases

When you set up fl ight phases for helicopter models, 

you start with this menu. You assign individual phases 

a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) 

transition into each phase. Note that – depending on 

your model and your settings – switch times much 

longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. 

You can also set up several phases with names and 

transition times even if you don't currently have a 

use for them, since the decision as to which of the 

Phase settings

Setting up fl ight phases

"occupied" phases you activate is made only on the 

»Phase assignment« menu (page 148) when setting 

"phase switches".

The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which 

one of the phases 1 ... 7, including the autorotation 

phase this is 8, has already been assigned to a switch, 

plus the current status of that switch:

Symbol Meaning

– No switch assigned

+ Phase can be accessed via switch

 Indicates the phase currently active

Note:

The "Copy fl ight phase" option on the »Copy / 

Erase« menu is a useful aid when programming the 

various fl ight phases. First, you need to determine the 

parameters for a specifi c fl ight phase; these are then 

copied to the next fl ight phase, where they can then 

be modifi ed as appropriate.

"Name" column

The fi rst line, and thus the fi rst fl ight phase, is 

reserved for autorotation fl ight, see »Basic settings, 

model« menu. Accordingly, the predefi ned name 

cannot be changed.

Use the selection keys to move to the line "Phase 1". 

Briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad then assign the needed phase (phase 1 up to 

maximum of 7 phases) by picking the respective 

name from the selection list with the selection keys of 

the left or right touch pad. In addition to this standard 

pool of names, the »General basic settings« menu, 

page 261, permits up to 10 names of personal 

preference to be defi ned.

The order in which phases 1 to max. 7 are assigned is 

entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. 

Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", 

the "Normal phase", which is always active if ...

• ... no phase switch is set in the »Phase 

assignment« menu or if

• no phase has been assigned to specifi c 

combinations of switches.

The defi nition of the phase name "Normal" could 

therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". 

The names themselves have absolutely no technical 

signifi cance for programming; their only purpose is to 

help you to identify which phase is active at any time 

and are thus displayed in all fl ight phase-dependent 

menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.

"ph. Tim." column

In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen 

display, other timers are also available whose settings 

are confi gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu, 

page 156.

Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2

The fl ight phase timers "Clk 1 ... 3" plus "Time1" 

and "Time2" run only in the fl ight phase to which 

they have been assigned in this menu. During other 

fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the 

assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.

The lap counter, once started, continues to run 

through changes of phase, however, although it can 

be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center 

ESC key of the left touch pad.

While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" 

and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" 

have the following meaning:

Time1 This timer will only measure time during which 

the switch or control switch assigned in the 

"Lap time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase 

timers« menu, page 156, is "closed". The 

frequency at which the switch is activated 

is shown on the basic display. This counter 

fi eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for 

the "Time1" timer is "opened", i.e. the timer is 

stopped:
Detail program description - Phase settings | Helicopters 147

#02 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Starlet

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 00 0.0s

RX VOLT:4.9V

 When necessary, the selection keys can be 

used to access and read the sequence of 

switching times.

Application:

Measurement of (e.g.) fl ight phases with 

increased motor speed, if the same switch is 

used to actuate fl ight phase switching.

Time2 This timer stores both the "off" and the "on" 

periods for the associated switch, i.e. every 

switch actuation in either direction will cause a 

record to be written for the timer, the timer will 

be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again 

as time passes.

 Each time count can be suspended with the 

center ESC key of the right touch pad, without 

actuating the switch itself. Activating the 

switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and 

restarts the "Time2" timer.

 In order to read out the time memory with the 

selection keys, the "Time2" timer must fi rst be 

suspended by using the ESC key of the right 

touch pad.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers 

shown in the basic display.

"Sw. time" column

When you switch between fl ight phases, it is 

advisable to use this column to program a switch time 

for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. 

Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a 

different time for the switchover from any phase to, 

for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 

1.

However, for reasons of safety, transition into the 

autorotation fl ight phase should ALWAYS be set 

to switch without any time delay. The arrow "->" 

in the column labeled "Sw.time" at the end of the 

"Autorot" line indicates that a delay can be set when 

transitioning FROM (!) autorotation INTO (!) another 

phase.

Use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad 

to move the marker frame to the right beyond the 

"Sw.time" column.

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

–

–

–

–

Autorot Autorot 

Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, the switchover time value in the fi eld 

displayed in inverse video can be changed within a 

range of 0 and 9.9 s. 

Example:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

5.5s

3.0s

2.0s

4.0s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

+

+

–

–

Autorot Autorot 

Normal

Hover

Speed

A delay of 5.5 s applies when switching FROM autorotation into any other phase. A delay of 0.0 s always 

applies when switching TO auto-rotation.

The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 

«normal» will take 3.0 s. 

When switching from e.g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the 

switch time is set to 4.0 s.

Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when, 

e.g. switching between extremely different fl ight 

phases, such as between aerobatics and normal fl ight.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the 

currently active value fi eld back to 0.1.

Note:

The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all 

settings that are specifi c to fl ight phases, and thus 

to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, 

see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between 

fl ight phase-specifi c mixers does not occur abruptly. 

If you want individual servos to be switched without 

a delay, however, defi ne these accordingly in the 

»Non-delayed channels« menu (see page 151).
148 Detail program description - Phase assignment

Phase assignment

Setting up fl ight phases

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

scroll to the »Phase assignment« menu option in the 

multi-function menu: 

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Model type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Base setup model Helicopter type

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

Note:

A phase name appears to the right of the phase 

number at the bottom right of the display only if you 

have assigned the name beforehand on the »Phase 

settings« menu.

In the »Phase settings« menu, described above 

separately for fi xed-wing and helicopter models, you 

will have set up names for your phases. On this menu 

– which is identical for both model types – you must 

now specify the switches or switch combinations that 

you want to use to trigger each phase. One exception 

for helicopter menu: one of the two auto-rotation 

switches must be set on the menu »Basic settings, 

model«.

Please note the following priorities:

• If no fl ight phase switches nor these names have 

been assigned in this menu, the model is in fl ight 

phase "1". Accordingly, by the time you start 

programming fl ight phases, you should therefore 

have already given this fl ight phase the phase 

name "Normal".

• Independent of the phases with allocated switch 

settings made in this menu, the autorotation phase 

(only present for the "Helicopter" model type and 

to be assigned a switch in the »Basic settings, 

model« menu) always (!) takes precedence. 

Accordingly, as soon as the auto-rotation switch 

in question is activated, the following warning 

appears:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

C

1 Normal

Kombination

A B DEF Autorot

• Phase switch "A" is given priority over all 

subsequent switch positions, from "B" to "F"

• Phase switch "B" is given priority over all 

subsequent switch positions, from "C" to "F"

• 3-way switches should always be assigned from 

the middle position.

Therefore use switch "A" and/or switch "B" only if you 

wish to change from any other fl ight phase – apart 

from the helicopter's autorotation phase – directly into 

the phase that is assigned to this switch.

Programming fl ight phase switches

Once you have confi gured your desired switch 

position, "A" to "F", using the selection keys on the 

left or right touch pad, a switch (whether a "normal" 

switch or an expanded switch) is then assigned 

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).

The order in which assignment is made is irrelevant: 

you must ensure only that you assign what are, 

for you, the "correct" switches. (In the helicopter 

program, for example, you should also take care 

to ensure you do not use this menu to re-assign 

any auto-rotation switch already assigned on the 

»Basic settings, model« menu.)

Example: 4 fl ight phases with phase priority

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

2 67

Assigning fl ight phases to switch positions

Now that names have been assigned to the fl ight 

phases (1 ... max. 8) in the »Phase settings« menu 

and also programmed switches in this menu, but ... 

at the bottom right of the display screen, you only 

see <1 Normal > – regardless of the positions the 

switches are in!?

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to 

move the marker frame down and to the right and then 

briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:
Detail program description - Phase assignment 149

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

C

1Normal

combi

A B DEF

2 67

Now close one (or more, as required) of the switches 

that you have assigned, and assign one of the fl ight 

phase names from the list you selected beforehand 

on the »Phase settings« menu to this switch position 

or combination. 

Here, for example, we assign the "Launch" phase to 

the closed ("I") priority switch "A" ...

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior

C

2 Launch

combi

A B DEF

2I 6 7

... if, for example, we wish to switch to this phase 

regardless of the "C" ... "F" switch positions, because 

the same switch activates an electric motor, etc.

Use the same approach to set the other switches or 

combinations of switches.

Theoretically – for the situation where all three are 

closed – you could use the three single switches 

shown in the example to defi ne an additional 

fi fth fl ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu. 

However, since this example assumes just four fl ight 

phases, you can leave the default phase name as «1 

Normal» for this switch position.

Leave this menu in the familiar way, with a tap on the 

center ESC key of the left touch pad.

Tips:

• If you have named more phases than you 

currently have switches defi ned for then this is not 

really problematic. You can repeat and change 

your switch assignment as you wish at any point in 

time. And you can also name additional phases at 

any time and then assign switches to them.

• When assigning switches, check whether the 

switches are already otherwise assigned to ensure 

that you avoid duplicate assignments.

Important notice:

Before a phase switch is assigned, the model 

settings confi gured are now to be found in the 

fl ight phase «1 Normal», i.e. all fl ight phasedependent menus are reset to the standard 

confi gurations for all other fl ight phases.

To avoid having to start from scratch in every 

fl ight phase, you can copy over these standard 

settings by using the command "Copy fl ight 

phase" on the "Copy / Erase" menu to replace 

them with fl ight data obtained from the «Normal» 

fl ight phase. You then need only to make further 

fl ight phase-specifi c changes to the settings.
150 Detail program description - Phase trim | Winged models

Phase trim

Flap settings specifi c to fl ight phases

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multifunction menu: 

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

 Normal 0%

ELEV

Depending on the settings made on the "Aileron/

camber fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu, page 

94, and in the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, this 

menu offers at least one control function for ELEV ...

 Normal 0%

Normal ELEV

... and, with the maximum of 4 for ELEV, AI, Al2, 

FL and FL2 a total of fi ve control functions for fl ightphase-specifi c trim settings. The setting of the fl ight 

phase switches, to be defi ned beforehand in the 

»Phase assignment« menu, determines the line 

that is chosen. An asterisk marks the fl ight phase 

currently active. At the same time, the name of the 

respective fl ight phase is also shown at the bottom 

left of the screen. You can enter settings only for the 

currently active fl ight phase, e.g.:

 Normal 0%

Normal ELEV

0% 0% 0%

AI FL FL2

Launch

Thermal

Dist.

0% 0% 0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0%

0%

AI2

0%

0%

0%

In the column labeled "ELEV" a phase-specifi c 

elevator trim setting can be stored.

Important notice:

Settings made in this column have an 

immediate effect on elevator trim and, 

accordingly, the trim setting display. In 

turn, the elevator trim control affects the 

values of this column either "globally" 

or "phase-specifi cally", depending on 

the "global/phase" setting made on the 

"Elev" line of the »Stick mode« menu. 

Columns "Al", "Al2", "Fl", "Fl2"

 The values in these columns (max. 4) 

are identical to those in the "Fl.pos" 

(fl ap position) line on the "Multi-fl ap menu" 

within the »Wing mixers« menu. For this 

reason, any changes made always affect 

the other menu directly – and vice versa.

After selecting the appropriate column with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a brief 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, these 

values can be entered, independent of one another, 

with the selection keys within a range of ±150 %. 

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in the currently active value fi eld back to 0 %.
Detail program description - Non-delayed channels 151

Non-delayed channels

Channel-dependent delays to switching

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multifunction menu: 

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

NONDELAYED CHANNELS

non-delayed

normal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

On the »Phase settings« menu, you will have set the 

necessary switch times for fl ight phase transitions.

In this menu, you can now deactivate the transition 

delay set previously, per fl ight phase and for 

individual control channels – e.g. for the motor 

channel for electric models or heading-lock systems 

for helicopter gyros, etc.

Switch over to the corresponding fl ight phase. This is 

shown at the bottom left of the display.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

to move the " " onto the corresponding channel then 

briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.

The switch icon changes from "normal" to "non-delay" 

and vice versa.

NONDELAYED CHANNELS

non-delayed

normal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Normal
152 Detail program description - Timers (general)

Timers (general)

Timers on the basic display

The default transmitter display shows a total of three 

timers. These are: the transmitter operating time on 

the left of the display, plus a "Top" and a "Centr" timer 

on the right of the display:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Runde 00

RX VOLT:4.9V

Another, fl ight-phase specifi c timer can also be 

confi gured with settings in the two menus »Flight 

phase timers«, page 156, and »Phase settings«, 

pages 142 and 146. This optional fl ight phase timer – 

such as the lap time timer – appears underneath the 

"Centr" (fl ight time) timer:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 00 0.0s

RX VOLT:4.9V

To confi gure the "Top" and/or "Centr" timer, use the 

selection keys on the left or right touch pad to access 

the menu option »Timers (general)« in the Multifunction menu: 

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Servo adjustment Stick mode

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

Model time

Batt. time

Top :Stop watch

Centr:Flight tim

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s

–––

–––

CLR

" Model time"

This timer shows the currently registered total 

access time to the currently active model memory 

location. If necessary, this automatic time acquisition 

can also be infl uenced by assigning an on/off 

switch to this "Model time" timer in the rightmost 

column labeled with the switch symbol. This timer 

can then be switched on and off as desired. This 

switch is assigned (and erased again as required) 

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time back to 

"0:00 h".

" Batt. time"

This operating hours timer records the transmitter's 

total switch-on time since the last time the battery 

was charged, thus monitoring the transmitter battery. 

A switch cannot be assigned to this function.

This timer is automatically reset to "0:00 h" when the 

transmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is 

signifi cantly higher than the last time it was switched 

on, e.g. as a result of a charge process or the 

installation of a replacement battery.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will also reset this time back 

to "0:00 h".

"Top" and "Centr"

These two timers are located at the top right of the 

basic display (see the screen image immediately to 

the left) and can be assigned a different name; their 

function and mode of operation varies according to 

the name you give them. Independently of the name 

each is given, the "Top" and "Centr" timer can be 

programmed to run any length of time forwards or 

backwards – see further below.

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

select the line for the "Top" or "Centr" timer. 

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select your desired timer and complete your 

selection with another tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad:

"Stop watch" or "Motor(run)time"

Both of these two timer variants can be started and 

stopped using any of the available switches.

The timer defi ned as "Stopwatch" or "Motor runtime" 

sums the "ON" times continually, so that once your 

aircraft has landed, you can read off the sum of all 

switch "ON" times since the timer was last reset.
Detail program description - Timers (general) 153

"Flight tim"

This timer is especially for measuring fl ight time: it 

can be started with an assigned switch and stopped 

(once the switch has been re-opened) on the basic 

display with a tap on the center ESC key of the left 

touch pad. Once in a stopped state, it can be reset to 

its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the 

or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time 

(CLEAR). 

If you wish to assign a control switch, you must fi rst 

defi ne the switch on the»Control switch« menu and 

specify the switching point along the travel of the 

transmitter control. As an example, the timer can then 

be started by "opening the throttle" or by opening the 

throttle limiter for helicopter models.

Note:

The combination of the fl ight time timer and 

stopwatch means that you can glance at the display 

at any time and see how long you have been fl ying 

since the timers were started, plus the total motor 

runtime within this particular period of fl ight time.

"Time frame"

The time frame timer is intended primarily for use 

by competition pilots, who are frequently given a 

timeframe within which they must complete certain 

tasks. The timer is started in precisely the same way 

as the fl ight time timer. To stop the timer, fi rst ensure 

the timer switch is at its OFF position. Then touch and 

hold the  or  selection keys then touch the 

center ESC key.

Switch assignment

Use the  selection key of the left or right touch 

pad to move the marker frame next to the triangle 

as shown in the screen image shown below to the 

rightmost column of the relevant line:

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

Here, you assign a switch as described in the section 

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control 

switches" (page 56).

Typical application:

The "stop watch" and "fl ight timer" are both to be 

started simultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as 

a user-defi ned switching point is exceeded.

For this purpose, defi ne a control switch, e.g. "C1", in 

the »Control switch« menu, page 135. To complete 

the procedure, you select this from the expanded 

switches (see the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56) 

and assign it to both these lines:

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s

Timer Alarm

G1

G1

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

The stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below 

the switching point and resume running above the 

switching point. The same is not true for the fl ight 

time timer, however, which also starts the fi rst time 

the switching point is exceeded. It can be stopped 

(with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad) only once the stopwatch is stopped; it can then 

be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous 

tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad 

(CLEAR).

Switchover between "forward" and "backward"

Timer runs forwards (stopwatch function)

Following switch assignment, if the stopwatch shown 

on the basic display is started with the initial value of 

"0:00", then it will run forwards for max. 180 min and 

59 s and then restart from 0:00.

Timer runs backwards (countdown function)

In the – left – minutes fi eld, select a start time between 

0 and 180 min ...

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

180:00

0:00

0s

0s

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

... and in the – right – seconds fi eld, select a start time 

between 0 and 59 s (or any combination of these):

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

180:59

0:00

0s

0s

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

Procedure

1. Select the desired input fi eld with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad.

2. Now tap on SET in the center of the right 

touch pad.

3. Make a time selection in the inverse video minutes 

or seconds fi eld with the selection keys of the right 

touch pad.
154 Detail program description - Timers (general)

4. Complete the entry with a tap on the center 

SET key.

5. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any setting 

made back to "0" or "00".

6. Following a switch back to the basic display (by 

tapping the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad as many times as required), make sure 

the stopwatch is stopped then simultaneously 

tap on the  or  keys of the right touch 

pad (CLEAR) to switchover the stopwatch to 

the "timer" function. Look at the top right in the 

following fi gure.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

10:01.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Runde 00

RX VOLT:4.9V

After the assigned switch is activated, the stopwatch 

starts at the initial value set and runs backward

("countdown clock function"). Once the timer reaches 

zero it does not stop, but continues to run to enable 

you to read off the time elapsed after it reached 0:00. 

To make this absolutely clear, the timer is shown 

highlighted.

"Alarm" timer

The "Alarm" column is accessed by moving the 

marker frame to the right with the  selection key of 

the left or right touch pad until it is over the column 

labeled "Alarm". In the "Alarm" column a time 

between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) 

can be defi ned. This is the amount of time the timer is 

to count down before issuing an acoustic signal. This 

eliminates the need to repeatedly check the display 

continually during the fl ight.

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

180:59

0:00

90s

0s

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any settings made 

back to "0 s".

Audible signal sequence

30 s before zero: Triple beep

Single beep every two seconds 

20 s before zero: Double beep

Single beep every two seconds 

10 s before zero: Single beep

Single beep every second

 5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a 

higher frequency

 zero: longer beep signal and 

changeover of display presentation 

to inverse video

Resetting suspended timers

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset timers which have 

already been suspended.

Notes:

• Timers that are running backwards are shown on 

the basic display with a fl ashing colon (:) between 

the minutes and the seconds fi elds.

• A typical application, "Timer activation via the C1 

joystick", can be found on page 284.

• An interim timer function change becomes 

active after timer/s have been suspended and 

subsequently reset by a simultaneous tap on the 

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

• Remember that the timer switches also remain 

active during programming. 

• A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the previously 

stopped timer to its programmed initial value, refer 

to sections "Alarm" and "Timer". 
For your notes 155
156 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers

Fl. phase timers

Selecting and setting

A description of how timers are assigned to a fl ight 

phase has already been provided in the text for the 

»Phase settings« menu, page 142 and 146. The 

same section has also described the properties of 

"Time1" and "Time2". This section now proceeds to 

describe "Timer 1, 2 and 3" and the "lap counter/time 

table" timer variants.

The additional, fl ight phase-specifi c timer selected 

is displayed on the basic display underneath the 

"center" timer, as shown below:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Timer 100 0:00.0

RX VOLT:4.9V

On this menu ... 

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

 ... you can now program "Clks 1 ... 3" as stopwatches 

(i.e. timers that run forward) or as countdown/alarm 

timers (i.e. timers that run backwards). You can assign 

any switch to these timers, and the same is true of the 

"lap counter/timetable" timer:

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

0:00 –––

0:00

0:00

Lap display

0s

0s

0s

–––

–––

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

The fl ight phase timers "Timer 1 ... 3" and the 

"Time1"/"Time2" timers (described in the »Phase 

settings« section, pp. 142 and 146) run only in the 

fl ight phase to which they have been assigned. They 

are also shown as appropriate on the basic display. 

During other fl ight phases they are stopped (and 

hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has 

no effect.

The lap counter, once started, continues to run 

through changes of phase (as discussed further 

below), however, although it can be stopped during 

any fl ight phase via the center ESC key of the left 

touch pad.

Clks 1, 2 and 3

These timers are started and stopped via a switch or 

control switch. To do so, fi rst use the selection keys 

to select the appropriate column via the switch icon 

at the bottom right. Then set the switch that you want 

by briefl y tapping the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, as described in the section "Assigning 

transmitter controls, switches and control switches" 

(p. 56). Here, too, a control switch offers you the 

option of activating the timer via one of the joysticks 

or proportional controls. The switching point along 

the transmitter control travel is set on the »Control 

switch« menu (page 135).

Remember that the timer switches also remain active 

in programming mode.

Switching between "forwards" and "backwards"

 Stopwatch mode (timer runs forwards) 

In this mode, the timer starts at the initial value "0:00" 

(min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If 

it reaches the maximum time of 180 min. and 59 s, it 

will re-start at "0:00".

"Countdown" (timer runs backwards)

Following the activation of the corresponding value 

fi elds (by tapping the center SET key of the right 

touch pad), if a time in minutes (maximum 180 min) 

and/or a time in seconds (maximum 59 s, right fi eld) 

is set, then the timers will run backwards from this 

initial value following the activation of the assigned 

switch (see section "Assigning transmitter controls, 

switches and control switches" on page 56), i.e. 

a "countdown" function will apply. Once the timer 

reaches zero it does not stop, however, but continues 

to run (highlighted) so you can read off the time 

elapsed after reaching zero.

Note:

Timers that are running backwards are shown on the 

basic display with a fl ashing colon (:) between the 

minutes and the seconds fi elds.

A simultaneous tap on the or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values in the 

currently active fi eld back to zero.

"Alarm" timer 

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

0:00 –––

0:00

0:00

Lap display

0s

0s

0s

–––

–––

–––

–––

Timer Alarm
Detail program description - Fl. phase timers 157

The input fi eld in the "Alarm" column is activated with 

a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. 

In this fi eld, use the selection keys on the left or right 

touch pad to defi ne a time between 5 and 90 seconds 

(in 5-second increments) before zero is reached: at 

this point an audible signal will be emitted, which 

eliminates the need for you to check the screen 

continually during the fl ight. 

Audible signal sequence

30 s before zero: Triple beep

 Single beep every two seconds 

20 s before zero: Double beep

 Single beep every two seconds 

10 s before zero: Single beep

Single beep every second

 5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a 

higher frequency

 zero: longer beep signal and changeover 

of display presentation to inverse 

video

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values 

entered in the currently active fi eld to "0 s".

Note:

If timer functionality has been changed at any point, 

then the new changes to settings are made active 

only after the timer(s) have been stopped on the 

basic display then making a simultaneous tap on the

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to 

reset them.

Like the two standard timers positioned above it, this 

third, phase-specifi c timer is reset to its starting value 

with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of 

the right touch pad (CLEAR). It is stopped in all fl ight 

phases at the same time, even if it has not been 

stopped separately in the other fl ight phases.

Lap counter/timetable

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

0:00 –––

0:00

0:00

Lap display

0s

0s

0s

–––

–––

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

On the "Lap time/tim tab" line, assign a switch only 

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" (page 56). 

Preferably, make use of one of the two momentary 

switches which are included as standard equipment 

in the switch panels. The lap count is incremented 

each time by one lap while simultaneously (and 

automatically) the lap time elapsed during this lap 

is stopped (and recorded). This momentary switch 

simultaneously starts the stopwatch for the next lap. 

As the timer is triggered, the lap or switch impulse 

counter is shown highlighted.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 11 2:34.5

RX VOLT:4.9V

"Time1" and "Time2" operate in the same manner; for 

more details please read the section on the »Phase 

settings« menu option.

Up to 99 lap times can be recorded and accessed, 

each with a maximum duration of 99 minutes and 

59.9 seconds.

To stop the timer in question, tap the center ESC key 

of the left touch pad on the basic display after the 

fl ight is over. The lap or switch impulse counter is now 

shown in "normal" mode:

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Graubele

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

Lap 12 1:23.4

RX VOLT:4.9V

A simultaneously tap on the  or  keys of 

the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will 

reset the counter to "00" and deletes the stored 

times. However, the timers must have been stopped 

before this.

Notes:

• If you have selected a normal switch to operate 

the lap counter, take care to ensure that this 

switch is set to "OFF" before touching the center 

ESC key of the left touch pad.

• If you should forget to switch off the lap counter in 

a phase which is now not currently active, simply 

touch the center ESC key of the left touch pad.

To swap between the basic display and the 

"Lap Display" ...

01

02

03

04

SEL

01:23.4

02:34.5

03:45.6

05 SEL

04:56.7

05:67.8

07

08

09

10

00:00.0

00:00.0

00:00.0

11

12

00:00.0

00:00.0

06 06:78.9 00:00.0

13

14

15

16

00:00.0

00:00.0

00:00.0

17

18

00:00.0

00:00.0

00:00.0 1/6

... go to the line ...
158 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers

Lap Display

Timer 1

Timer 2

Timer 3

Lap time/Tim tab

0:00 –––

0:00

0:00

Lap display

0s

0s

0s

–––

–––

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

... and use the switch assigned. You assign this 

switch as described in the section "Assigning 

transmitter controls, switches and control switches" 

(page 56).
What is a mixer? 159

What is a mixer?

Basic functionality

With many models, a mix of the model's functions 

is often desirable, i.e. coupling aileron to rudder or 

coupling two servos together, in cases where rudder 

control surfaces with the same functionality are to be 

controlled together using a single servo. In all cases, 

the signal fl ow at the "output" of the control function 

on the transmitter control-side "branches" – , this also 

means: "downstream" of transmitter control options 

such as e.g. »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Control adjust«, 

»Channel 1 curve« etc. – in order for the signal to 

have its predefi ned effect on the "input" of another 

control channel and thus on another receiver output.

Example: V-tail mixer

3 3

4

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

4

V-tail mixer

Control function inputs

Control channels

(receiver outputs)

Elevator stick

Rudder stick

Right rudder / elevator

Left rudder / elevator

Rudder

Elevator

Elevator

Rudder

Rudder

Elevator

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter software contains a 

large number of pre-programmed coupling functions 

as standard, which are designed to mix together two 

(or more) control channels. Accordingly, the mixer 

named in the example just above can be activated in 

the "Tail" line of the »Model type« menu by selecting 

"V-tail".

In addition, for each model memory in the fi xedwing and helicopter programs , the software makes 

available a total of eight freely programmable linear 

mixers, four freely programmable curve mixers and 

four dual mixers.

Also be sure to read the general remarks about "free 

mixers" in this manual, beginning on page 192.
160 Detail program description - Wing mixers

»Mix only channel« (see page 205) and use it 

for another purpose with the help of a "free mixer" 

(see page 193).

• If "2AIL" is set in the »Model type« menu, page 

94, then fl ight-phase dependent fl ap functionality 

can be achieved with appropriate offset settings for 

input 5 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.

• For almost any menu option, you have the option 

of checking your settings by switching to the 

servo display screen, which is accessed with a 

simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of 

the left touch pad. 

Caution:

With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo 

display« move in the same manner and in the 

opposite manner with camber changing fl ap 

actuation.

• Note that if two fl ap servos have been selected, 

any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be 

decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors 

in operating the fl aps. The same applies to input 

10 and the selection "2AIL 4FL".

• A range of options are available for positioning 

fl aps. You can ...

a) ... simply accept one position per fl ight phase, 

by setting only the corresponding trim values. 

b) ... vary the fl aps positioned by a) with a 

transmitter control assigned to "Input 6" in 

the »Control adjust« menu, (page 108), 

and if desired by also selecting fl ight-phase 

dependency "PH" in the "Type" column. 

The selected transmitter control directly controls 

the two fl ap servos located on receiver outputs 6 

and 7 and, as required, also the two FL2 servos 

connected to outputs 9 and 10 – assuming that 

corresponding fl aps have been specifi ed on the 

"Aileron/camber fl aps" line in the »Model type«

menu. This transmitter control indirectly 

»Phase assignment«, page 148 menus, and these 

fl ight phases have been given names, the fl ight 

phase names will appear along the bottom display 

edge, e.g. «Normal».

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal 

All options can then also be programmed specifi c to a 

fl ight phase.

Comments:

• In the »Model type« menu, (page 94), control of 

the brake fl ap mixer can be reprogrammed from 

control input 1 to 7, 8 or 9 and a corresponding 

offset point can be set.

• Braking with raised ailerons and, if present, 

lowered fl aps (crow system) can be implemented 

by making appropriate settings on the "Crow" line 

of the "Brake settings" sub-menu.

• If you would like to alternate between the C1 stick 

controlling an electric drive system and a butterfl y 

system, then you can use the options in the 

"Motor" column on the »Phase settings« menu – 

refer to the example on page 279.

• You can also use the opportunity to set switch 

times for a "soft" transition from fl ight phase to 

fl ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu (see 

page 142).

• If your model features multiple wing fl aps and a 

"crow / butterfl y system" (see below), but without 

additional airbrakes, then you can separate output 

1 (usually freed up by the above system) from 

control function input 1 (throttle/brake stick) on the 

Wing mixers

Calibrating the wing fl ap system

Within the menu tree of the menu ...

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

... the sub-menus and options available depend 

entirely on the number of aileron and fl ap servos set 

up on the »Model type« menu, page 94 ... 

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 2AIL

M O D E L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

... which means that the only settings listed are the 

ones that can actually be confi gured. The resulting 

menu structure gains not only in clarity but also 

prevents potential programming errors.

For example, if "2AIL" has been preset, display of the 

»Wing mixers« menu would appear (without camber 

fl aps) as shown below:

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5



If various fl ight phases are envisioned in the 

settings of the »Phase settings«, page 142, and 
Detail program description - Wing mixers 161

controls the fl ap position of the ailerons via the 

percentage value entered in the "Ail" (and "Ail2") 

column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-fl ap menu.

 However, in order to improve control sensitivity 

for fl ap settings, travel should be reduced to 

about 25 % in "Input 6" line of the »Control 

adjust« menu.

c) ... alternatively, you can also leave the default 

entry of "0 %" in the "AILE" (and "AIL2") column 

on the "FLAP" line of the multi-fl ap menu, and 

use the »Control adjust« menu to assign both 

input 6 and input 5 to the same transmitter 

control. You can then set the degree to which 

both fl ap pairs are affected, optionally making 

this fl ight phase-dependent by selecting "PH" 

in the "Type" column, with the respective travel 

adjustment.

Basic programming procedure

1. Select the desired line with the  selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad.

Depending on the line selected, the bottom line of 

the display will either show the "Next page" icon 

() or a switch icon.

2. Depending on the line selected, you will either 

switch to the next page – on which you carry out 

the same procedure as below – or the desired 

value fi eld is activated by tapping the center SET

key of the right touch pad.

3. Use the selection keys to set the mixer ratio or 

degree of differential.

To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move the 

transmitter control or joystick to its center position, 

so that the marker frame surrounds both value 

fi elds. To confi gure asymmetric values, move the 

transmitter control/joystick to the corresponding side.

Negative and positive parameter values are 

possible, in order to be able to adjust the 

respective function to the direction of servo 

any mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu. 

Otherwise, the mixer travel is expanded back to 

100 % automatically.

All other mixers in the »Wing mixers« menu have 

their neutral point with the control at its center, i.e. 

they have no effect at this control position. The value 

set is mixed in at full travel.

Mixer functions

The individual options in the »Wing mixers« menu 

are discussed below, separately for single-, dualand multi-fl ap models. Before we start, a number of 

remarks on the differentials for ailerons and fl aps:

Aileron differential

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal 

Fl-Pos.

Diff.

Ail-tr

AI

Normal AILE

+100%

WK2

FLAP

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% +100% +100%

For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated on 

an aileron oriented downwards is greater than that 

generated by the same aileron when it is oriented 

upwards by the same amount. One effect of this 

unequal distribution of drag produces is a yawing 

motion around the vertical axis and, accordingly, a 

"turning away" from the intended direction of fl ight, 

which is why this undesirable side effect is also 

rotation or fl ap orientation.

4. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry value 

in the given active (inverse video) fi eld back to its 

default value.

5. Complete the entry with a tap on the center ESC

key of the left touch pad or the center SET key of 

the right touch pad.

Assigning switches

Wing mixers "Aileron 2  4 rudder" and "Flaps 6 

3 elevator" can be made optionally on/off switchable 

by way of a switch or expanded switch. Accordingly, 

when the respective line is selected, the familiar 

switch symbol ( ) will appear on the lower edge of 

the screen.

Switching delays

The delay time or switch time confi gured on 

the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, for the 

respective fl ight phase also affects all wing mixers 

and thus avoids abrupt changes to fl ap confi gurations 

when switching between the fl ight phases.

Mixer neutral points (Offset)

For all mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu, the 

"brake offset" to be set on the »Model type« menu is 

to be confi gured to the transmitter control position at 

which the airbrakes are retracted.

Accordingly, in the "Brake offset" line of the »Model 

type« menu, see page 94, specify Input 1, 7, 8 or 

9 and the offset to accommodate personal piloting 

habits. When selecting "input 1", please note also 

that you may need to specify your desired "Throttle 

min" position "forward/back" before establishing the 

offset point in the "Motor at C1" line.

Note:

If the offset is not set right at the end of the 

transmitter travel, the rest of the travel is a "dead 

zone", i.e. the transmitter control does not infl uence 
162 Detail program description - Wing mixers

used today offers considerable benefi ts.

The degree of differential can be changed at any 

time, for example, and, in extreme circumstances, 

the downward defl ection of an aileron, in what is 

termed a "split" position, can be suppressed entirely. 

This approach not only reduces or even suppresses 

"adverse yaw", but can, in certain circumstances, 

even generate a positive yaw: in such cases, an 

aileron command will generate a yaw about the 

vertical axis in the direction of the turn. For large 

glider models in particular, this approach lets such 

aircraft fl y "clean" turns using just the ailerons, which 

is not otherwise possible unaided.

The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it 

possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, 

regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron 

servos. While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage, 

i.e. no differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %" represents 

the "split" function. 

For aerobatic fl ying, low absolute values are required 

to ensure the model rotates exactly along its 

longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. 

Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical 

for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting 

(-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope fl iers, where 

ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if channels 

are assigned properly.

Diff. (Differentiation)

Fl-Pos.

Diff.

Ail-tr

AL

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP FL2

+100%

0% 0%

+100%

+100% 0% +100% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% +100% +100%

0%

The "AI" (topmost) line in the Multi-fl ap menu can 

be used to set the extent to which the fl aps act as 

ailerons and follow the aileron joystick.; this value is 

entered as a percentage. The fl aps differential – to 

be set on the line "Diff." (two lines below) – works in 

a similar way to the aileron differential, i.e. where an 

aileron command acts on the fl aps, the respective 

defl ection downwards can be reduced.

The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes 

it possible to set a differential appropriate for each 

side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the 

servos. A value of 0 % is equal to normal linkage, i.e. 

the servo travel downwards is the same as the travel 

upwards. A value of -100 % to +100 % means that 

travel downwards will be reduced to zero for aileron 

commands affecting the fl aps ("split" mode). 

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if channels 

are assigned properly.

termed "adverse yaw". This effect is naturally greater 

on the comparably long aerofoils possessed by model 

gliders, compared to e.g. powered aircraft models, 

which generally have relatively short moment arms. 

For the former, it must normally be compensated for 

by making a simultaneous rudder defl ection in the 

opposite direction. However, this rudder defl ection 

also generates drag and therefore further degrades 

fl ight characteristics. 

If, on the other hand, a differential is applied to the 

aileron orientations, by giving the aileron oriented 

downwards a smaller defl ection than the aileron 

oriented upwards, the (undesirable) adverse yaw can 

be reduced – and possibly entirely negated. However, 

the basic precondition for this is that each aileron 

must have its own servo present, which can therefore 

also be embedded straight into the aerofoils. In 

addition, the shorter linkage paths produce an 

additional benefi t: reproducible aileron confi gurations 

that also exhibit less "play".

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (Split)

Unlike mechanical solutions, which not only 

commonly need to be designed and built in when 

constructing the model but also produce a slightly 

increased "play" in the control system for strong 

differentials, the transmitter-based differential typically 
Detail program description - Wing mixers 163

Model type: "1AIL"

If you have entered "1AIL" for the "Aileron/camber 

fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), 

then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will 

match the following screen image:

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

2 4 rudder –––

Normal 

From the fi rst line on this display screen, you can 

switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad ...

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor 

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu 

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase 

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the 

currently active fl ight phase. Switch the fl ight phase if 

required:

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS



Normal

Since you cannot set up a butterfl y or aileron 

differential in a model with only a single aileron servo, 

this menu offers no further confi guration options with 

the exception of a "pointer" to the "Elevat curve" submenu. Therefore, move ahead from here with another 

Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is 

defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented 

aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of 

around 50 % is usually highly appropriate. 

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to 

the neutral point of the aileron joystick. 

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

0%

L – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Elevator

Normal

If required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need 

to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are 

extended, you can program an appropriate automatic 

mixer affecting the elevator at this point.

For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, 

please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option 

text beginning page 128.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

2 4 rudder –––

Normal

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder 

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used 

in particular in connection with aileron differential to 

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y 

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate 

commands to the rudder. 

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the 

direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this 

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the 

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring 

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons 

or rudder if desired. 
164 Detail program description - Wing mixers

To confi gure the setting, fi rst position the brake control 

in the brake position at full travel (i.e. its end-point). 

Then, briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad and enter a suitable value using the selection keys 

on the left or right touch pad. To ensure a suffi ciently 

strong braking effect, note that you should try to lower 

the fl ap as low as is mechanically possible.

From the second line on this display screen, you 

can switch to the sub-menu "Elevat curve" by briefl y 

tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

0%

L – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Elevator

Normal

If required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you 

will need to set pitch trim compensation when 

the airbrakes are extended, you can program an 

appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at 

this point.

For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, 

please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option 

text beginning page 128.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

6

Normal

Flaps 6 3 elevator 0% 0% –––

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder 

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used 

in particular in connection with aileron differential to 

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y 

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate 

commands to the rudder. 

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the 

direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this 

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the 

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring 

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons 

or rudder if desired. 

Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is 

defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented 

aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of 

around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to 

the neutral point of the aileron joystick.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Elevator 3  6 fl aps

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

6

Normal

Flaps 6 3 elevator 0% 0% –––

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns 

and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the 

fl ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The 

mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are 

defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented 

upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented 

elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This mixer can 

be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the 

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring.

To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move 

Model type: "1AIL 1FL"

If you have entered "1AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/

camber fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 

94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter 

will match the following screen image:

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

6

Normal 

Flaps 6 3 elevator 0% 0% –––

From the fi rst line on this display screen, you can 

switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad ...

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor 

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu 

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase 

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the 

currently active fl ight phase. Switch the fl ight phase if 

required:

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

QR

0%

WK2

0%

FLAP

0%

Appropriate to the model type selected, you can now 

enter a suitable value in the "Crow" line to lower the 

fl ap when you activate the brake control – which is 

typically the C1 joystick.
Detail program description - Wing mixers 165

the elevator joystick to its center position, so that 

the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To 

confi gure asymmetric values, move the joystick to 

the corresponding side.

Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible, 

so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo 

rotation or direction of fl ap defl ection.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

The "typical" values confi gured for this mixer are 

single-digit or low two-digit values.

Flaps 6  3 elevator

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator flaps 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

6

Normal

Flaps 6 3 elevator 0% 0% –––

This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim) 

compensation when a fl ap command is given. This 

typically enables you to adjust the model's airspeed 

automatically when fl aps are lowered.

If you have used the »Control adjust«, page 108, to 

assign Input 6 to a transmitter control or switch then 

this also affects this mixer.

Depending on the position of the fl ap control, either 

a symmetrical or asymmetric setting within the range 

±150 % is possible.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by 

assigning a switch in the right column.

The values confi gured for this mixer are typically in 

the single-digit range.

Model type: "2AIL"

If you have entered "2AIL" for the "Aileron/camber 

fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), 

then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will 

match the following screen image:

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal 

From the fi rst line on this display screen, you can 

switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad ...

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor 

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu 

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase 

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the 

currently active fl ight phase. Switch the fl ight phase if 

required:

Elevator curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

0%

WK2

0%

WK

0%

Diff.- reduct

Depending on the model type selected, setting 

options will now be available in the "Crow" and 

"Diff(erential)reduct(ion)" lines for the column 

labeled "AILE". These options should be utilized by 

...

• ... putting the transmitter control for "Brake" 

(refer to the »Model type« menu description on 

page 94) – typically the C1 joystick – in its limit 

position in the brake direction. Switch to the "Crow" 

line, briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad and use the selection keys on the left 

or right touch pad to set a value that moves the 

aileron upwards as far as possible to brake the 

model or, if you are using airbrakes as the main 

braking system, the aileron should be set to elevate 

only minimally to provide an extra braking effect.

Note:

To reliably prevent the servos mechanically 

striking their end-stops – which draws a heavy 

current – you can set an appropriate limit value 

in the column labeled "– limit +" in the »Servo 

adjustment« menu, page 102.

• ... then fi nally, moving to the "Diff. reduct" line, set a 

% value there which is greater than or equal to that 

value set (or to be set) in the "Aileron differential" 

line of the display screen "before" this one.

In this way, you can suppress the aileron 

differential when braking, thus ensuring that you 

can count on suffi cient aileron response despite 

your ailerons being defl ected upwards.

From the lowest line, "Elevator curve", you can switch 

to setting the "Elevator curve" mixer by briefl y tapping 

the center SET key of the right touch pad:
166 Detail program description - Wing mixers

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

0%

L – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Elevator

Normal

If required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need 

to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are 

extended, you can program an appropriate automatic 

mixer affecting the elevator at this point.

For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, 

please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option 

text beginning page 128.

Aileron differential

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal 

The adjustment range of ±100 % makes it possible 

to set the correct direction of differential, regardless 

of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. 

While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage, i.e. no 

transmitter-side differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %" 

represents the "split" function.

For aerobatic fl ying, low absolute values are required 

to ensure the model rotates exactly along its 

longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. 

Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical 

for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting 

(-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope fl iers, where 

ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (Split)

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if channels 

are assigned properly.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder 

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used 

in particular in connection with aileron differential to 

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y 

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate 

commands to the rudder. 

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the 

direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this 

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the 

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring 

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons 

or rudder if desired. 

Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is 

defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented 

aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of 

around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to 

the neutral point of the aileron joystick.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Elevator 3  5 aileron

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns 

and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the 

aileron function follow controls sent to the elevator. 

The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the 

fl aps are defl ected downwards when the elevator is 

oriented upwards and vice versa for a downwardoriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This 

mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with 

one of the switches or a control switch that is not 

self-restoring.

To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move 

the elevator joystick to its center position, so that 

the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To 

confi gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter 

control to the corresponding side.
Detail program description - Wing mixers 167

Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible, 

so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo 

rotation or direction of aileron defl ection.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low twodigit range.

Model type: "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL"

If you have entered "2AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/

camber fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu 

(page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your 

transmitter will match the following screen image:

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Flaps elevator 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

6

4

3

Normal 

Multi-flap menu

If, on the other hand, "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL" has been 

entered for the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the 

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the "Wing mixers 

menu" on the transmitter should correspond to the 

fi gure below:

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Flaps elevator 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

6 4

3

Normal 

Multi-flap menu

Regardless of the combination of aileron and fl ap 

servos you choose, all of the parameters available 

can be adjusted separately for each fl ight phase.

Note:

For almost any menu option, you have the option 

of checking your settings by switching to the servo 

display screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous 

tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad. 

If you do, note however that the vertical lines on the 

»Servo display« move in the same direction for 

ailerons and in the opposite direction for fl aps.

Before we address the details of this menu we would 

like to provide a brief explanation of the different 

display modes for the multi-flap menu:

Model type: "2 AIL 1 FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as 

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the 

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations 

"AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following fl aps:

AI

left

FL FL AI

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu 

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of 

fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, 

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options 

available for the given model.

Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 1FL", the options for 

setting aileron functions to fl aps will be suppressed, 

as will all setting options throughout the (right-side) 

column labeled "FL2".

Fl.pos

AILE

FL

0%

Normal

EL FL

WK2

FLAP

+100%

0% 0%

0% 0% +100% +100% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

In addition, the settings for "Aile(ron) diff(erential)" 

are not found on the "multi-fl ap menu", as with "2AIL 

2/4FL", but one level higher in the "Wing mixers" 

menu, see the screenshot at top left.
168 Detail program description - Wing mixers

Model type: "2AIL 2FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as 

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the 

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations 

"AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following fl aps:

AI

left

FL

left

FL

right

AI

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu 

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of 

fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, 

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options 

available for the given model.

Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 2FL", all options 

for setting options for a second set of fl ap pairs will 

be suppressed throughout the (right-side) column 

labeled "FL2".

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP WK2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL

El Fl

0% 0% +100% +100% +100% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Model type: "2AIL 4FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as 

described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the 

»Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations 

"AILE", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the following fl aps:

AI

left

FL

left

FL2

left

FL2

right

FL

right

AI

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu 

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of 

fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, 

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options 

available for the given model.

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

AI

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP FL2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL

El Fl

0% 0% +100% +100% +100% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Model type: "4AIL 2FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as 

described on page 61and selected accordingly in the 

»Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations 

"AILE", "AILE2" and "FL" refer to the following fl aps:

AI

left

AI2

left

FL

left

FL

right

AI2

right

AI

right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu 

and its sub-menus vary according to the number of 

fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, 

page 94, the list contains only those set-up options 

available for the given model.

Therefore, with a preset to "4AIL 2FL", all options 

for setting options for the fi rst and second set of 

aileron pairs as well as those for the fl ap pair will be 

displayed throughout.

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

AILE2 FL

0%

+100% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% +100% 0%

0%

FL

El Fl

0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Model type: "4AIL 4FL"

If servos have been connected to the receiver as 

described on page 61and selected accordingly in the 

»Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations 

"AILE", "AILE2", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the 

following fl aps:

AI

left

AI2

left

FL

left

FL2

left

FL2

right

FL

right

AI2

right

AI

right

Since the "4AIL 4FL" selection represents the 

maximum possible number of wing servos, in addition 

to the columns labeled "AILE" and "AILE2" there will 

now also be columns available labeled "FLAP" and 

"FL2.
Detail program description - Wing mixers 169

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

AI

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

0% 0%

0% 0% 0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL

AILE2 FLAP

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

El Fl 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

Delta/fl ying wing type models with more than two 

wing fl aps

If the "ELEVON" tail type (for a delta-wing or fl ying 

wing model) has been selected and number of wing 

fl aps in the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Model 

type« menu conforms to that menu's description, then 

activation of the elevator joystick will normally result in 

as little movement for both ailerons as for the inside 

fl aps (FL) and, if present, (FL2). The reason for this is 

the default mixer ratio of 0 % for all wing fl aps set for 

the "ELFL" mixer found in the "Multi-fl ap" menu:

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL

El Fl

0% 0% +100% +100% +100% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Accordingly, you must fi rst specify your desired 

elevator control on the "EL  FL" line. Take care to 

ensure that up/down activation occurs in the right 

sequence.

Note:

The "Brake settings" sub-menu (see next double 

page) is also suitable for setting up the butterfl y 

(crow) function with delta and fl ying wing models. In 

fi ne-tuning the defl ection of the fl ap pairs AIL, FL and 

(if present) FL2, however, ensure that the moments 

created by one pair of fl aps compensate the moments 

created by the other pair of fl aps in each case. For 

example: the "up" effect of ailerons when defl ected up 

should be compensated by a "down" effect from fl aps 

when they are lowered.

Multi-fl ap menu

AI (Aileron  camber fl aps)

(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP FL2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

The "AI" line can be used to make fl ight-phase 

dependent settings for the percentage of aileron 

action to result for the camber fl ap pair "FLAP" and, if 

present, also "FL2" when aileron control is exercised. 

(In the "AILE" column it is also possible to adjust the 

defl ection of the aileron pair, if required.) Normally, 

however, the fl aps should follow the ailerons with less 

of a defl ection, i. e. the mixer ratio should be smaller 

than 100 %. 

The adjustment range of -150 % to +150 % means 

the direction of defl ection can be adjusted, depending 

on the direction of rotation of the servos, to suit the 

ailerons.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active 

(inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the 

fi gure.
170 Detail program description - Wing mixers

AiI-tr. (aileron trim)

(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP FL2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

In this line, you specify the percentage rate with 

which aileron trim is to affect "AILE", "FLAP" and – if 

present – "FLAP2".

The available range of values is -150 % to +150 %, 

relative to the adjustment range of the trim wheel.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right 

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse 

video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gure.

Diff. (Differential for aileron function)

(With "2AIL 1FL", at one level higher in the 

»Wing mixers« menu, see fi gure on the previous 

double page.)

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP FL2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

On this line, you set the aileron differential, plus the 

differential for the FLAP and FLAP2 wing fl aps – if the 

latter are being activated as ailerons.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (split)

AI FL FL2

FL2 FL AI

If you are unsure about the meaning of differential 

travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the 

start of this section on page 161.

The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct 

differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the 

direction of rotation of aileron and fl ap servos.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active 

(inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in 

the fi gure.

Fl.pos (fl ap position)

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP FL2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

Here, you set the fl ight phase-specifi c wing fl ap 

positions for all of the fl aps present on the model 

in question. In this way, you can specify the fl ap 

positions that apply to each fl ight phase. 

The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes 

it possible to set the correct direction of travel 

regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron 

and fl ap servos.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active 

(inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the 

fi gures.

FL (effect of fl aps)

This line specifi es the percentage of effect produced 

on aileron and fl aps by the settings (if applicable, also 

fl ight-phase dependent settings) made for Input 6 in 

the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Al

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP FL2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

For each fl ap pair, you can defi ne either a 

symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the 

transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to 

the relevant side.

If each travel adjustment is left at +100 % on the 

»Control adjust« menu, page 108, then values 

between 5 % and 20 % should generally be suffi cient 

here.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active 

(inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the 

fi gures. 

Note:

By default, NO transmitter control is assigned to input 

6 on the »Control adjust« menu. However, you can 
Detail program description - Wing mixers 171

assign a transmitter control or switch to this input 

at any time – also in a fl ight phase-dependent way 

– thus enabling different fl ap settings within a fl ight 

phase; see also example 2 on page 292.

El  Fl (elevator  fl ap) 

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns 

and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the 

fl ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The 

mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are 

defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented 

upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented 

elevator – i.e. in opposite directions.

For each fl ap pair, you can defi ne either a 

symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the 

transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or 

to the relevant side. Values in the range -150 % to 

+150 % are possible:

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE FLAP FL2

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100% 0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

El Fl 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active 

(inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the 

fi gures. 

The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low twodigit range.

If a switch is assigned in the next line, "El  FL"

then the effect produced on fl aps can be switched on 

and off with the elevator. 

Important general notice:

Do not let control surfaces and servos strike their 

mechanical end-stops when large defl ections 

are set! This is especially relevant in relation 

to the functions "AI", "FL" and possibly 

"FL2". Use the "- limit +" option (travel limit) 

available in the "Servo adjustments" menu 

(page 102), as required.

El  Fl offset (elevator) 

Fl.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr

Normal AILE FLAP FL2

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100% 0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

El Fl 0% 0% 0% 0% +100% +100%

A value entered into the "El"  Fl" line offers support 

to the elevator during tight curves and aerobatics. 

This "El"  Fl offset" line determines the offset 

value introductory point where this percentage of 

effect on fl aps is to take place for elevator action. 

• With an offset value of 0%, fl aps will be affected 

by elevator action beginning with the neutral 

position of the elevator joystick by the percentage 

set in the "El"  Fl".

• With an offset value other than 0 %, fl aps will be 

affected by movement of the elevator joystick, 

in either the "up" or "down" direction, only after 

reaching the preset offset point.

To set this offset point, put the elevator joystick at 

the offset point to be set (in either of the two possible 

directions). A brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad will store this position.

Tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad with 

the elevator joystick in its centered position to set the 

offset value back to 0 % again. If a switch is assigned 

in column "Switch", the effect produced on fl aps can 

be switched on and off with the elevator.

Brake settings

Notes:

• The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: 

"Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« 

menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the 

»Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to 

"yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Switch 

the fl ight phase if required:

• The "brake mixers" described below can also – 

and should also – be confi gured to be specifi c to 

individual fl ight phases.

Crow

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

0%

WK2

0%

FLAP

0%

Diff. reduct

FL2

0% 0% 0%

The "Crow" mixer function is actuated by control 

function 1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on the input assigned 

on the "Brake Offset" line in the »Model type« menu 

(see page 94).

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 2AIL2FL

M O D E L T Y PE

Brake Offset +100%

SEL

Input 1
172 Detail program description - Wing mixers

Note:

The Offset, i.e. the activation direction, is also set in 

the »Model type« menu, pager 94. This offset should 

be set to about +90 % of stick travel (if the C1 joystick 

is used, this is generally located at the forward 

position of the stick). To extend the fl aps, the stick 

must therefore be moved back towards the pilot. The 

remaining joystick travel of around 10 % then has no 

effect, although it is not "lost", since the control travel 

is automatically expanded back to 100 %.

Use the select fi elds of the columns labeled "AILE", 

"FLAP", "FL" and, if present, "FL2" to specify the 

extent and the direction that corresponding fl ap 

pairs are to follow when the airbrake control (control 

function 1, 7, 8 or 9) is operated. If the model has no 

airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver output 

free or set it in the »Mix only channel« menu to 

"MIXonly" to be able to use it elsewhere.

Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active 

(inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the 

fi gure. 

• "AILE" column

When braking the model as it comes in to land, 

neither of the two aileron fl aps should ever be 

defl ected more than half of the possible travel 

upwards, to ensure that enough travel is available 

to control the model along its longitudinal axis 

(aileron function).

AI

FL

FL2

FL2

FL

AI

• "FLAP" (and "FLAP2") column

As the model is braked on the landing approach, 

both pairs of fl aps can be set to defl ect by different 

amounts, e.g.:

AI

FL

FL2

FL2

FL

AI

AI

FL

FL2

FL2

FL

AI

• Combining AILE and FLAP for "Crow"

AI

FL

FL2

FL2

FL

AI

Though the airbrake mixers are set as described 

above, there is a special fl ap constellation, called 

"crow position" or "butterfl y", that can also be set. This 

airbrake setting causes both ailerons move moderately 

upward while the fl aps move downward as far as 

possible. Another mixer – see below, under the section 

"Elevat. curve" – is then used to trim the elevator such 

that the fl ight speed does not change signifi cantly in 

comparison to the normal fl ight position. Otherwise, 

there is a danger that the model loses too much speed 

and then, after the braking system is retracted (e.g. 

to extend a landing approach that was too short, for 

example), pancakes or even stalls.

A tip for "seeing" the effect of brakes:

lift the fl aps and look over and under the surface from 

the front. The larger the surface projected by the lifted 

fl ap, the greater the braking effect achieved.

Tips for activating airbrakes:

• When, in addition to aileron and camber fl ap 

servos, there is also a built-in servo for actuating 

wing airbrakes, it can be most simply connected 

to that receiver output – if free – whose input has 

been selected for the brake function, i.e. either 

on 1, 7, 8 or 9. If this is not possible then, as 

an alternative, use a free mixer to connect the 

selected brake control channel with the airbrake 

servo.

• To activate two airbrake servos, the best approach 

is to leave one servo on output 1 and to connect 

the second servo to a free output of your choice 

– for example, output 9. You then also assign this 

output to transmitter control 1 (as standard) on the 

»Control adjust« menu, page 108, see fi gure.

I9 0% +100%

I10

I11

I12

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

Cn1 ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

As you do, leave the settings for offset, travel, 

etc. at their default values. Also leave the default 

"GL" value in the column labeled "TYP" so that 

the second airbrake, like the fi rst, operates in the 

same way across all fl ight phases.
Detail program description - Wing mixers 173

AI

FL

FL

AI

Servo 1

Servo 9

You can assure yourself that this works as 

stated by accessing the »Servo display« menu, 

accessible from almost any menu level with a brief 

simultaneous tap on the  keys on the left touch 

pad (see page 262):

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

+100

0

0

0

+100

0

0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

If this relatively simply variant should prove 

impossible for whichever reasons, then the 

alternative is a solution with two free mixers – and 

potentially involving the »Mix only channel« 

menu, page 205.

In either case, however, the airbrake travels must 

then be fi ne-tuned on the »Servo adjustment« 

menu, page 102.

Diff. reduct

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

0%

WK2

0%

FLAP

0%

Diff. reduct

FL2

0% 0% 0%

Earlier, we discussed the problems with the butterfl y 

(crow) confi guration. Namely: that with the use of 

aileron differential, the aileron effect can be strongly 

(negatively) affected by the aileron elevation. This is 

fi rstly because further defl ection of the one aileron 

upwards is (almost) no longer possible and secondly 

because the downward-defl ected aileron – depending 

on the elevation and degree of differential 

confi gured – is often unable to achieve even its 

"normal" position.

To be able to restore the effect of the aileron altered 

in this way as far as possible, you should ensure 

that you make use of the automated "Differential 

reduction" feature. This feature continuously reduces 

the degree of aileron differential as the airbrake 

system is extended. The feature is confi gurable and 

can even be set to suppress differential entirely. 

A value of 0 % means that the "aileron differential" set 

at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry that 

equals the % value set for aileron differential means 

the differential is fully eliminated once the butterfl y 

function is at maximum travel, i.e. with fl aps fully 

extended. Setting a reduction value greater than the 

aileron differential confi gured will eliminate the latter 

even before the full travel of the airbrake joystick.

Values can be set in the range 0 to 150 %.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Elevat. curve (Brake  Elevator)

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

0%

WK2

0%

FLAP

0%

Diff. reduct

FL2

0% 0% 0%

If the airbrake control – to be set to 1, 7, 8 or 9 on the 

"Brake Offset" line of the »Model type« menu, page 

95 – is used to extend the fl aps as described previously 

for the "Brake settings" menu, this will often have a 

negative effect on the aircraft model's airspeed. This 

mixer can be used to compensate this type of effect by 

applying a corrective value to the elevator. 

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will switch to the display screen shown below:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

0%

L – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Elevator

Normal

Setting notices for "Elevat. curve" (Brake 

Elevator)

The offset set in the »Model type« menu, page 94, 

affects this mixer.

The vertical line on the display that indicates the 

position of the airbrake control only moves from 

the edge of the graph when the confi gured offset 

is exceeded. In doing so, airbrake control travel is 

automatically expanded back to 100 %, as described 

in the »Model type« menu.

Accordingly, the mixer's neutral point always lies on 

the left edge, independently of the offset confi gured.

Now adjust the elevator curve in the direction of the 

opposite end-point in accordance with requirements. 

Note that this method for setting the 5-point curve 

mixer follows the same principles that are applicable 

to the curve mixers, already described on page 128 in 

the context of the »Channel 1 curve« menu.
174 Detail program description - Wing mixers

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Aileron 2  4 rudder

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

2 4 rudder –––

Normal

Multi-flap menu

Flaps 6 3 elevator 0% 0% –––

Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder 

follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used 

in particular in connection with aileron differential to 

suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y 

"clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate 

commands to the rudder. 

The mixer direction is typically chosen to ensure that 

the rudder moves in the direction of the aileron that is 

defl ected upwards.

Settings are always made symmetrically relative to 

the neutral point of the aileron joystick.

The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the 

direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this 

mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the 

switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring 

so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons 

or rudder if desired. 

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

A value of around 50 % is generally an excellent 

starting point.

Flaps 6  3 elevator

Brake settings

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

2 4 rudder –––

Normal

Multi-flap menu

Flaps 6 3 elevator 0% 0% –––

When setting camber-changing fl aps, one side-effect 

can be to generate moments causing movement 

around the transverse axis. Equally, however, it may 

also be desirable that e.g. your aircraft model opts for 

a more pacey fl ight style with the fl aps slightly raised. 

This mixer can be used to achieve both results.

With this mixer, the extension of the fl aps – depending 

on the value confi gured – automatically ensures 

the elevator position follows suit. Symmetrical or 

asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of 

the fl ap control are possible.

If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by 

assigning a switch in the right column.

Values can be set in the range 150 to 150 %. The 

"typical" values confi gured for this mixer are singledigit or low two-digit values.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

Note:

If a transmitter control or switch has been assigned 

in the »Control adjust« menu, as described under 

"FL" on page 171, then that setting will also have 

an effect on this mixer. 

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

–25%

H – + 100

 O U T P U T

–25%

Elevator

Normal

The selected setting should certainly be tried out in 

suffi cient altitude and, if necessary, readjusted. When 

doing this, be sure to pay attention that the model 

does not slow down too much while the brake system 

is extended! Otherwise, you run the risk that, after the 

braking system is retracted, e.g. to extend a landing 

approach that was too short, for example, your model 

pancakes or even stalls.

Aileron differential

(Only for "2AIL 1FL". For the "2AIL 2/4 FL" selection, 

this is included on the Multi-fl ap menu, see page170.)

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

2 4 rudder –––

Normal

Multi-flap menu

On this line you can set the aileron differential for the 

two aileron servos.

If you are unsure about the meaning of differential 

travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the 

start of this section on page 161.

The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct 

differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the 

direction of rotation of aileron and fl ap servos.
For your notes 175
176 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Helicopter mixer

Flight phase-specifi c setting of collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor

In this menu ...

Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switches

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

... all of the fl ight phase-specifi c helicopter mixers are 

described, with the exception of the mixers for autorotation fl ight (discussed from page 190 onward.) 

These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a 

model helicopter.

For fl ight phase programming, see the menus:

• »Basic settings, model«, page 84

• »Phase settings«, page 146

• »Phase assignment«, page 148

When the switch for a specifi c fl ight phase is 

actuated, then the name of the given fl ight phase, 

e.g. «Normal», will be displayed at the lower left edge 

of the display screen:

Channel 1

Channel 1

Pitch

Throttle

Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

Roll

Throttle

Tail rot.

Nick

Nick

Throttle

Tail rot.

Swashplate rotation

Swashplate limiter

0%

0%

0%

0°

Off

Gyro suppression 0%



Gyro offset 0%

Normal

In each of these fl ight phases – with the exception 

of the auto-rotation phase – the typical helicopter 

mixing and coupling functions shown in the screenshot above are available for setting up the model 

helicopter. These functions are described in the fi rst 

part of this comprehensive chapter.

General information on mixers, 

(see also pages 159 and 192)

An arrow "" indicates a mixer. A mixer "branches 

off" the signal fl ow of a control function at a 

particular point, in order to use this fl ow to cause a 

predetermined effect on a further control channel 

and, ultimately, the receiver output. "Pitch ax  Tail 

rot" mixer means, for example, that when the pitchaxis joystick is actuated, the tail rotor servo must also 

react within the scope of its setting.

Basic programming procedure:

1. Select the mixer by using the selection keys of the 

left or right touch pad.

Depending on the mixer involved, the bottom 

display line will show either SEL or the  (indicating 

a change to a second page is necessary).

2. A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will permit direct settings for linear mixer 

ratios. Use the selection keys to set the mixer 

ratio.

Otherwise you will need to switch to the second 

screen page where you can set up the appropriate 

curve mixer.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of 

the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed 

value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 

0 %.

3. Another tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad will complete the entry.

4. A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad 

will cause a return to the previous display page.

Description of helicopter mixers

To set collective pitch curves as well as the two 

mixers, "Channel 1  Throttle" and "Channel 1 

Tail rotor", there are curve mixers available in all 

fl ight phases. Accordingly, these mixers also permit 

the programming of non-linear mixing ratios along 

the path of joystick travel, if required. Switch to the 

display screen for curve settings with a brief tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, see 

description below.

The curve is set up basically in the same way as the 

Channel 1 curve for helicopters, but we will describe 

it again here in detail using pitch confi guration as 

an example, to save you having to leaf through the 

manual.

In the remaining lines, fi rst activate the value fi eld and 

then use the selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to set a mixer value in the value fi eld (inverse 

video).

The settings available are rounded off with the 

"Swashplate limiter" option: This option can be set to 

restrict maximum defl ection of the swashplate servo 

in the sense of a limiter. Together, these settings 

confi gure the basic set-up of the helicopter model. 

In the "Autorotation" fl ight phase as described 

on page 190, however, the mixers "Channel 1 

Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rot" are not needed 

and therefore switched to a confi gurable default 

value.

Changed parameters can be reset to their respective 

default values at any time with a simultaneous tap on 

the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

Pitch (Pitch curve (Channel 1  Pitch))

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad to move to the "Pitch" line then tap 

briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer 177

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–50%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Normal

Unlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is 

only associated with the control curve of pitch servos, 

whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all servos 

controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.

Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 

curve" option thus functions as an input signal for 

the collective pitch curve programmed here: In the 

graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the 

throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows 

the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.

The control curve can be defi ned (separately per 

fl ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference 

points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.

Initially, however, fewer reference points are 

adequate for setting up the collective pitch curve. We 

recommend beginning with three reference points to 

start with. These three points, namely the two endpoints "Pitch low (L)" (= -100 % control travel) and 

"Pitch high (H)" (= +100 % control travel) plus a point 

at the center of control travel still to be set, defi ne an 

initially linear profi le for the pitch curve.

Programming details

First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, e.g. «Normal».

The throttle/collective pitch stick is used to move 

the vertical line in the graph between the two endpoints "Point L" (minimum pitch at -100 %) and "Point 

H" (maximum pitch at +100 % control travel): at the 

same time, the current joystick position is shown 

numerically on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). 

The point at which the vertical line crosses the 

curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at 

the maximum of 8 reference points within the range 

-125 % to +125 %. A control signal modifi ed in this 

way affects only the collective pitch servos. 

In the example to the left, the joystick is at exactly 0 % 

of control travel and also generates an output signal 

of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.

Up to six additional reference points can be set 

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the 

distance between neighboring reference points must 

not be less than approx. 25 %.

Setting reference points

Move the joystick. If the display shows a framed 

question mark, then you can set the next reference 

point with a tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by 

its number and the value fi eld to the right of the 

reference point number is highlighted:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Normal

1

The order in which up to six reference points 

are generated between the end-points "L" and 

"H" is irrelevant since these reference points are 

continuously renumbered automatically from left to 

right as they are entered.

Confi guring reference points

To confi gure a point, use the joystick to move the 

vertical line onto the point you wish to change. 

The number and current curve value of this point 

are displayed on the left side of the display, on the 

"Point" line. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad. Use the selection keys on the right 

touch pad to change the current curve value shown 

in the highlighted fi eld. The possible range is -125 % 

to +125 % and changes do not affect neighboring 

reference points. 

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+75%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

+75%

Normal

1

In this sample screen image, reference point "1" has 

been set to +75 %. 

If you wish, however, other points can also be set. At 

-50 %, for example ...

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–12%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–12%

Normal

2

1

... and/or a further point at +50 %:
178 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+88%

3 – + 100

 O U T P U T

2

+88%

Normal

1

3

To do so, use the joystick to move to the 

corresponding area. As soon as a "?" appears in the 

marker frame on the "Point" line, the respective point 

can be set by touching the selection keys of the right 

touch pad. Just as with other points, this can be set 

... 

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

0%

3 – + 100

 O U T P U T

2

0%

Normal

1

3

... or, reset again with a simultaneous tap on the 

or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). 

The "L" and "H" points, on the other hand, CANNOT 

be deleted. 

Trim point function

Alternatively, a jump up or down to reference 

points already set, L, 1 ... max. 6 and H, can be 

accomplished by using the  selection keys on the 

left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch 

pad can then be used to change the reference point 

jumped to as described above, entirely independently 

of the control position.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–25%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim point 1

In this simple example, the pitch joystick – represented 

by the vertical line – is halfway between "Pitch minimum" 

and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %). 

However, "Point 1" will be relocated to control center at 

a point value of +50 %, resulting in a momentary output 

value of -25 %.

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad terminates this trim point function.

Trim offset function

When a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is 

not only possible, as previously described, to jump 

up or down to reference points already set with the 

 selection keys of the left touch pad and to make 

a change with the selection keys of the right touch 

pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically 

repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the 

 keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a point 

value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves in both of 

the following fi gures have been vertically shifted within 

the ±25 % range by the trim offset function:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–25%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–25%

Normal

Trim offset

1

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+25%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

+25%

Normal

Trim offset

1

A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will 

also terminate this function.

Trim x-axis function

This function is activated by tapping the left () or 

right () selection key of the right touch pad with 

an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can 

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as 

you wish. In the fi gure below, "Point 1" which was just 

shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now 

be shifted to the left:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+67%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim X-axis 1

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned horizontally further 

away from the current control position than 

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line 

Point. This question mark does not refer to the 

repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es 

that a further point can be set at the current 

control position.
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer 179

• Please note that the percentage value on the 

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick 

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the collective pitch curve

In the example below, sample reference points have 

been set ...

reference point 1 to +50 %,

reference point 2 to +75 % and

reference point 3 to -50 %

... as described in the last section.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

3 – + 100

 O U T P U T

2

–50%

Normal

1

3

This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed 

automatically simply by pressing a button. 

Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief 

tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This 

will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) 

on" (or vice versa).

Pitch

Curve

on Point

Output

Input +50%

–50%

3 – + 100

 O U T P U T

2

–50%

Normal

1

3

Notes:

• If the joystick does not coincide with the exact 

reference point, please note that the percentage 

value on the "Output" line always relates to the 

current joystick position.

• The fi gures on these pages show control curves 

created only for the purpose of illustration. Please 

note, therefore, that the curve characteristics 

displayed do not in any way represent real-life 

collective pitch curves. A specifi c application 

example can be found in the programming 

examples on page 312.

The following three graphs show typical 3-point pitch 

curves for various fl ight phases, such as hovering, 

aerobatics and 3D fl ight.

The vertical bar depicts the current joystick position. 

Please note that trim values greater than +100 % and 

less than -100 % cannot be presented in the display.

Sample collective pitch curves for various fl ight 

phases: Output

Output

Output

Control travel Control travel Control travel

Hover Aerobatics 3D

Notice about marker keys:

If marker keys have been set in the »Basic settings, 

model« menu, page 91, touching a key while in 

this graph will set a dashed vertical line to show the 

position of the C1 joystick at the time the key was 

pressed.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

0%

Normal

Move the C1 joystick (continuous line) to the marker 

line in order to read out the input and output values.

If the marker line, for example, indicates momentary 

hovering fl ight and this is to be put exactly in control 

center then it is only necessary to transfer the 

"output" value of the marker line, in this example, shift 

control center to reference point "1".

Erasing reference points

To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use 

the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity 

of the reference point in question. As soon as the 

reference point number and its associated value is 

shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), 

following activation of the value fi eld on the "Point" 

line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on 

the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it 

can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap 

on the center key ESC of the left touch pad.

Channel 1  Throttle (Throttle curve)

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +25%

+25%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

+50%

Throttle

Normal

Unlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is 

only associated with the control curve of the throttle 

servo, whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all 

servos controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.

Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 

curve" menu thus functions as an input signal for 

the throttle curve programmed here: In the graph, 

the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/

collective pitch stick and therefore follows the 

current Channel 1 curve characteristic.

The throttle curve can also be defi ned (separately 
180 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

per fl ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference 

points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.

The reference points are defi ned, adjusted and 

erased in the usual way, as explained in the previous 

section on the collective pitch curve. Start by defi ning 

the throttle curve with three points, namely the points 

"L" and "H" at the extremes, plus the Point "1" still 

to be set in the control center in order to match the 

motor power curve to the collective pitch curve.

Helicopter with carburetor or electric drive 

system with speed CONTROLLER

This setting relates only to the control curve of the 

throttle servo or the speed controller.

Setting the throttle curve to suit a helicopter equipped 

with a speed controller is discussed in the following 

section.

As with the confi guration of the collective pitch curve 

(see previous page), the throttle curve can also be 

defi ned by up to 8 points.

• In each case, set the control curve so that 

when the throttle/collective pitch stick is in its 

end position, the carburetor is fully open or the 

controller of an electrically-powered helicopter is 

set to maximum (except for auto-rotation fl ight, 

see page 190).

• For the hover point, which is normally at the 

control center, the carburetor setting or power 

control for the speed controller must be matched 

to the collective pitch curve so that the correct 

system rotational speed is obtained. 

• At the minimum position of the throttle/collective 

pitch stick, the throttle curve must fi rst be 

confi gured so that a glow motor runs at a speed 

considerably higher than idle speed and the clutch 

is fi rmly engaged.

Starting and stopping of the motor – whether 

combustion or electric drive – always takes place 

within the given fl ight phase as a consequence 

of the throttle limiter and the "Thr. CutOff" option 

(see below).

This makes it unnecessary to program the two fl ight 

phases that may be familiar to you from using other 

remote control systems – namely "with idle-up" and 

"without idle-up", and with the associated "waste" of a 

fl ight phase for this purpose – since the mc-32 HoTT 

program offers a much more fl exible approach to fi netuning and optimizing increases to system rotational 

speed below the hover point than the "idle-up" 

approach taken by older mc remote control systems.

Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before 

starting a motor with carburetor, i.e. so that the 

carburetor can be adjusted within the idle range 

only with trim. Ensure that you follow the safety 

instructions on page 189 at all times. If the throttle is 

set too high when switching on the transmitter, you 

will receive audible and visible warnings!

#02 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

00:00h

M

V

Starlet Throttle

too

high! H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

The following three graphs show (typical) 3-point 

throttle curves for various fl ight phases, such as 

hovering aerobatics and 3D fl ight.

Sample throttle curves for various fl ight phases:

+100% +100% +100%

-100% -100% -100% Output Output Output

1 2 34 5 1 2 34 5 1 2 34 5

Control travel Control travel Control travel

Hover Aerobatics 3D

Notes on using the "throttle limit" function:

• The throttle limit function should be used in any 

case (»Control adjust« menu, page 117). At the 

rear limit of the default transmitter control, the 

right-side throttle limit proportional rotary slider, 

the throttle servo is completely decoupled from the 

throttle curve, the motor is at idle and will respond 

only to C1 trim. This option permits the motor 

to be started in any fl ight phase and to shut the 

motor off with the "Thr. CutOff" option. 
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer 181

Once the motor has started, push the throttle 

limiter s l o w l y in the direction of the opposite 

end-point to put actuation of the throttle servo fully 

under the control of the throttle/collective pitch 

joystick once again. In order to prevent the throttle 

servo from being restricted by the throttle limiter in 

the full throttle direction, set control travel on the 

plus-side of the column labeled "travel" to +125 % 

in the "Tl16" line of the »Control adjust« menu. 

Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" 

column alone, however, to confi gure this setting 

globally for all fl ight phases.

For a more fi nely-tuned control travel curve for 

the throttle limit control, you can also use the 

"Expo throttle limiter" (page 100). This gives 

you the option of defi ning the idle setting at the 

throttle limit control's center position, as readily 

determined both visually and audibly.

Set the throttle limiter to its center position and 

adjust the "EXPO thro lim." value as far as is 

needed until the motor is idling smoothly with 

the throttle limit control set at its center point. In 

this position, the motor will then start without any 

problems. To switch off, turn or push the throttle 

limit control – that is, without C1 cutoff trim – to its 

rearmost end-point. As you do, ensure that the 

affected servo cannot hit an end-stop mechanically.

The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is 

made visible as a horizontal bar in the diagram:

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +50%

+50%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

+50%

Throttle

Normal

The output signal for the throttle servo can never 

be higher than that set by the horizontal bar. In 

this example, about a maximum of +25 %.

• Since electric drive systems have no need for an 

idle setting, the basic confi guration of settings 

for an electrically-powered helicopter merely 

involves making sure that the control range of the 

throttle limiter is both higher and lower than the 

adjustment range of the speed controller (usually 

-100 % to +100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary, 

therefore, adjust the "travel" setting of the throttle 

limiter as appropriate on the "Tl16" line of the 

»Control adjust« menu. Leave the default value 

of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to 

confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases. 

Fine-tuning of the throttle curve itself, however, 

must take place in fl ight – as with a glow-powered 

helicopter.

• If you wish to record the fl ight time of a (glowpowered) helicopter, you can assign a control 

switch to the throttle limit slider, and then use this 

to switch a timer on and off; see page 135.

For auto-rotation fl ight, an automatic switch-over 

is made from this mixer to a confi gurable default 

value; see page 190. 

Helicopter with speed CONTROLLER

Unlike speed controllers, which merely adjust output 

level in a manner similar to a carburetor, a speed 

regulator keeps speed in the system it monitors 

constant by regulating its output autonomously. In 

the case of combustion motor powered helicopters, 

the regulator therefore controls the throttle servo 

itself as appropriate or, for an electric helicopter, the 

motor's speed controller. Therefore, speed regulators 

do not need a traditional throttle curve but rather only 

a speed setting. A deviation from the preset speed 

will therefore only take place if the level of output 

required exceeds the maximum level available.

Usually, receiver output 8 is reserved for connecting a 

speed regulator; refer to the receiver layout on page 

65. However, if this connection is used there will be no 

throttle limit function because the throttle limit function 

can only be implemented via the "Channel 1 

Throttle" mixer which is on the – then unused – output 6.

To make the comfort and safety features of a throttle 

limiter available, a speed regulator should be 

connected to receiver output 6 (contrary to the general 

connection notices) and only requires appropriate 

adaptation to the throttle curve so it can take over the 

task of the "conventional" transmitter control. 

Since in this case the "throttle curve" only regulates 

the target speed of the motor controller and this 

target motor speed should typically remain constant 

over the entire collective pitch adjustment range, the 

"Channel 1 Throttle" mixer must be used to set a 

horizontal line – i.e. every (pitch) input value will result 

in the same ("throttle") output value – whose "height" 

is defi ned by the target motor speed. 

First, therefore, the reference points "1" to "6" – if 

present and set – are erased. Following this, the 

reference points "L" (input = -100 %) and "H" 

(input = +100 %) are then each set to the same 

value, for example:
182 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Channel 1 

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+66%

L – + 100

 O U T P U T

+66%

Throttle

Normal

The value to be set depends both on the speed 

controller used and on the target motor speed that is 

desired, and can, of course, be varied according to 

the fl ight phase.

For auto-rotation fl ight, an automatic switch-over 

is made from this mixer to a confi gurable default 

value; see page 190.

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

+30%

H – + 100

 O U T P U T

+30%

Tail rot.

Normal

Starting with values of -30 % for point "L" and +30 % 

for point "H", the mixer is to be confi gured in such 

a way that the helicopter, even during prolonged 

vertically ascending or descending fl ights, does not 

deviate from the yaw axis as a result of the main 

rotor's altered torque while hovering. For hovered 

fl ight, trim should only be affected by way of the 

(digital) tail rotor trim wheel. 

For a reliable torque compensation setting, it is 

essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves 

have been set up correctly, i.e. that the rotor speed 

remains constant over the collective pitch's full 

adjustment range.

This third curve mixer applies only to the control 

curve of the tail rotor servo when the throttle/

collective pitch stick is moved, whereas the "Channel 

1 curve" (see page 131) acts on all servos that are 

affected by the throttle/collective pitch stick. Note that 

the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option also 

functions as an input signal for the tail rotor curve 

programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is 

synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick 

and follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic 

from the »Channel 1 curve« menu.

In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is 

automatically switched off.

Channel 1  Tail rot. (static torque compensation)

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

– + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Tail rot.

?

Normal

The default approach here is to preset a torque 

compensation curve with a linear mixer ratio of a 

uniform 0 %, as is required for a gyro sensor working in 

"heading lock mode" – see the screen image above. 

Important notice:

In this context, ensure that you comply with 

the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, 

you risk making adjustments that render your 

helicopter impossible to fl y.

If, on the other hand, you use your gyro sensor in 

the "normal" operating mode, or if it only has what is 

termed "normal mode", then confi gure the mixer as 

follows:

As with the confi guration of the collective pitch curve 

(see page 176), the control curve of the tail rotor 

can also be defi ned by up to 6 points. If required, 

therefore, you can modify the mixer at any time 

and preset both symmetrical and asymmetric mixer 

ratios both above and below the hover point. Before 

you do, however, ensure you have entered the 

correct direction of rotation for the main rotor on the 

»Helicopter type« menu.
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer 183

Tail rotor  throttle

Channel 1

Channel 1

Pitch

Throttle

Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

Throttle

Normal SEL

While the tail rotor normally compensates for the 

effect of main rotor torque on the fuselage, it is also 

used to control the helicopter around the vertical axis. 

Increasing tail rotor thrust requires a corresponding 

adjustment to motor power, however, to avoid a falloff in system rotational speed.

This mixer sets the extent to which the throttle 

follows the tail rotor. The throttle will follow on one 

side only, to the side on which the tail rotor thrust is 

increased. The setting range is therefore 0 to +100 %. 

The direction depends on the main rotor's direction 

of rotation (left or right), and this must fi rst be set 

correctly on the »Helicopter type« menu. For lefthand rotation systems, the throttle follows the tail 

rotor when the tail rotor joystick is moved to the left, 

and vice versa for right-hand rotation systems.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is 

automatically switched off.

Set-up notes:

To set the mixer value accurately you should either fi rst 

fl y several high-speed pirouettes against the direction 

of main rotor rotation or, if a strong wind is blowing, 

hover at right angles to the wind with a suffi ciently 

large tail rotor defl ection. Set the mixer value so that 

there is no fall-off in system rotational speed.

Increasing pitch is not the only change that requires a 

corresponding torque compensation via the tail rotor: 

major cyclic control movements also require this, e.g. 

if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. Here, too, 

the mc-32 HoTT program lets you confi gure settings 

for both types of tilt movement (roll and pitch-axis) 

separately.

For advanced aerobatics in particular, which involve 

very large control defl ections in the pitch-axis 

controls, e.g. the "Bo-turn" (vertical pull-up followed 

by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops, 

the uncompensated torque present in these fl ights 

causes the model to turn to a greater or lesser degree 

around the yaw axis. This spoils the appearance of 

the maneuver.

These two mixers permit static torque compensation 

to be activated by the swashplate tilting in any 

direction. The mixers work by always increasing tail 

rotor thrust, starting from the center point of the roll 

and pitch-axis sticks, i.e. they always generate a tail 

rotor defl ection in the same direction regardless of 

the direction of the command.

The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to 

+100 %.

The mixer direction is determined automatically by 

your defi nition of the direction of main rotor rotation 

on the »Helicopter type« menu, page 98.

In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is 

automatically switched off.

Gyro suppression

Roll Throttle 0%

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

0%

0%

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Gyro suppression 0%

Normal

Roll  Throttle and Pitch axis  Throttle

Channel 1 Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

Throttle

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

0%

0%

Normal

Increasing collective pitch is not the only change that 

requires the throttle to follow suit: major cyclic control 

movements also require this, i.e. if the swashplate is 

tilted in any direction. The mc-32 HoTT program lets 

you adjust the degree of throttle follow separately for 

roll and pitch-axis controls.

This offers particular advantages in aerobatic fl ying, 

e.g. when fl ying a roll: here, with moderate collective 

pitch values and the carburetor only about half-open, 

cyclic control travels are nonetheless executed that 

require much higher performance from the motor.

The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to 

+100 %. The correct mixer direction is automatically 

taken into account.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value 

in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.

In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is 

automatically switched off.

Roll  Tail rot. and Pitch axis  Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

Throttle

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

0%

0%

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Normal
184 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Important: in normal situations, this function 

should not be used if your model is fi tted with a 

modern gyro system. In this context, ensure that 

you comply with the instructions on adjusting your 

gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render 

your helicopter impossible to fl y. This menu has 

nonetheless been retained in order to cater to a full 

range of requirements and fl ying habits.

With this option, the effect of the gyro sensor 

("gyro") can be varied according to the tail rotor 

joystick position; this assumes the use of a gyro 

system whose gyro gain can be controlled from the 

transmitter via an auxiliary channel. This channel will 

be channel 7 for Graupner remote control systems. 

The gyro suppression function reduces gyro gain in a 

linear progression as the pilot increases the tail rotor 

defl ection. Without gyro suppression – i.e. when set 

to 0 % – the gyro effect is constant, regardless of the 

joystick position.

With a transmitter control assigned on the "Gyr7" 

line on the »Control adjust« menu (page 116), 

e.g. one of the proportional sliders mounted in the 

middle console; as applicable, also made fl ight-phase 

dependent and/or with infi nitely variable gyro effect 

between minimum and maximum. In this case, gyro 

gain is maximum at full defl ection of the slider, and 

zero at the opposite end-point.

Of course, the software lets you limit the gyro gain 

range on both sides by altering the transmitter 

control travel.

Depending on the transmitter control's position, the 

gyro gain at full travel on the tail rotor joystick is:

"current control position

minus

gyro suppression value".

Accordingly, if the transmitter control is at the 

neutral point, and gyro suppression is set to 100 %, 

the gyro gain is reduced to zero as the tail rotor 

if the assigned transmitter control is moved to the 

+50 % position (as shown here); and only at >150 % 

suppression is gain reduced to zero with the slider 

at this position, well before full tail rotor defl ection.

Exemple:

+50 %

Í Gyro gain 

Î

left

Stick deflection tail rotor

centre right

Range of 

transmitter

control 7

• Linear gyro suppression with reduced control 

travel, e.g. -50 % to +80 % of full travel. 

Gyro gain is infi nitely variable within these transmitter 

control limits. Here too, for purposes of illustration, 

we plot gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor 

defl ection for various parameter values of gyro 

suppression.

Exemple:

+80 %

Í Gyro gain 

Î

left

Stick deflection tail rotor

centre right

Range of

transmitter

control 7

Adjusting the gyro sensor

To achieve the maximum possible level of 

stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the 

defl ection increases. For values between 100 % and 

the maximum value of 199 %, the gyro can be fully 

suppressed – depending on the transmitter control 

position – well before full defl ection of the tail rotor; 

see the diagram on the next page.

For the Graupner/JR gyro NEJ-120 BB, order no. 

3277, both the upper and the lower values are set via 

rotary controls: control 1 sets the minimum gyro gain 

at the bottom position of the slider; control 2 sets the 

maximum gain at the top end-point of the slider; the 

transition between these two values occurs roughly in 

the middle of the slider travel. 

In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and 

PIEZO 3000 gyro systems feature proportional, 

infi nitely variable adjustment of gyro gain; see below 

for typical diagrams.

As an example, the option to confi gure fl ight 

phase-specifi c – and static – gyro gain gives you 

the opportunity to exploit maximum stabilization for 

normal, slow fl ying, but to reduce gyro gain for fast 

circuits and aerobatics.

Samples of various gyro settings and confi guration 

notes

• Linear gyro suppression: 0 % to 199 %. 

With the tail rotor joystick in the center position, 

the resulting gyro effect is set using the selected 

transmitter control. Using a proportional rotary 

control or slider, the effect is infi nitely variable 

between zero ("min") and maximum ("max"), 

provided transmitter control travel is not restricted. 

With full tail rotor defl ection, the effective gyro gain 

is as follows:

"current control position

minus

gyro suppression value".

This means that at 0 % gyro suppression, gyro 

gain is constant for tail rotor joystick movement; 

at 50 % suppression, gyro gain is reduced to half 
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer 185

vertical axis, observe the following:

• The controls should have as little friction and 

"play" as possible.

• There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.

• Use a strong and comparably fast servo. 

When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the 

faster its response – a corresponding corrective 

change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further 

the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing 

the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better 

the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the 

response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail 

will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. 

Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be 

made to eliminate the oscillation.

If the model is fl ying forward at high speed or 

hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the 

stabilizing effect of the vertical fi n combined with the 

gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again 

manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve 

optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, you 

can make use of the option to adjust gyro gain from 

the transmitter using a transmitter control assigned to 

input "7", in connection with gyro suppression and/or 

the two settings on the Gyro NEJ-120 BB. 

Further notes on gyros with confi gurable multilevel 

gyro gain (e.g. NEJ-120 BB)

Since you cannot specify the gyro gain from the 

transmitter proportionally via the transmitter control, 

the gyro's own control 1 must be used to set the 

(weaker) gyro gain (e.g. for aerobatics) and control 

2 the stronger gyro gain (e.g. for hovered fl ight). 

Even though a proportional control is used for control 

function 7, only a switch-over between these two 

values takes place and the setting is therefore not 

proportional. 

You should therefore advance control 2 to the point 

where the model is on the brink of oscillating when 

hovering in calm conditions, and advance control 1 to 

SEL

Roll Tail rot.

Nick Throttle

0%

0%

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Gyro suppression 0%

Gyro offset 0%

Normal

Based on these fl ight-phase specifi c (offset) settings, 

gyro gain can also be infi nitely varied by a transmitter 

control assigned in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control 

adjust« menu, page 116.

Swashplate rotation

SEL

Nick Throttle 0%

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Gyro suppression 0%

0%

Swashplate rotation 0°

Gyro offset

Normal

Some rotor head control systems make it necessary 

to incline the swashplate in a different direction from 

the intended inclination of the rotor plane when 

a cyclic control command is given. If your model 

features a four-bladed main rotor, for example, you 

may need to use this menu to set up a softwaredriven 45° rotation of the control linkage to the right, 

so that the pushrods from the swashplate to the 

rotor head can be set exactly vertical, ensuring that 

the blade control system works correctly, without 

unwanted differential effects. This eliminates the need 

to make mechanical changes to the control linkages. 

Negative angles equate to a virtual rotation of the 

rotor head to the left; positive angles a virtual rotation 

to the right.

the point where the model does not oscillate with its 

tail even when fl ying at maximum speed into a strong 

headwind. Depending on the state of the weather 

and the fl ight program planned, you can also switch 

over the gyro gain from the transmitter – also with 

gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor defl ection if 

required.

Gyro offset

Important notice:

The value of this option is identical to the offset 

value set in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control 

adjust« menu, page 116. For this reason, any 

changes made always affect the other menu 

directly – and vice versa.

Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature 

infi nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but 

also offer a choice of two separate types of gain 

mode on the transmitter. 

If the gyro in use has at least one of these features 

then this alternative offset setting provides an 

opportunity to preset both "normal" gyro gain as well 

as, as appropriate, to specify a "heading-lock mode" 

whereby, even within this pre-selection, gyro gain can 

be reduced by a particular gain type for normal, slow 

fl ight with maximum fl ight stabilization, fast circuit 

fl ights and aerobatics. 

To proceed as described above, use fl ight phase 

switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro 

offset" line. Values between -125 % and +125 % are 

possible:
186 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

Swashplate limiter

SEL

Nick Tail rot. 0%

Gyro suppression 0%

0%

Swashplate rotation 0°

Swashplate limiter off

Gyro offset

Normal

This function works like a circular mechanical 

surround acting upon the stick which controls the 

swashplate, restricting the normally square stick 

travel to a circular range. In fact, if the helicopter is 

set up in such a way that the defl ections for roll and/

or pitch-axis exploit the maximum travel mechanically 

possible, e.g. for 3D helicopters, then the total tilt 

applied to the swashplate if full roll and pitch-axis 

commands are applied simultaneously will be 

considerably greater (141 % in numerical terms). The 

swashplate mechanism may then strike its end-stops 

and, in the worst case, the ball-links could even be 

disengaged.

The mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter contains a 

confi gurable software 

function for limiting the 

total swashplate travel, 

i.e. it restricts the tilt angle 

of the swashplate from 

100 % (the travel is limited 

to the value obtainable 

either with roll or pitchaxis alone) to 149 % (no effective limit). In addition, 

the function can be set to "Off" and hence completely 

deactivated. The swash limiter can also be confi gured 

per model and per fl ight phase. 

This software solution is therefore much more fl exible 

than a physical circular surround attached to the stick 

unit: the latter can, in any case, only be used if the roll 

and pitch-axis functions are controlled by a common 

stick unit.

The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 100 % 

setting. the cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed 

and appears as a "dead zone".

If this function is used, "Dual Rate" should be set to 

100 % and Dual Rate values above 100 % should also 

not be used. If not, and you set a swashplate limit of 

100 %, for example, then swashplate movement will 

be restricted even if roll and pitch-axis commands are 

given separately.

Setting range: 100 ... 149 % and "off".
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer 187

Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curve

Practical approach

Although the throttle and collective pitch control 

systems are based on separate servos, they are 

always operated together by the throttle/pitch joystick 

(except during autorotation fl ight). This coupling is 

performed by the helicopter program automatically. 

In the mc-32 HoTT program, the trim wheel of control 

function 1 acts principally only on the throttle servo. 

However, in the »Stick mode« menu (see page 106) 

a decision can be made if this should be used for idle 

trimming as part of the throttle limit function, or for 

idle trimming during the auto-rotation phase ("throttle 

AR").

The process of fi ne-tuning throttle and collective 

pitch, i.e. setting the motor power curve to match 

the collective blade pitch setting, is the most 

important aspect of setting up a model helicopter. 

The mc-32 HoTT software provides for independent 

confi guration of the throttle, collective pitch and torque 

compensation curves, in addition to the C1 control 

curve (»Channel 1 curve« menu, page 131). 

While these curves can be modeled using up to 

six points, fewer points are generally suffi cient. We 

recommend starting with three-point curves to begin 

with. This involves setting individual values for the 

center point and other (optional) reference points, 

and for the two end-points ("L", "low", and "H", "high") 

of the throttle/collective pitch stick: together, these 

defi ne the control curves. 

Before setting the throttle and collective pitch 

function, the rods of all servos should be 

mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to the 

set-up instructions for the given helicopter.

Note:

The hover point should normally be set to the 

center position of the throttle / collective pitch 

stick. In special cases, e.g. for "3D" fl ight, 

deviating hover points can also be programmed. 

For example, one point for normal fl ight attitude 

above the center and one point for inverted fl ight 

attitude below the center.

Idle setting and throttle curve

Note:

Since electric drive systems have no need for 

an idle setting, motor idling does not need to be 

calibrated. Fine-tuning of the throttle and collective 

pitch curve(s), however, must take place as for glowpowered helicopters.

The idle setting, whose detailed description begins 

on page 117, always takes place with the throttle 

limiter closed – normally with the trim wheel of the 

C1 function and only in special cases is the throttle 

limiter itself also utilized (as standard, the CTRL 6 

proportional rotary control). 

The programming of a corresponding value for the "L" 

point of the throttle curve acts to set the descent speed 

of the motor, without infl uencing the hover confi guration.

Here, for example, fl ight phase programming can be 

used to set different throttle curves. This increased 

system rotational speed below the hover point proves 

to be useful in certain circumstances, e. g. for fast, 

steep landing approaches with greatly reduced 

collective pitch, and for aerobatics.

The fi gure depicts a curve with a 

slightly changeable throttle setting 

below the hover point at the control 

center. 

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Different throttle curves are programmed to be 

fl ight-phase dependent in order to achieve the given 

optimal adaptation to hovering fl ight as well as 

aerobatics:

• Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle 

control response and low noise when hovering

• Higher rotor speed for aerobatics with motor power 

set close to the maximum. In this case, the throttle 

curve must also be adjusted in the hover range. 

Basic set-up procedure

Even though pitch and throttle curves can be set 

electronically over a wide range with the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter, all linkage in the model should already 

be mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to 

the instructions for the given helicopter. Experienced 

helicopter pilots will be glad to help with this basic 

set-up.

The carburetor linkage must be set so that the throttle 

is just past the fully open setting with collective pitch 

set to maximum or, for electric helicopters, with the 

speed controller set to full. When the throttle limiter is 

closed, however, it must be possible to just close off 

the carburetor using the C1 trim wheel (rapid throttle 

setting of the "digital trim", see page 58 ), without the 

servo mechanically striking its end-stop. For electric 

helicopters, it must be possible to cut the electric 

motor's speed controller safely with the throttle limiter 

closed.

Take great care when confi guring these settings, 

by adjusting the control linkage as required and/or 

altering the linkage point on the servo or carburetor 

lever. Only then should the throttle servo's fi ne-tuning 

be electronically optimized.

Caution:

Inform yourself thoroughly about the dangers and 

safety precautions applicable to handling motors 

and helicopters before starting the motor for the 

fi rst time!

With this basic set-up complete, the motor should 

be started in accordance with the motor operating 

instructions: idling can then be confi gured using 

the trim wheel of the throttle/collective pitch stick. 

The preset idle position will be displayed on the 

transmitter's basic display by a horizontal bar next 

to the C1 trim wheel position indicator. Refer to the 

description of digital trim on page 58 of this manual.
188 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer

the collective pitch stick to its end-point. Compared to 

the hover confi guration, motor speed should remain 

unchanged. 

If motor speed falls off in the climb, even with the 

drive system working at full power and therefore 

no further power increase is possible, then reduce 

maximum blade pitch angle at full defl ection of the 

collective pitch stick, i.e. the value of point "H". 

Conversely, the attack angle should be increased if 

motor speed is to increase while climbing. Therefore, 

on the "Pitch" graph page, put the vertical line on 

Point "H" by moving the pitch joystick then change 

this point's value appropriately with the  selection 

keys of the right touch pad. 

This diagram shows only the 

changes when setting the maximum 

collective pitch value.

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Hover

point

Then bring the model back to hover, which should, 

in turn, be achieved with the C1 stick at its center 

point. If the hover fl ight point is now achieved only by 

moving the pitch joystick away from its center point 

toward "higher" values then this deviation should 

be compensated by increasing the hover-fl ight pitch 

value – i.e. for point "1" – a little until the model once 

again hovers with the joystick at its center point. 

Conversely, if the model hovers below the midpoint, correct this by reducing the angle of attack 

appropriately.

It may also be necessary to correct the carburetor 

opening for the hover point (point "1") with "C1 

throttle".

The model should lift off the ground with the collective 

pitch stick roughly at its center point and hover 

roughly at the expected rotational speed. If this is not 

the case, proceed as follows:

1. The model does not lift off until the collective 

pitch stick is above the center point.

a) Rotational speed is too low

Remedy: On the graph page 

for "Channel 1  Throttle"

increase the value for 

point "1".

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Hover

point

b) Rotational speed is too high

 Remedy: Increase the blade 

angle of attack pitch by 

increasing the value of point 

"1" on the "Pitch" graph page.

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Hover

point

2. The model lifts off before the center point is 

reached.

a) Rotational speed is too high

 Remedy: Decrease the 

carburetor opening by 

reducing the value of point 

"1" on the graph page for 

"Channel 1  Throttle".

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Hover

point

b) Rotational speed is too low

 Remedy: Decrease the blade 

angle of attack pitch by 

reducing the value of point "1" 

on the graph page for "Pitch".

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Hover

point

Important:

These settings must be reconfi gured until the model 

hovers at the correct rotational speed with the 

throttle/collective pitch stick at its center point. The 

confi guration of all other model parameters depends 

on these settings being made correctly!

Standard set-up

Standard set-up is completed on the basis of the 

basic set-up described above, whereby the model 

hovers in normal fl ight at the correct rotational speed 

with the throttle/collective pitch stick set to its center 

point: This means a set-up with which the model 

is capable of both hovering and fl ying circuits in all 

phases while maintaining a constant rotational speed.

Climb settings

The combination of throttle hover setting, collective 

pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective 

pitch setting (point "H") now permits, in a simple 

manner, a means of attaining a constant rotational 

speed from hovering right through to maximum climb.

First, perform a prolonged, vertical climb by moving 
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer 189

Therefore, after the motor is started, system rotational 

speed should be increased s l o w l y by way of the 

throttle limiter. If a switch has been assigned to the 

throttle limiter, always ensure the »Control adjust«" 

menu (page 112) is used to program a time constant 

of about 5 seconds to run up system rotational 

speed (opening the throttle limiter). Do not, however, 

program a delay for closing the throttle limiter. Leave 

the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, 

however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight 

phases.

be a visual and an acoustic warning if the carburetor 

is open too wide when the transmitter is switched 

on. Otherwise, if the carburetor or speed controller is 

open too far when the motor starts, there is a danger 

that the motor will run up to speed immediately 

after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will engage 

immediately.

Accordingly,

always hold the rotor head

fi rmly when starting.

Nevertheless, if the motor is accidentally started with 

the carburetor too wide open, the golden rule is this:

Don't panic!

Hold the rotor head securely!

Don't let go! 

Instead, close the throttle limiter immediately, even 

if this risks damaging the drive system (in the worst 

case scenario).

YOU must ensure

the helicopter never moves

in an uncontrolled manner. 

The costs of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the 

motor itself are negligible in comparison to the injuries 

and damage that an uncontrolled model helicopter 

can cause if it is allowed to thrash about with spinning 

rotor blades.

Always make sure no other person

is present in the

helicopter's hazard area.

The switchover from idle to a fl ight setting with 

increased system rotational speed must not take 

place abruptly. This will cause the rotor to accelerate 

very quickly, resulting in premature wear to the clutch 

and gear train. Since the main rotor blades are 

generally mounted on a freewheeling unit, they will 

be unable to keep pace with such rapid acceleration; 

they will respond by swinging far out of their normal 

position and may even cause a boom strike.

This diagram shows only the 

change to the hover point, i. e. 

collective pitch minimum and 

maximum are both left at -100 % 

or +100 %.

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Modify these settings until they really result in a 

constant rotational speed over the full control range 

between hovering and climbing fl ight.

Descent setting

The descent setting should now be confi gured by 

placing the model in a steady descent from forward 

fl ight at a considerable altitude by fully reducing 

collective pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum 

value (point "L") so that the model descends at an angle 

of 60° ... 70 °. Therefore, on the "Pitch" graph page, put 

the vertical line on Point "L" by moving the pitch joystick 

then change this point's value appropriately with the 

selection keys of the right touch pad.

This diagram shows only the 

changes when setting the minimum 

collective pitch value.

+100%

-100%OUTPUT 1 2 34 5

Control travel

Hover

point

Once the model can fl y this maneuver properly, set 

the value for "Throttle min" – the value for point "L" 

on the graph page for "C1  throttle" – so that the 

rotational speed neither increases nor decreases. 

This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and 

collective pitch.

Some important closing remarks

Before starting the motor, ensure that the throttle 

limiter is fully closed: this ensures that the carburetor 

now responds only to the C1 trim wheel. There will 
190 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settings

Helicopter mixers

Auto-rotation setting

Auto-rotation permits both full-size and model 

helicopters to land safely in a crisis, e. g. if the motor 

should fail. Moreover, if the tail rotor should fail, 

cutting the motor and landing using auto-rotation is 

also the only possible way to avoid a high-speed, 

uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis 

and a resulting catastrophic crash – which is why a 

switchover TO the auto-rotation phase takes place 

immediately.

When the switchover to the auto-rotation phase is 

made, the Helicopter mixer menu screen changes as 

follows:

Pitch

–90%

Tail rot. offset AR 0%

Thr. position AR

Gyro suppression

Swashplate rotation

Swashplate limiter

0%

0°

AUS



Gyro offset 0%

Autorot

During auto-rotation fl ight, the main rotor is no longer 

driven by the motor but only by its own momentum and 

the the airfl ow through the rotor plane during descent. 

Since the energy stored by a rotor kept spinning in this 

way is rapidly consumed if the helicopter fl ares, pilots 

must not only have experience in handling helicopter 

models but must also consider carefully how the 

relevant functions should be confi gured.

The advanced pilot should therefore practice autorotation landings at regular intervals. Not only to be 

able to demonstrate mastery of the maneuver at 

competitions, but also to ensure the pilot can can 

land the helicopter undamaged from a great height if 

the motor should fail. For this purpose, the program 

provides a range of adjustment options designed to 

help the pilot fl y a motorized model in its unpowered 

state. Note that the auto-rotation settings comprise a 

complete seventh fl ight phase, which provides access 

to all the fl ight phase- specifi c confi guration options, 

and to trims, collective pitch curve settings, etc., 

in particular. The following functions have special 

features not present in the powered fl ight phases:

Pitch (Collective pitch curve (C1  Pitch))

In powered fl ight, the maximum blade pitch angle is 

limited by available motor power. In auto-rotation, 

however, it is limited only by the point at which airfl ow 

ceases over the main rotor blades. Greater maximum 

collective pitch must therefore be set to ensure 

suffi cient thrust when fl aring the helicopter even as 

rotational speed is falling off. To do so, briefl y tap 

the center SET key of the right touch pad to switch 

to the "Pitch" graph page and then use the joystick 

to move the vertical line to point "H". Start by setting 

a value that is about 10 to 20 % greater than your 

"normal" maximum value for collective pitch. Initially, 

however, do NOT set a value that is considerably 

greater than for normal fl ight, since, if this is done, 

the behavior of the collective pitch controls may then 

be very unfamiliar following the switchover. Indeed, 

there is a danger that the pilot will oversteer during 

the fl are and the model will balloon: this will case the 

rotor speed to collapse at a considerable altitude and 

the model will then crash to the ground. The value 

can always be readjusted later after fl ying some test 

auto-rotations.

The minimum value for collective pitch can differ 

from that set for normal fl ight. This depends on the 

pilot's usual style for normal fl ight. For auto-rotation, 

however, always set a suffi ciently generous minimum 

value for collective pitch at point "L" to ensure 

the model can be brought out of forward fl ight at 

moderate speed into a descent at an angle of around 

60 ... 70 degrees when collective pitch is reduced to 

a minimum. If, like most helicopter pilots, you have 

used this kind of setting for normal fl ight anyway, then 

this value can simply be transferred.

If, however, you normally let your model "fall" at a 

shallower angle, then you should increase the value 

at point "L", and vice versa.

Approach angle for 

various wind conditions

Approach angle

in moderate 

wind

no wind

45°

60°

75°

in strong 

wind

As a rule, the collective pitch stick itself is not 

positioned right at the bottom of its travel for autorotation. Instead, it is typically between the hover 

position and the bottom end-point. This offers the 

pilot an option for further adjustment, e. g. via pitch 

inclination through pitch-axis controls.

The approach can be shortened by pulling back 

slightly on the pitch-axis joystick and gently reducing 

pitch or by extending the approach by pushing 

forward on the pitch-axis joystick and carefully 

increasing pitch.

Throttle setting AR 

Although pilots will be expected to cut the glow 

motor completely during competitions, This is rather 

inconvenient during training sessions because the 

motor must be restarted after every practice autorotation landing.

Therefore, for training sessions, set this line's value 

such that a combustion motor is held at a safe idle 

without the clutch engaging during the auto-rotation 

phase; electric drive systems should be set safely to 

"Off". 

Note:

The "Motor Stop" option in the »Base setup model« 

menu offers an alternative "Emergency STOP" 
Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settings 191

function.

Tail rotor AR

In normal fl ight, the tail rotor is set so that it 

compensates for motor torque while the model is 

hovering. It therefore generates some a certain 

amount of thrust even in its normal position. The 

level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control 

system, and also by the various mixers which provide 

all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor 

trim is also used to compensate for varying weather 

conditions, fl uctuations in system rotational speed 

and other infl uences.

For auto-rotation, however, the main rotor is not 

driven by the motor, but by the "windmill" principle. 

Since this, in turn, does not generate any torque 

for which the tail rotor must compensate, all 

corresponding mixers are switched off automatically.

Since the absence of torque in auto-rotation also 

means the above-mentioned thrust is superfl uous, 

however, a different tail rotor confi guration is also 

required:

Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground 

in a level attitude. With the transmitter and receiving 

system switched on, select the fl ight phase "Autorotation" and then fold the tail rotor blades down. Now 

change the value on the "Tail rotor" line until the tail 

rotor blade angle of attack is zero degrees. Viewed 

from the tail, the tail rotor blades should be parallel to 

one another. 

Depending on the friction and running resistance 

of the gearbox, the fuselage may still yaw slightly, 

however. This relatively slight torque must then be 

corrected if necessary by adjusting the tail rotor 

blade pitch angle. This value will always be a fi gure 

between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to 

the pitch angle in normal fl ight.
192 General notes on freely programmable mixers

The previous pages have described a wealth of 

ready-to-use built-in coupling functions, in the context 

of the two menus »Wing mixers« and »Helicopter 

mixers«. The fundamental signifi cance of mixers and 

the principle by which they work are described on 

page 159. The following section provides information 

about the so-called "free mixers". 

In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned 

above, the mc-32 HoTT also offers a number of 

freely programmable mixers in every model memory 

location, whose inputs, outputs and mixer ratios can 

be defi ned to meet one's own requirements. These 

include: 

• 8 linear mixers, numbered 1 through 8

• 4 curve mixers, numbered 9 through 12

These 12 mixers are certainly adequate for most 

applications and are certainly suffi cient when the 

potential of the pre-programmed coupling functions 

are utilized. In the »Mix active/phase« menu (see 

page 204), each of these 12 mixers can be activated 

or deactivated separately for each fl ight phase.

For the "free mixers", the signal present at any control 

function (1 to 16) can be assigned as the input signal

or,for a so-called "switch channel" (see further below), 

the signal from any switch can be utilized. The signal 

that is present at the control channel and passed 

to the mixer input is always infl uenced by its own 

transmitter control and by any control characteristic 

that may have been set, e. g. those specifi ed by 

the »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Channel 1 curve« and 

»Control adjust« menus. 

The mixer output acts on a control channel (1 

to – depending on receiver type – a maximum of 16) 

that can also be assigned freely. Before this channel 

routes the signal to the servo, it can only still be 

infl uenced by the »Servo adjustments« menu, i.e. 

by the the servo reverse, neutral point offset, servo 

travel and servo travel limit functions, and possibly by 

»Tx. output swap«.

One control function can be used for any number of 

mix inputs simultaneously: if, for example, several 

mixers are to be switched to act in parallel. 

Conversely, it is possible for any number of mixers to 

affect one and the same control channel. Particularly 

in the latter case, however, it is very important to 

ensure that the servo concerned does not strike its 

mechanical end-stops when several mixer signals 

accumulate excessively. For safety's sake, it may 

therefore be necessary to set an appropriate travel 

limit in the »Servo adjustments« menu.

For more complex applications, mixers can be switched 

in sequence. In this case, it is not the (transmitter) 

signal at the "output" of a control function which forms 

the input signal of the "series-wired" mixer, but the 

(mixed) signal "further back" at the "input" of a control 

channel. The following description of the free mixers 

includes several examples of this type.

In the software, one "free mixer" is always initially 

activated. Optionally the mixer can also be assigned to 

an ON/OFF switch. Since there are so many functions 

to which switches can be assigned, be careful to avoid 

(undesired) multiple assignments to a single switch.

The two key mixer parameters are: 

• ... the mixer ratio, which defi nes the extent to 

which the input signal acts on the output of the 

control channel connected to the mixer output. 

The mixer ratio for linear mixers can be set as 

symmetrical or asymmetric. Curve mixers can also 

be confi gured with up to 8 points to suit one's own 

application and even implement extremely nonlinear curves.

• ... the neutral point of a mixer, which is also 

referred to as the "offset". 

The offset is that specifi c point along the 

movement of a transmitter control (joystick, 

proportional control or switch) at which the 

mixer no longer infl uences the control channel 

connected to its output. Normally, the neutral 

point is the center point of the transmitter control. 

However, the offset can also be set at any other 

point along the control travel. Since there are no 

restrictions on the design of the curve mixers, 

setting a mixer neutral point only makes sense for 

the 8 linear mixers.

Switch channel "S" as a mixer input

Occasionally, however, only a constant control signal 

is required at the mixer output, e.g. for a slightly 

increased "up-elevator" trim when the aero-tow 

release is closed – fully independently of its normal 

trim setting.

In this case a switch is assigned both to the aerotow release and the mixer; it is then used not only 

to open and close the release, but also to pass the 

desired trim signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio. 

To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input 

control function in the program is designated "S" for 

"Switch channel". 

In addition, if the corresponding "target channel" 

should now no longer be infl uenced by its "normal" 

transmitter control, isolate the latter from the function 

input of the affected control channel by way of the 

»MIX-only channel« menu (page 205). Here too, for 

clarifi cation of this there is an example of the function 

provided in the following menu description.

General notes on freely programmable mixers
Detail program description - Free mixers 193

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

page to the menu option ...

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX aktiv / Phase

... on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu 

option.

Regardless of the model type selected, each of the 

80 model memory locations offers eight linear mixers 

(LinearMIX 1 ...8) ...

LinearMIX 1 ??

Mitte

?? ––––

from – Begr. +

?? ?? ––––

?? ?? ––––

?? ?? ––––

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

... and 4 curve mixers (CurveMIX 9 ... 12), which 

also offer non-linear control characteristics:

LinearMIX 8 ??

Mitte

?? ––––

from – Begr. +

?? ?? ––––

?? ?? ––––

?? ?? ––––

?? ?? ––––

CurveMIX 9

CurveMIX10

CurveMIX11

CurveMIX12

In addition, the »MIX active/phase« menu (page 204) 

permits the independent activation and deactivation 

of only particular mixers for specifi c fl ight phases. 

On the "Free mixers" menu, the blocked mixers 

are then suppressed in the corresponding fl ight 

phase. If you are hunting for a mixer that is 

not shown, you should therefore switch to the 

appropriate fl ight phase!

In this fi rst section, however, we will concentrate on 

how to program the fi rst screen page of the "free 

mixers". We will then move on to the method of 

programming mixer ratios, both for linear mixers and 

curve mixers, as found on the second screen page of 

this menu.

Basic programming procedure

1. Select the mixer you want by using the 

selection keys on the left or right touch pad.

2. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The 

input fi eld on the line marked "fr" at the lower edge 

of the screen is now shown highlighted.

3. Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 

select the "fr" mixer input.

4. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad; 

using the  selection key of the left or right touch 

pad, switch to the column marked "to" at the lower 

edge of the screen then tap the center SET key of 

the right touch pad once again. 

The input fi eld "to" is shown highlighted.

5. Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 

select the "to" mixer output.

6. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. 

Optionally use the selection key of the left or 

right touch pad to switch to the column marked 

"ty" at the lower edge of the screen in order to 

include the trim of the respective joystick in the 

mixer input signal ("Tr" for trim or "P" for phase) 

and/or to add series switching for mixers ...

... and/or use the  selection key of the left or 

right touch pad to change the column marked 

with the switch icon on the lower edge of the 

screen. To do this, tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad once again and assign a switch 

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).

7. Using the  selection key of the left or right touch 

pad, switch to the column "Settings" then tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. 

8. Defi ne the mixer ratios on the second screen 

page.

9. Return to the fi rst page by using the center ESC

key of the left touch pad.

" fr"

After selecting a mixer line and a subsequent tap on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad, select one 

of the control functions, 1 ... 16 or S, for the value 

fi eld now in inverse video with the selection keys of 

the right touch.

For the sake of clarity, control functions 1 ... 4 are 

marked as follows when setting wing mixers:

C1 Throttle/airbrake stick

AI Aileron stick

EL Elevator stick

RU Rudder stick

... and, for the helicopter program:

Free mixers

Freely-programmable linear and curve mixers
194 Detail program description - Free mixers

Mixer switches

In the sample screen image shown above, switches 

"4" and "2" have been assigned to linear mixers 1 and 

4 and to mixer 2 of the control switch "G4".

The switch symbol to the right of the switch number 

shows the current switch state.

Any mixers not assigned to a switch, as indicated 

by an empty cell for the column marked by the 

switch icon on the screen's bottom line, are 

fundamentally active!

A switch must be assigned to LinearMIX 4 if you 

wish to switch between two fi xed mixer values (still 

to be set) that correspond to the two end-points of 

a (proportional) transmitter control. Accordingly, the 

"switch channel" mixer cannot also be switched "on" 

or "off" as with the other mixers.

If you intend to assign a control switch (G1 ... G4) 

as a switch, then please note that you must defi ne 

this appropriately BEFOREHAND in the »Control 

switch« menu. If you do not, you will assign an 

undefi ned control switch and therefore one that 

functions as a fi xed switch.

" Ty"

Including the trim

For control functions 1 ... 4, you can also allow 

trimming of the digital trim wheel for the given joystick 

effect the mixer's input. In this case, briefl y tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad then use the 

selection keys to select "Tr" in the inverse video fi eld:

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

 3 8

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

 4

C4

2

Tr

off

off

off

1 Throttle/collective pitch stick

2 Roll stick

3 Pitch-axis stick

4 Tail rotor stick

Note:

If you select any of the control functions 5 ... 16 for 

fi xed-wing models or 5, 7 ... 16 for helicopter models, 

do not forget to assign a transmitter control for each 

of these in the »Control adjust« menu!

"S" as switch channel

Selecting "S" (switch channel) in the fr column has 

the effect of passing a constant input signal to the 

mixer input, e.g. in order to add a little more "upelevator" trim when the aero-tow release is closed, as 

mentioned on the previous page.

After assigning a control function or the "S" switch 

channel in the "fr" column, the following is also 

displayed ...

" to "

... on the lower edge of the screen. 

Use this column's input fi eld to specify the destination 

of the mixer, i.e. assign mixer output, to one of the 

control channels. At the same time, additional fi elds 

will appear in the bottom line of the screen:

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

 3 8

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

 4

C4

2

off

off

off

In this example, four mixers have already been 

defi ned. The second mixer is already familiar in 

principle as "Elevat curve" from the "Brake settings" 

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu and the third 

is familiar from the line "Tail" ("2ELSv3+8") of the 

»Model type« menu. As a general rule, however, you 

should fi rst make use of the pre-programmed mixers. 

However, if you need asymmetric mixer ratios, want 

to program non-linear curves or need to offset the 

mixer neutral point, then you should set or leave the 

pre-programmed mixers at "0 %" and replace these 

with free mixers.

Erasing mixers

To erase a previously-defi ned mixer, select the 

appropriate line with the  selection keys on the 

left or right touch pad , switch to the "fr" column, if 

necessary, with the  selection keys then briefl y 

tap the center SET button on the right touch pad:

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

 3 8

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

 4

C4

2

off

off

off

The fi eld in the " fr " column for the mixer you want to 

delete will now be shown in inverse video: tap both 

 selection keys or  on the right touch pad at 

the same time (CLEAR):

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

 ?? ??

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

 4

C4

2

off

off

off

––––
Detail program description - Free mixers 195

Example:

Two mixers (MIX 6  7 and 7  8):

a) WITHOUT series switching:

6 6

7

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

7

8

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

MIX 1

MIX 2

b) The same mixers WITH series switching:

6 6

7

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

7

8

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

MIX 1

MIX 2

In this highly simplifi ed example, if mixer 2 is 

switched in series, then it does not "take over" solely 

the transmitter signal of control function 7 – as shown 

under a) – but, instead, the entire (mixed) signal 

present at the servo side of control channel 7, as 

shown under b). It then directs this in accordance 

with its confi gured mixer ratio forwards to control 

channel 8. In this case, the effect of transmitter 

control "6" extends as far as output "8". This kind of 

serial linkage can be extended as far as you wish. 

For example, another mixer "8  12" can be used 

to route the control signal from "6" as far as output 

"12", taking into consideration the associated mixer 

ratios. Of course, even with an active serial link, 

each separate mixer can still be controlled via the 

transmitter control assigned to the mixer input. Fixedwing and helicopter mixers also work in the same 

way, when set up to switch "in sequence".

Including phase trim

If you wish to apply the FLAP channel ("6") or FLAP2 

channel ("9") trim values stored in the »Phase trim«" 

menu – fl ight phase dependent – then fi rst tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad and use its 

selection keys to select "P":

LinearMIX 1 11

type

 6

from – Begr. +

?? ??

?? ??

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

Tr

––––

––––

?? ?? ––––

P

Depending on the mixer value confi gured, a mixer 

can, as shown in the example above, route the signal 

from a fl ap control present (e.g.) on input 6 to control 

channel 11, while also applying the FLAP trim value 

set on the »Phase trim« menu (page 150) for the 

respective fl ight phase.

Other special features of free mixers

Mixer input = mixer output

If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as 

its output, e.g. "C1  C1", you can achieve some 

very special effects in conjunction with the option of 

switching a free mixer on and off in any way you like. 

A typical application of this can be found at the end of 

this section, as Example 2 on page 202.

Tip:

If you separate a control function, e.g. "9", from 

control channel 9" using the »MIX-only channel« 

menu (see page 205), then servo response is 

defi ned only by the mixer ratio (yet to be specifi ed) 

The effect of the C1 trim wheel on mixer output will 

depend on the function assigned in the »Model type« 

menu (page 94), in the "Motor on C1" column for 

fi xed-wing models ...

Trim Effect on mixer output

None linear over full trim wheel travel

Forward Only effective if C1 stick is forward

Back Only effective if C1 stick is back

... or on the "Pitch" line of the »Stick mode« menu 

for helicopter models:

Trim Effect on mixer output

AR

(Thr-AR)

linear over full trim wheel travel

TL

(throttle 

limit)

only effective at minimum position of 

the assigned throttle limit control (the 

right side proportional rotary control as 

standard)

Switching mixers in series

As already explained on page 192, you can also 

switch mixers in series: Where mixers are switched 

in "sequence", the "input signal" of a control channel 

already on its way to the servo "branches off" and 

is directed to a further channel. In the "ty" column, 

select the right angle bracket " " or "Tr ", if the trim 

should also act simultaneously on the mixer input:

LinearMIX 1 7

type

 6

from – Begr. +

7 8

?? ??

?? ??

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

Tr

––––

––––
196 Detail program description - Free mixers

N.N.*  7 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an 

aileron function

N.N.*  9 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a 

fl ap function

N.N.*  10 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with an 

aileron function

N.N.*  11 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with a 

fl ap function

N.N.*  12 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with 

an aileron function

• Model helicopters:

With helicopter mixers, collective pitch control 

may be provided by up to 4 servos connected 

to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, depending on 

helicopter type. The software links these together 

to control collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis.

Other than within the »Helicopter mixers« 

menu, it is not advisable to mix a free mixer into 

these channels because this can lead to very 

complex interactions. One of the few exceptions is 

"Collective pitch trim using a separate transmitter 

control" – see example 3 on page202.

Important notices:

• With serial links in particular, remember that 

that the travels of the individual mixers are 

cumulative if multiple stick commands are 

made simultaneously: there is a risk that the 

servo(s) may strike a mechanical end-stop. If 

necessary, reduce "servo travel" to avoid this; 

alternatively, set "Travel limit" on the "Servo 

adjustments" menu and/or reduce mixer values.

• Take advantage of the ever-present option 

to switch over to the transmitter's »Servo 

display«" menu (see page 262). This menu 

is reached from almost any menu with a 

of the mixer programmed on the same channel. 

Thus, with linear mixers LinearMIX 1 ... 8 or curve 

mixers CurveMIX 9 ... 12, 8-point control curves can 

be defi ned for any transmitter control in a manner 

analogous to that described in the »Channel 1 

curve« menu and these can also be used in fl ight 

phase switching if needed. This method of "linking" is 

not only also switchable but can even be subject to a 

delay by assigning an appropriate delay in the "– time 

+" column of the »Control adjust« menu.

Mixer output affecting default software coupling 

of aileron, camber-changing fl ap or collective 

pitch servos

Before we start specifying the mixer ratio, we must 

fi rst give some thought to what happens if we permit 

a mixer to affect the default software coupling of 

aileron, camber-changing fl ap or collective pitch 

servos:

• Fixed-wing models:

Depending on the number of wing servos available 

on the "Aile/fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu, 

control channels 2 and 5 are connected via special 

mixers for the "aileron" function, 6 and 7 for the 

"fl ap" function, outputs 9 and 10 (if present) for the 

FLAP2 servos and 11 and 12 for AI2 servos.

If mixer outputs are programmed to affect these 

kinds of couplings, then their effect on the 

respective fl ap pair derived from the "receiving" 

control channel must be accounted for:

Mixer Effect

N.N.*  2 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an 

aileron function

N.N.*  5 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a 

fl ap function

N.N.*  6 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a 

fl ap function

brief, simultaneous tap on the  keys of 

the left touch pad. This menu gives you the 

opportunity to check the effects of all of your 

settings on a single screen.

Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point

Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature 

of the mixer functions, the following section describes 

how to program linear and non-linear mixer curves. 

For each of the 12 available mixers, the mixer curves 

are programmed on a second page of the screen 

display. Use the selection keys  on the left or 

right touch pad to select the desired mixer line. If 

necessary, use the touch pad's selection keys to 

move to the right column (= ) then briefl y tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad to access the 

graph page.

LinearMIX 1 ... 8: Setting linear mixer values

As a practical example, we will now defi ne a linear 

mixer curve to resolve the following problem:

For a motorized aircraft model, the two servos 

connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 – defi ned on 

the "Aile/fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu as "... 

2FL" – are to be used for actuating landing fl aps. That 

is; when a transmitter control is moved, they must 

defl ect downwards only. This requires a simultaneous 

elevator trim, however.

First allocate, for example, input 6 to the leftmost 

slider control SR1 located in the middle of the console 

by making settings in the »Control adjust« menu. 

A transmitter control on input 6, – as shown in the 

above table – will control the two servos connected 

to receiver outputs 6 and 7 by default as fl aps. Leave 

the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, 

however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight 

phases – as is the case for the free mixer.

* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)
Detail program description - Free mixers 197

»Control adjust« menu

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

S11 ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

Note:

Note that if two fl ap servos have been selected, 

any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be 

decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors 

in operating the fl aps. However, in the interests of 

safety, you should make a habit of leaving all inputs 

not currently required to "free", or of resetting these 

back to "free"!

Start by moving this transmitter control to its forward 

limit and adjust the landing fl aps so that they are 

retracted or closed in this position. If you now move 

the dial to the rear, the fl aps should move downward; 

if not the direction of servo rotation must be adapted.

We now turn our attention to the fi rst mixer shown in 

the screen image on page 194 ("6  EL"), to which 

switch 4 was assigned:

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

 3 8

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

 4

C4

2

off

off

off

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to open the second screen page:

Linear MIX 1 6 EL

off

If this screen appears, the mixer has not yet been 

activated in combination with the assigned toggle 

switch – "4", in this example. If so, operate the switch:

6

Mix input

0%

Offset

0%

Linear MIX 1 EL

0%

SYM ASY STO SET

The continuous vertical line represents the current 

position of the transmitter control linked to input 

6. (However, it is not visible in the above graphic 

because it is at the left edge since slider control SR1, 

in this example assigned to input 6 (see previous 

page), is at its forward limit.) The dotted vertical line 

in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of 

the mixer neutral point – see under "Offset", below. 

The solid horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which 

currently has the value zero over the entire stick 

travel; accordingly, the elevator will not yet follow the 

movement of the fl aps.

First, the ...

Offset (mixer neutral point)

... should be defi ned. Switch over to STO for this by 

using the  selection key of the left or right touch pad:

6

Mix input

0%

Offset

0%

Linear MIX 1 EL

0%

SYM ASY STO SET

The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram 

indicates the position of the mixer neutral point 

("Offset"), i.e. the specifi c point along the control 

travel at which the mixer does NOT infl uence the 

control channel connected to its output. The default 

position for this point is at the control center.

However, since in our example the fl aps should be 

closed or retracted with the slider control at its forward 

limit and therefore the elevator should not be further 

infl uenced in this position, the mixer neutral point must 

be relocated to precisely this point. To do so, push the 

slider control used (in this example, slider control SR1) 

to its forward limit if you have not already done so, 

then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. The dotted vertical line moves across to this point, 

the new mixer neutral point, which by defi nition always 

retains the "initial" value of zero. 

However, to better illustrate our example, we now 

wish to set this "Offset" value to only -75 %.

6

Mix input

0%

Offset

–75%

Linear MIX 1 EL

0%

SYM ASY STO SET
198 Detail program description - Free mixers

Notes:

• By selecting SET with the  selection key of the 

left or right touch pad followed by a tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad ...

6

Mix input

0%

Offset

Linear MIX 1 EL

0%

SYM ASY STO SET

–75%

... the offset value can be set manually or 

adjusted in 1 % increments with the selection keys 

on the left or right touch pad.

• By selecting SET ...

6

Mix input

0%

Offset

Linear MIX 1 EL

0%

SYM ASY STO

–75%

SET

• ... – see previous fi gure – set the mixer's neutral 

point automatically back to control center with a 

simultaneous tap on both the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). 

Symmetrical mixer ratios

The next task is to defi ne the mixer values above and 

below the mixer neutral point – starting from its current 

position. 

If necessary, use selection keys  on the left or 

right touch pad to select the SYM fi eld in order to 

establish a mixer value which is symmetric to the 

offset point just set. Following a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad, set both SYM

fi elds (now in inverse video) via the selection keys 

of the right touch pad to values between -150 % and 

+150 %. Note that the mixer value set always refers 

to the input signal of the respective transmitter control 

(control signal)! Negative mixer values reverse the 

direction of the mixer.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will erase the mixer 

ratio in the inverse video fi eld.

The "optimum" value in our example will certainly 

need fl ight-testing.

6

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 1 EL

SYM ASY STO

–75%

SET

–20% –20%

Earlier, we set the mixer neutral point at -75 % of 

control travel: as a result, the elevator ("EL") will 

exhibit a (slight) down-elevator effect even at the 

neutral point of the landing fl aps and this is naturally 

undesirable. Accordingly, you should reposition the 

mixer neutral point to -100 % of control travel, as 

described earlier.

6

Mix input

+20%

Offset

Linear MIX 1 EL

+20%

SYM ASY STO SET

–100%

If the offset, now -100 %, is reset to 0 % of control 

travel by using selection key  on the left or right 

touch pad to select the SET fi eld then tapping either 

the selection key combination  or  on the right 

touch pad (CLEAR), the following screen will appear:

6

Mix input

+20%

Offset

Linear MIX 1 EL

+20%

SYM ASY STO

0%

SET

Asymmetric mixer ratios

In many cases, however, we require different mixer 

values on each side of the mixer neutral point. 

Do this by fi rst resetting the offset of the mixer used 

in the example, "6  EL" again to 0 %,if necessary, 

refer to the fi gure above. Now select the ASY fi eld 

with the selection key  on the left or right touch 

pad then tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. If slider control SR1, assigned to input 6 in 

this example, is now moved in each corresponding 

direction, the mixer ratios for each of the two control 

directions, i.e. left and right of the established offset 

point, can be adjusted with the selection keys of the 

right touch pad:
Detail program description - Free mixers 199

6

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 1 EL

SYM ASY STO

0%

SET

–55% –20%

Note:

If you are using a type "S  N.N.*" switch channel 

mixer you will need to actuate the assigned switch. 

The vertical line then jumps between the left and 

right side.

Setting curve mixers 9 ... 12

These four curve mixers allow the defi nition of 

extremely non-linear mixer curves by placing up to six 

freely positionable points between the two endpoints 

"L" (low = -100 % control travel) and "H" (high = 

+100 % control travel) along the control travel.

If you have already read the »Channel 1 curve« menu 

description or about programming 8-point curves in the 

»Helicopter mixers« menu, you can safely skip the 

following description.

Programming details

The control curve is defi ned by up to 8 points, 

known as "reference points". In the default software 

confi guration, 2 reference points are already defi ned, 

namely only the two end-points, "L" and "H"; see the 

next screen image.

The following section applies to "any" mixer to which 

we wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic.

The examples shown in the following section 

are merely illustrative, however, and they do not 

represent real-life mixer curves.

Setting reference points

When you move the transmitter control assigned to 

the mixer input – here control function 8 – a vertical 

line in the graph follows the movement between the 

two end-points. The current control position is also 

shown numerically on the "Input" line. The point at 

which this line intersects with the curve in question 

is named the "Output" and can be varied between 

-125 % and +125 % by setting reference points; see 

further below. This control signal acts on the mixer 

output.

In the above example, the transmitter control is on 

input 8 at -50 % of control travel. The output signal 

continue to show 0 %, however, since no value has 

yet been entered.

Up to six additional reference points can be set 

between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the 

distance between neighboring reference points must 

not be less than approx. 25 %.

Curve MIX 9

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

8 10

When you now briefl y tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, the "?" is replaced by a point number 

and the value fi eld to the right is activated, i.e. 

presented in inverse video:

Curve MIX 9

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

8 10

1

Using the selection keys on the right touch pad you 

can now change the point value within a range of 

±125 %, e.g.::

Curve MIX 9

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

+50%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

+50%

8 10

1

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact 

reference point, please note that the percentage 

value on the "Output" line always relates to the 

current joystick position.

Continue in this way to set other reference points. 

Note that the order in which you generate the 

(maximum) four reference points between end-points 

"L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points 

are continuously renumbered automatically from left 

to right as they are entered.

Erasing reference points

To erase one of the reference points between "L" 

and "H", use the transmitter control in question 

to move the vertical line onto or into the vicinity 

of the reference point in question. The reference 

point number and associated reference point value 

* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)
200 Detail program description - Free mixers

are shown on the "Point" line. The value fi eld is 

highlighted, see screen image above. 

Now tap the two selection keys  or  on the 

right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR). 

The selected reference point is erased, and the 

numbering of the remaining reference points is 

updated as required. Briefl y tap the center ESC key 

of the left touch pad to complete the procedure.

Note that the reference points "L" and "H" cannot be 

erased.

Changing reference point values

To change reference point values, use the associated 

transmitter control to move the vertical line onto 

the point you wish to change: "L", 1 ... 6 or "H". 

The number and current curve value of this point 

are displayed. After activating the value fi eld on the 

"Point" line by briefl y tapping the center SET key, use 

the selection keys on the right touch pad to change 

the current curve value shown in the highlighted fi eld. 

The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes 

do not affect neighboring reference points. Briefl y tap 

the center ESC key of the left touch pad to complete 

the procedure.

Note:

If the joystick does not coincide with the exact 

reference point, please note that the percentage 

value on the "Output" line always relates to the 

current joystick position.

Trim point function

Alternatively, a jump up or down to reference 

points already set, L, 1 ... max. 6 and H, can be 

accomplished by using the  selection keys on the 

left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch 

pad can then be used to change the reference point 

jumped to as described above, entirely independently 

of the control position. 

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–25%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim point

Curve MIX 9 8 10

1

In this simple example, slider control 

SD1 – represented by the vertical line – is halfway 

between the forward limit and the midpoint of control 

travel (input = -50 %). However, "Point 1" will be 

relocated to control center at a point value of +50 %, 

resulting in a momentary output value of -25 %.

One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad will terminate this trim point function.

Trim offset function

When a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is 

not only possible, as previously described, to jump 

up or down to reference points already set with the 

 selection keys of the left touch pad and to make 

a change with the selection keys of the right touch 

pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically 

repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of 

the  keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a 

point value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves 

in both of the following fi gures have been vertically 

shifted within the ±25 % range by the trim offset 

function:

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

–25%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–25%

Normal

Trim offset

Curve MIX 9 8 10

1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+25%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

+25%

Normal

Trim offset

Curve MIX 9 8 10

1

You can also exit this function by tapping the center 

ESC key of the left touch pad.

Trim x-axis function

This function is activated by tapping the left () or 

right () selection key of the right touch pad with 

an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can 

then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 

reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as 

you wish. In the fi gure below, "Point 1" which was just 

shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now 

be shifted to the left:

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+67%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

+50%

Normal

Trim X-axis

Curve MIX 9 8 10

1

Notes:

• If the point is repositioned horizontally further 

away from the current control position than 

approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line 

Point. This question mark does not refer to the 

repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es 

that a further point can be set at the current 

control position.
Detail program description - Free mixers 201

• Please note that the percentage value on the 

"Output" line always relates to the current joystick 

position and not to the position of the point.

Smoothing the curve

Curve MIX 9

Curve

Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

3 – + 100

 O U T P U T

2

–75%

8 10

1

off 3

This "angular" curve profi le created in the example 

can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a 

button. Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a 

brief tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. 

This will result in a switchover from "(Curve) off" to 

"(Curve) on" (or vice versa):

Curve MIX 9

Curve

Point

Output

Input +50%

–75%

3 – + 100

 O U T P U T

–75%

8 10

on

2

1

3

Note:

The curves shown here are for demonstration 

purposes only and are not at all representative of real 

mixer curves. For real-world application examples, see 

the programming examples on pages 274 and 313.

Examples:

1. To open and close an aero-tow, a switch, e.g. SW 

2, has already been assigned to control channel 8 

in the »Control adjust« menu:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

Offset

GL

---

Normal

2

Subsequent aero-tow fl ying has proven that you 

always have to fl y with the up-elevator held slightly 

in during the tow. The solution will be to set up a 

mixer that applies slight up-elevator trim to the 

elevator servo connected to receiver output 3 when 

the aero-tow release is closed. The screen-shot will 

be familiar from page 194: here, the fourth linear 

mixer has been set up for this function, with the 

switch channel "S" as mixer input: Move the selected 

switch to the OFF position and then switch ... 

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

 3 8

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

 4

C4

2

off

off

off

... to the mixer confi guration page. 

Here select STO under "Offset" then tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad briefl y ... 

depending on the selected travel setting in the 

»Control adjust« menu and the switch setting, 

the offset value will jump to +X % or -X %, for 

example:

S

Mix input

0%

Offset

Linear MIX 4 EL

0%

SYM ASY STO

–100%

SET

Now change left to SYM under "Mixer ratio" then 

tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. The value fi elds are now highlighted. After 

you have moved the selected switch to the mixer 

ON position, use the selection keys on the right 

touch pad to set the required symmetrical mixer 

ratio, for example:

S

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 4 EL

SYM ASY STO

–100%

SET

+10% +10%

2. If a multi- fl ap wing featuring a "crow or butterfl y 

system" with (additional) airbrakes is intended, 

and this brake system is to be tested with and 

without airbrakes, then simply set channel 1 to 

"MIX-only" ...

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonly

normal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

... and follow this by programming a free mixer 

"C1  C1" to restore control over the airbrakes 
202 Detail program description - Free mixers

via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this 

mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on 

and off as you please.

3. The fi nal example applies to model helicopters:

In the helicopter program, if you wish affect pitch 

trim with a proportional control, e.g. one of the 

slider controls in the middle of the console, then 

assign one of these controls to this function in 

the »Control adjust« menu; for example the 

"I9" input. (However, leave the default value 

of "GL" in the "Type" column as it is so this 

confi guration, analogous to the free mixer yet to 

be programmed, will be applicable globally for all 

fl ight phases.) Finally, simply defi ne a LinearMIX 

"9  1" with a symmetric mixer ratio of, for 

example, 25 %. Due to the internal coupling, this 

transmitter control then acts equally on all of the 

model's collective pitch servos without affecting 

the throttle servo. 

9

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 5 1

SYM ASY STO

0%

SET

+25% +25%

Decouple the assigned transmitter control from 

control channel 9 in the »MIX-only channel« 

menu to ensure that any servo connected to 

receiver output 9 can no longer be operated by 

this transmitter control; see also page 205.
For your notes 203
204 Detail program description - MIX active/phase

MIX active/phase

Selecting mixers for fl ight phases

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

page to the menu option ...

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX only channel

Channel 1 curve Switch display

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

... on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu 

option.

LinearMIX 1

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

6 EL

C1 EL

LinearMIX 4

3 8

S EL

yes

SEL

yes

yes

yes

MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE

The "free mixers" on the previous menu can be 

enabled and disabled for specifi c fl ight phases. 

You therefore have complete freedom in assigning 

specifi c mixers only to specifi c fl ight phases.

Switch to your chosen fl ight phase and use the 

selection keys to page through this menu. The mixers 

on the »Free mixers« menu are displayed in the 

center column.

Following the activation of the value fi eld by briefl y 

tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad, 

if the respective mixer is set to "no" by using the 

selection keys on the left or right touch pad, then this 

mixer is deactivated in the fl ight phase shown at the 

bottom of the display and, simultaneously, removed 

from the »Free mixers« menu list:

LinearMIX 1

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

6 EL

C1 EL

LinearMIX 4

3 8

S EL

yes

SEL

yes

yes

MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE

no

If a mixer is "lost" in the »Free mixers« menu ...

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

LinearMIX 6

to Adjust

 4

C4

7

off

off

off

?? ?? ––––

... then you should either switch through the fl ight 

phases until it appears again ... or, alternatively, 

switch to this menu and temporarily reactivate the 

mixer you are looking for:

LinearMIX 1 EL

type

 6

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

 3 8

S EL

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

 4

C4

7

off

off

off
Detail program description - MIX-only channel 205

MIX-only channel

Separating control functions from control channels for all fl ight phases

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

page to the menu option ...

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX only channel

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

... on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu 

option.

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonly

normal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

This menu can be used to interrupt the normal signal 

fl ow between the input side control function and the 

output side control channel, therefore the "classic" 

control-to-servo connection is actually separated.

Use the potential offered by this fl ight phase 

independent menu, particularly to keep one of the 

control channels "free" in all fl ight phases from 

assignment to a transmitter control or switch for 

specifi c fl ight phases in the »Control adjust« menu.

Conversely of course, such a joystick, transmitter 

control or switch "robbed" of its servo can still be 

used freely as a control in other way – indeed even in 

fl ight phase dependence – , refer to the programming 

examples at the end of this section.

A joystick, transmitter control or switch robbed of its 

servo by setting the channel to "MIX only" will then 

namely affect mixer inputs only ...

... and the servo connected to a channel set to 

"MIX only" is then also only accessible from the 

mixers programmed to its control channel, i.e. "(with) 

MIX(ers) only".

Accordingly, for any channel set to "MIX only", you 

can utilize both its control function and its control 

channel entirely independently of one another for any 

special functions you need; see the examples at the 

end of this section.

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to select the desired channel from 1 to 16 ( ) then 

briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad, 

to switch at will between "normal" ( ) and "MIX only" 

( ) modes: 

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonly

normal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Examples:

• For model glider aircraft without airbrakes, the 

butterfl y function (page 172) is generally used as a 

landing aid. Just as with "normal" airbrakes, this is 

generally controlled using the C1 stick. While the 

(airbrakes) servo typically connected to channel 1 

is then generally absent as a rule, receiver output 

1 is still not "free", since the control signal of the 

brake stick is still present at this location.

Its control signal – which in this specifi c case is not 

desired – can be decoupled from control channel 

"1" to thus "free up" this channel from the C1 

joystick signal by setting channel 1 to "MIX only" 

in the »MIX-only channel« menu. This makes 

it possible to use control channel "1", together 

with receiver connection "1", at any time for other 

purposes, via freely-programmable mixers – e.g. 

to connect up a speed controller.

• If your model has built-in airbrakes, however, and 

you would like to perhaps test the performance 

of a butterfl y system with and without airbrakes, 

simply set channel 1 to "MIX only" and program a 

free mixer "C1  C1", so as to restore your ability 

to control the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also 

assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able 

to switch this mixer on and off as you please.
206 Detail program description - Dual mixers

Dual mixers

Same-sense/opposite-sense mixing of two control channels

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

page to the menu option ...

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Control switch Logical switch

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

... on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu 

option.

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

?? ??

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

?? ??

?? ??

0%

0%

0%

0%

The four fl ight phase independent dual mixers couple 

a V-tail mixer in a similar manner ...

3 3

4

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

Servo 4,8 V C 577

Best.-Nr. 4101

4

V-tail mixer

Control function inputs

Control channels

(receiver outputs)

Elevator stick

Rudder stick

Right rudder / elevator

Left rudder / elevator

Rudder

Elevator

Elevator

Rudder

Rudder

Elevator

... a same-sense " " and an opposite-sense 

" " control function, although they permit any 

channel to be used and offer differential travel for the 

opposing function.

Important notice:

Since the same and opposite sense infl uences 

of the given input on the two servos or rudder 

fl aps – coupled to one another by the dual mixer – are 

determined by, among other things, their installation 

situation and the direction of rotation specifi ed in 

the »Servo adjustment« menu, the symbols " " 

and " " are to be perceived more as synonyms 

rather than as consistently appropriate defi nitions! 

Accordingly, if wing fl aps are defl ected in the wrong 

direction, simply swap the two inputs or use the 

"servo reverse" option in the »Servo adjustment« 

menu; see page 102. 

In the software, the V-tail mixer already mentioned is 

supplemented by other "dual mixers" for realization 

of the two aileron servos on receiver outputs 2 and 

5 and for the fl ap pairs on outputs 6 and 7, possibly 

also 9 and 10. These are activated via the aileron 

stick and the transmitter control that has been 

assigned to input "6" on the »Control adjust« menu.

In the same way, the four freely-programmable 

dual mixers on this menu can be used to couple 

two further control functions, a feature that would 

otherwise only be possible with time-consuming 

programming of free mixers.

Here, we will use a "V-tail with rudder differential" as 

our example to explain the programming of a dual 

mixer (see also the examples on page 286):

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

EL RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

?? ??

?? ??

+25%

0%

0%

0%

Depending on activation, both servos move in the 

sense of elevators or rudder fl aps. The differentiation, 

according to dual mixer confi guration, is only effective 

for rudder activation. In this case, both corresponding 

trim wheels are effective. No additional free mixers 

are required for this arrangement. When using this 

mixer, however, the tail type MUST be entered as 

"normal" on the "Model type" menu.

Tip:

All settings can be checked directly in the »Servo 

display« menu, which can be accessed from almost 

any other menu by simultaneously tapping the 

keys on the left touch pad.

Example:

Model with two rudders, with differential travel and 

outward movement (e.g. swept-back fl ying wing):
Detail program description - Dual mixers 207

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

 8 RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

?? ??

?? ??

+75%

0%

0%

0%

When a rudder command is given, the second servo 

connected to output 8 follows suit. (With this type of 

programming, differential travel can be confi gured 

for the rudders.) In this case, too, trim from the 

rudder stick affects both servos. If the rudders are 

also required to defl ect outwards when the airbrakes 

are activated, then you should assign the C1 stick 

(transmitter control 1) to input 8 on the »Control 

adjust«" menu. Afterwards, change to the "Offset" 

column then modify the offset value until both 

rudders are again in their neutral positions. It may 

be necessary to "play" a bit with the offset and travel 

adjustments.
208 Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safe

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

page to the menu option ...

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free Mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

... on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu 

option:

SWASH MIXER

Pitch

Roll

Pitch ax.

+61%

+61%

+61%

SEL

Note:

If "1 servo" is selected on the "Swashplate" line of the 

»Helicopter type«" menu, this option is not shown on 

the multi-function menu.

The number of servos installed in your helicopter for 

pitch control was established in the Swashplate line 

of the »Helicopter type« menu, see page 98. This 

information is used to automatically couple together 

the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch, 

so that you do not need to defi ne any other mixers 

yourself.

For helicopter models with only a single collective 

pitch servo, this "Swashplate mixer" menu option is of 

course superfl uous because the software controls a 

total of three swashplate servos for pitch, nick and roll 

independently of one another, i.e. without a mixer. In 

Swashplate mixer

Collective pitch, roll, pitch-axis mixer

this scenario, this menu option is therefore no longer 

available to you from the multi-function menu. With 

all other swashplate linkages employing 2 ... 4 pitch 

servos, mixer ratios and mixer directions are set up 

by default as shown above. The default is +61 % in 

each case but the value can be varied from -100 % to 

+100 % if required by briefl y tapping the center SET

key of the right touch pad and its selection keys. 

Simultaneously tapping both  or  selection 

keys on the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the 

mixer ration in inverse video again to the +61 % 

default value. 

If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, 

roll and pitch-axis) does not respond to the joysticks 

properly, you should alter the mixer directions 

("+" or "-") before trying to correct the directions 

of servo rotation.

Note:

Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in the 

servos mechanically striking their end-stops.

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

page to the menu option ...

Phase settings Phase assignment

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Phase settings Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free Mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

... on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu 

option:

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DELAY : 0.25s STO

The higher level of operating safety exhibited by 

the HoTT system when compared to traditional 

PPM technology results from the fact that the 

microprocessor built into the HoTT receiver not only 

exclusively processes the signals of "its" transmitter, 

but can also clean up "dirty" control signals that it 

receives. Only when these signals become too errorprone or garbled due to outside interference does the 

processor automatically replace the disrupted signals 

Fail-safe

Fault condition setpoints
Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safe 209

with the last received correct signal, temporarily 

stored in the receiver. This feature is confi gured by 

the settings as described below. This feature also 

suppresses brief interference caused by e.g. local 

drops in fi eld strength, which otherwise result in the 

familiar "glitches". In this case, the red LED lights up 

on the receiver.

If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for 

the active model memory but have not yet carried 

out the fail-safe programming, you will see a warning 

message on the screen when you switch on the 

transmitter:

Fail Safe

 setup

 t.b.d.

Programming procedure

The "Fail Safe" function determines the behavior of 

the receiver if communication between the transmitter 

and the receiver is disrupted. Receiver outputs 1 ... 

16 can optionally ...

1. preserve the current position ("hold"):

if communication is disrupted, all servos 

programmed to "hold" mode remain at the 

positions judged to be the last valid positions by 

the receiver until the receiver picks up another 

valid control signal, or

2. move to a freely selectable position ("Pos") if 

interference should occur, following the expiry of 

the "time delay". 

Use selection keys  on the left or right touch pad 

to select the desired servo connection 1 bis 16 ( ) 

then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to freely switch between "hold" ( ) and "Pos" 

mode ( ):

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DELAY : 0.25s STO

Following this, use the selection keys  on the left 

or right touch pad to select the "DELAY" option shown 

at the bottom of the display ...

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DELAY : 0.25s STO

... and then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right 

touch pad. Now use the touch pad's selection keys to 

make your choice from the four possible time delays 

(0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s and 1 s) offered.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse 

video fi eld to its default value 0.25 s.

Afterwards, select the STO fi eld at the bottom right 

of the display with the  selection keys on the left 

or right touch pad. Now put the servos which have 

been switched into position mode into their desired 

positions SIMULTANEOUSLY with the respective 

operating elements.

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to store these positions as the fail-safe setting 

for the receiver, so that it can revert back to them if 

interference is experienced. 

Successful storage of the positions is confi rmed 

briefl y on the screen:

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DELAY : 0.25s STO

Position stored

Attention:

• Please note that decisive fail-safe settings are 

stored in the receiver! Therefore, following a 

change of receivers, these fail-safe settings 

should be renewed and in the previous 

receiver they should be erased, if necessary 

per Reset, see page 46.

• Ensure you make use of this safety net by 

at least programming the following for a failsafe incident: for glow-powered models, set 

the motor throttle position to idle; for electric 

models, set the motor function to stop, or 

"Hold" for helicopter models. If interference 

should occur, the model is then less likely 

to fl y off on its own and cause damage to 

property or even personal injury. Consider 

asking an experienced pilot for advice.
210 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

Teacher/pupil

Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode with a trainer lead

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter is equipped 

standard – as viewed from the front, under the left 

front fl ap – with a DSC socket. This is not only usable 

for connecting fl ight simulators – as described on 

page 22 – but also to integrate the transmitter into a 

cable-coupled teacher/pupil system. 

To accommodate the settings necessary for this, 

scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad to the »Teacher/pupil« menu option in the 

Multifunction menu: 

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to open this menu option:

TRAINER /student

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: ––– BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

Note:

The screen image shown above shows the menu 

in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been 

released by the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned

("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).

When assigning control functions, the usual 

conventions must be observed:

Channel Function

1 Motor throttle/collective pitch

2 Aileron/roll

3 Elevator/pitch-axis

4 Rudder/tail rotor

Teacher-pupil settings

Up to twelve function inputs (see "Term defi nitions" 

on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be 

individually or in any combination transferred to the 

pupil transmitter "P".

The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore 

indicates the function inputs with which control 

functions 1 ... 4 (joystick functions for fi xed-wing and 

helicopter models) are permanently connected as 

well as inputs 5 ... 12, which can be freely assigned 

in the »Control adjust« menu. 

Note:

Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned 

over to the pupil is basically of no consequence. 

However, their assignment in the »Control adjust« 

menu is possible only when the trainer mode 

connection is inactive.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for 

transfer to the pupil( ) then briefl y tap center SET

key of the right touch pad for each switch to be 

switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):

TRAINER /student

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: ––– BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

To be able to carry out the transfer, you must then 

assign a trainer mode switch on the left of the display. 

Do this by placing the marker just to the right of 

the "P"at the bottom left of the screen display by 

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

then assign a switch as described in the section 

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control 

switches" on page 56. 

Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard 

momentary switches on the switchboard to allow 

a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any 

time.

TRAINER /Teacher

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: ––– BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

–

No

 pupil

 signal

Since at this early stage of programming a trainer 

system it is unlikely that an operational pupil 

transmitter is connected to the teacher transmitter, 

the transmitter responds immediately to the switches 

closed during the switch assignment process with 

appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You 

should therefore re-open the switch you have just 

assigned:
Detail program description - Teacher/pupil 211

TRAINER /Teacher

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

9



Note:

The switch assignment just described also 

determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher 

and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a 

pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch 

on this menu. The header line therefore also 

switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher / 

Teach" once a switch has been assigned.

The model to be controlled by the pupil must be 

programmed completely – i.e. with all its functions 

including trims and any mixer functions – in one of 

the model memories of the mc-32 HoTT teacher 

transmitter. The HoTT receiver of the model in 

question must also be "bound" to the teacher 

transmitter, since the latter ultimately controls the 

model, even in pupil mode.

ALWAYS ENSURE YOU SWITCH ON THE mc-32

HoTT teacher transmitter FIRST BEFORE 

PLUGGING THE CONNECTION CABLE INTO 

THIS UNIT. Otherwise the RF module will not be 

activated.

The mc-32 HoTT teacher transmitter can be 

connected to any suitable pupil transmitter, even 

transmitters using the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range. 

This means, for example, that a mc-32 HoTT 

teacher transmitter can indeed also be connected to 

a mc-24 pupil transmitter. 

However, if the pupil-side connection is NOT made 

via a two-pole DSC socket but rather via a threepole trainer socket (for example, out of the Graupner

product line), then the basic prerequisite for a 

correct connection to a pupil transmitter which is 

completely independent of the type of modulation 

used in the teacher transmitter must ALWAYS be 

set to modulation type PPM (10, 16, 18 or 24) in 

the pupil transmitter. 

Pupil transmitter set-up

The model to be controlled by the pupil must be 

programmed completely, i.e. with all its functions 

including trims and any mixer functions, in one 

of the model memories of the teacher transmitter 

and, if applicable, the HoTT receiver of the model 

in question must also be "bound" to the teacher

transmitter. In principle, a mc-32 HoTT pupil 

transmitter can also be connected to a teacher 

transmitter operating on the "traditional" 35/40 MHz 

bands. This is possible because the PPM signal 

required by the teacher transmitter is available in the 

(pupil) transmitter's DSC socket.

Almost any transmitter with at least four control 

functions from previous and current Graupner series 

can be used as a pupil transmitter. More detailed 

information can be found in the RC main catalog and 

on the www.graupner.de website.

If required, the pupil transmitter should be fi tted 

with the connection module for pupil transmitters. 

This is to be connected to the transmitter board in 

accordance with the supplied installation instructions. 

Information on the pupil modules required in each 

case can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog 

and on the www.graupner.de website.

The connection to the teacher transmitter is made 

using the appropriate lead; see the following 

double page.

The control functions of the pupil transmitter 

MUST act directly on the control channels, i.e. the 

receiver outputs, without intermediary mixers. 

If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter, 

it is best to activate a free model memory with the 

required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign 

the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode 

(mode 1 ... 4) and "Throttle min. forward/back" to suit 

the pupil's preferences. All other settings are left at 

their default values, however. If you have selected 

the "Helicopter" model type, you must also set the 

throttle/ collective pitch direction and idle trim on the 

pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mixer 

and coupling functions, are confi gured exclusively on 

the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them 

to the model.

If the pupil transmitter is a mx-20 HoTT or mc-32

HoTT series model then it may also be necessary 

to adapt the type of modulation in the "DSC output" 

line of the »Base setup model« menu in order to 

accommodate the number of control channels to 

be transmitted. For example, the signal packet for 

modulation type "PPM10" contains only control 

channels 1 ... 5 but not channel 6. However, if this 

channel is to be used by the pupil then a modulation 

type must be selected in which it is included.

For transmitters of type "D" and "FM" it is necessary 

to check servo operating directions and their control 

correlations. It may be necessary to reconnect cables 

appropriately. All mixers must also be switched off or 

set to "zero".

When assigning control functions, the usual 

conventions must be observed:

Channel Function

1 Motor throttle/collective pitch

2 Aileron/roll

3 Elevator/pitch-axis

4 Rudder/tail rotor

If other control functions are to be transferred to the 

pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two 
212 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

dual axis sticks (1 ... 4), access the »Control adjust« 

menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs

which correspond to enabled function inputs 5 ... 

12 as shown in the »Teacher/pupil« menu of the 

teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating 

elements appropriately.

Important:

• If you should forget to assign a transmitter 

control on the pupil side, then the affected 

servo or servos will remain in the center 

position when the transfer is made to the pupil 

transmitter.

• The pupil transmitter must always be operated 

in PPM mode, regardless of the RF connection 

type used between the teacher transmitter and 

the model.

• If the transmitter is connected using a DSC 

socket on the pupil side, ALWAYS leave the 

pupil transmitter's On/Off switch in the "OFF" 

position: this is the only way to guarantee 

that no RF signal is sent from the pupil 

transmitter's transmitter module, even after the 

DSC lead has been plugged in.

Trainer mode operations

Both transmitters are connected to one another 

using a suitable lead (see summary on next page): 

The plug marked "M" (master) must be inserted 

into the socket on the teacher transmitter, and the 

plug marked "S" (student) into the pupil transmitter's 

socket. (Note that not all leads may have such "M" 

and "S" labeling.) 

Important notices:

• Check that the model aircraft is operational 

and check that all functions issue the correct 

commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.

• The ends of the trainer lead, usually marked 

as either "S" or "M", terminate in a three-pole 

TRS jack. Do not insert these jacks into a DSC 

system socket, as it is not suitable for this 

application. The DSC socket is exclusively 

designed for cables with 2-pole TRS jacks.

Checking functionality

Activate the assigned trainer mode switch:

• The trainer mode system is working properly if the 

display now changes from " L" to " S".

• However, if the WARNING LED at the right, next 

to the transmitter's On/Off switch, blinks and 

an acoustic signal sounds off at the same time, 

then the connection between pupil and teacher 

transmitters is faulty. 

The basic display also displays the following 

warning notice ...

No

 pupil

 signal

... and the left side of the screen display for the 

»Teacher/pupil« menu will change to show 

"-Pupil". In this case, all control functions are 

retained by the teacher transmitter automatically, 

regardless of switch position: this ensures the 

model is always under control.

Possible faults:

• Pupil transmitter not ready

• Interface in pupil transmitter not correctly 

connected in place of the RF module

• Cables connected wrongly: see right for cable 

connections

• Pupil transmitter not switched over to PPM (10, 

16, 18, 24) mode

Other possible faults:

• Teacher transmitter not properly "bound" to HoTT 

receiver in training model

Trainer cables

4179.1 for trainer operation between any two 

Graupner transmitters equipped with DSC 

sockets – distinguished by a two-pole TRS 

jack at both ends.

3290.7 trainer cable for connecting a teacher 

transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-32

HoTT) or a transmitter retrofi tted with an 

optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24) to 

a Graupner pupil transmitter with an optoelectronic system pupil socket – identifi able 

by the mark "S" on the side of the threepole TRS jack.

3290.8 trainer cable for connecting a pupil 

transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-32

HoTT) or a transmitter retrofi tted with an 

optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24) 

to a Graupner teacher transmitter with an 

opto-electronic system teacher socket – 

identifi able by the mark "M" on the side of 

the three-pole TRS jack.

Further details about the cables and modules 

mentioned in this section for teacher and pupil 

transmitters can be found in the respective transmitter 

handbook, in the Graupner RC main catalog or in 

Internet at www.graupner.de.
Detail program description - Teacher/pupil 213

Trainer mode with the mc-32 HoTT transmitter

Due to the continuous improvements made to the product range, please consult our website at www.graupner.de for the latest information

Teacher transmitter

with DSC socket

Teacher transmitter with 

teacher module, order 

no. 3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22

Teacher/pupil cable, 

order no. 3290.8

M

Pupil transmitter mc-32 HoTT 

mx-12 HoTT,

mx-16 HoTT, 

mx-20 HoTT and 

mc-32 HoTT

mc-19 through mc-24, 

mx-22(iFS), mx-24s

Pupil transmitter

with DSC socket

Pupil transmitter with pupil 

module, order no. 3290.3, 

3290.10, 3290.33

D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, 

FM 6014, mc-10 ... mc-24, 

mx-22(iFS), mx-24s

S

Teacher transmitter mc-32 HoTT

mx-12 HoTT,

mx-16 HoTT, 

mx-20 HoTT and 

mc-32 HoTT

Note:

The lists present the possible transmitters/transmitter 

combinations at the time of going to press.

Teacher/pupil cable, 

order no. 4179.1

Teacher/pupil cable, 

order no. 3290.7

Teacher/pupil cable, 

order no. 4179.1
214 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

Wireless HoTT system

Wireless operation of the mc-32 HoTT trainer 

mode system is also possible. To do so, the teacher 

transmitter must be "connected" to a pupil transmitter 

as described below. Prior to this, however, the 

training model's receiver must be bound to the PUPIL 

transmitter. This confi guration is possible between 

transmitters which have the "BIND:" option in the 

»Teacher/pupil« menu.

Preparing for training mode

Teacher transmitter

The training model must be programmed completely,

i.e. with all of its functions including trims and any 

mixer functions, in one model memory of the HoTT 

teacher transmitter. The model to be used for 

training must therefore be under the complete 

control of the teacher transmitter. The fi nal step 

in preparation, however, is to bind the training 

model to the pupil transmitter. For a detailed 

description of the binding process, please 

consult pages 77 and 85. 

Pupil transmitter

If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter, 

it is best to activate a free model memory with the 

required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign 

the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode 

(mode 1 ... 4) and "Throttle (or collective pitch) min. 

forward/back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All 

other options are left at their default values. All other 

settings, including all mixer and coupling functions, 

are confi gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, 

which in turn transmits them to the model.

When assigning control functions, the usual 

conventions must be observed:

Channel Function

1 Motor throttle/collective pitch

2 Aileron/roll

3 Elevator/pitch-axis

4 Rudder/tail rotor

If other control functions are to be transferred to the 

pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two 

dual axis sticks (1 ... 4), access the »Control adjust« 

menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs

which correspond to enabled function or transmitter 

control inputs 5 ... 12 as shown in the »Teacher/

pupil« menu of the teacher transmitter. Afterwards, 

assign the operating elements appropriately. 

Important:

If you should forget to assign a transmitter 

control on the pupil side, then the affected servo 

or servos will remain in the center position when 

the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.

Preparing the teacher and pupil transmitters

Once you have bound the training model to the pupil 

transmitter, now switch on the teacher transmitter. On 

both transmitters, use the selection keys on the left or 

right touch pad, page to the »Teacher/pupil« menu 

option on the multi-function menu:

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to open this menu option:

TRAINER /student

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: ––– BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

Note:

The screen image shown above shows the menu 

in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been 

released to the pupil ( ) and no switch has been 

assigned

("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).

Pupil transmitter

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to move the marker frame to the "BIND" input fi eld. If 

there is a switch shown at the right of "S:" then this 

must fi rst be erased, see screen image:

TRAINER /student

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12



–––
Detail program description - Teacher/pupil 215

Teacher transmitter

Up to twelve function inputs (see "Term defi nitions" 

on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be 

individually or in any combination transferred to the 

pupil transmitter "P". 

The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore 

indicates the function inputs with which control 

functions 1 ... 4 (joystick functions for fi xed-wing and 

helicopter models) are permanently connected as 

well as inputs 5 ... 12, which can be freely assigned 

in the »Control adjust« menu. 

Note:

Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned 

over to the pupil is basically of no consequence. 

However, their assignment in the »Control adjust« 

menu is possible only when the trainer mode 

connection is inactive.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for 

transfer to the pupil ( ) then briefl y tap center SET

key of the right touch pad for each switch to be 

switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):

TRAINER /student

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: ––– BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

To be able to carry out the transfer, you must now 

assign a trainer mode switch. Do this by placing the 

marker frame just to the right of the "P" at the bottom 

left of the screen display by using the selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad then assign a switch 

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard 

momentary switches on the switchboard to allow 

a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any 

time:

TRAINER /Teacher

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: ––– BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

–

No

 pupil

 signal

Since at this stage of programming the wireless 

trainer system no connection yet exists to a pupil 

transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to 

the switches closed during the switch assignment 

process with appropriate visual and audible warning 

notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you 

have just assigned:

TRAINER /Teacher

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

9



Note:

The switch assignment just described also 

determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher 

and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a 

pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch 

on this menu. The header line therefore also 

switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher / 

Teach" once a switch has been assigned.

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

now move the marker frame to the right, to "BIND: 

n/a":

TRAINER /Teacher

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

n/a

678 9 10 11 12

9



Binding the pupil transmitter to the teacher 

transmitter

Note:

The distance between the two transmitters should not 

be too great during the binding process. If necessary, 

change the positions of the transmitters and initiate 

the binding process again.

Initiate the "BINDING" process from the pupil 

transmitter by tapping the center SET key of the right 

touch pad ...

TRAINER /student

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

Binding

678 9 10 11 12



–––

... and repeat this immediately on the teacher 

transmitter:

TRAINER /Teacher

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

Binding

678 9 10 11 12

9


216 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil

As soon as this process is complete, both screens 

will show "ON" instead of the fl ashing "BINDING":

TRAINER /student

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

on

678 9 10 11 12



–––

TRAINER /Teacher

P

T

2 3 4 5

SW: BIND:

1

on

678 9 10 11 12

9



You can return to the basic display on both screens 

and start the training session after carefully checking 

all of the relevant functions. 

If neither transmitter or only one transmitter displays 

"ON", this means the binding process has failed: try 

changing the positions of both transmitters and then 

repeat the entire procedure.

Important notice:

Check that the model aircraft is operational 

and check that all functions issue the correct 

commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.

During the ...

Training session

... the teacher and pupil can maintain a variable 

distance from one another. The "reach of signal" 

(max. 50 m) should not be exceeded under any 

circumstances, however, no one else should be 

standing between the teacher and the pupil since 

these persons could reduce the connection range of 

the return channel used by the two transmitters. 

In this operating mode, the basic display of the 

teacher transmitter is as shown below ...

#01 0:24h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

3.9V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

1:23h

P

V

RFC–Teacher

Graubele

... and the pupil transmitter's display will look 

something like this:

#01 0:24h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

3.7V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

4:32h

RFC–student

Schüler

If, however, the connection between the teacher 

and pupil transmitters should be lost during the 

training session, then the teacher transmitter will 

automatically assume control of the model.

If the trainer mode switch is in the "Pupil" position 

when connectivity is lost, the Warning LED on the 

teacher transmitter will blink and audible warning 

signals will also be sounded for as long as the signal 

is lost. The basic display also displays the following 

warning notice:

No

 pupil

 signal

However, if only the character string "HF –" blinks on 

the transmitter's basic display accompanied by the 

audible warning signals, the pupil signal has been 

lost but the trainer mode switch is set to the "Teacher" 

position.

In both cases, your fi rst step should be to reduce 

the distance between the two transmitters. If this 

does not help, then you should land immediately and 

establish the cause.

If both transmitters are operational and the receiver 

system is switched off, then the teacher transmitter's 

basic display will show the icons instead of the 

"familiar" . The antenna icon will also fl ash and an 

audible warning signal will sound twice per second.

Resuming trainer mode

If you switch off one or both transmitters during the 

session – for whatever reason – then the basic display 

of the transmitter(s) shows the following question 

after being switched back on:

ACT

TRAINER

Wireless Link

INH

If "INH" (set) is confi rmed by tapping the center SET

key of the right touch pad or, alternatively, by waiting 

for approx. two seconds until the message disappears. 

then you will reset the transmitter in question back to 

its "normal" operating mode. You will then have to reestablish a connection between the teacher and pupil 

transmitters.

If, on the other hand, the selection keys on the left or 

right touch pad are used to select "ACT" ... 
Detail program description - Teacher/pupil 217

Please select

Trainer link?

ACT INH

... and this selection is confi rmed by tapping the 

center SET key of the right touch pad, then the 

existing teacher connection is restored. The same 

approach is used if the transmitter is confi gured as a 

pupil transmitter.
218 Detail program description - Tx. output swap

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad, page to the menu option »Tx. output swap« Tx. 

output swap on the multi-function menu: 

Phase trim Non-delayed chan

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to open this menu option.

Tx. output swap

To achieve maximum fl exibility regarding receiver 

socket assignment, the mc-32 HoTT program offers 

you the option of swapping servo outputs 1 to 16 as 

you please.

This option lets you distribute the transmitter's 16 

"control channels" to any of the transmitter outputs

1 ... 16. If you do, you must remember that the 

»Servo display« screen – accessible from almost any 

menu option by simultaneously tapping the  and 

keys on the left touch pad – refers exclusively to the 

"control channels" as preset by the receiver socket 

assignment: it therefore does NOT take any output 

swaps into account.

Tx. output swap

Swapping the outputs on the transmitter

Servo

Servo

Servo

Servo

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Output

Output

Output

Output

TRANSFER OUTPUT

SEL

Use the  selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad to select the channel/output combination to be 

changed then briefl y tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad. You can now use the right selection 

keys to assign your selected (control) channel to the 

desired output, confi rming this with the SET key ... 

Servo

Servo

Servo

Servo

6

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Output

Output

Output

Output

TRANSFER OUTPUT

SEL

... or, by tapping the  or  selection keys on 

the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR), you 

can restore the original assignment. 

Any subsequent changes, such as servo travel 

adjustments, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., must 

always be performed in accordance with the 

original receiver socket assignment!

Example:

In the mc-32 HoTT helicopter program, the outputs 

for a collective pitch servo and the throttle servo 

are swapped around, compared to some older 

GRAUPNER/JR mc units. The throttle servo now 

occupies transmitter output "6" and the collective 

pitch servo output "1". Perhaps, however, you wish 

to retain the previous confi guration? In this case, you 

will swap over channels 1 and 6 as appropriate, so 

that (control) channel 6 is located on output 1 and 

vice versa – as shown above:

Note:

"Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) is the 

receiver-side channel correlation function integrated 

into the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's telemetry menu. 

With channel mapping, the transmitter's control 

channels (16 maximum) can be freely distributed 

to multiple receivers or receiver outputs having the 

same control function, for example to operate two 

servo controls per aileron surface instead of just 

being able to control one servo, etc. To keep controls 

manageable, however, we strongly recommend using 

only one of the options at a time. 
For your notes 219
220 Detail program description - Profi -trim | Winged models

Profi -trim 

Flaps and aileron trimming

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter has an integrated 

software function for direct trimming of all fl aps and 

ailerons. 

Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, 

page to the »Profi -trim« menu option in the multifunction menu ...

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free Mixer

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

... then open this menu option with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad.

PRO TRIM

AI AI FL FL

Trim off off off off

ctl sw free

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

free free free

To set the desired option, move the marker frame 

onto the desired line or column with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. Select the 

desired entry in the fi eld now displayed in inverse 

video with the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad or move the desired transmitter control. Conclude 

the procedure with a tap on the ESC key.

Programming is done in three steps.

First of all, in the "Trim" line it will be established just 

which fl ap pair is to be trimmed as "AI" and/or "FL". The 

"Control" line specifi es the control channel over which 

the given trim function is to be performed and, fi nally, 

a switch is defi ned in the "ON/OFF" line by which this 

profi -trim function can be switched on or off globally.

Trim

Notes:

• Please note that, depending on the number of 

aileron and fl ap servos specifi ed in the »Model 

type« menu (page 95), some settings cannot 

be used. For example, with only 1 aileron and/

or 1 fl ap servo there is no aileron fl ap activation 

possible, and the opposite is also true. Since 

this is the case, a number of settings in various 

columns remain ineffective.

• Pay attention to potential double-assignments 

when making trim control choices.

The trim functions which can be activated (ON) or 

deactivated (OFF) on the fi rst line of this menu, 

either individually or in any combination, make prefl ight corrections to aileron and fl ap settings quick 

and easy, without the complexity of having to call up 

individual setting options. 

Individually, these are functions for ...

• Trim of the aileron function for aileron ("AI")

• Trim of the fl ap function for aileron ("AI")

• Trim of the aileron function for fl aps ("FL")

• Trim of the fl ap function for fl aps ("FL")

Tap on the  or  selection keys of the right 

touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) to reset the 

value of the fi eld displayed in inverse video back to 

"OFF".

Note:

Regardless of a switch's ON/OFF setting (see further 

below), the reset of a value fi eld in the "Trim" line has 

the effect an immediate return of the affected trim 

function to its original reference point.
Detail program description - Profi -trim | Winged models 221

Control

PRO TRIM

AI AI FL FL

Trim act act off off

ctl sw free

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

free free free

The second line of this menu is for selecting 

transmitter control assignments which appear 

advantageous from the many controls available on 

the transmitter. 

To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys 

to navigate to the desired column then tap briefl y on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad ...:

PRO TRIM

AI QR WK FL

Trim actN AUS AUS off

ctl sw Lever1

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

free free free

Move desired

control adj.

... and move the desired transmitter control:

PRO TRIM

AI AI FL FL

Trim act act off off

ctl sw Tvr1

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

Tvr2 free free

The mid-point position of enabled proportional 

controls corresponds to the programmed fl ap setting.

The trim range for a given transmitter control is 

about ±25 %. However, these "trim" controls are 

only effective when, as described in section "ON/

OFF" further below, has been assigned to a profi -trim 

switch and switched on.

With trims switched on, make a test fl ight to 

determine the optimal setting then open the ON/

OFF switch to secure the setting against inadvertent 

maladjustment. Now as long as the ON/OFF switch 

remains open or is erased, the located trim values will 

retain their settings. 

An active transmitter control assignment can be 

erased with a simultaneous tap on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).

Note:

Trim values retain their settings until the next closure 

of the ON/OFF switch, even then when the trim 

functions in the "Control" line have been temporally 

reset to "free". 

ON/OFF

The "ON/OFF" line is used to assign a switch which 

permits the profi -trim function to be switched on/

off globally. This assignment is done in the manner 

described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.

In this context, pay attention to the following 

dependencies:

• Only when the ON/OFF switch in the "Trim" line is 

set to "ON" will the trim functions assigned to trim 

controls in the "Transm. controls" line be able to 

affect trim within a range of ±25 %. 

• As soon as the ON/OFF switch is opened or 

erased, the current trim positions will be stored 

and the selected trim controls become ineffective. 

A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) when a switch 

assignment is active will reset a fi eld's value back to 

"---":

PRO TRIM

AI AI FL FL

Trim act act off off

ctl sw Tvr1

on/off –––

SET SET SET SET

Tvr2 free free
222 Detail program description - Profi -trim | Helicopters

Profi trim

Pitch, throttle, tail-rotor, and C1 curve trimming

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter's software has an 

integrated function for additional trimming of 8-point 

curves;in Heli programs »Channel 1 curve« page 

131, and »Helicopter mixer« page 176. These are 

intended for "Pitch" curves "Channel 1  Throttle" 

and "Channel 1  Tail. rot.".

This feature, named »Profi trimm« because of its 

functional similarity to the Profi -Trim module for the 

mc-24 but only available on that transmitter as a 

retrofi t option. Select this feature from the multifunction menu with the selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad ... 

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixer MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

... then open this menu option with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad.

Mixer Point Phase

free

free

free

free

None

None

None

None

L 1

1

1

1

L

L

L

"Trim control" column

Note:

Pay attention to potential double-assignments when 

making trim control choices.

This menu's fi rst line is for assigning those transmitter 

controls (from the many available on the transmitter) 

which appear most advantageous for this purpose. 

To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys 

to navigate to the desired line then tap briefl y on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad ...

Mixer Point Phase

free

free

free

free

None

keiner

keiner

None

L 1

1

1

1

L

L

L

Move desired

control adj.

... then move the desired transmitter control:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

free

free

None

None

None

None

L 1

1

1

1

L

L

L

Erase trim control

Select the transmitter control assignment in the 

appropriate line as already described, e.g.:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

free

free

None

keiner

keiner

None

L 1

1

1

1

L

L

L

Move desired

control adj.

A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will now reset 

the fi eld's value back to "free".

"Mixer" column

There are a total of four value fi elds in this column. For 

each of these fi elds a helicopter mixer can be selected, 

individually or in any combination, from a list.

To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right 

touch pad to change to the desired value fi eld. Then 

briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad ...

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

free

free

None

None

None

L 1

1

1

1

None

L

L

L

... and select the desired mixer with the selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

free

free

None

None

None

L 1

1

1

1

Pitch

L

L

L

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude 

the entry. This procedure is the same for the other 

menus.

A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a fi eld 

displayed in inverse video back to "None".
Detail program description - Profi -trim | Helicopters 223

"Point" column

The lines of the column "Mixer" were used to select 

one or mixers. Now, in the "Point" column, the 

reference points to be trimmed will be set. 

To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right 

touch pad to move to the desired value fi eld. Then 

briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad ...

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

free

free

None

None

None

L 1

1

1

1

Pitch

L

L

L

If a undefi ned point is selected – in the basic version, 

only points "L" and "H" are set – the respective 

regulator will remain ineffective.

The point offset (in a maximum range of about 

±12 %) for the selected mixer will simultaneously be 

displayed in the curve diagrams of the »Helicopter 

mixer« menu so that the offset can also be checked 

visually.

Phase

The rightmost column is used, if desired, to determine 

which programmed fl ight phase the given regulator 

is to be active. The number preceding fl ight phase 

names, in the example "1" (Normal)", are based 

on the phase numbers as found in the »Phase 

assignment« menu on page 148:

Mixer Point Phase

Slide1

free

free

free

None

None

None

L 1

1

1

1

Pitch

L

L

L

However, the current position of the regulator 

will be – contrary to the corresponding fi xed-wing 

program – set to a new zero point when ...

• by a change of fl ight phase, individual or all trim 

controls become active or

• the given trim control is erased or

• meanwhile the function assigned in the "Mixer" 

column is to be changed.

In all of these cases, the current regulator position will 

be stored and automatically overridden, i.e. adopted 

into the curve characteristic, by the pre-programmed 

curve points specifi ed by the »Channel 1 curve« 

and »Helicopter mixer« menus. In this manner it 

is possible to simultaneously optimize up to four 

arbitrary curve points during the fl ight.

The memory storage option described here is, for 

example, useful during the fi rst test fl ights of a new 

model as this permits the "fl own" fl ight corrections to 

be immediately recorded in the program.

However, in order to have a clearly defi ned reference 

point prior to the fi rst time a store is done, it is important 

to put all regulators into their middle positions. 

But always be careful that, after repeated stores, 

servo travel is not too severely restricted on one side. 

Check and correct the control linkage if necessary.

Sometimes, despite an optimal basic setting for the 

model, it becomes necessary to temporarily change 

reference points, for example, when the weather 

has changed and the motor requires a short-term 

correction or even when the muffl er gets a leak 

unexpectedly, etc. Of course, in all of these cases, 

the corrected settings should not be stored via 

the Profi trim option. Storage can be prevented by 

ensuring that the regulator is in its middle position 

before activation or deactivation.

Note:

Yet another point, independent of this, can be 

regulated via the "Trim function" through use of 

the selection keys. This is described in detail along 

with the programming of 8-point curves in section 

»Channel 1 curve« on page 131.
224 Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged models

Trim memory 

Storing the current trim position

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu 

option in the multi-function menu: 

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers

Wing mixers Free Mixer

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to open this menu option:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

0%

0%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

SET

This menu permits selective storage of the given 

current position for the four digital trim controls in 

order to return them afterward to their visual middle 

points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the 

respective middle positions of trim wheels for control 

functions 1 ... 4 available again following a model 

memory location change or after long fl ight pauses.

This memory store process is effective on a fl ightphase specifi c basis for the currently active model 

memory location and is not to be stored globally. 

Therefore, as soon as fl ight phases have been 

defi ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phase 

assignment menus, the given active fl ight phase 

will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For 

example:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

0%

0%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

Storing trim positions

The model has been fl ight tested and trimmed 

during the test fl ights. Current trim positions are 

now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located 

approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim 

range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right 

column displays trim memory content, currently fi lled 

uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been 

stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

-7%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

Now use the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be 

written into trim memory, e.g. the elevator trim value:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

-7%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected 

value fi eld. The message "Please press trim"

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

0%

Please

press trim

will then appear briefl y in the display.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

0%

Now briefl y press the trim wheel for the elevator's 

joystick to accept the trim value.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

0%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

+3%

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad 

will fi nish the procedure.

Now, if desired, change the fl ight phase and repeat 

the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the 

other control functions, as necessary.
Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged models 225

Erasing stored trim positions

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased 

from trim memory, e.g.:

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

0%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

+3%

Now briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad to activate the value fi eld.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

+3%

Please

press trim

As previously described, the message "Please 

press trim" will appear briefl y. After his message has 

disappeared, simultaneously tap on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to 

reset the value fi eld again back to "0 %".

However, if you do not erase a trim memory before 

storing a new value, the new value will be added to 

the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to 

effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim 

range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive 

offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including 

one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control 

linkages and make corrections as necessary.
226 Detail program description - Trim memory | Helicopters

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu 

option in the multi-function menu: 

Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

Free mixer MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to open this menu option:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Pitch ax.

0%

0%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

SET

This menu permits selective storage of the given 

current position for the four digital trim controls in 

order to return them afterward to their visual middle 

points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the 

respective middle positions of trim wheels for control 

functions 1 ... 4 available again following a model 

memory location change or after long fl ight pauses.

This memory store process is effective on a fl ightphase specifi c basis for the currently active model 

memory location and is not to be stored globally. 

Therefore, as soon as fl ight phases have been 

defi ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phase 

assignment menus, the given active fl ight phase 

will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For 

example:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

0%

0%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

Storing trim positions

The model has been fl ight tested and trimmed 

during the test fl ights. Current trim positions are 

now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located 

approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim 

range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right 

column displays trim memory content, currently fi lled 

uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been 

stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

+3%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

Now use the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad to move to the line whose trim value is to be 

written into trim memory, e.g. the pitch-axis trim 

value:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

+3%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected 

value fi eld. The message "Please press trim"

TRIM MEMORY

+5%

+3%

0%

Trim Pos.

–7%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

0%

Please

press trim

Roll

Roll ax.

Pitch/thr

Tail rot.

will then appear briefl y in the display.

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

+3%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

Now briefl y press the trim wheel for the elevator's 

joystick to accept the trim value.

Trim memory

Storing the current trim position
Detail program description - Trim memory | Helicopters 227

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

0%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

0%

0%

+3%

0%

Normal SET

Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad 

will fi nish the procedure.

Now, if desired, change the fl ight phase and repeat 

the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the 

other control functions, as necessary.

Erasing stored trim positions

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased 

from trim memory, e.g.:

TRIM MEMORY

Roll

Roll ax.

+5%

0%

Pitch/thr 0%

Tail rot.

Trim Pos.

-7%

0%

0%

+3%

0%

Normal SET

Now briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad to activate the value fi eld.

TRIM MEMORY

Aileron

Elevator

+5%

+3%

Channel 1 0%

Rudder

Trim Pos.

–7%

0%

0%

0%

Normal SET

+3%

Please

press trim

As previously described, the message "Please 

press trim" will appear briefl y. After his message has 

disappeared, simultaneously tap on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to 

reset the value fi eld again back to "0 %".

However, if you do not erase a trim memory before 

storing a new value, the new value will be added to 

the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to 

effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim 

range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive 

offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including 

one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control 

linkages and make corrections as necessary.
228 Detail program description - Telemetry

Telemetry

Read-in and settings for telemetry data

The receiver's settings, as well as optional telemetry 

sensor settings, can be called up and programmed 

in real-time by way of the »Telemetry« menu. 

Communication with the transmitter is accomplished 

over the return channel built into the HoTT receiver.

As many as four sensors can be attached, if 

necessary via V or Y adapter cables, to receivers 

with current fi rmware of types: GR-12S HoTT 

(order no. 33505), GR-12 HoTT (order no. 33506), 

GR-16 (order no. 33508), GR-24 HoTT (order 

no. 33512) and GR-32 DUAL (order no. 33516).

The update capability of these and future receivers, 

which can be performed by the user, will keep the 

respective »Telemetry« menu up to date with the 

latest version and ensure enhancement with future 

functions or languages.

Note:

After registering your product at https://www.

graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you are 

automatically informed of new updates. 

Important notices:

• This manual is based on the functions available at 

the time of printing.

• As already indicated in the section "Binding 

multiple receivers" on page 77 and 85, multiple 

receivers per model can be bound into the system 

as necessary. However, only the receiver 

selected in the line "TELEMETRY RCV" of 

the "Telemetry" menu is able to establish 

a telemetry connection to the transmitter! 

However, that also means the inverse, that only this 

receiver can be addressed through the Telemetry 

menu! If necessary, therefore, the selection must 

be changed before settings can be made on a 

specifi c receiver:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

• When adjusting the settings of the remote 

control, make absolutely sure that the 

transmitter antenna is always far enough 

away from the receiver antennae! To be on the 

safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. 

Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection 

to the return channel and malfunctions will 

result.

• Since the telemetric data between transmitter 

and receiver is only exchanged after the fourth 

data package, the data transmission requires a 

certain amount of time for technical reasons, so 

the reaction to the operating keys and changes 

to settings take place with a delay. Therefore, the 

delay is not due to an error.

• Programming on the model or on sensors may 

only take place if the model is on the ground. Only 

carry out the settings with the motor switched 

off and the battery disconnected! Otherwise, 

undesired programming cannot be ruled out.

For example, a servo test initiated accidentally 

could cause the model to crash and cause 

personal injury and/or property damage. Observe 

the safety instructions on pages 4 ... 7 of this 

manual and the respective separate manuals.

• All settings (such as fail-safe, servo direction 

reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings, 

etc.) made through the »Telemetry« menu are 

stored only in the receiver and therefore are 

adopted along with it if it is implemented as a 

receiver in another model. Therefore, to be on the 

safe side, re-initialize your HoTT receiver if you 

want to use the receiver in a different model; see 

"Reset" on page 46.

• Only program the servo direction reversal, 

servo travel, mixer and curve settings through 

the mc-32-specifi c standard menus »Servo 

adjustment« page 102, »Dual Rate / Expo« 

page 120 or page 124, »Channel 1 curve« 

page 128 or 131, and so on. Otherwise, the 

settings superimpose one another, which can 

lead to complexity or even problems in the later 

operation.

• The channel assignment function, called "Channel 

mapping", integrated into the »Telemetry« menu 

of the mc-32 HoTT transmitter can also freely 

distribute control functions over multiple receivers 

or even distribute a single control function over 

multiple receiver outputs, such as two servos per 

aileron instead of only one individual servo, etc. 

We also recommend exercising extreme during 

the programming.
Detail program description - Telemetry 229

Telemetry

The menus gathered under the heading »Telemetry« 

can be called up from the mc-32 HoTT transmitter's 

basic display with a tap of about one second duration 

on the center ESC key of the left touch pad. The 

same menus can, like other transmitter menus, also 

be opened in the multifunction menu with a tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad:

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Basic operation

Operating the »Telemetry« menu is essentially the 

same as for the remaining mc-32 HoTT transmitter 

menus. The few differences are described in the 

following:

The  selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

can be used to switch between individual pages 

of the Telemetry menu. Corresponding directional 

indicators can be found at top right of each display 

page in the form of angled brackets ( ), refer to the 

fi gures below. If only one angled bracket is visible, 

you are on either the fi rst or last respective page. 

In this case, changing pages is only possible in the 

indicated direction.

Menu lines in which parameters can be changed are 

identifi ed with the aforementioned angled bracket ( ). 

The " " pointer will jump a line forward or back with 

a tap on the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad. Lines to which a jump cannot be made 

are unalterable.

In order to change a parameter, briefl y touch the 

center SET key of the right touch pad (the parameter 

will be displayed in inverse video), change the value 

within the permissible adjustment range via the 

selection keys of the right touch pad and adopt the 

value with another tap on the SET key. A brief tap on 

the center ESC key of the left 4-way pad will cause a 

return to the starting position again.

Now use the  selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to pick the desired sub-menu. However, if 

the message ...

OK

CAN NOT

RECEIVE

DATA

... appears instead of the desired sub-menu after 

touching the center SET key of the right touch pad 

then no connection has been established with a 

receiver. Therefore, switch on your receiver system 

or, if applicable reconnect the addressed receiver as 

described on page 77 or 85 or activate it as described 

under "Important Notices" on the previous page.

On the fi rst display page of the sub-menu overwritten 

with ...

RX DATAVIEW

...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

... no settings can be made. This page is only 

provided for information:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

RX DATAVIEW

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C

L PACK TIME 00010msec

R-VOLT :05.0V

L.R-VOLT:04.5V

S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C

SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C

Value Explanation

S-QUA signal quality in %

S-dBm Reception power in dBm

S-STR signal strength in %

R-TEM. Receiver temperature in °C

L PACK 

TIME

Indicates the time in ms in which the 

longest data package is lost during the 

transmission from the transmitter to the 

receiver

R-VOLT Current operating voltage of the 

receiver in volts

SETTINGS/DISPLAYS
230 Detail program description - Telemetry

L.R-VOLT Lowest operating voltage of the 

receiver since it was last turned on, in 

volts

SENSOR1 Indicates values of optional telemetric 

sensor 1, in volts and °C

SENSOR2 Indicates values of optional telemetric 

sensor 2, in volts and °C

Signal quality (S-QUA)

The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent "live" over the 

receiver's return channel to the transmitter and 

indicates the signal strength in %.

Reception power (S-dbm)

Reception power (S-dbm) is indicated with negative 

values, which means a value of zero is the maximum 

value (= best reception) and the lower the values are, 

the poorer the reception power! The range test before 

operation, among other things, is important for this.

Note:

With negative numbers the evaluation of a number is 

reversed: The higher the number following the minus 

symbol, the lower the value is. Therefore, a reception 

power of -80 dBm, for example , is poorer than one of 

-70 dBm.

Perform the range test as described on page 80 and 

88 before each fl ight and, in doing so, simulate all 

servo movements which also take place during the 

fl ight. The range must be at least 50 m on the ground 

with the range test activated. At this distance, the 

value shown under "S-dBm" in the "RX DATAVIEW" 

display may not be greater than -80 dBm in order to 

guarantee safe operation. The model should never 

be operated with a lower value (e.g. -85 dBm). Check 

the installation of the receiver system and the position 

of the antenna.

The reception power should not drop below -90 dBm 

during operation. Otherwise, reduce the distance of the 

model. Normally, however, the acoustic range warning 

(peep tone interval 1 s) is triggered before this value is 

reached in order to guarantee safe operation.

Signal strength (S-STR)

The signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. In 

general, an acoustic range warning (peep tone 

interval 1 s) is issued as soon as the receiver signal 

becomes too week in the return channel. However, 

since the transmitter has a signifi cantly higher 

transmission power than the receiver, the model can 

still be safely operated. For the sake of safety, the 

distance to the model should be reduced until the 

warning tone goes silent again.

Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)

Make sure the receiver remains within the permissible 

temperature range during all fl ight conditions (ideally 

between -10 and 55 °C).

The receiver temperature limit, at which a warning 

is issued, can be adjusted in the sub-menu »RX 

SERVO TEST« under "ALARM TEMP+" (50 ... 80 °C 

and "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 ... +10 °C). When the 

value is under-run or over-run, an acoustic signal 

sounds (continuous peep tone) and "TEMP.E" will 

appear at the top right of all "RX" receiver sub-menus. 

Additionally, the parameter "R-TEM" will be displayed 

in inverse video on the »RX DATAVIEW« display 

page.

Data packages (L PACK TIME)

Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data 

packages are lost in the transmission from the 

transmitter to the receiver. In practice, that is the 

longest time span in which the remove control system 

has entered into fail-safe mode.

Receiver operating voltage (R-VOLT)

Always check the operating voltage of the receiver. 

Never operate or even start your model if the 

operating voltage is too low.

The receiver low voltage warning can be adjusted 

between 3.0 and 6.0 volts in "ALARM VOLT" of the 

»RX SERVO TEST« sub-menu. If this range is underrun, an acoustic signal is sounded (repetitive double 

peep tone (long/short)) and "VOLT.E" will appear at 

the top right of all »RX ...« receiver sub-menus.| In 

addition, the parameter "R-VOLT" will be displayed in 

inverse video in the »RX DATAVIEW« sub-menu.

The current receiver battery voltage is also displayed 

in the default display, see page 28.

Minimum receiver operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)

"L.R-VOLT" indicates the minimum operating voltage 

of the receiver since the last time it was switched on.

If this voltage should deviate signifi cantly from the 

current "R-VOLT" operating voltage, the receiver 

battery may be too heavily encumbered by the 

servos. The consequence is voltage drops. In this 

case, use a more powerful voltage supply in order to 

achieve maximum operational safety.

Sensor 1 + 2

Indicates the values of optional telemetric sensors 

1and 2, if present, in volts and °C. A description of 

these sensors can be found in the appendix.

RX SERVO

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF

CENTER : 1500μsec

TRIM : –000μsec

LIMIT– : 150%

OUTPUT CH: 01

LIMIT+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec

It is very important that you read the notices on page 

228 before doing any programming on this display 
Detail program description - Telemetry 231

page.

Value Explanation Possible

settings

OUTPUT 

CH

Channel selection 1 ... depending 

on receiver

REVERSE Servo reversal OFF / ON

CENTER Servo center in μs if active 

(inverse), 

dependent on 

control position

TRIM Trim position in μs 

deviating from the 

CENTER position

-120 ... +120 μs

LIMIT– Travel limit on the "–" 

side of servo travel 

in % servo travel

30 ... 150 %

LIMIT+ Travel limit on the "+" 

side of servo travel 

in % servo travel

30 ... 150 %

PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 or 20 ms

OUTPUT CH (channel selection)

If applicable, select the line "OUTPUT CH" with the 

selection keys. Touch the SET key of the right touch 

pad. The value fi eld is shown highlighted. Now set 

the desired channel (e.g. 01) with the selection keys 

on the right touch pad. The following parameters 

are always based on the channel set here.

Reverse (servo reversal)

Set the rotational direction of the servo connected to 

the selected servo channel: ON / OFF

CENTER (servo center)

The active value fi eld (inverse video) in the "CENTER" 

line shows the current impulse time in μs for the 

control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line. 

The displayed value depends on the current position 

of the control infl uencing this control channel and, if 

applicable, the position of its trimming.

A channel impulse time of 1500 μs corresponds to the 

standard center position and thus the conventional 

servo center.

In order to change this value, select the "CENTER" 

line then touch the SET key. Now move the 

respective transmitter control, joystick and/or trim 

wheel to the desired position and store the current 

control's position with another tap on the SET key. 

This position is saved as the new neutral position.

TRIM (trim position)

In the "TRIM" line" you can carry out the fi ne 

adjustment of the neutral position of a servo 

connected to the control channel selected in the 

"OUTPUT CH" line using the selection keys of the 

right touch pad in 1 μs increments. The value in the 

"CENTER" line can be adjusted by the TRIM value 

set here in a range of ± 120 μs. 

Factory setting: 0 μs.

LIMIT–/+ (side dependent travel limit -/+)

This option is provided for the adjustment of a sidedependent limit (limiting) of the servo travel (rudder 

throw) of the servo connected to the control channel 

selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line. 

The settings for both directions are separate but both 

are in a range of 30 ... 150 %.

Factory setting: 150 % each.

PERIOD (cycle time)

In this line you determine the time interval of the 

individual channel impulse. This setting is adopted for 

all control channels.

With the use of only digital servos, a cycle time of 

10 ms can be set.. 

In mixed operation or with use of only analog servos, 

20 ms should absolutely be set, because the latter 

can otherwise be "over-strained" and react with 

"shaking" or "quivering" as a result.

RX FAIL SAFE

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : HOLD

F.S.POS. : 1500μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

POSITION : 1500μsec

The description of this menus necessitates a few 

words of warning in advance:

"Do nothing" is the absolute worst thing to be done in 

this regard. "HOLD" is prescribed in the base setup 

model of the HoTT receiver.

In the event of a failure, in the best case scenario the 

model fl ies straight ahead for an indefi nite amount of 

time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without 

causing signifi cant damage! However, if something 

like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong 

time, the model may become uncontrollable and 

"tear" across the fl ight fi eld completely out of control, 

putting the pilot and spectators at risk.

Therefore, it would obviously be benefi cial to program 

the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order 

to prevent such risks. If necessary, seek the advice of 

an experienced pilot in order to fi ne a "logical" setting 

for your model.

And then another brief notice regarding the three 

possible versions of the mc-32 HoTT transmitter for 

the setting of Fail Safe:

The easiest, and recommended, way to fail-safe 

settings is the use of the »Fail Safe« menu, which 

can be reached from the multifunction menu, see 

page 208.

Similarly, in order to achieve the same result 

somewhat more laboriously, the "FAIL SAFE ALL" 

option described on the following pages is also 

available.
232 Detail program description - Telemetry

In addition, there are the relatively elaborate methods 

of the of the individual adjustment using the options 

"MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY". The description of 

these variants begins with the "MODE" option further 

below.

Value Explanation Possible

settings

OUTPUT 

CH

Output channel 

(servo connection 

of the receiver)

1 ... depending 

on receiver

INPUT CH Input channel 

(channel 

coming from the 

transmitter)

1 ... 16 %

MODE Fail-Safe mode HOLD

FAIL SAFE

OFF

F.S.POS. Fail-safe position 1000 ... 2000 μs

DELAY Reaction time 

(delay)

0.25, 0.50, 0.75 

and 1.00 s

FAIL 

SAFE ALL

Save of the Failsafe

Positions of all 

control channels

NO / SAVE

POSITION Display of the 

saved Fail-safe 

position

Between approx 

1000 and 2000 μs

OUTPUT CH (servo connection)

In this line you select the respective OUTPUT CH 

(servo connection of the receiver) to be set.

INPUT CH (selection of the input channel)

As already mentioned on page 228, the 16 control 

functions of the mc-32 HoTT transmitter can 

be arbitrarily distributed to multiple receivers, if 

necessary, or even assigned to multiple receiver 

outputs with the same control function. For example, 

this might be used in order to be able to control two 

servers for each aileron fl ap or an oversize rudder 

with linked servos instead of an individual servo. 

Distribution to multiple HoTT receivers, in turn, offers 

the advantage of not having to use a long servo 

cable, e.g. for large models. In this case, bear in 

mind that only the receiver selected in the line "TEL.

EMPF." through the »Telemetry« menu can be 

addressed!

The 16 control channels (INPUT CH) of the mc-32

HoTT can be appropriately managed through socalled " Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) 

whereby a different control channel is assigned to the 

servo connection selected in the OUTPUT CH line for 

the receiver in the INPUT CH line. BUT CAUTION: If, 

for example, "2AIL" is specifi ed in the transmitter on 

the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Base setup, 

model« menu then control function 2 (Aileron) will 

already be assigned in the transmitter to control 

channels 2 and 5 for distribution to the left and right 

ailerons. The receiver's corresponding INPUT CH, 

which must also be mapped, would be the channels 

02 and 05 in this case; see the following example.

Examples:

• You would like to control each aileron of a large 

model with two or more servos. 

• You would like to control each aileron of a large 

model with two or more servos. 

Assign one of the two standard aileron 

control channels 2 or 5 as INPUT CH to the 

corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 

depending on the left or right bearing surface. 

• You would like to control the rudder of a large 

model with two or more servos. 

Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel) 

to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo 

connections). In this case, this is the standard 

rudder channel 4.

MODE

The settings of the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and 

"DELAY" determine the behavior of the receiver in the 

event of a failure in the transmission from transmitter 

to receiver.

The setting programmed under "MODE" is always

based on the channel set in the OUTPUT CH line.

The factory setting for all servos is "HOLD".

For each selected OUTPUT CH (servo connection of 

the receiver) you can choose between:

• FAI(L) SAFE

With this selection, in the event of a failure the 

corresponding servo moves to the position shown 

in the "POSITION" line for the remainder of the 

failure until the "Delay time" set in the "DELAY" 

line has lapsed.

• HOLD

With a setting of "HOLD", in the event of a failure 

the servo maintains the last correctly received 

servo position for the duration of the failure.

• OFF

With a setting of "OFF", in the event of a failure 

the receiver discontinues the retransmission 

of (temporarily stored) control impulses for the 

respective servo output for the duration of the 

failure. In other words, the receiver switches the 

impulse line "off".

BUT CAUTION: Analog servos and even some 

digital servos no longer put up any resistance 

against the previous control pressure during the 

failure of the control impulse and are more or less 

pushed out of their position as a result.

F.S.POS. (Fail-safe position)

For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo connection), 

set the position the given servo should assume in 

"FAI(L) SAFE" mode, i.e. in the event of a failure, via 
Detail program description - Telemetry 233

the "F.S.POS." line. This is done by fi rst activating 

the value fi eld (inverse representation) with a tap on 

the SET key of the right touch pad then using the 

selection keys of the right touch pad to choose the 

servo position. The adjustment takes place in 10-μs 

increments.

Factory setting: 1500 μs (servo center).

Important notice:

The function "F.S.POS." has an additional meaning in 

all three modes, "OFF", "HOLD" and "FAI(L) SAFE" 

in the event that the receiver is switched on, but (still) 

does not receive a valid signal. 

The servo immediately travels to the fail-safe position 

predefi ned in the "Position" line. In doing so, the 

landing gear, for example, is is prevented from 

retracting of the receiver is accidentally switched on 

while the transmitter is switched off. In normal model 

mode, on the other hand, the corresponding servo 

behaves in accordance with the set "MODE" in the 

event of a failure.

DELAY 

(fail-safe reaction time or delay)

Here you adjust the delay time after which the servos 

should move to their predetermined positions in the 

event of a signal interruption. This setting is adopted 

for all channels and only pertains to the servos 

programmed to the "FAIL SAFE" mode. 

Factory setting: 0.75 s.

FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)

This sub-menu allows servo fail-safe positions to 

be established at the "push of a button" in a similar 

manner to that described on page 208 for the »Fail 

Safe« menu.

Switch to the "FAIL SAFE ALL" line and activate the 

value fi eld by touching the center SET key of the right 

touch pad. "NO" will be displayed in inverse video. 

Then adjust the parameter to "SAVE" with one of the 

selection keys of the right touch pad. Now, using the 

operating elements of the transmitter, move all servos 

to the desired fail-safe position you assigned or want 

to assign in the line "MODE" "FAI(L) SAFE". The 

current position of the control for the channel which 

was just set is shown in the bottom "Position" line:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1670μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE

After a tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad, the display will change again, from "SAVE" to 

"NO". The saved the positions of all servos affected 

by this measure and adopted them in parallel to the 

line "F.S.Pos." and the display then immediately 

shows the following for the current OUTPUT CH 

(servo connection):

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1670μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

Switch off the transmitter and check the fail-safe 

positions based on the servo throws. 

"Fail Safe" in combination with "Channel Mapping"

In order to ensure that the mapped servos – that is 

to say servos which are controlled from a common 

control channel (INPUT CH) – react the same way 

even in the event of a failure, the corresponding 

settings of the INPUT CH determine the behavior of 

the mapped servos!!! 

Therefore, the servo connections 6, 7 and 8 of a 

receiver are mapped with one another, whereby the 

OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 06, 07 and 08 

are assigned as INPUT CH of the same respective 

control channel "04" ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1670μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 06

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1230μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 07

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1770μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 08

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

... the INPUT CH 04 determines the fail-safe behavior 

of these three servos connected to the control 

channel 4 completely independently of the individual 

settings of the respective OUTPUT CH: 
234 Detail program description - Telemetry

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1500μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

This is also the case, for example, if this is mapped 

with INPUT CH 01:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.POS. : 1420μsec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1670μsec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

In this case, the servo connection 04 would, in turn, 

react according to the fail-safe settings of CH 01.

The reaction or delay time set in the "DELAY" line, 

on the other hand, always applies uniformly for all 

channels set to "FAI(L) SAFE".

RX FREE MIXER

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX FREE MIXER

MASTER CH: 00

SLAVE CH : 00

S–TRAVEL–: 100

S–TRAVEL+: 100

MIXER : 1

RX WING MIXER

TAIL TYPE: NORMAL

Value Explanation Possible settings

MIXER Mixer selection 1 ... 5

MASTER 

CH

Signal source or 

source channel

0, 1 ... depending 

on receiver

Value Explanation Possible settings

SLAVE CH Target channel 0, 1 ... depending 

on receiver

S-TRAVEL– Admix negative 0 ... 100 %

S-TRAVEL+ Admix positive 0 ... 100 %

RX WING 

MIXER 

TAIL TYPE

tail type NORMAL,

V-TAIL (V-LW)

ELEVON

(vertical/horizontal 

mixer for delta and 

fl ying wing)

MIXER

Up to three mixers can be programmed 

simultaneously. Use "MIXER" to switch between 

mixers 1 ... 5.

The following settings in this display always for just 

the mixer selected in the "MIXER" line.

Important notice:

If you have already programmed mixer functions 

in the »Wing mixer« or »Free mixer«" Free mixer 

" menus, make absolutely sure that these mixers 

do not overlap with those in the menu "RX FREE 

MIXER"!

MASTER CH ("from")

According to the same principles described in the 

section "Free mixer" on page 192, the signal applied 

at the MASTER CH (signal source or source channel) 

is mixed to a variable extent to the SLAVE CH (target 

channel). 

Select "00" if no mixer should be set.

SLAVE CH ("to")

The signal of the MASTER CH (source channel) 

is mixed proportionally to the SLAVE CH (target 

channel). The mix ratio will be determined by the 

percentages entered in the lines "TRAVEL–" and 

"TRAVEL +".

Select "00" if no mixer should be set.

TRAVEL–/+ (proportion of the admix in %)

With the settings of these two lines the percentage 

of the admix is specifi ed in relation to the MASTER 

signal separately for each direction.

RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (tail unit type)

The following model types are also available in the 

"Tail" line of the »Model type« menu, on page 94 and 

should, preferentially, be preset there. In this case, 

always leave the TAIL TYPE set to NORMAL.

However, if you would prefer to use the mixer 

integrated in the receiver, you can select the already 

pre-adjusted mixer functions for the corresponding 

model type:

• NORMAL

This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft 

type with rear tail unit and separate rudder and 

elevator. No mixer function is necessary for this 

model type.

• V-TAIL (V-tail unit)

With this model type the elevator and rudder 

control functions are connected, so that each 

of the two tail unit fl aps – each controlled with a 

separate servo – assume both the elevator and 

rudder function. 

The servos are normally connected to the receiver 

as follows:

OUTPUT CH 3: Left V-tail servo

OUTPUT CH 4: Right V-tail servo

If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, 

please observe the notices on page 62.

• ELEVON (delta/fl ying wing models)

The servos connect at the outputs 2 and 3 assume 

the aileron and elevator function. The servos are 

normally connected to the receiver as follows:

OUTPUT CH 2: Left horizontal/vertical
Detail program description - Telemetry 235

OUTPUT CH 3: Right horizontal/vertical

If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, 

please observe the notices on page 62.

RX CURVE (EXPO)

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

 TYPE : B

CURVE1 CH : 02

 TYPE : B

CURVE2 CH : 03

 TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

Value Explanation Possible settings

CURVE1, 

2 or 3 CH

Channel 

assignment of the 

respective curve 

setting 

1 ... depending on 

receiver

TYPE Curve type A, B, C

see fi gure

Expo = +100%

–100% +100% 0 –100% 0 +100%

Expo = –100%

TYPE A

–100% +100% 0 –100% 0 +100%

linear

–100% +100% 0 –100% 0 +100%

TYPE B

TYPE C

DR = 125% DR = 70% Servo travel

Control travel

Servo travel

Control travel

Servo travel

Control travel

Normally a non-linear control function, if applicable, is 

used for the aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) 

and rudder (channel 4). These channel defaults also 

correspond to the factory settings. BUT CAUTION: 

This assignment only applies when, on the transmitter 

side, neither "2HRSv3+8" is specifi ed in the "Tail 

type" line nor is "2AIL" or 2AIL 2FL" specifi ed in the 

"Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Base settings« 

menu. Otherwise, assignments will have already 

been made in the transmitter for control function 3 

(elevator), which will then be split between control 

channels 3 & 8, or control function 2 (aileron), which 

will then be split between control channels 2 & 5 for 

the left and right ailerons. The corresponding control 

channels (INPUT CH) in the receiver would in both 

cases be channels 03 & 08 or 02 & 05.

Therefore if, for example, "2AIL" has been specifi ed 

on the transmitter side and the intent here is to utilize 

the RX CURVE option instead of the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter's individually adjustable »Dual Rate / 

Expo« menu (see page 120 or 124), then two curves 

must be set:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

 TYPE : B

CURVE1 CH : 02

 TYPE : B

CURVE2 CH : 05

 TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

Otherwise, the left and right ailerons have different 

control characteristics.

With the RX CURVE function you can manage the 

control characteristics for up to three servos:

• CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH

Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) of 

the fi rst servo.

The following setting in TYPE only pertains to the 

channel selected here.

TYPE

Select the servo curve:

A: EXPO = -100 % and DUAL RATE = 125 % 

The servo reacts strongly to movements of the 

joystick around the neutral position. As the rudder 

throw increases, the curve becomes fl atter.

B: Linear setting. 

The servo follows the joystick movement linearly.

C: EXPO = +100 % and DUAL RATE = 70 %

The servo reacts weakly to the joystick 

movements around the neutral position. As the 

rudder throw increases, the curve becomes 

steeper.

Note:

The control characteristics programmed here also 

affect the mapped receiver outputs.

5CH FUNCTION: "SERVO" or "SENSOR"

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

 TYPE : A

CURVE1 CH : 02

 TYPE : A

CURVE2 CH : 03

 TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION:SERVO

Some receivers have a specifi c servo connection 

which has been made switchable rather than an 

independent telemetry connection. Thus, for example, 

on the GR-12 receiver included with the mx-12 HoTT 

set, order no. 33112, , servo connector 5 has an extra 

"T" mark and can be alternatively connected ...

Servo 

Sensor OR

... not only via an order no. 7168.6Aadaper cable 

to upgrade the receiver but also connected to a 

telemetry sensor. 

However, in order for the receiver to correctly 

recognize the given connected device correctly, servo 

connection 5 (in this case) MUST be appropriately set 
236 Detail program description - Telemetry

for either "SERVO" or "SENSOR".

This switchover is accomplished by moving the 

with the selection key of the left or right touch pad 

until the " " symbol is at the left margin of the bottom 

line then tapping on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad. 

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

 TYPE : A

CURVE1 CH : 02

 TYPE : A

CURVE2 CH : 03

 TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION:SERVO

Now use one of the  selection keys on the right 

touch pad to select the alternative setting "SENSOR".

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX CURVE

 TYPE : A

CURVE1 CH : 02

 TYPE : A

CURVE2 CH : 03

 TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

5CH FUNCTION:SENSOR

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will close the selection and, with appropriate 

repetitive taps on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad, a return to the transmitter's basic display is 

accomplished.

RX SERVO TEST

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

TEST : STOP

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

Value Explanation Possible

settings

ALL-MAX Servo travel on the 

"+" side for all servo 

outputs for the 

servo test

1500 ... 2000 μs

ALL-MIN Servo travel on the 

"-" side for all servo 

outputs for the 

servo test

1500 ... 1000 μs

TEST Test procedure START / STOP

ALARM 

VOLT

Alarm threshold 

of the receiver 

undervoltage 

warning

3.0 ... 6.0 V

factory setting: 

3.8 V 

ALARM 

TEMP+

Alarm threshold for 

excessively high 

temperature of the 

receiver

50 ... 80 °C

Factory setting: 

70 °C

ALARM 

TEMP–

Alarm threshold 

for excessively low 

temperature of the 

receiver

-20 ... +10 °C

Factory setting: 

-10 °C

CH 

OUTPUT 

TYPE

Channel sequence ONCE, SAME, 

SUMI, SUMO

ALL-MAX (servo travel on the "+" side)

In this line you set the maximum servo travel on the 

plus side of the control travel for the servo test.

2000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs 

corresponds to the neutral position.

Make sure that the servos do not overrun 

mechanically during the test routine.

ALL-MIN (servo travel on the "-" side)

You adjust the maximum servo travel on the minus 

side of the control path for the servo test in this line.

1000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs 

corresponds to the neutral position.

TEST

You start and stop the servo test integrated in the 

receivers in this line.

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will open the entry fi eld:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : STOP

Now, with one of the selection keys of the right touch 

pad, select START:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : START

A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will now start the test run. The input fi eld is 
Detail program description - Telemetry 237

shown as "normal" again:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : START

To stop the servo test, reactivate the entry fi eld as 

described above, select STOP and confi rm this 

selection with the SET key of the right touch pad.

ALARM VOLT (receiver undervoltage warning)

The receiver voltage is monitored through ALARM 

VOLT. The interval can be adjusted between 3.0 and 

6.0 Volt. If the set alarm threshold is undercut, an 

acoustic signal is issued (interval peep tone long/

short) and "VOLT.E" blinks in the top right of all »RX 

...« displays:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF

CENTER : 1500μsec

TRIM : –000μsec

TRAVEL– : 150%

OUTPUT CH: 01

TRAVEL+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec

VOLT.E

The parameter "R-VOLT" is also represented 

inversely in the »RX DATAVIEW« display:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C

L PACK TIME 00010msec

L.R-VOLT:03.5V

S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C

SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C

R-VOLT :03.7V

RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E

ALARM TEMP +/- (recommended temperature 

monitoring)

These two options monitor the receiver temperature. 

A lower threshold "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 ... +10 °C) and 

an upper threshold "ALARM TEMP+" (50 ... 80 °C) 

can be programmed. When these specifi cations are 

exceeded or undercut, an acoustic signal (continuous 

peep tone) sounds and "TEMP.E" appears in the top 

right of all receiver displays. In addition, the parameter 

"R-TEM" is shown inversely on the "»RX DATAVIEW«" 

display page.

Make sure that your receiver remains within the 

permissible temperature range during all fl ight 

conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).

CH OUTPUT TYPE (connection type)

Here you select how the receiver outputs are 

controlled.

• ONCE

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TESTVOLT.E

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

The servo connections of the receiver are 

controlled successively. This is recommended for 

analog servos. 

This setting automatically operates servos in a 

20 ms cycle – or in a 30 ms cycle for a 12 channel 

receiver (order no. 33512) – , regardless of what is 

set or displayed in the "PERIOD" line of the »RX 

SERVO« screen!

• SAME

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TESTVOLT.E

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SAME

The servo connections of the receiver are 

controlled in parallel in blocks of four. This 

means channels 1 through 4, 5 through 8 and 

9 through 12 each receive the control signals 

simultaneously.

This is recommended for digital servos when 

multiple servos are used for one function (e.g. 

aileron), so that the servos can run absolutely 

synchronized.

When only using digital servos, we recommend 

setting the "PERIOD" line of the »RX SERVO« to 

10 ms in order to be able to utilize the fast reaction 

of digital servos. With the use of analog servos or 

in mixer mode, "20 ms" must be selected!

With this setting, pay particular attention to the 

suffi cient dimensioning of the receiver current 

supply. Since up to four servos can always 

operate simultaneously, the requirement is higher.

• SUMO (sum signal OUT)

A HoTT receiver confi gured as SUMO permanently 

generates a so-called sum signal from the control 

signals of all of its control channels and provides 

this by default to the accompanying GR-32 DUAL 

receiver on servo connection 8.

On receivers whose display shows "SUMO" at the 

top right, an additional two-digit number appears ...
238 Detail program description - Telemetry

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TESTVOLT.E

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12

... after confi rmation of "SUMO" with a brief tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, 

the active fi eld changes to the right for channel 

selection. With this selection you specify the 

highest of the transmitter channels contained in 

the SUMO signal:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TESTVOLT.E

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12

Either confi rm the default with another tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad or use the 

selection keys to pick another channel between 

04 and 16 and confi rm that with SET. 

Receiver outputs will be controlled successively 

in a 20 ms cycle (30 ms with the GR-32 DUAL 

receiver, order no. 33516), even if 10 ms is set in 

the "PERIOD" line of the the »RX SERVO« screen.

Primarily intended for the "Satellite mode" of 

two HoTT receivers, as described below, the 

sum signal generated by the SUMO-designated 

receiver can also be used, for example, to 

control of Flybar systems (provided they have an 

appropriate input) or to control fl ight simulators via 

an adapter cable, order no. 33310

In ...

Satellite mode 

... two HoTT receivers are connected to one 

another through a three-wire connecting cable 

(order no. 33700.1 (300 mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm)) 

at receiver-type-specifi c servo connections. Type 

GR-16 and GR-32 DUAL receivers, for example, 

are to be connected with one another at servo 

output 8. More detailed information can be found 

on the Internet at www.graupner.de.

This connection transmits all channels of the 

HoTT receiver confi gured as SUMO as well as 

those of the receivers designated as satellites 

continuously to the second HoTT receiver, which 

is to be programmed as ...

• SUMI (sum signal IN)

... the designation for the main receiver. 

Therefore, the signal always goes toward SUMI:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TESTVOLT.E

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SUMI

The receiver defi ned as SUMI, however, only uses 

the sum signal coming from SUMO in the event of 

a failure of receipt if at least one channel in SUMI 

is programmed to fail-safe. 

If the receiver programmed as the SUMO satellite 

receiver has a reception outage, the servos 

connected to this receiver assume the fail-safe 

positions which were programmed into the satellite 

receiver, completely independent of the main 

receiver.

On the other hand, if two receivers have a 

reception outage simultaneously, the fail-safe 

settings in the current receiver software at the 

time this manual went to print (in principle, the 

SUMO's fail-safe settings) become effective. In the 

individual case, however, interactions cannot be 

ruled out, which is why we urgently recommend 

performing an appropriate test BEFORE 

commissioning a model.

This receiver combination is recommended if, for 

example, one of the two receivers is installed in 

the model at an unfavorable position for receiving 

or as a result of nozzles, carbon fi ber material 

or the like, there is the danger that the receipt 

signal is weakened due to the fl ight position, so 

that interruptions of the range must be taken into 

account.

Therefore, make sure to connect the most 

important control functions to the main receiver 

programmed as SUMI, so that, in the event of 

a failure, the model remains controllable when 

the SUMO satellite receiver no longer receives a 

signal.

Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the onboard electricity supply, on the other hand, is only 

sent to the transmitter by the satellite receiver 

confi gured as SUMO. Therefore, telemetry 

sensors are to be connected to the satellite 

receiver (SUMO).

Each receiver should be connected with its own 

supply line from the common voltage supply. With 

receivers with a high current load, it may even be 

benefi cial to connect them with two supply lines to 

the same current supply. 

On the other hand, if each of the two receivers

should be supplied from 

its own voltage source, 

the center cable must be 

removed from one of the 

two plugs of the satellite 

cable; see fi gure.

rot

1

2 3

If you would like to carry out additional 
Detail program description - Telemetry 239

programming, such as fail-safe settings, 

disconnect the three-pole satellite connection 

between the two receivers and switch on only 

the relevant receiver. It may be necessary to also 

change the connection sequence.

Setting/displaying sensors

If, in addition to a "receiver", at least one sensor 

is selected in the »Telemetry« menu's »SENSOR 

SELECT« sub-menu (described below) then 

its settings can be read in and changed on the 

previously described receiver screens. 

However, to actually gain access to this data, the 

selected sensor/s must be connected to the receiver 

system and this receiver system must have an active 

telemetry connection. 

If, as described in the next section, there is at least 

one sensor activated which has the support of current 

fi rmware, then it is possible to directly switch between 

individual modules. However, if sensors with older 

fi rmware are in use, it may be necessary to select 

"etc." instead of the direct sensor selection. 

In either case, tap the  or  selection key of the left

touch pad ... 

RECEIVER

VARIO

etc.

... then use the same keys to select up or down for 

the desired module, for example:

VARIO

GPS

Receiver

If the selected module, in this case a Vario module, 

is active then on the last receiver screen ("RX 

SERVO TEST"), at the top right there will also be 

an additional " " symbol pointing to the right. This 

symbol is located just to the right of the left-pointing "

" symbol and is the visible indicator that additional 

display screens can be accessed.

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1

RX SERVO TESTVOLT.E

ALL–MIN : 1000μsec

ALL–MAX : 2000μsec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE

Now use one of the  selection keys on the left or 

right touch pad to switch to the selected sensor's 

displays and check or change its settings as 

described in the manual delivered with the sensor.
240 Detail program description - Telemetry

SENSOR SELECT

Selecting sensors

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

... and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad, the selected sub-menu will open.

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER

GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE

ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

This menu option can be used to determine which 

of the graphic displays described on page 36, as 

well as those described previously for sub-menu 

»SETTINGS/DISPLAYS«, can be selected and which 

remain hidden. 

Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of 

respective sensors by selecting the desired lines with 

the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad 

then tapping on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad, e.g.:

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER

GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODULE

ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS
Detail program description - Telemetry 241

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

... and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu. 

This provides a visualization of the quality of the 

connection of transmitter and receiver:

E100%

SL 22

P 10

RL 41

4.8RS

S 95%

4.8RM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E

Top row: Reception power of the channels 

1 ... 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm 

coming from the receiver to the 

transmitter.

Bottom row: Reception power of the channels 

1 ... 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm 

coming from the transmitter to the 

receiver.

Comments:

• Since reception power is measured and presented 

in dBm, reception power is increasingly worse 

the higher the bar is and vice versa; refer also to 

"Reception power (S-dBm)" on page 230 about 

RF STATUS VIEW

this. 

• The points above the bars mark the poorest 

reception since switching on the transmitter or 

the last reset of the display with a simultaneous 

tap on the or  keys of the right touch pad 

(CLEAR).

Additional fi gures are shown to the left of the graphic 

representation of the reception power. These mean:

Value Explanation

E Signal quality in % of the signal received 

from the receiver

S Signal quality in % of the signal received 

by the receiver

SL Reception power in dBm

P Number of lost data packages of the 

receiver

RL Reception power in dBM of the signal 

received by the receiver

RS Current operating voltage of the receiver 

in volts

RM Lowest receiver operating voltage since 

last startup, in volts
242 Detail program description - Telemetry

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATAVIEW

SENSOR SELECT

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

TELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1

VOLT.E

and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu.

REPEAT

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

–––

–––

VARIO –––

1sec 

In order to be able to start the voice output through 

the headphone connection, at the very least the 

"REPEAT" line must be assigned to a switch. The 

takes place as described in the section "Switch and 

control switch assignments" on page 56:

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

–––

–––

VARIO –––

Move desired switch 1SEC

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

–––

VARIO –––

1sec 3

With this switch you can have the last respective 

voice trigger repeated for the duration of the time 

set to the left of the switch, as long as the assigned 

switch is closed:

TRIG

With a switch assigned to this line, preferably 

one of the two pushbuttons, switch the selected 

voice messages in rotation on to the next voice 

message for the below-described "TRANSMITTER", 

"RECEIVER" and "SENSOR" options, as described 

below. 

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO –––

1sec 3

1

VARIO

If the "VARIO MODULE" line is activated ( ) in the 

»SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu, as described on 

page 240, a switch assigned to one of these lines 

can be used to call up vario-specifi c voice messages 

for the headset connection which are completely 

independent of other voice messages, i.e. voice 

messages triggered by altitude changes, such as the 

message "slowly ascend/descend".

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO

1sec 3

1

8

TRANSMITTER

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO

1sec 3

1

8

and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu.

VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

TIMER(GE.)CENTER:

TIMER(GE.)TOP:

TIME:

PHASE TIMER:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a 

subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, the selected voice message can be 

activated ( ) or deactivated ( ).

VOICE TRIGGER
Detail program description - Telemetry 243

VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

TIMER(GE.)CENTER:

TIMER(GE.)TOP:

TIME:

PHASE TIMER:

RECEIVER

After selection of the desired menu line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad ...

VOICE TRIGGER

TRIG

TRANSMIT

VARIO

1

8

RECEIVER

... and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu:

TEMP:

STRENGHT:

VOLT:

FLUGZEITUHR:

LOWVOLT:

UHRZEIT:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the 

selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a 

subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, the selected voice message can be 

activated ( ) or deactivated ( ).

SENSOR

This line only appears if a sensor was fi rst activated 

in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu. For example, 

if the »VARIO« sensor is selected then the selections 

for the "VARIO" line will be opened ...

VOICE TRIGGER

TRANSMIT

VARIO 8

RECEIVER

VARIO

when a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad calls up the sub-menu.

ALT:

MAXALT:

MINALT:

FLUGZEITUHR:

VOLT MINIMUM:

UHRZEIT:

As described in the column at the left, these menus 

also allow every offered voice message to be 

activated ( ) or deactivated ( ) by selecting the 

desired line followed by a tap on the center SET key 

of the right touch pad.

Note:

The selection made here is completely independent 

of the "VARIO" voice triggers.
244 Detail program description - Channel sequencer

Channel sequencer

Programming the motion sequences of up to 3 servos

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Channel sequence« menu option in 

the multi-function menu: 

Wing mixers Free mixers

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Free mixers MIX active/phase

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

CHANNEL SEQUENCER

Channel

Channel

INACT

INACT

SET

Channel

channel

14 INACT

15

16



The »Channel sequence« menu option can be used 

to execute up to 9 exactly coordinated steps for up 

to three servos over a period of up to 30 seconds. 

Such a sequence can be triggered by a single switch 

and begin at an initial servo position which is freely 

adjustable. For example, this makes the opening 

of undercarriage doors, complete with subsequent 

extension of the retractable gear, just as simple to 

program as opening a wheel well with renewed closing 

of one undercarriage door once the landing gear has 

been lowered or to program the raising of a cockpit 

canopy with subsequent head turns and waving 

performed by the pilot. However, the prerequisite for 

all these actions is the "parsing" of the desired motion 

sequence into practical, individual steps.

Programming procedure

On this menu option's fi rst display page, see fi gure 

below left, either accept the three preset channels, 

14 ... 16, or select an available channel, 5 ... 16, for 

each line to form any other desired combination, e.g.:

CHANNEL SEQUENCER

Channel

Channel

INACT

INACT

SET

Channel

channel

10 INACT

11

12



With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given 

channel is reset back to 5, 6 or 7.

The next step makes the control channels needed 

for the channel sequence available. This is done 

in the "SET" column by changing settings from 

"INACT" to "ACT" and thus making the individual 

channels "available" to the program for sequencing. 

Conversely, this also means that channels defi ned as 

"active" in the »Channel sequence« menu are not

available for other purposes.

CHANNEL SEQUENCER

Channel

Channel

ACT

ACT

SET

Channel

channel

10 ACT

11

12



With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given 

channel is reset back to "INACT".

Once control channels and their activity statuses 

have been set, switch to the right column then tap on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad to reach 

the second page, the »Channel sequence« menu's 

choreography page. Since the call-up of the second 

page in this example was issued from the "Servo 12" 

line, this servo remains the object of focus after the 

page change.

Channel sequencer

STEP TIME

10

11

12

0

POS

0% –––

The previous display page permitted the selection 

of participating servos and their incorporation into 

the sequence. This display page will now be used 

to establish the sequence of steps for participating 

servos, beginning with initial positions yet to be 

defi ned. The step number, from "0" to a maximum 

of "9", will be shown in the column labeled "STEP" 

near the bottom left of the display.

Step 0: Setting initial position

Keep the focus of attention on "Servo 12" or change 

to any other of the three servos by using the 

keys of the left touch pad, e.g. upward to "Servo 10".
Detail program description - Channel sequencer 245

Channel sequencer

STEP TIME

11

12

0

POS

0% –––

10

Use one of the  selection keys of the right touch 

pad, as necessary, to shift the marker frame to the 

right from the column "TIME" to the value fi eld above 

the column labeled "POS" then, after a tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad, alter this value 

within a range of ±100 % until the servo is in the 

desired initial position. For example:

Channell sequencer

STEP TIME

11

12

0

POS

–––

10

+90%

Repeat this procedure as necessary for the other two 

servos.

With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given 

position value will be reset back to"0 %".

Step 1: fi rst event

Now that initial positions have been established, the 

fi rst step can be set. This is a matter of defi ning what 

is to be done, or not done, fi rst, following a certain 

span of time.

Do this by fi rst using the  selection keys of the left

touch pad to select one of the servos. Now tap the 

 key of the left touch pad. The step number, which 

was previously indicated by a "0" is now replaced 

by a "1" and the value "0.0s" will appear in the fi eld 

above "TIME".

Channel sequencer

STEP TIME

11

12

1

POS

–––

10

0.0s +90%

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad as 

necessary to shift the marker frame to the "TIME" 

column.

Now briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad to set the activation time into the value 

fi eld for the "TIME" column, e.g. 1.5 s. The current 

position in time is represented in the graphic by the 

dotted vertical line. It will move to the right according 

to the time setting and, at the same time, the course 

of servo positions will be presented as dotted lines 

between time-point "0" and time-point "1".

Channel sequencer

STEP TIME

11

12

1

POS

–––

10

1.5s +90%

Now set the desired servo positions for the end of the 

fi rst time span (with the same procedure as already 

described for "Step 0") or leave one or more of these 

servos in the same position they were in for the 

previous step.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right 

touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video value 

displayed if the TIME fi eld back to "blank" and erase 

the current sequence, in this example only Step "1".

Channel sequencer

STEP TIME

11

12

0

POS

–––

10

0.0s +90%

Step 2 ...

Repeat the previously described procedure for 

every other step to be defi ned until the servos have 

reached their terminal positions.

Switch assignment

In conclusion, assign the sequence of events created 

to a switch (as described on page 56 in the section 

"Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control 

switches") with which the servos can be switched 

between their initial and terminal positions.

Channel sequencer

STEP TIME

11

12

8

POS

10

0.0s 0% 2

As soon as this switch is closed, the servos' 

sequence of movements can be followed in the 

graphic. The servo curves will be shown in inverse 

video according to the preset time windows. All 

movements will sequence in reverse when the switch 

is opened again.

Important notices:

• The sequence shown is only for demonstration 

purposes and is not at all representative of a real 

sequence of servo movements. 
246 Detail program description - Channel sequencer

• The settings made in the "POS" value fi eld 

replace the otherwise "conventional" transmitter 

control signal. Therefore it is necessary, before 

programming such a sequence, to check in the »Servo display« menu to make sure none of the 

channels planned for the sequence are actuated 

by any other transmitter operating element. If this 

were to be the case, it could lead to unpredictable 

excursions in the motion sequence. 

• The settings made in the »Servo adjustment« 

and »Tx. output swap« menus are not affected 

by settings in this menu.

• When preparing and creating a sequence, 

be absolutely sure the servos do not collide 

mechanically. If necessary, use the "Travel limit" 

option in the »Servo adjustment« menu.

Multi-channel

Channel multiplier for special functions

The mc-32 HoTT transmitter has an integrated multifunction channel built into the transmitter's software. 

This facility permits up to two control channels to be 

used for up to four or eight special functions Every 

available switch (including the so-called expansion 

switches, see page 56) or transmitter control can be 

assigned on the transmitter side.

On the receiver side, the following modules are 

available as accessories, whereby at one time a 

maximum of two modules can be operated via the »Multi-channel« menu.

NAUTIC-Expert, switching module, order no. 4159

The NAUTIC-Expert switching module expands a 

servo's functionality to 16 switched functions. By 

appropriately wiring the connecting cable, loads can 

either be operated from a common power supply or 

also separately by multiple power sources.

NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder order no. 4142.N

The 1/4 C-NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder expands 

a proportional function to four proportional functions.

Light module order no. 2381

A module for switching the light signals of rail, road 

and airborne vehicles with true authenticity.

Sound switch for vehicle models order no. 2382.F

start, stop and supplementary sounds as well as 

typical vehicle signals

Sound switch for ship models order no. 2382.S

start, stop and supplementary sounds as well as 

typical ship signals

Further information can be found in Internet at 

www.graupner.de. Use the search mask by entering 

the respective order no. Alternatively, contact or visit 

your local dealer.

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the menu option »Multichannel« menu 

option in the multi-function menu:
Detail program description - Multi-channel 247

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

... then open this menu option with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad. 

Here, in the second column from the left, each of the 

two multi-channel functions can be activated ("ACT") 

or deactivated ("INACT") as desired and in the third 

column the given function can be assigned to one of 

the transmitter channels, C5 through C8, in a list.

MULTICHANNEL

MULTIC1

MULTIC2

INACT

INACT

C5

C6

SET SEL 

MULTIC 4CH

MULTIC 4CH

SEL

Note:

When a changeover is made to the »Servo display« 

or if »Servo adjustment« is used to select the 

"-travel+" or "-lim +" columns for these previously set 

channels, their respective cells will fl ash to indicate 

that these channels have been activated in the 

»Multichannel« menu. The preset values of 100 % or 

150 % should not be changed.

Prior to channel selection, please observe the 

following notices:

1. "SETTINGS/DISPLAYS" line of the Switch to the 

»Telemetry« menu and tap on the center SET key 

of the right touch pad:

• on the "RX SERVO" page, select the "20 msec" 

setting in the last line "PERIOD", see page 

231.

• On the "RX SERVO TEST" display page, 

select the "SAME" option for the last line "CH 

OUT TYPE", see page 238.

2. The control channel used may not be used as an 

input nor as an output channel for any mixer! For 

example, if C5 is selected, be sure that the "Aile/

fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu is preset 

to "1AIL" or that the "Swashplate type" line of the 

»Helicopter type« menu is preset to "1 servo".

3. The channel settings intended for NAUTIC control 

channel purposes in the »Control adjust« and 

»Servo adjustment« menus are to be left as 

they are or reset back to their original settings. 

Do not assign any transmitter control or switch to 

the respective input either. Also be sure that the 

servo's direction of rotation is not reversed. Leave 

the servo middle at 0%.

MULTICHANNEL

MULTIC1

MULTIC2

ACT

ACT

C5

C6

SET SEL 

MULTIC 4CH

MULTIC 4CH

SEL

In the next column to the right, make a separate 

channel count specifi cation for each of the two multichannels; "MULTIC 4C." for the NAUTIC-Multi-Prop 

mini decoder, order no. 4142.N or "MULTIC 8C." 

for the NAUTIC-Expert switching module, order no. 

4159.

MULTICHANNEL

MULTIC1

MULTIC2

ACT

ACT

C5

C6

SET SEL 

MULTIC 4CH

SEL

MULTIC 8CH

Afterward, use the right arrow symbol at the bottom 

line's right end to switch over to the second page of 

settings for the »Multichannel« menu:

MULTICH 2

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5

Input 6

Input 7

Input 8

fr

fr

fr

fr

fr

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

–––

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel +

This menu page is now used for making individual 

settings for "MULTICH 1" and "MULTICH 2".

Column 2, "Control"

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel+

fr

MULTICH 2

Use the arrow keys to move to the column over SEL. 
248 Detail program description - Multi-channel

and then connected as necessary.)

If a Nautic-Expert switching module (order no. 4159) is 

present, the assigned proportional control will function 

like a switch when it is put near its limit position.

Column 3, "Switch"

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel +

fr

MULTICH 2

This column is used to assign each of the inputs 

used, 1 through 8 (maximum), to any switch available 

on the transmitter. These assignments are done 

as described in the section "Assigning transmitter 

controls, switches and control switches" on page 56:

Any controls which were previously assigned in the 

second column will be erased. In this case, instead 

of SEL, the switch symbol will be displayed at the 

bottom of the 2nd column such that now a second 

"normal" switch, or even a transmitter control switch, 

logical switch, ... can be assigned as needed from 

the group of "expanded switches". In general it is 

suffi cient to assign a simple switch or transmitter 

control.

–––

Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel +

3

MULTICH 2

Column 3, "Offset"

–––

Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel +

3

MULTICH 2

The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero 

point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment 

range lies between -100 % and +100 %.

Simultaneously tapping on the  or  keys of 

the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the value 

displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value.

Leave the offset setting at 0 % while making switch 

assignments.

Column 3, "–travel+"

–––

offset

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel +

3

MULTICH 2

Finally, transmitter control travel is set for both sides 

in the rightmost column "-travel+". The range for this 

lies between -100 % and +100 %. To accomplish this, 

push or turn the respective transmitter control in the 

given direction. This will set the "travel" for each given 

direction individually.

If the assignment is for a switch, leave the setting at 

the default value of 100 %.

After completing the activation of transmitter control 

assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right 

touch pad , the message shown below will appear in 

the display:

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel +

fr

MULTICH 2

Move desired

control adj.

Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch 

pad can be tapped for a second time while this 

message is on display:

–––

SEL Offset

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

fr

fr

fr

–––

–––

–––

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

+100%

0%

0%

0%

0%

– travel +

fr

MULTICH 2

Now the desired transmitter control can be selected 

with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad. 

If the selected control has an assignment, it can be 

disconnected from a transmitter control switching its 

fi eld to "fr".:

• transmitter control 1 ... 4 (CH 1 ...4)

• slider control 1 ... 3 in the middle of the console 

(SR1 ... 3)

• depressible, roller-shaped proportional speed 

control (DG1 ... 5)

• side proportional control control (SD1 and SD2)

(Function inputs "UV1" through "UV8", which are also 

in the selection list, can be selected at a later time 
Detail program description - Multi-channel 249

Note:

Due to technical reasons, servos connected to a 1/4 

C NAUTIC Multi-Prop mini decoder may operate 

somewhat hesitatingly. This is not a fault.

Connection notes for the 

Nautic-Expert switching module, order no. 4159

As many as 16 switched functions can be controlled 

per switching module. 

Eight loads, like lamps, LEDs, etc. – but not electric 

motors – , with a load current of up to 0.7 A each can 

be connected directly. 

Two switch functions per connector socket are 

possible via the three conductor cable, order no. 

3941.6 , see bottom right fi gure.

Electric motors and loads drawing substantial current 

should be connected by other means, e.g. via 

switching modules. Ask your dealer about this.

M

6 (output: 5 ... 8)

5 (output 5 ... 8)

(Receiver power supply to the „B + -“ 

marked terminals)

Best.-Nr. 4159

Max. 8 x 0,7 A

Batt. 3...30V

NAUTIC - Expert

Schaltbaustein

2 - 16 K

Empfänger

1- H -2

1- G -2

1- F -2

1- E -2

1- D -2

1- C -2

1- A -2

1- B -2

Best.-Nr. 4142.N

1/4 K NAUTIC Multi-PropMini-Decoder

RX

S 4

S 3

S 2

S 1

external powersupply 3 ... 30 V

- +

+

-

Current consumption of directly 

connected consumer units 

(but no electric motors) 

max. 0,7 A (total max. 8 x 0,7 A).

Wiring for direct connection of two consumer units at one output

3-pole cable with flat connector Order No. 3941.6 

red

brown

orange

consumer

unit

max. 0,7 A

consumer

unit

max. 0,7 A

additional modules e.g....

Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. 3970

Switching module multi function SXM Order No. 3971 

Switching module 

high voltage 

SXH Order No. 3970

Switching

module 

SXH

Switching

module 

SXM

Switching module

multi function 

SXM Order No. 3971 

Soundswitch

Order No. 2382

Light module 

Order No. 2381

7 (output: 5 ... 8)

8 (output: 5 ... 8)

additional servos, speed controller, 

sail winch, ... also on this side

The figure shows an example of the connectivity of the ' 2-16 C NAUTIC 

Expert Switch building block "," 1/4 K NAUTIC Multi-Prop Mini-Decoder ",

" light module "and" sound switch ". Two of these modules in parallel can 

be operated using the menu »Multi channel« on output 5 ... 8.

Before first time operation of the NAUTIC modules make the above described settings.

Connection example with the Graupner HoTT GR-16 receiver
250 Detail program description - Ring limiter

Ring Limiter

Control of Voith Schneider propellers in model ships

Scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multifunction menu: 

MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

RING LIMIT

4

4

9

11

SET

4

Input

3 3

3

3

X Y

4

10

12

X

Output

Y

OFF

OFF

OFF



This »Ring limiter« is primarily intended for the 

control of up to three so-called Voith Schneider 

propellers in ship models. These are positioned 

beneath the ship where they are exposed to a free 

fl ow of water in all directions. The control of these 

drives and turning their vertically oriented propeller 

blades is done with two servos per Voith Schneider 

propulsion unit whereby, for mechanical reasons, 

the propellers of this type offered by Graupner under 

order nos. 2358 and 2358.BL have a maximum 

control travel limitation of 4 mm each. 

As long as the joysticks for forward/reverse and left/

right are operated individually (see section "Column 

Input") this is no problem because travel for the 

two servos can be appropriately adjusted, both 

mechanically as well as in the »Servo adjustment« 

menu. However, this becomes problematic when, for 

example, one joystick is 100 % forward and, at the 

same time, the other joystick is pushed completely 

to the right to arithmetically produce a 141 % sum for 

the two servo travel vectors. The mechanical controls 

of the Voith Schneider propellers will collide with their 

limits; in best case only drawing an unnecessary 

amount of electric current, in worst case causing 

damage or even bursting the linkage..

In order to avoid this problem, the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter has a maximum of three "ring limiters" 

available in the "SET" column of this option's fi rst 

display page (see fi gure at left) that can be switched 

"ON" or "OFF" individually. In the fi rst line on the 

setting page for a given "ring limiter", its maximum 

travel can then be set for a range of between 25 and 

125 %. The second line provides a setting for the size 

of limitation of overall defl ection between:

 0 % circular limit ( )

100 % no limit ( )

(limitation is strictly a matter of the given 

joystick's mechanical stop)

Important notice:

When this function is used, leave the respective 

setting values in the »Dual Rate / Expo« and 

»Servo adjustment» menus at 0 and 100 % or 

reset them back to their default values.

The adjacent sketch illustrates the 

effect for a 0 % setting. The crosshatched area of travel is curtailed 

and appears as a "dead zone".

Column, "Input"

With the standard preset control mode 1, all three 

ring limiters are pre-assigned to inputs 3 (forward/

reverse) and 4 (left/right) which are actuated by the 

left joystick. However, this pre-assignment can be 

replaced anytime by any other transmitter control 

combination. Use the selection keys on the left or 

right touch pad to move the marker frame to the 

desired value fi eld then briefl y tap the center SET key 

of the right touch pad:

RING LIMIT

4

9

11

SET

4

Input

3 3

3

3

X Y

4

10

12

X

Output

Y

OFF

OFF

OFF



4

Select the desired control channel (1 ... 12) for the 

value fi eld now displayed in inverse video by using 

the  or  selection keys. However, do not 

forget that if a control channel in the range of 5 ... 12 

is selected, it must also be assigned to a control in 

the »Control adjust« menu, see page 108. Briefl y 

tap the center ESC of the left touch pad or the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to conclude your entry.

In principle, the other inputs are to be handled in the 

same manner.

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad 

at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value 

fi eld back to its given default value.
Detail program description - Ring limiter 251

Column, "Output"

The three ring limiters are pre-assigned to receiver 

outputs 3/4, 9/10 and 11/12 by default, whereby the 

outputs in column "X" are for the forward/reverse 

function and the outputs in column "Y" are for the left/

right function. However, this preset combination of 

receiver outputs can be replaced as necessary by 

any other combination at any time. This is essentially 

done in the same manner as described previously 

under "Input", for example:

RING LIMIT

4

9

SET

4

Input

3 3

3

3

X Y

4

10

6

X

Output

Y

OFF

OFF

OFF



4

7

Note:

Watch out for undesirable overlaps if you use one of 

the outputs within a mixer.

Column, "SET"

The SET column is used to determine just which of 

the ring limiters is to be "OFF" and which are to be 

"ON", i.e. active. Use the selection keys on the left 

or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the 

desired value fi eld in the SET column then briefl y tap 

the center SET key of the right touch pad:

RING LIMIT

4

9

SET

4

Input

3 3

3

3

X Y

4

10

6

X

Output

Y

OFF

OFF



4

7 OFF

In the value fi eld now displayed in inverse video, 

make a choice between the two options, "ON" and 

"OFF", with the  or  selection keys then 

conclude the entry with a brief tap on the center ESC

key of the left touch pad or on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad.

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad 

at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value 

fi eld back to its "OFF" default value.

Column 

RING LIMIT

4

9

SET

4

Input

3 3

3

3

X Y

4

10

6

X

Output

Y

ON

ON



4

7 ON

Following a selection of one of the three lines with 

the selection keys, switch to the settings page for the 

selected ring limiter (1 ... 3) with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad.

0%

Ring Limit 1

max-X

0%

100% 100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

CH 3

If, however, the small diamond at the center of the 

circle in the fi gure above (which represents the 

current joystick position) is not visible ...

0%

Ring Limit 1

max-X

0%

100% 100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

CH 3

... then the respective ring limiter is still switched 

"OFF". In this case, switch back to the previous page 

with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left 

touch pad then switch the respective ring limiter "ON" 

as previously described.

Programming procedure

The two upper value fi elds – labeled at the bottom 

left of the display as "max-X" or "max-Y", depending 

on the position of the marker frame – are used to 

specify separate settings for each of the two control 

functions, "left/right" and "forward/reverse" within a 

range of 25 ... 

0%

Ring Limit 1

max-X

0%

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

25%

CH 3

... and 125 %:

0%

Ring Limit 1

max-X

0%

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

125%

CH 3
252 Detail program description - Ring limiter

In practice, the setting is made by changing the given 

value until the respective servos in the model just 

reach the point where they no longer move.

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at 

the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value in 

the active value fi eld back to its "100 %" default value.

In the next line down – labeled at the bottom left of 

the display as " <=> -X" or " <=> -Y", depending 

on the position of the marker frame – the setting 

values, in a range from 0 % and a maximum of 125 %, 

affect the form of limitation between "circular" and 

"rectangular", whereby a setting value here may 

never be greater than the value of the fi eld above it.

Ring Limit 1

0%

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

100%

–X

0%

CH 3

Ring Limit 1

0%

100%

CH 4

VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y

0% 0%

100%

–X

100%

CH 3

A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at 

the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value 

in the active value fi eld back to its "0 %" default value.

When fi nished with these settings, switch back to 

the fi rst display page for this option then repeat this 

procedure, as applicable, for the lines of ring limiter 

2 or 3.

Final note:

This option can, of course, also be used as necessary 

and applicable for fi xed-wing models.
For your notes 253
254 Detail program description - MP3 player

MP3 player

Replay program for MP3 fi les, such as music fi les

Scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch 

pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multifunction menu: 

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapg

Profi trim Trim memeory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

00/00

TRACK

00/00

No files 0kbps ESC

A

15

If the message "No fi les" appears near the middle of 

the display when this menu option is called then the 

transmitter has been unable to fi nd any suitable MP3 

fi les on the SD card. If this should happen, use a PC 

or laptop to check the content of the "MP3" directory 

on the SD card and copy suitable MP3 fi les into this 

directory if it is empty.

Therefore, insert a SD card containing MP3 fi les in 

a directory named "MP3" and, after switching the 

transmitter on, open the »MP3-Player« menu option.

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

00/00

TRACK

00/00

0kbps ESC

A

15

Briefl y tap the  key of the left touch pad to start 

replay of the fi rst MP3 fi le of album 1. The replay will 

start immediately, however, the display of data about 

the number of albums and titles as well as playing 

time for the current MP3 fi le – depending on the size 

of the MP3 fi le – will only appear after some delay.

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

01/04

TRACK

01/02

0kbps ESC

A

15

The automatic replay of album 1 will continue to run 

until it is stopped with a tap on the  key of the left 

touch pad ...

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

01/04

TRACK

01/02

6:54/12:21 128kbps ESC

A

15

sing, sing.mp3 

... or the the transmitter is switched off.

During ongoing replay, the menu can be exited at 

any time and the transmitter can be used without 

restriction. The ongoing MP3 replay is visualized in 

the transmitter's basic display by virtue of a "MP3" 

display label shown at the left of the SD card symbol 

and an animated triangle beneath that display label.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V MP3 RX VOLT:4.8V

Note:

If voice output is activated it will be blended in with 

the playing MP3 fi le.

Volume

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM

01/04

TRACK

01/02

6:54/12:21 128kbps ESC

A Sing, sing, sing.mp3 

15

After a tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to activate the value fi eld, the volume of replay 

can be regulated within a range of "0" (= mute) to 

"30" (very loud).

Album

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to move 

to the value fi eld above "ALBUM" and briefl y tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad:
Detail program description - MP3 player 255

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

01/02

6:54/12:21 128kbps ESC

A

15

sing, sing.mp3 

02/04

Use the  selection keys of the right touch pad to 

select the desired album number (from 1 to a maximum 

of 10) in this value fi eld. Briefl y tap the center SET key 

of the right touch pad to confi rm the selection.

Note:

The number of albums is a consequence of the 

number of fi les present in subdirectories of the "MP3" 

directory on the SD card, not the sum of album 

names which may be stored in identically named 

meta-data fi elds of the MP3 fi le.

Title

Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to move 

to the value fi eld above "TRACK" and briefl y tap the 

center SET key of the right touch pad:

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

0:00/2:34 128kbps ESC

A

15

Track01.mp3 

02/04 01/02

Now select the desire title by using the  selection 

keys on the right touch pad. Briefl y tap the center 

SET key of the right touch pad to start this selection.

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

0:00/3:45 128kbps ESC

A

15

Track01.mp3 

01/23 02/23

Notes:

• The title displayed will be the fi lename of the MP3 

fi le, not any identically named title which may be 

stored in the MP3 fi le as a meta-data fi eld.

• The number of the title per album is a consequence 

of the number of MP3 fi les per directory.

MP3 player operator fi eld

MP3-PLAYER

VOLUME ALBUM TRACK

0:00/3:45 128kbps ESC

A

15

Track01.mp3 

01/23 02/23

• 

Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and 

other players, jump one title forward or back for 

each tap on one of the  selection keys of the 

left touch pad.

• / 

Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and 

other players, start and stop the MP3 player with a 

tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad.

• A / 1 / 1

Switch between these three options with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad.

A Replay of the selected album will repeat in 

an endless loop until it is either stopped or 

the transmitter is switched off.

1 Replay of the current title will repeat in an 

endless loop until it is either stopped or the 

transmitter is switched off.

1 Replay will stop automatically at the end of 

play for the current title.

ESC A tap on the center ESC key of the left 

touch pad will exit the menu option without

stopping any replay that may be running.
256 Detail program description - Basic settings

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the »Basic settings« menu option in the 

multi-function menu: 

Dual mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Swashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapg

Profi trim Trim memeory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

Battery type

Battery warning

Touch Sense

Top LCD Contrast

Li-Io

Display light

Region

2

3.60V

0

EURO

unlim.

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set stick mode 1

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Pre-set Pitch min rear

Stick warning: unlim.

Pre-set modulation

Own phase name

Own phase name

HoTT

2

10

Bottom LCD Contrast 0

Own phase name 1

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

SEL SEL

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

Power-on/off beep yes

Basic settings are made in this menu. Transmitterspecifi c settings, such as volume regulation for 

acoustic signals and voice messages output via the 

built-in speaker or headset connector, the owner's 

name, country setting and even specifi cations for new 

model memories. The settings made in this menu on 

the lines ...

• "Pre-set stick mode",

• "Pre-set modulation",

• "Pre-set DSC Output" and

• "Pre-set Pitch min"

... therefore have no infl uence whatsoever on already 

existing model memories; instead, they are only 

defaults which are automatically adopted into newly 

initialized model memories and can be changed 

there individually at any time in the »Basic settings, 

model« and »Helicopter type« menus. A change 

to the "Pre-set" settings in value fi elds of this menu 

therefore only affects those model memories created 

new at a later time.

Note:

The settings in this menu are only specifi ed once 

in the entire transmitter. Therefore, after opening 

this menu in another model memory, the last valid 

settings always appear.

Select the desired line with the  selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad then tap the center SET

key of the right touch pad. The value in the fi eld now 

displayed in inverse video can be changed. After a 

change has been made, the entry can be concluded 

with another tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad.

Voice volume / Vario volume / Touch-beeps vol.

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

SEL SEL

These three lines can be used to individually set the 

volume of the three groups of acoustic signals and 

voice messages. This involves selection from among 

a total of three variants, whereby each of the variants 

offer two or three options for individually regulating 

volume even after leaving this menu.

Basic settings

Basic transmitter settings
Detail program description - Basic settings 257

Pre-setting a value

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to move the marker frame to the desired value fi eld in 

the column above the left SEL at the display's lower 

edge then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right 

touch pad. The desired volume for the selected group 

can be specifi ed in increments between 0 and 10 

in the value fi eld now displayed in inverse video by 

using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. 

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude 

the process.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return 

to its "7" default value.

via rotary control

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to move the marker frame to the desired value fi eld in 

the column above the right SEL label at the display's 

lower edge then briefl y tap the center SET key of the 

right touch pad. The message shown below will then 

appear in the display:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voive volume

Vario volu

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

SEL SEL

Move desired

control adj.

Now turn the desired rotary control, for example, the 

right retractable knob DG2. Afterward, this knob can 

be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for 

the selected group between 0 and 10.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return 

to its "fr" default value.

via three position switch

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to move the marker frame to the column above the 

switch symbol at the display's lower edge then briefl y 

tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The 

message shown below will then appear in the display:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume Sprache

Vario volumetöne

Touch-beeps

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

SEL SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Now, assign a switch as described on page 56 in the 

section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and 

control switches". Ideally a self-neutralizing three 

position switch, e.g. like that offered by Graupner

under order no. 33001.5. Afterward, this switch can 

be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for 

the selected group between 0 and 10.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return 

to its "---" default value.

Owner

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

SEL SEL

Up to 15 characters can be used to specify the 

owner's name. Change to the next screen page () 

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad:

 !"#$%&’()

Owners name

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

+,–./0123456789:; ?

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

H-J Sandb

Select the desired characters with the selection 

keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap on the 

selection key of the right touch pad or its center SET

key, move to the next position in which a character 

can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the  or 

 keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a 

space character at the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry 

fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right 

touch pad.

A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad will cause a return to the previous menu page.

Pre-set stick mode

As a basic principle, there are four different ways to 

assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, 

rudder and throttle or brake fl aps for winged models 

as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch 

for helicopter models to the two joysticks. Just which 

of these options is chosen depends on the individual 

preferences of the individual model pilot.

Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch 

pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option fi eld 

will be framed.
258 Detail program description - Basic settings

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Voice volume

Vario volume 7 fr –––

7 fr –––

Pre-set stick mode 1

H-J Sandbrunner

SEL

Tap on the SET key briefl y. The currently displayed 

stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now 

use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select 

the variant, from 1 to 4, you most frequently use. In 

the future this will be used for newly initialized model 

memories, but can be changed on an individual basis 

for up to 80 model memories.

Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return 

to stick mode "1".

With another tap on the SET key, the selection fi eld 

will be deactivated again to permit a change to 

another line.

Winged model stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

full throttle

left rudder

right rudder

idle

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

Motor Vollgas

idle

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

Helicopter model stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

pitch axis

tail rotor

pitch axis

tail rotor

throttle

roll

roll

throttle

tail rotor

tail rotor

throttle throttle

pitch axis

pitch axis

roll

roll

pitch axis

pitch axis

roll

roll

Motor/Pitch

throttle

tail rotor

tail rotor

throttle

throttle

roll

roll

pitch axis

pitch axis

tail rotor

tail rotor

Pre-set modulation

Standard equipment for the mc-32 transmitter 

includes a HoTT transmitter module and, under 

the right front cover – as viewed from the front – a 

connector socket for an external RF module, see 

page 25. Additionally, a transmitter-internal iFS RF 

module can be installed and connected. On a modelspecifi c basis, the transmitter can be set to use the 

modulation of any one of these three RF modules by 

appropriately selecting "HoTT", "EXT. PPM" or "INT. 

PPM" in the "Pre-set modulation" line of the »Basic 

settings, model« menu. The most frequently used 

variant should logically be selected for the "Pre-set 

modulation" line in the "General Basic Settings" 

menu. In the future this will be used for newly 

initialized model memories, but can be changed on 

an individual basis for up to 80 model memories.

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Touch-beeps vol. 7 fr –––

Pre-set stick mode 1

H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set modulation HoTT

SEL

Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to 

select the variant from among "HoTT", "EXT. PPM" 

and "INT. PPM".

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will return the display back 

to modulation "HoTT".

With a brief tap on the SET or ESC key, the selected 

fi eld is deactivated to permit a switch to another line.

Pre-set DSC Output

In the line with the same name in the »Basic 

settings, model« menu, a separate specifi cation 

can be made from among the available modulation 

types which is specifi c to each model memory and 

will then provided at the DSC socket. This choice 

primarily infl uences the maximum number of control 

channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct 

servo control) socket, and thus also available to a 

fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting 

"PPM10" this will be control channels 1 ... 5, for 

"PPM16" channels 1 ... 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 ... 

9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 ... 12.

SET SET SEL SET

Rcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/a n/a

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

BASIC SETTING,MODEL
Detail program description - Basic settings 259

In a manner similar to "Pre-set stick mode, in this

»General basic settings« menu the selection made 

for the "Pre-set DSC Output" line will determine which 

of the four possible modulation types will be adopted 

as the default variant for a newly initialized model 

memory.

If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left 

or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line 

then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the 

right touch pad, activate the value window:

H-J Sandbrunner

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name

Pre-set stick mode 1

H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set modulation HoTT

SEL

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Now a choice can be made from among the four 

possible modulation types: "PPM10", "PPM16", 

"PPM18" and "PPM24", with the selection keys of the 

right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad will conclude the entry.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset this option back to 

"PPM10".

Pre-set Pitch min

(only relevant to helicopter models)

In a manner similar to the previously described 

options "Stick mode" and "DSC Output", enter 

the preferred actuation direction for the throttle/

pitch joystick on this line so the choice will already 

be present by default for model memories newly 

initialized in the future. The functionality of all other 

helicopter program options (to the extent they affect 

throttle and/or pitch) are dependent on this setting; in 

other words the throttle curve, idle trim, Channel 1 

tail rotor mixer, etc.

This means:

"fwd.": minimum front pitch setting, the pitch 

joystick (C1) points away from the pilot.

"back": minimum rear pitch setting, the pitch 

joystick (C1) points towards the pilot.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the 

right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".

Note:

The C1 joystick's control direction for "Throttle min 

front/rear" in the fi xed-wing program can be changed 

individually in the »Model type« menu.

Contrast, upper display / lower display

In assure optimal legibility of mc-32 HoTT displays 

under all weather and temperature conditions, their 

contrast settings can be adjusted separately. 

Contrast for the forward display, located between the 

switch panels, is adjusted by selecting the "Top LCD 

contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad then briefl y tapping on the center SET key 

of the right touch pad.

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

SEL

Top LCD contrast 0

Bottom LCD contrast 0

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Pre-set Pitch min. rear

Now display contrast can be adjusted in the value 

fi eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20 

by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP

L–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE R-LOW V:4.6 +22°C

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP

L–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE R-LOW V:4.6 +22°C

Contrast for the rear display, located between the 

touch pads, is adjusted by selecting the "Bottom LCD 

contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad then briefl y tapping on the center SET key 

of the right touch pad.

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

SEL

Top LCD contrast 0

Bottom LCD contrast 0

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Pre-set Pitch min. rear

Now display contrast can be adjusted in the value 

fi eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20 

by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

H-J Sandbrunner

Graubele

RX VOLT:4.9V
260 Detail program description - Basic settings

#01 0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

H-J Sandbrunner

Graubele

RX VOLT:4.9V

Simultaneously tapping the  or  selection 

keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the 

inverse video fi eld back to "0".

Display light

This line determines how long the transmitter 

display's backlight illumination is to remain on after 

switching the transmitter on or after the last activation 

of a transmitter operating element.

Available options are "unlim(ited)", "30 s", "60 s", 

"120 s" and "off".

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse 

video fi eld to "unlimited".

Power on/off beep

A power on/off beep for the transmitter can be 

switched on ("yes") and off ("no") in this line.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option 

shown in inverse video back to "yes". 

Battery type

SEL

Bottom LCD contrast 0

Battery type Li-Io

Display light unlim.

Power-on/off beep yes

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

This line specifi es whether transmitter power is 

provided by a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell 

LiPo battery. As a consequence of this setting, the 

next line will offer a suitable voltage range for the 

"Battery warning" threshold.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option 

shown in inverse video back to "Lith.".

Battery warning threshold

SEL

Battery type Li-Io

Display light unlim.

Power-on/off beep yes

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

You can arbitrarily specify the warning threshold for 

the display ...

Batt. must

be recharged!!

... – contingent on the battery type selection in the line 

above – in increments of 0.01 volt between 4.50 and 

5.50 V (NimH battery) or 3.40 and 4.20 V (LiIo/LiPo 

battery). Make sure that you do not enter a value 

which is too low, so that you still have suffi cient time 

to safely land your model in the event of a battery 

warning.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch the fi eld 

shown in inverse video back to its factory setting, 

4.70 V (NiMh) or 3.60 V (Lith.).

Power-on warning

SEL

Battery type Li-Io

Power-on/off beep yes

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

Stick warning unlim 

In this line you can determine how long the 

transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an 

operating element until the activation of an optical 

and acoustic power-on warning before the transmitter 

switches off automatically one minute later.

The values "unlim(ited)", "30 s" and 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 

and 60 minutes are optional selections.

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse 

video fi eld to "unlimited".

Note:

To restart the transmitter after an automatic shut-off, 

fi rst push the transmitter's power switch to the right 

into its "OFF" position then, after about fi ve seconds, 

again into its "ON" position (toward the antenna).

Touch Sense

SEL

Battery type Li-Io

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

Stick warning unlim

Touch Sense 2

In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the 

touch pads in a range from 1 to 10. The lower this 

number is, the more sensitive the touch pad will be to 

taps and vice versa.
Detail program description - Basic settings 261

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the fi eld 

shown in inverse video back to "2".

Region

SEL

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Battery warning 3.60V

Stick warning unlim

Touch sense 2

Region EURO

The region is needed for compliance with various 

regulations (FCC, ETSI, IC etc.). In France, for 

example, the operation of a remote control is only 

permitted within a limited frequency band. Therefore, 

region MUST be changed to "France" for the 

transmitter whenever it is operated in France. In 

no case may the Universal/EURO mode be used in 

France!

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the fi eld 

shown in inverse video back to "Euro".

Own phase name 1 ... 10

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Stick warning unlim

Touch sense 2

Region EURO

Own phase name 1



Up to ten phase names can be freely specifi ed 

for one's own use. Each of these can be up to 7 

characters long. The characters of the name are 

assembled by selecting them from a list. In addition to 

the standard names, these additional names will then 

also be available in all model memory locations.

If possible, new phase name entries should begin 

with the "Own phase name 1" line.

Change to the character table with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad:

 !"#$%&’()

Own phase name

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

+,–./0123456789:; ?

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

A

Now the desired characters can be selected with the 

selection keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap 

on the  selection key of the right touch pad or its 

center SET key, move to the next position in which a 

character can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the 

 or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will 

place a space character at the current position.

Positioning to any character position within the entry 

fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch 

pad.

A return to the previous menu page is accomplished 

with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left 

touch pad.
262 Detail program description - Servo display

Servo display

Display of the servo position

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the menu option »Servo display« menu 

option in the multi-function menu: 

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to open this menu option.

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

0

0

0

0

–100

0

0

0

–100

0

0

0

+100

0

0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

However, the visual display of current servo positions 

can not only be opened by selecting this menu, but 

also – directly from the transmitter's base screen 

as well as nearly all other menu positions – with a 

simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch 

pad. A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left 

touch pad will cause a return to the respective point 

from which it was called. 

The current position of each servo is displayed in a 

bar diagram between -150 % and +150 % of normal 

travel with consideration for the control and servo 

settings, the dual-rate/expo functions, the interplay 

of all active linear and curve mixers, etc. 0 % 

corresponds precisely to the servo center position. 

This way, you can quickly check your settings without 

having to switch on the receiver. However, this does 

not absolve you from fi rst carefully testing all program 

steps, as well as on the model, prior to the fi rst 

operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!

For winged models the display takes place 

according to the following scheme:

Bar 1 = Throttle/brake servo

Bar 2 = Aileron or left aileron

Bar 3 = Elevator

Bar 4 = Rudder

Bar 5 = Right aileron

Bar 6 = Camber-changing fl ap (left) / free 

channel

Bar 7 = Right camber-changing fl ap / free 

channel

Bar 8 = Free channel / second elevator servo

Bar 9 = Free channel / Left FL2

Bar 10 = Free channel / Right FL2

Bar 11 = Free channel / Left AI2

Bar 12 = Free channel / Right AI2

Bar 13 = Free channel

Bar 14 = Free channel

Bar 15 = Free channel

Bar 16 = Free channel

... and for helicopter models:

Bar 1 = Pitch or roll (2) or pitch (2) servo

Bar 2 = Roll (1) servo

Bar 3 = Pitch (1) servo

Bar 4 = Tail servo (gyro)

Bar 5 = Pitch (2) servo / free channel

Bar 6 = Throttle servo or speed controller

Bar 7 = Gyro sensitivity / free channel

Bar 8 = Speed controller / free channel

Bar 9 = Free channel

Bar 10 = Free channel

Bar 11 = Free channel

Bar 12 = Free channel

Bar 13 = Free channel

Bar 14 = Free channel

Bar 15 = Free channel

Bar 16 = Free channel

Notes:

• However, please note that the servo display is 

only based on the original sequence of servos. 

This means that any swapping of outputs 

which may have been implemented, in either 

the »Transmitter output« menu or »Receiver 

output« menu, is not taken into account.

• Please also note that, by default, bar diagram 

tracking is opposite to the left/right movements of 

a joystick.

• The number of channels shown in this menu 

correspond to the 16 control channels available 

in the mc-32 HoTT transmitter. However, the 

number of actually usable channels depends 

on the receiver type as well as the number of 

servos connected to it and, therefore, may be 

considerably lower under certain circumstances.

• Use this display during the model programming, 

because you can immediately check all settings 

on the transmitter. However, this does not absolve 

you from fi rst carefully testing all program steps, 

as well as on the model, prior to the fi rst operation 

of the model in order to eliminate errors!
Detail program description - Servo test 263

Servo test

Function test of Servo 1 ... 16

Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 

to scroll to the menu option »Servo test« menu 

option in the multi-function menu: 

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad to open this menu option:

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

: 0.5s

Any of the inputs 1 ... 16 can be activated for the servo 

test by selecting with the selection keys of the left or 

right touch pad and then briefl y tapping the SET key of 

the right touch pad. As soon as you have set only one 

of the inputs 1 ... 16 to "active", the following notice 

appears at the bottom of the display screen:

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CLR = act./deact. : 0.5s

A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) would now start and 

stop, for example, a servo test of input "1" with a 

cycle time of 0.5 s.

To change cycle time, select the loop symbol at the 

bottom right of the display with the selection keys of 

the left or right touch pad.

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CLR = act./deact. : 0.5s

Once this value fi eld has been activated with a brief 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad ...

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CLR = act./deact. : 0.5s

... the motion cycle can be changed for the value fi eld 

shown in inverse video within a range of 0.5 s and 

3.0 s in 0.5 s increments. Briefl y tap the center SET

key of the right touch pad to close time selection.

Important notice:

The shut-off of the transmitter does not 

automatically end an active servo test. Therefore, 

always stop a servo test manually BEFORE 

SHUTTING OFF the transmitter, because the 

servo test is otherwise restarted after switching 

on the transmitter again.

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CLR = act./deact. : 2.5s

The "servo test" function, started with a simultaneous 

tap on the  or  selection keys of the right 

touch pad (CLEAR), automatically operates the 

servos as though the corresponding transmitter 

controls were being simultaneously and continuously 

moved back and forth between -100 % and +100 % 

during the preset time. All active mixing and coupling 

functions in the respective model memory, therefore, 

are effective and the servos move within the specifi ed 

servo paths and servo delimitations.

As soon as the servo test has been started by a 

simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys 

of the right touch pad (CLEAR) a window will open:

SERVOTEST

activ

off

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CLR = act./deact. : 2.5s

Servo test act.

Another tap simultaneously on the  or 

selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will 

terminate the test.
264 Detail program description - Entry lockout

Entry lockout

Locking the multifunction menu

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

scroll to menu option ...

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Code lock Info display

... in the multi-function menu. Tap briefl y on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad to open this 

menu option:

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

1 23 3 4 SET

Access to the multifunction menu can be locked 

against unauthorized use by a four-digit secret code 

comprised of the numbers 1 to 4. This code lock is 

entered by way of the selection keys of the left touch 

pad according to the scheme shown in the display, for 

example :

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (123_)

1 23 3 4 CLR

As soon as another tap of a left touch pad selection 

key occurs after the fourth number has been entered, 

the message shown below will appear in the display:

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzasccess code: (1234)

1 23 3 4 CLR

Memorise access 

code carefully

A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch 

pad will confi rm the entered secret code and exit the 

menu.

On the contrary, a brief tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad will confi rm the currently active 

CLR fi eld at the bottom right of the display and thus 

erase the entered digits.

Make note of the secret code and keep it safe. 

Otherwise, the transmitter must be sent in to 

Graupner service for decoding.

The lock becomes active the next time the transmitter 

is switched on. However, the control remains ready 

for operation. However, a call-up of the multi-function 

menu, and thus also a model change, can no longer 

be accomplished without entering the correct number 

combination.

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

1 23 3 4 SET

A renewed attempt following an incorrect entry is only 

possible after the lapse of a time-out.

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzacccess code: (4321)

1 23 3 4 CLR

Input error

Time lock

Deletion of the secret code

If the secret code is to be erased later on, tap twice

on the center SET key of the right touch pad right 

after calling up this menu option.

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (1234)

1 23 3 4 CLR

The fi rst activation of the center SET key of the right 

touch pad will erase the secret code (CLR):

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

1 23 3 4 SET

and the second activation will confi rm the empty entry 

fi eld (SET). The message shown will appear in the 

display:
Detail program description - Entry lockout 265

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )

1 23 3 4 SET

Memorise access

 none 

Now exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of 

the left touch pad.

Leaving the menu without input of a secret code

To leave the menu opened out of curiosity or by 

accident when no other key has been touched. 

Therefore, the display appears as follows:

CODE LOCK

Desired (new) access code: (_ )

1 23 3 4 SET

Tap once on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad. The following display appears:

CODE LOCK

Bitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )

1 23 3 4 SET

Memorise access

 none 

Now exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of 

the left touch pad.

Tip:

If you generally want to dispense with a programming 

lock, that option should be removed from the 

multifunction menu by way of »Suppress menus«. 

This will prevent unauthorized persons from entering 

a secret code "on the sly".
266 Detail program description - Info display

Info display

Transmitter ID, date, time and memory card

Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to 

scroll to menu option ... 

Profi trim Trim memory

Telemetry Channel sequence

Multichannel Ring limiter

Mp3 player Basic settings

Servo display Servo test

Code lock Info display

... in the multi-function list. A brief tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad will open this menu:

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

available

1.234

1933MB

99%

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

Transmitter-specifi c information is shown in this menu 

and – insofar as necessary and benefi cial – can also 

be changed.

Select the appropriate line with the  selection 

keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tap on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad. The given 

default value in the value fi eld displayed in inverse 

video can now be changed – insofar possible and 

necessary – with the selection keys of the right touch 

pad followed by another tap on the center SET key to 

conclude the entry.

RFID

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

The RF identifi cation number of the transmitter is 

shown in this line. It is transmitter-specifi c, is only 

issued once per transmitter and cannot be changed. 

During the connection process, this is sent to the 

receiver, among other things, so that it is always 

capable of identifying the radio signals of "its" 

transmitter.

Firmware Version

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

The current version number of the transmitter 

software is shown in this line. 

Through a comparison of the number shown here 

with the update version offered on the Internet 

download page of the corresponding product under 

www.graupner.de, you can determine whether a 

current update of the transmitter operating system is 

available.

If applicable, the version number is also required for 

inquiries with the service department.

Date

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

If necessary, select this line with the selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad and, as necessary, 

select the month or date fi eld. After activating the 

respective value fi eld with a tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad, the year, month or day can 

be set with the selection keys of the right touch pad. 

Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad will close the given entry. Years ranging from 

2000 through 2135 are available for selection.

The abbreviated day of the week to the right outside 

in brackets is automatically generated from the 

respective date.

Notes:

• If the transmitter is connected to a PC as 

described on page 43, the date and time can 

also be set through the PC program provided for 

the respective product via the Internet page at 

www.graupner.de.

• The date and time are protected against data 

loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for 

situations like a battery change, see page 18. 
Detail program description - Info display 267

Time

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

If necessary, select this line with the selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad and, as applicable, the 

minute fi eld. After activation of the respective value 

fi eld by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad, the hour or minute can be adjusted with the 

selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad will close 

the given entry. 

In contrast, the seconds display cannot be set 

directly; it can only be restarted at "00" with a brief 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Note:

• If the transmitter is connected to a PC as 

described on page 43, the date and time can 

also be set through the PC program provided for 

the respective product via the Internet page at 

www.graupner.de.

• The date and time are protected against data 

loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for 

situations like a battery change, see page 18. 

SD card

RFID

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

ABCDEF12

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

In this line the memory capacity of a memory card 

inserted in the transmitter, if applicable, is shown 

in MB.

Depending on the memory capacity of the inserted 

micro SD or micro SDHC memory card, it may take 

several minutes until the correct value is shown after 

switching on the transmitter.

available

Firmware Version

date

time

SD-CARD

1.234

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

available 1933MB

Display of the available storage space in MB.

As mentioned before, display of the available storage 

space – depending on the capacity of the inserted 

memory card – does not appear until some time has 

passed after switching on the transmitter.

The display of the available storage space in relation 

to the total memory capacity is shown in the line 

below:

date

time

SD-CARD

2011/11/11(Fr )

11:22:33s

1943MB

available 1933MB

99%

As mentioned before, display of the available storage 

space – depending on the capacity of the inserted 

memory card – does not appear until some time has 

passed after switching on the transmitter.
268 Programming examples - Winged models

mc-32 HoTT programming

Preparatory measures based on the example of a winged model

Programming models in an mc-32 HoTT ...

... is easier than it may appear at fi rst!

The primary prerequisite for "clean" programming, 

and this applies not only to the mc-32 HoTT but is 

also a principle for all programmable transmitters, is a 

mechanically correct installation of all remote control 

components in the model! Therefore, it should be 

ensured no later than on connection of the linkages 

that the servos are in their respective neutral position 

and their rudder lever is also in the desired position. 

Otherwise you should loosen the rudder and refasten it with an offset of a few lobes. If servos are 

positioned with the help of a servo tester, e.g. RC 

tester, order no. 2894.12, then the "correct" positions 

can be determined very easily. 

The possibility of changing the neutral position of a 

servo in practically every modern transmitter is only 

intended for fi ne-tuning. Greater deviations from "0" 

can result to further asymmetries in the course of 

the further signal processing in the transmitter. In the 

same manner: A car with a bent chassis does not get 

any straighter if only the steering wheel is trimmed to 

"straight"!

An additional important point is the adjustment of 

the rudder paths: This should take place through 

a corresponding adjustment of the steering points, 

insofar as possible. Ultimately this is far more effi cient 

than extensive efforts with the path adjustments in the 

transmitter! In this case: Path adjustments serve fi rst 

and foremost for to compensate for the manufacturerstipulated tolerances for the servos and their fi netuning, and less for the compensation of carelessness.

If two separate aileron servos are used for a 

winged model, the ailerons, controlled through 

the corresponding activated wing mixer – see the 

following pages – can be assigned with both the fl ap 

function and raised with the brake fl aps – however this 

would make more sense in a glider or electro glider 

than in a motor model.

In this case the rudder arms – starting from the neutral 

position – should be tilted forward one lobe, pointing 

toward the nose, set to the respective servo. 

The mechanical differentiation achieved through this 

asymmetric assembly contributes to the fact that the 

brake effect of the elevated ailerons increases with 

their defl ection and, therefore, does not normally 

require a greater path upward than downward.

Correspondingly, when planning to operated 

separately controlled fl ap servos, they should also be 

integrated into a crow system. Since the brake effect 

of this fl ap position referred to as a "crow position" 

is infl uenced less by the elevated ailerons than the 

downward defl ection of the fl aps, the rudder arms 

should be installed somewhat toward the rear in 

this case, tilted toward the trailing edge. As a result, 

there is a greater available path for the downward 

defl ection. With such a combination of lowered fl aps 

with raised ailerons, however, the latter should only 

be elevated moderately, because they have more of 

a stabilizing and controlling function than a braking 

function in this type of crow system.

A "tip" for seeing the brake effect in this connection: 

lift the fl aps and look over and under the surface from 

the front. The greater the projected surface of the 

protruding rudder, the greater the brake effect.

Outboard ailerons

Inboard camber-changing flaps

(Similar asymmetric installation of rudder arms can 

be meaningful, e.g. for open-cowl fl aps or landing 

fl aps, even in a motorized model.)

If a model is completed and mechanically attuned 

in this respect, you can basically begin with the 

programming of the transmitter. The following 

examples, an attempt is made to follow the practice 

of fi rst describing the general basic settings and then 

fi ne-tuning or specializing them in the subsequent 

steps. After the initial fl ight and over the course of the 

further fl ying in of a model, it may be necessary to 

occasionally adjust some of the settings. As a pilot's 

experience increases, however, so does the desire for 

enhancements and expansions of settings. For this 

reason, the sequence of options is not always adhered 

to or some options are even mentioned multiple times.

Of course, just the opposite can also be the case, 

that not everyone of the described steps is relevant 

for a certain model, just as some users may miss the 

description of a certain step for their model ...

whatever the case may be, you should consider a 

logical assignment of the control mechanisms before 

you begin with the model programming.

For models in which the emphasis is on the "motor", 

regardless of whether it is powered by an electric or 

combustion motor, there should be no problem in this 

respect, because the assignment of the two joystick 

units essentially lies in the four basic functions 

"Power regulation (= throttle)", "Side", "Altitude" and 

"Transverse"! However, in the menu ...
Programming examples - Winged models 269

»Model type« (beginning on page 94)

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

... you should determine whether you would like 

the minimum throttle position in the "front" or "rear", 

because "none (motor)" is entered by the program in 

the creation of a model memory as a basic principle.

The difference between "none" and "idle front/rear" 

is not only the effect on C1 trimming, which covers 

the entire scope of joystick travel with "none" but with 

"idle front/rear" only has an effect in the idle direction. 

In the process, the "effective direction" of the C1 

joystick is adapted accordingly, so that with a change 

from "front" to "rear" or vice versa, the rotational 

direction of the throttle servo or brake system do not 

have to be adapted as well. In addition, with an "idle 

front/rear" setting, a warning indication appears in 

the display for safety reasons and issues a warning 

beep, if the throttle joystick is too far in the full-throttle 

direction:

#01 0:00h

Stoppuhr

Flugzeit

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

Throttle

too

high! H-J Sandbrunner

Graubele

RX VOLT:4.9V

In any case, it will be necessary to give some thought 

to "special functions". 

With electro gliders, on the other hand, it is only 

occasionally different. In this regard, one must ask 

how the drive and brake system are actuated. Certain 

solutions have shown to be practical and others have 

shown to be less practical.

For example, it is certainly less practical, if you have 

to release a joystick for the approach of a glider 

model in order to be able to appropriately control 

the spoilers or a crow position using one of the other 

controls. It may be more advantageous to either 

design the function of the C1 joystick to be switchable 

(see Example 4, beginning on page 279) or to leave 

the control of the brake system at the joystick and to 

control the motor through one of the other controls or 

even with a switch! Since this type of model does not 

normally have a motor, and just a "start assistance" 

function to either "lift" the model in the sky with full 

force or, in any case, to "tow" it with "half" force by a 

wind fi eld, When this is also mounted in a convenient 

to grip location, the motor can be switched on and 

off without letting loose of one of the joysticks – even 

during the landing approach.

If you cannot decide to have your Graupner service 

location retrofi t a three-function control switch, order 

no. 33000.13, for this purpose then use preferably 

the single-pole, three-function switch, order no. 

33001.25, and mount it to the side of the sender 

opposite from the hand in which you hold the model. 

In other words: If the model is started from the right 

hand, the motor switch should be mounted on the left 

side and vice versa.

The idea is the same for the control of fl aps, 

regardless of whether only ailerons or fl aps covering 

the entire wingspan (combinations) are raised or 

lowered. A 3-position switch with a long grip generally 

suffi ces for control of camber fl aps, preferably 

mounted outboard on the throttle/brake joystick side 

There it is always accessible without having to let 

loose of the joystick.

If everything is now in order, you can begin with the 

programming.
270 Programming examples - Winged models

Initial steps for the programming of a new model

Example: Winged model with two ailerons and – initially – without motor propulsion

In the context of initial commissioning a new 

transmitter, in the selection menu ...

»General basic settings« (page 256)

Battery type

Battery warning

Touch Sense

Top LCD contrast

Li-Io

Display light

Region

2

3.60V

0

EURO

unlim

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set stick mode 1

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Pre-set Pitch min rear

Stick warning unlim

Pre-set modulation

Own phase name

Own phase name

HoTT

2

10

Bottom LCD contrast 0

Own phase name 1

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

SEL SEL

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

Power-on/off beep yes



... some basic information should be entered. This 

serves various purposes:

The fi rst three lines of this menu can be used to 

individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 

10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via 

the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset 

connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to 

record the transmitter owner's name and the lines 

"Pre-set stick mode", "Pre-set modulation", "Preset DSC Output" and "Pre-set Pitch min" are for the 

storage of pre-set values used as defaults for new 

models. These are then adopted on the activation of 

a new model memory in its basic settings, but can be 

changed there at any time.

The "Top / Bottom LCD Contrast" lines can be 

used to adapt the contrast of respective displays to 

ambient light conditions as necessary by changing 

the standard pre-set "0" in a range of ±20 (as an 

alternative to the line with the same name in the 

»Secret mode« menu page 32). 

The setting in the "Display light" line determines 

how long display lighting remains illuminated after 

the transmitter is switched on or after the last key 

actuation.

The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep" 

line determines whether the "recognition melody" is 

to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on 

again.

The "Battery type" line indicates to the transmitter 

whether its power comes from a four-cell NiMH 

battery or a single-cell LiPo battery and the "Battery 

warning" line can be used to individually set the 

threshold for the battery warning. Make sure that you 

do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still 

have suffi cient time to safely land your model in the 

event of a battery warning.

If necessary, the "Stick warning" line can be used to 

determine how long the transmitter should wait after the 

last activation of an operating element before issuing 

a visual and acoustic stick warning, followed about a 

minute later by the transmitter switching itself off. 

On the other hand, the setting made in the "Touch 

Sense" line is merely a personal comfort setting. The 

lower this number is, the more sensitive the touch 

pad will be to taps and vice versa.

In contrast, the setting in the "Region" line is anything 

but a matter of taste and is determined by statutory 

regulations: Therefore, when in France, only 

commission the transmitter with the "France" 

setting.

The ten "Own phase name" lines can be used to 

create one's own phase names, which are then 

valid throughout the transmitter, if none of the preset phase names appear appropriate. An entry itself 

is accomplished – as also for owner's name – by 

switching to a second display page and selecting the 

necessary characters from a character list.

This menu can be exited after completing "general 

settings" with a return to the multi-function menu by 

way of the center ESC key of the left touch pad.

To program a new model, now use the selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad to switch to the menu ...

"Model select" (page 69)

..., and use the selection keys of the left or right 

touch pad to select a free model memory location.

03

04

05

01

06

R16

 free 

 free 

 free 

 free 

00:12h

02  free 

Right after a tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad to confi rm this selection, the type of model 

to be programmed will be requested:
Programming examples - Winged models 271

Select model type ( free model memory )

Since the objective is to work with a winged model 

in this section, the symbol for a winged model is to 

be confi rmed with a tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad. The display switches back to the 

base screen.

Notes:

• Of course, you can also use the predefi ned default 

"winged model" supplied with the receiver as 

model memory 01 for the programming of your 

fi rst model.

• Once the "Select model type" option has been 

opened, the process can no longer be canceled! 

Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection 

must be made! After a selection has been made, 

the selected model memory can only be made 

"free" again by subsequent erasing.

• If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover 

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An 

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

Once this fi rst hurdle has been taken, the binding of 

the receiver built into the model to this model memory 

can be done in the menu ...

»Basic settings, model« (page 76 ... 83)

. To this end, switch to the line "Module".

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Info

Module HoTT n/a n/a n/a

SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

Note:

After confi rmation of the model selection in the base 

screen, if you confi rm the message appearing in the 

screen for a few seconds ...

BIND. N/A

OK

... with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, 

this line is accessed automatically.

In this line the binding process between model 

memory and receiver is initiated, as described in 

detail on page 77. Otherwise, you cannot address the 

receiver.

Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right 

four-way pad to move up to the fi rst line and begin 

with the actual model programming in the "Model 

name" line.

Model name

Stick mode 1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS,MODEL

Info

n/a n/a



Module HoTT bind

The "Model name" can now be entered here and, 

on the next line, an informative note about the model 

can be entered if necessary in the same manner, by a 

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad 

to switch to the character table.

 !"#$%&’()

Model name Graub

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

+,–./0123456789:; ?

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

The pre-sets for "Stick mode", "Modulation" and 

"DSC Output" are adopted from data stored in the 

»General basic settings« menu and these should 

be reviewed and changed as necessary.

In the menu ...

Model type

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

... the principle arrangement of the servos in 

the model is selected and communicated to the 

transmitter. The following selections are available:

"Motor at C1"

• "none"

Trimming works independently of the joystick 

position and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the 

»Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160", is 

available without limitation.

The "Throttle too high" warning message, see 

page 30 and/or 94, and the "Motor stop" option 

are deactivated.
272 Programming examples - Winged models

• "(Idle) front or rear“

C1 trimming is affected in the front or rear and the 

"Motor stop" option is activated. 

If the throttle joystick is too far in the full throttle 

direction when the transmitter is switched on, 

this will be indicated with the warning message 

"Throttle too high".

In parallel with this, the "Brake settings" sub-menu 

of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160, 

will only then be available if the "Motor" column of 

the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, has the 

entry "none" for the currently active fl ight phase.

In the next two lines, the principle arrangement of the 

servos in the model is selected and communicated to 

the transmitter:

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

None

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L L T Y PE

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Tail type: "normal", "V-tail", "Delt/fl .wing" or "2 

Sv EL 3+8"

Aileron/camber fl aps:

 1, 2 or 4 AI servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 FL 

servos

Since we want to actuate the brake system of the 

"Brake settings" sub-menu under the »Wing mixers« 

menu with the C1 joystick, we will leave the outer 

right setting in the "Brake Offset" line with "Input 1". 

With the "Offset value" to the left of this, you should 

only place the mixer neutral point at the point where 

the brake system is retracted or inactive. If, in the 

process, the offset is not place completely at the end 

of the control path, the rest of the path is "idle travel", 

which means the mixer is not infl uenced in this range 

of the joystick movement.

By now at the latest, servos should be plugged into 

the receiver in the standard Graupner’ish sequence:

Receiver power supply

free or AIL2 left or aux. function

free or AIL2 right or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron

Elevator or 1st elevator

free or 2nd Elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

Right aileron or aux. function

Flap or left flap

Right flap or free or aux. function

free or left flap2 or aux. function

free or flap2 right or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

Comments:

• If a V-tail unit should move incorrectly either "high/

low" or "left/right", please observe the information 

in the table on page 62 in the right column. The 

same process applies for the ailerons and fl aps.

• The settings described in the following are based 

on a model with "normal" tail unit and "none 

(motor)". The settings are adopted for models 

with a V-tail with practically no changes at all. 

However, the transfer of this information is not so 

simple for delta/fl ying-wing models. Therefore, a 

special programming example for this model type 

is provided on page 301.

In the menu ...

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

... servos can now be adapted for appropriate 

"direction of rotation", "neutral position", "travel" 

and "limitation" to the requirements of the model.

In this sense, all settings which serve to compensate 

servos and make minor adaptations to the model are 

"necessary".

Notes:

• The maximum possible throw of a Graupner servo 

is 150 % per side, based on both mechanical and 

electrical reasons. For example, if the the sum of 

the values of the columns "Center" and "Servo 

travel" exceed this limit, the respective servo can 

no longer follow the control commands starting 

from this point. Therefore, please bear in mind that 

mixers and settings in the »Dual Rate / EXPO« 

menu also have an infl uence on servo travel. 

• The settings options provided in this menu 

for asymmetric servo travel do NOT serve for 

achieving differentiations for ailerons and/or fl aps. 

There are options better suited for this purpose in 

the »Wing mixers« menu.

In the last column, "- limit +", the basic settings of 

150 % can, and perhaps should be, signifi cantly 

reduced. 
Programming examples - Winged models 273

The values entered in this position act as a quasi 

"limiter", whereby the setting is actually for which 

point of travel the respective servo may not exceed, 

so that it does not start up mechanically and thus 

unnecessarily draw current. In this case it is the end

of available mechanical play on the servo, rudder 

and/or steering which is decisive for the value to be 

set.

An example of this would be the selection of a 

model with cruciform tail, with which the rudder 

moves in a wedge-shaped cutout of the elevator. In 

order to prevent the rudder on the elevator starting 

up and possibly blocking it, the travel is normally 

mechanically adjusted (at the linkage) so that 

the rudder does not start with the full throw of the 

joystick. As long as the rudder is only controlled 

with the corresponding joystick, there will not be 

any further problems with this. But at the moment, 

when in addition to the normal rudder signal a mixer 

also infl uences the rudder, such as an "aileron 2 

4 rudder" mixer (aileron to rudder), it is possible that 

the two signals can sum to an excessive extent. 

A correctly set limit of travel intercedes precisely at 

this point and thus reliably prevents the mechanical 

starting of the rudder. The limit of travel should, 

however, not be too small, so that the rudder throw is 

permanently and excessively limited.

Of course, the travel on both sides could, of course, 

also be reduced to the that a start-up would not even 

occur with an addition of the maximum values. With 

this method, however, the prevention of an actually 

occurring event would result in a permanent reduction 

of the normal rudder throw.

The menu ...

»Stick mode« (page 104)

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

In addition to the generally interesting adjustment of 

the increments in the column "Tr. step" (number of 

trim increments for each "trim wheel click") for digital 

trimming – separate adjustments for each of the four 

trim wheels – in the case of the (later) programming 

of fl ight phases in the second column of this menu 

you can select whether the trimming of transverse, 

altitude and side should operate "globally" in equal 

measure over all fl ight phases or separately in each 

(fl ight) "phase".

The "Time" column, on the other hand, is not of 

interest for this initial programming.

The settings made up to this point are suffi cient 

to permit basic fl ight of winged and motorized 

models – though the latter does require a correctly 

set idle joystick direction in the "Motor on C1" line 

of the »Model type« menu. However, the "fi netuning" is still missing. The fi ne-tuning certainly adds 

to the enjoyment of fl ying over the course of time. 

Therefore, if you can already fl y your model safely, 

you should delve into the menu...

»Wing mixers« (page 160 ... 175)

... where various options are available, depending on 

the specifi cations made in the »Model type« menu, 

page 94.

Since this section deals with a model having only 2 

servos in the wings, the Multi-fl ap menu beginning on 

page 170 is not shown.

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5



Therefore, we begin with the "Brake settings" submenu:

off

BRAKE SETTINGS

If this display appears, you model is equipped with 

a motor, contrary to the assumption of this section, 

and therefore you have selected "front/rear" instead 

of "none" in the line "Motor on C1" of the »Model 

type« menu, page 94. Therefore, change this setting 

temporarily or change the "yes" entry in the "Motor" 

column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, to 

"no" for the currently active fl ight phase – Phase 1 in 

this case.

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw.time

0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–

no 

...
274 Programming examples - Winged models

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

0%

WK2

0%

WK

0%

Diff. reduct

After this statement about mutual dependencies, 

back to the topic:

If the ailerons are to be elevated for braking, an 

appropriate value is entered into the "Crow" line after 

activating the "AILE" column's value fi eld. In addition, 

a value should always be entered in the line below 

it, "Diff.Reduct" (differentiation reduction), which 

corresponds to the value you entered or would like to 

enter on the fi rst page of the »Wing mixers« menu in 

the line "Aile.diff." (see fi gure above)! With this entry, 

on actuation of the brake joystick, the set aileron 

differentiation is hidden again proportionally in order 

to increase the downward the throw of the raised 

ailerons and thus signifi cantly improve its effect in the 

braking phase.

A setting of the " Elevat. curve" mixer is then only 

necessary if the fl ight speed of the model changes 

too dramatically on actuation of the brake system. In 

any case, you should try out the setting at a suffi cient 

and readjust, if necessary, whereby you should focus 

less on the fl ight position than on maintaining the 

"normal" fl ight speed of the model. Otherwise there 

is the risk that the model plunges when engaging 

the brake system, because it became too slow in the 

meantime:

Brake

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

–25%

H – + 100

 O U T P U T

–25%

Elevator

Normal

After exiting the "Brake settings", the "Aileron 

differentiation can be set:

This serves to eliminate the negative torque. The 

downward defl ected aileron normally generates 

a higher level of resistance during the fl ight than 

when defl ected upward the same distance, whereby 

the model is pulled to the "wrong" side. In order to 

prevent this, with the input of a differentiation of the 

travel of the respective servo defl ected downward is 

reduced accordingly. A value between 20 and 40 %, 

in this case, seldom arises, however, the "correct" 

setting must be sought.

The option "AI 2  4 RU" (aileron  rudder) 

also serves a similar purpose, as well as for the 

comfortable control of a model. A value of about 

50 % is a practical initial value. However, this function 

should be made switchable with the assignment of 

a switch if you ever have aerobatic fl ight ambitions. 

(The author, for example, switches off this mixer 

"automatically" when switching to the "Speed" fl ight 

phase, in which he assigns both options to the same 

switch accordingly.)

The last option in the »Wing mixers« menu, the 

"El 3  6 Fl" mixer, is not yet of interest at the 

moment.

If the model-specifi c settings were made thus far, 

the initial start can be considered. If course, at fi rst 

you should perform a "dry run", meaning you should 

carefully check all the settings once again on the 

ground. Incorrect programming can damage more 

than just the model! In case of doubt, ask the advice 

of an experienced model pilot.

If you should fi nd during the testing that one or 

multiple settings must be made for the adjustment of 

the rudder effects to your control habits, the control 

throws are too long or short on the whole, you should 

adjust this in the ... 

»Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)

... to your own requirements and habits.

"Dual Rate" establishes a relationship between 

joystick travel and control travel, see page 120:

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

––– –––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

On the other hand, if the maximum throws are OK 

and only the reactions around the center position 

are to strong for more sensitive controls, then the 

"exponential" functions comes (additionally) into play: 

0%

0%

0%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Move desired switch

to ON position

(ext. switch: ENTER)

Normal

3

If a switch is also assigned, switching can even take 

place between two dual-rate/expo settings during the 

fl ight.
Programming examples - Winged models 275

This is similar for the option ...

»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

With this option, one or multiple points of the control 

curve of the throttle/brake joystick can be infl uenced 

in such a way that a pleasant or even purposeful 

behavior is guaranteed.

An example of this would be the "dead" travel of 

spoilers. The fl aps fi rst pass through this after a 

certain "idle travel" of the brake joystick from the 

wing. With a corresponding "bending" of the curve, 

the "dead' travel is covered more quickly. The 

spoilers come out from the wing earlier and then 

the remaining travel can be controlled with greater 

sensitivity. (This also applies for the control of a motor 

in the same manner, which can be controlled through 

C1 as an alternative.)

Finally, the receiver's behavior in the event of a failure 

should certainly be established in the menu...

»Fail Safe« (page 208)

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

DELAY : 0.25s STO

... because "doing nothing" is the worst thing which 

can be done for a winged model.

In the transmitter's home position, "Hold" is specifi ed 

and "Hold" means that the receiver continuously 

sends the last correctly recognized control impulse to 

the servos in the model. In the best case scenario the 

model fl ies straight ahead for an indefi nite amount of 

time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without 

causing signifi cant damage! However, if something 

like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong 

time, the model may become uncontrollable and 

"tear" across the fl ight fi eld completely out of control, 

putting the pilot and/or spectators at risk. Therefore, 

it would obviously be benefi cial to program the the 

function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to 

prevent such risks.

With electro gliders, on the other hand, the fail-safe 

setting "motor off" can also be used, for example, for 

outlanding, to reliably stop the motor or its propeller 

by immediately switching off the transmitter after the 

landing.

The author usually prefers a "braking fi nish" within 

eyeshot to fl oating off "somewhere else". 
276 Programming examples - Winged models

Integration of an electric drive into the model programming

An electric drive can be controlled in different ways: 

The simplest method to integrate one such drive into 

the model programming is with the use of a throttle/

brake joystick (C1). However, since this is already 

specifi ed for the brake system in the course of the 

model programming described above, either the 

switchable solution described beginning on page 279 

or even the use of an alternative control is possible. 

As a suitable alternative, one of the two 3-position 

switches would be better than one of the 

proportionals controls. However, either one of the two 

side proportional rotary controls are also well suited 

to activation of a motor without having to let go of the 

joystick. An alternative would also be one of the twostage switches. Basically, whatever switch is used 

should be located where it is within convenient reach.

Before we turn to the individual examples, it is 

important must be noted that all inputs in the 

»Control adjust« menu can be selectively 

programmed as fl ight-phase specifi c ("PH" in the 

"Type" column) or model memory specifi c ("GL" in the 

"Type" column)!

However, since the drive should usually be 

available depending on the current fl ight phase, 

we recommend leaving the standard default "GL" 

("global") in the "Type" column which your are using.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

A common option in the following examples 1 ... 5, 

the automatic tracking of the elevator trimming in 

the power fl ight, should also be mentioned at the 

beginning of this section:

If it becomes apparent after the initial power fl ights 

that the model must be continuously corrected with 

the elevator while the motor is switched on, this 

situation can be corrected by setting a free mixer and 

adjusting it accordingly. For this purpose, switch to 

the menu ...

»Free mixers«

... and program one of the linear mixers, Linear MIX 

1 ... 8, or even one of the curve mixers, Curve MIX 9 

... 12, from "channel controlling the motor" according 

to "Ele", for example:

LinearMIX 1 EL

Typ

 8

from – Begr. +

?? ??

?? ??

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

––––

––––

?? ?? ––––

On its second screen page, the required – usually 

low – correction value is entered:

8

Mix input Offset

– + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Linear MIX 1 EL

+4%

SYM ASY STO SET

+4%

Note:

The adjustment of a curve mixer is described in 

detail in the section »Channel 1 curve« starting on 

page 128.

Example 1

Proportional control usage

If one of these controls is used, the connection is very 

simple. Only the motor controller (speed control) has 

to be connected to a free servo connection 5 ... 16 of 

the receiver. 

Bear in mind that, depending on the model type and 

number of aileron and fl ap servos, the output 2 + 5 or 

6 + 7 are already linked. 

Therefore connect your speed controller to the next 

free input and assign the selected input – for example, 

"Inp. 8" – to one of the transmitter's proportional 

controls, for example the left-side proportional rotary 

control. This is done in the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

Select the desired line with the  selection keys 

of the left or right touch pad. A tap on the the center 

SET key of the right touch pad will activate "Switch 

and control assignment". Now move the selected 

proportional control. After a short time, an entry, e.g. 

"Cn2", will appear in the inverse video fi eld. 
Programming examples - Winged models 277

one column to the right, to the "- time +" column then 

move the selected control close to "full throttle" so the 

marker frame is only placed around one value fi eld. 

Now enter a value of at least 1 s ...

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

Cn2

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

1.0

... with which a movement of the proportional control 

in the "ON" on direction which is too fast is processes 

move gently, and you can check immediately this by 

switching to the »Servo display«.

Note:

No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the 

drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This 

does not additionally stress the drive, because it 

merely "runs down".

The adjustment of the appropriate control travel and 

directions for the motor control (speed control) is 

normally carried out in the »Control adjust« menu 

in the "- travel +" column. Alternatively, these settings 

can also be made in the menu ... 

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

Servo 4 +100% 100%

Servo 5

Servo 6

Servo 7

Servo 8

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

+100% 100% 100% 150% 150%

+100% 100% 100% 150% 150%

+100% 100% 100% 150% 150%

+100% 100% 100% 150% 150%

.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

Cn2

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

However, since propulsion must usually be available, 

independent of the current fl ight phase, leave the 

default value "GL" in the "Typ" column – as already 

mentioned earlier in this section.

If applicable, for necessary adjustment of appropriate 

control travel for the motor control (speed control), 

use one of the arrow keys to switch to the right into 

the "- travel +" column.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

Cn2

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

This fi elds of this column can be use to set the travel 

required, even asymmetric if necessary.

A simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left 

touch pad now will switch over to the »Servo 

display« where the selected proportional control 

can be activated to watch the the bars for channel 8 

"wander" from one side to the other and back.

However, if the proportional control is moved 

too fast – in practice – the resulting sudden motor 

acceleration can briefl y strain the entire drive train 

(too much). In this case, be sure to enter a value in 

the "- time +" column to counteract such a condition.

Therefore, using one of the selection keys, switch 

Example 2

2-way switch usage

This variant realizes a purely ON/OFF function.

On the receiver side, either a simple electronic 

switch or – if a gentle motor start-up, for example, is 

desired – an appropriate motor control (speed control) 

is required.

With the exception of assigning a different 

operating element, the settings required for this 

are essentially the same as those described under 

Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and 

recommendations also apply. 

Apart from the infi nitely variable motor control under 

Example 1 and the two-stage motor control in this 

example, the selection of the two transmitter control 

types only has an effect on the type of timer control, 

see page 284.

Only the nature of the assignment and representation 

of the selected switch in the display of the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

As in example 1, change over to the line of a free 

input, activate the "Switch and control assignment" in 

the second column, page 56, then move the selected 

switch, in this case for example switch 2, from the 

desired motor OFF position in the direction of motor 

ON.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

--- 2

Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this 

section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ" 

column.
278 Programming examples - Winged models

The setting of the appropriate control travel for the 

motor control (speed control) is made in the "- Travel 

+" column. If the motor should up gently with the use 

of a motor control (speed control), an appropriate 

delay time can be set – as described in Example 1 – in 

the "- time +" column:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

--- 2 1.1

All other settings – as already mentioned earlier in 

the example – are made analogous to Example 1. 

Therefore, the same comments and recommendations 

also apply.

Note:

No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the 

drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This 

does not additionally stress the drive, because it 

merely "runs down".

Example 3

3-way switch usage

This variant realizes a three-stage speed setting, 

such as Motor OFF, "half" and full power.

A corresponding motor control (speed control) is 

required on the receiver side.

The required settings are basically the same as those 

described under Example 1 and 2. Therefore, the 

same comments and recommendations also apply.

Apart from the infi nitely variable motor control under 

Example 1 and the three-stage motor control in this 

example, the selection of the operating element only 

has an effect on the type of clock control, see page 

284, and the nature of the assignment.

Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this 

section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ" 

column.

Put the desired 3-way switch into its middle position 

then activate "Switch and control assignment" above 

the column with the switch symbol, as described on 

page 56. Now put the selected 3-way switch forward, 

out of its middle position:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

--- 7

Now put the activated switch from its forward position 

back into its middle position.

Now move the marker frame to the left and into the 

column above the column now labeled with a second 

switch symbol instead of the previous label SEL. 

Reactivate "Switch and control assignment" for this 

column then move the 3-way switch out of its middle 

position toward the rear: 

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

8 7

The setting of the appropriate control travel for the 

motor control (speed control) is made in the "- travel 

+" column. The motor should rev up gently with a 

motor control (speed control), to this end a suitable 

delay time can be set – as described in examples 1 

and 2 – in the "- time +" column:

All other settings–as already mentioned 

earlier in the example–are made analogous to 

Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and 

recommendations also apply.

Note:

By shifting the neutral position and subsequent 

adjustment of travel, the "half throttle position" can be 

infl uenced in the »Control adjust« menu by reducing 

travel from the offset value on the side to which the 

neutral point has been shifted and adding it to the 

other side. For example, an offset value of -20 % 

results in +80 % on the minus side of the travel setting 

and +120 % on the plus side, and vice versa.
Programming examples - Winged models 279

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 -90%

SEL

Thr. min front

This idle path ensures that all brake settings remain 

at "neutral", even with minor deviations from the 

limit of the brake fl ap control. At the same time, 

the effective control path is automatically spread to 

100 %.

For this reason, in the next step it must be ensured 

that the infl uence of the C1 joystick on the motor can 

be infl uenced. For this purpose, switch to the menu 

...

»Phase settings« (page 142)

... and assign a meaningful name, such as "Normal", 

from the list for "Phase 1" after activation of the 

selection fi eld in the "Name" column. The asterisk 

in the second column indicates which phase is 

currently active. As long as no phase switch has 

been assigned, this is always Phase 1. "Phase 2" 

can be given, appropriate to the example, the name 

«Landing».

In the "Ph.Tim" column you can assign a so-called 

fl ight phase timer for the measurement of the motor 

running time and/or the gliding times as necessary 

for each phase. You could, for example, assign one 

of the "Timers 1 ... 3" to the "Normal" fl ight phase in 

order to measure the total motor runtime via the C1 

joystick:

»Model type« (beginning page 94)

Here you fi rst specify in the "motor" line whether the 

throttle minimum position (= Motor "OFF" position) 

should be at the "front" or "rear" - as already 

discussed: In the following programming example, 

"Motor OFF" and "Brake OFF" are combined at "front":

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Thr. min front

Note:

With the selection of "Throttle min front/rear" the 

trimming will then only have an effect in the "idle" 

direction of the motor and is not the same as with the 

"none" entry, having the same effect at every position 

of the C1 joystick. Since the C1 trimming is not 

normally used with electric drives, however, this has 

no further relevance.

You adjust the "according to your model, in this case 

"normal".

In the "Aileron/fl aps" line you enter the correct 

number of aileron and fl ap servos – in this example 

"2 AIL".

In the last line you leave the standard entries for the 

selection of "Brake retracted = front". On the other 

hand, if the preference is for "Brake retracted = rear", 

select the "Brake offset" line and defi ne the offset 

point – as described on page 95 – as "rear". In the 

process, if the offset point is not placed completely 

at the end of the control travel, the remainder of the 

travel is "idle" up to this limit.

Control E-motor and crow alternately with C1 joystick

Example 4

Before we discuss the programming of this fourth 

example or turn the to the expansion of the previously 

described basic programming, a few words should be 

said about the position of the throttle/brake joystick 

with "Motor OFF" or "Brake OFF". Normally the C1 

control joystick is moved forward for the throttle 

control and backward for the extension of the brake. 

However, if for this type of "traditional" assignment, 

for example, a switchover of the brake system is to 

take place for the "Motor OFF" condition (joystick 

"back") then a switchover to "full brake" would take 

place immediately after the pre-set switchover time 

specifi ed in the »Phase settings« menu, and the 

opposite will take place when "brakes retracted" is 

switched over to propulsion causing the motor to 

switch over to "full power" within this time range ...

A "glider pilot" can make the best of this 

"Emergency" – normally with "brake retracted = 

front" – by switching to motor "ON" only if necessary 

so that power decreases, if applicable (and hopefully 

not forgetting to push the C1 joystick "forward" again 

when switching back). A typical "motor pilot", on the 

other hand, operates in the opposite manner, only 

switching to the brake if necessary, etc... You can 

also combine the "Zero point" of both systems to 

avoid confusion, whereby a "glider pilot" would tend 

prefer the "front" and a "motor pilot", on the other 

hand", would likely prefer the "rear". 

Whichever the case may be, the mc-32 HoTT 

transmitter permits both variants. In the following text, 

however, the combination of the two "OFF" positions 

to "front" is assumed. However, if you have a different 

preference, it is not a problem: The only difference 

from the described version lies in the logical selection 

of "Throttle min rear/front" and, if applicable, of a 

corresponding brake offset in the menu ...
280 Programming examples - Winged models

the phase for the front switch position "normal" and 

"landing" for the rear position (or vice versa):

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 7 2

2Landing

These phase names then appear in all fl ight-phase 

dependent menus and, of course, also in the base 

screen of the transmitter.

Now switch to the «Landing» fl ight phase and in the 

"Crow" line of the sub-menu ...

»Brake settings« (page 172)

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Landing

Crow

QR

WK2

0%

WK

0%

Diff. reduct.

0%

... of the »Wing mixers« menu, set the desired 

throw of the ailerons by actuation of the C1 joystick 

("brake") upward. Then, if applicable, switch to the 

"FL" column in order to specify the desired through 

of the fl aps with C1 actuation downward (hidden in 

the fi gure above). This fl ap position is referred to as 

"Crow position" or "Butterfl y; see also page 172.

In the line "Diff. reduct." (differentiation reduction), 

enter a value which corresponds to the value entered 

or want to enter on the fi rst page of the »Wing 

mixers« menu in the "Aile.diff." line.

With the "Elevat curve" mixer the normally occurring 

"Upward tilting" of the model on the raising of the 

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw.time

yes 1.1s

no 1.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–

Normal Clk1 

Landing

Then you must assigned these two fl ight phases 

to a switch with which you can switch between the 

two fl ight phases during the fl ight. In this case, a 

single switch is suffi cient. It should be easy to reach, 

however, so that you can still switch between "motor" 

and "brake" during a landing approach, for example, 

without having to release a joystick.

The assignment of the selected switch takes place in 

the menu ...

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

Select the switch symbol under "C" with one of the 

selection keys. Following a brief tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad, actuate the desired 

switch, e.g "2".

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

2 7 2

Both switch positions, in other words ON (I) and 

OFF ( ), are initially assigned at the bottom right of 

the display to phase «1 Normal». Select this value 

fi eld with one of the selection keys then activate the 

phase selection list that was set up in the »Phase 

settings« menu with a brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad. For example, you name 

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw.time

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–

Normal Clk1 

Landing

Then the timer is controlled through a corresponding 

control switch to be defi ned on the C1 joystick. As 

soon as you switch to the "Landing" fl ight phase, this 

fl ight phase timer is automatically stopped and hidden 

in the base screen. More about this can be found on 

page 156.

Now move the marker frame over the "Ph.Tim" 

column to the "Motor" column to the right. Here you 

can decide with "yes/no" in which phase the motor is 

controlled by the throttle/brake joystick and the brake 

system to be adjusted in the "Brake settings" submenu of the »Wing mixers« menu should be shut off 

(= "yes") and vice versa (= "no"):

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

Name Timer Motor Sw.time

yes 0.1s

no 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

yes 0.1s

–

–

–

–

Normal Clk1 

Landing

Now move the marker frame once more to the 

right and enter an appropriate switching time after 

activation of the value fi eld of the "Sw.Time" column; 

for example:
Programming examples - Winged models 281

ailerons can be automatically suppressed. The 

suitable correction values for the respective value 

must be tested out through fl ight. Set this mixer so 

that the fl ight speed of the model does not change too 

much with the brake system extended in comparison 

with the "normal" fl ight speed. Otherwise, there is 

the risk, among other things, that the model plunges 

when the brake system is retracted, e.g. for the 

extension of a landing approach which is too short.

If everything is correctly set so far, only the motor is 

controlled with the C1 joystick in the "Normal" fl ight 

phase, whereas this should be switched off in the 

fl ight phase "landing" (Servo 1 in »Servo display« 

independent of "Throttle min front/rear" to -100 % 

or adequately for a servo travel setting deviating by 

100 %, if necessary). In this fl ight phase the C1 joystick 

then only controls the raising of the ailerons and, if 

applicable, the lowering of the fl aps with the neutral 

point in the C1 control position selected per offset.
282 Programming examples - Winged models

C1 joystick switchable between E-motor and spoiler

Example 5

If, contrary to the assumptions of the preceding 

Example 4, the model has additional spoilers or only 

spoilers, they can be incorporated into the control of 

the model by means of the following programming.

Do this by programming the menus »Model type«, 

»Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« in 

the same manner as described under Example 4. 

The settings described there in the "Brake settings" 

sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu are only 

then relevant if an additional crow system is to be 

employed in parallel with the spoilers.

With the settings described under Example 4, the 

control of the E-motor and, if applicable, that of a 

crow system will function as usual. Only the control 

of a spoiler connected to Output 8, for example, must 

additionally be programmed. For this purpose, switch 

to the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

... and switch into the «normal» fl ight phase.

Now use the selection keys to switch to the left into 

the "Typ" column to set the parameter in this line, e.g. 

"I8" from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)", so that the settings 

too follow become effective on a fl ight-phase specifi c 

basis.

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

PH

SEL

fr ---

Afterward, switch to the "Offset" column and, 

following activation of the value fi eld with a brief 

tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, change 

the offset value for this Input 8 value fi eld now 

displayed in inverse video until the spoilers are again 

"retracted", e.g.:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

-95% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

PH

SEL

fr ---

Confi rm this setting with a brief tap on the center 

ESC key of the left key pad or the center SET key 

of the right touch pad then switch to the left into the 

column above SEL. Now switch to the fl ight phase 

«Landing» then briefl y tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad. The display shows the window ...

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

+100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Landing

PH

SEL

fr --- 0%

Move desired

control adj.

Now move the C1 joystick As soon as this is 

recognized, "Cn1" will appear in the display instead 

of "fr":

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

+100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

---

---

offset

GL

Landing

PH

SEL

Cn1 --- 0%

Leave the offset value in this fl ight phase

at "0 %". It may be necessary to change the leading 

symbol of the travel setting to reverse the control 

direction. Do this by switching the travel setting from 

+100 % to -100 % in the "travel" column.

Now we are practically fi nished. Check the 

programming in the »Servo display« menu, which 

you can reach from the base screen of the transmitter 

as well as nearly every other menu position with a 

simultaneous tap on  keys of the left touch pad. 

You will discover that "Servo 1" (motor control) is 

controlled in the "Normal" phase and in the "landing" 

phase only the spoiler is controlled at "Servo 8" and, 

if applicable the aileron and fl ap servos – just as we 

intended.
For your notes 283
284 Programming examples - Timer confi rmation with control or switch

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Cnt. 1

free

–85%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

In order to assign the control switch you just crated to 

the desired timer, switch to the menu ...

»Timers (in general)« (page 152 ... 154)

... and select the line "Top" with the selection keys. 

This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. 

In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer" 

column to the right, to the column above the switch 

symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left 

or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SET

key of the right touch pad: The fi rst tap will activate 

the switch assignment, the second tap will call up the 

list of "expanded switches":

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

Top :Stoppuhr

Centr.Mitte :Flugzeit

Movwünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

Now select the previously programmed control 

switch, C1 in the example, and assign it to the timer 

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad:

Modeltime

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s –––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

C1

The timer in the base screen now starts with 

movement of the C1 joystick toward full throttle 

and stops if you pull the C1 joystick back over the 

switching point. 

Example 1 of the preceding pages

If you have decided to continue with the model 

programming described on the previous pages in 

Example 1 on page 276, fi rst switch to the menu ...

»Control switch« (page 135)

... and select the line of a control switch which has 

not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After 

activation of the control assignment with a brief tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the 

following window will appear:

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

0%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

frei

free

free

frei Move desired

control adj.

Now simply move the respective proportional control, 

e.g. the left side proportional rotary control from 

its motor "OFF" position toward the motor "ON" 

direction.

Thereafter, change to the column above STO by 

using the appropriate selection key, move the 

selected control near its motor "OFF" position then 

Examples 4 and 5 of the preceding pages

If model programming is to be continued for 

Example 4, page 279 or Example 5, page 282 

as described on previous pages or, completely 

independent of this example programming, the 

C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) is to be used for 

power regulation, then a control switch can be used 

to automatically start and stop the stopwatch. For this 

purpose, fi rst switch to the menu ...

»Control switch« (page 135)

... and select the line of a control switch which has 

not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After 

activation of the control assignment with a brief tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the 

following window will appear:

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Geb. 1

0%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

frei

free

free

frei Move desired

control adj.

Now simply move the C1 joystick (throttle/brake 

joystick) from the motor "OFF" position in the motor 

"ON" direction.

Thereafter, change to the column above STO by 

using the appropriate selection key, move the C1 

joystick close to its motor "OFF" position then set 

the switch-point at the selected position with a brief 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. 

The switch's state will be displayed at the right of the 

control number, e.g.:

Timer confi rmation with control or switch
Programming examples - Timer confi rmation with control or switch 285

set the switch-point at the selected position with a 

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. 

The switch status is shown to the right of the control 

number:

SEL

0%

0%

0%

C1

C2

C3

C4 –––

CONTROL SWITCH

Slide2

free

–85%

STO

–––

–––

–––

SEL

C1

C2

C3

C4

free

free

Note:

Now place the switching point; but do not put it at the 

limit position of the control, because safe switching is 

not assured when doing so.

Ct1 used in the example here should be "closed" 

in the "full throttle" direction and "open" below the 

switching point. 

Now switch to the menu ...

»Timers (in general)« (page 152 ... 154)

... and select the line "Top"with the selection keys. 

This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. 

In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer" 

column to the right, to the column above the switch 

symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left 

or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SET

key of the right touch: The fi rst tap will activate the 

switch assignment, the second tap will call up the list 

of "expanded switches":

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s

–––

–––

Timer Alarm

Top :Stoppuhr

Centr.Mitte :Flugzeit

Movwünschten Schalter

to die EIN Position

(erw. Schalter: SET)

Control/Logic/fix switch

C2 C4 C5 C6

C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2

C1 C3

Now select the previously programmed control switch 

"C1" then tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad.

Modeltime

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

0:00

0:00

0s

0s –––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

C1

The stopwatch in the basic display now starts with 

movement of the proportional rotary control toward 

full throttle and stops if it is turned back again over 

the switch-point. 

Examples 2 and 3 of the preceding pages

If you control your motor with a switch, on the other 

hand, you do not need the described control switch 

described above. It is completely suffi cient if you 

assign the same switch to the timer, so that it also 

begins to run when you switch on the motor.

Tip:

If the motor run time for an E-model is limited by the 

battery capacity, you can have the stopwatch count 

down. Enter the maximum permissible motor run time 

in the "Timer" column, e.g. "5 min", and shortly before 

expiration of permissible time, e.g. "30 s" before, 

have the transmitter issue an acoustic warning signal:

Model time

Batt. time

Timer

12:34h –––

1:23h

5:00

0:00

30s

0s –––

Timer Alarm

Top : Stop watch

Centr: Flight tim

7
286 Programming examples - Parallel operating servos

Parallel operating servos

A second servo running in parallel is often required, 

such as when brake fl aps or spoilers installed in the 

wings or the left and right elevator or a double fi n 

should be actuated by a servo or a large rudder fl ap 

should be simultaneously controlled by two servos 

due to high throw forces.

In principle, this task could also be solved by 

connecting the servos together on the model side 

using V-cable. However, the disadvantage here is 

that servos combined in this manner can no longer 

be adjusted individually and separately from the 

transmitter – thus negating the potential for fi nely 

tuning respective servos to one another with a 

computerized remote control system. A similar 

situation is given for the so-called "Channel mapping" 

feature of the »Telemetry« menu. Here too there are 

certain limitations involved when compared to the 

transmitter's adjustment possibilities.

The fi rst example, therefore, describes the coupling 

of two brake or spoiler servos, the second describes 

the operation of two or more throttle servos and the 

third describes the coupling of two elevator servos.

The "two rudder servos" example on the next page 

describes the coupling of two rudder servos, whereas 

Variant 1 is preferable for applications of this type 

because the use of a cross-mixer« is quicker and 

easier to program. In contrast, the second variant, 

also described on the next page, additionally permits 

asymmetric and/or non-linear curves through use of 

the »Free mixer« menu.

Two brake or spoiler servos

In a situation where there is one installed servo for 

operation of brake fl aps and/or spoilers in each wing 

half then the pre-set linear control characteristics 

for the »Channel 1 curve« menu should remain 

unchanged.

Then connect one of the two servos to Output 1, 

provided for this purpose by standard, and the 

second to an arbitrary free receiver connection 

5 ... 16, such as Output "8". Subsequently switch 

to the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

... and, using the selection keys, assign "Control 1" in 

the Input 8 line :

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

Cn1

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

Since the spoiler on Output 1 can normally only be 

operated on a fl ight-phase dependent basis, it is 

strongly recommended that the "Typ" column for the 

input used is left at its "GL" default setting.

Also the remaining values should be left at their 

default settings. If necessary, carry out the required 

servo travel adjustments in the »Servo adjustment« 

menu. There you can also adjust the travel of servo 

1 and 8 to one another, if necessary.

Multiple-motor aircraft

As described above, a model can also be operated 

with two or more motors.

The fi rst throttle servo and/or the fi rst motor control 

is connected as usual to (receiver) Output 1 and 

each additional throttle servo and/or each additional 

motor control is connected to a free (receiver) Output 

6 ... 12. The inputs of respective assigned control 

channels are then each assigned to Control 1; for 

example :

I9 0% +100%

I10

I11

I12

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

---

Cn1

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

Cn1

Cn1

Cn1

Important notice:

Since the motor control unit should be available 

regardless of a currently active fl ight phase, make 

sure to leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" 

column.

Two elevator servos

Two elevator servos should be switched in parallel. 

According to the receiver assignment plan, see 

page 61, the receiver output 8 is intended for the 

connection of the second elevator servo.

This would be taken into account on the software side 

in the pre-confi guration of a corresponding mixer. You 

can fi nd this in the ...

"Model type" (page 94)

In this menu, switch to the "Tail" line using the 

selection keys, activate the value fi eld with a brief tap 

on the center SET key of the right key pad then select 

the entry "2ELSv3+8":
Programming examples - Parallel operating servos 287

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps 1 QR

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

2 EL Sv 3+8

Then do the fi ne-tuning for travel of the two 

servos "in the now familiar manner" in the 

»Servo adjustment« menu.

Two rudders

We want to switch two rudders "in parallel". The 

second rudder is located at the free receiver output 8.

Variant 1

In the menu ...

»Dual mixer« (page 206)

... select one of the cross-mixers and enter "8" and 

"RU" in its left and center value fi elds, as shown in 

the fi gure:

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

8 RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

?? ??

?? ??

0%

0%

0%

0%

The same defl ection "", which would take 

place through "Input 8" must not have an effect here. 

Therefore, you should make absolutely sure in the ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

... that "Input 8" "GL(obal)" is set to "free" so the 

control function is separate from the control channel 

over all fl ight phases.

Alternatively, Input 8 can be set to "no control" in 

the »Mix only channel« menu on a fl ight-phase 

independent basis by setting Channel 8 to "MIXonly".

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonly

normal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Variant 2

This variant uses the ...

»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)

... menu to set a "Tr RU  8". In the "Type" column, 

select the setting "Tr" so that the rudder trimming 

affects both rudder servos:

LinearMIX 1 8

type

 RU

from – Begr. +

?? ??

?? ??

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

––––

––––

?? ?? ––––

Tr

Afterwards, switch to the graphic screen and set a 

symmetric mix of +100 %.

RU

Mix input Offset

Linear MIX 1 8

SYM ASY STO

0%

SET

+100% +100%

Here too, "Input 8" should also be programmed – if 

applicable, for all fl ight phases – to "free" by way 

of the »Control adjust« menu. However, control 

function "8" can be separated from control channel 

"8" more easily in the fl ight-phase independent »Mix 

only channel« menu, page 205:

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonly

normal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
288 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases

Using fl ight phases

Up to 8 different fl ight phases (fl ight conditions) can 

be programmed with settings independent of one 

another within each the model memory.

Each of these fl ight phases can be called with 

a switch or a switch combination. This makes it 

possible to program different settings for various fl ight 

states, such as «Normal», «Thermal», «Speed», 

«Distance», etc., then make in-fl ight changeovers 

in a most convenient manner. However, with the 

fl ight phase programming you can also make slight 

modifi cations, e.g. of mixers, to try out by switching 

during the fl ight in order to fi nd the optimal settings 

for each model more easily.

Before actual programming of fl ight phases can 

begin, consideration should be given to whether 

the digital trimming of transverse, altitude and side 

should be "GL(obal)" – in other words, applicable to all 

fl ight phases – or per "PH(ase)" – in other words, each 

fl ight phase individually variable.

If you decide in favor of a phase-specifi c trimming of 

the elevator, for example, switch the menu ...

»Stick mode« (page 104)

... and change the standard "global" default accordingly.

The same applies for the number of trimming steps in 

the "Tr. step" column:

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

Example 1 ...

... continuing with the previous programming of 

an electric glider with 2 aileron servos.

AI

AI

EL

RU

Control of the electric motor is accomplished, 

independent of the C1 joystick, with one of the two 

side proportional rotary controls or one of the two 

standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch 

panels. The motor's speed control is connected to 

receiver output 8 as described on page 276 and 

continued in Examples 1 and 2 This is why "none" 

was selected for the "Motor on C1" line in the »Model 

type« menu. This not only causes the column "Motor" 

in the »Phase settings« menu to be unavailable 

but also allows all options to be available without 

restriction in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the 

»Wing mixers« menu.

1st Step 

»Phase settings« (page 142)

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Timer Sw.time

–

–

–

–

Normal 

Thermal

Speed

Launch

Initially, one or multiple fl ight phases are provided 

with a specifi c identifi cation ("Name") for the 

respective fl ight status. This identifi cation has no 

infl uence on the programming of the transmitter; it 

only serves for an improved differentiation of the 

individual fl ight phases and is shown later in all fl ightphase dependent menus and in the base screen.

The selection of the respective line, a name and the 

setting of the switchover time is done in the "usual" 

manner, with a tap on the appropriate key(s) of the 

two four-way touch pads.

Note:

With the exception of Phase 1, which should always 

be assigned with the name "Normal" since it is 

always active, if the fl ight phases are deactivated, it 

is completely irrelevant which name is assigned to 

which phase!

In everyday use by a model pilot, three to a maximum 

of four fl ight phases are usually completely suffi cient: 

• "Start" with the climb settings

• "Thermal" for "Flying high",

• "Normal" for normal conditions and 

• "Speed" for high gear.

In the "Sw.time" column (switching time) ...

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

1.0s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Timer Sw.time

–

–

–

–

Normal 

Thermal

Speed

Launch

... a "blend-in" time can be established for the time in 

which a changeover from any other fl ight phase into 

this given fl ight-phase is to be accomplished in order 

to permit a "smooth" transition for different servo 
Programming examples - Using fl ight phases 289

positions. Thus, an increased stress of the model 

under certain circumstances with a "hard" change of 

rudder or fl ap positions, for example, is prevented 

The "Status" column shows you the currently active 

fl ight phase with an asterisk "".

2nd Step

In order to actually be able to switch between the 

individual fl ight phases, the assignment of one or 

multiple switches is necessary. Either one of the two 

three-way switches is ideally suited for switching 

between up to three fl ight phases.

Each of the two switch end positions starting from the 

center position will be assigned to one of the fl ight 

phase switches A ... F. The assignment of the switch 

takes place in the menu ...

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

First select "C" with the marker frame. Then briefl y 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad and 

move the switch from its center position to one of its 

end-positions, for example, downward:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

2 7 6

Move the switch back to the center position and 

then select "D", and after activation of the switch 

assignment, move the switch to the other limit position, 

for example, to the top:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

2 7 6 7

Now the 3-way switch is programmed. 

Now and additional switch could be assigned for the 

"start" fl ight phase, if applicable. In this case under 

"A", so that the "start" phase is always switched 

to from every other fl ight phase in parallel to the 

switching-on of the motor: 

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

2 7 6 7

The given switch positions must then be assigned 

to respective fl ight phases (names). Although some 

fl ight phases have already been assigned to names, 

the phase name «1 Normal» will always initially 

appear at the right in the display; see the fi gures 

above.

First move the 3-way switch to one of its limit 

positions, for example to the top, and switch with the 

marker frame in the display down to the right to set 

the fl ight phase name. Briefl y tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad to activate the entry fi eld 

then select the desired fl ight phase for this switch 

position, in this example «2 Thermal», with the 

selection keys:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 7 6 7

2 Thermal

Proceed in the same manner for the other switch limit 

position, which is assigned the name "3 Speed".

If applicable move Switch 2 and assign this switch 

combination the name "4 Start".

A brief tap on the center ESC of the left touch pad 

or the center SET key of the right touch pad will 

complete the time name assignment.

The fl ight-phase dependent model settings made 

before the assignment of phase switches are now in 

the fl ight phase «1 Normal». This is the phase which 

is called with the open «Start» switch in the center 

position of the 3-way switch.

3rd Step 

In order to not have to carry out all previously made 

settings for the model in the "new" fl ight phase 

from the ground up, we recommend fi rst copying 

the already tested programming of the fl ight phase 

"Normal" to the other fl ight phases. This is carried out 

in the menu ...

»Copy / Erase« (page 72)

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD

=>


290 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases

Here, select the "Copy fl ight phase" menu item with 

the selection keys then briefl y tap the center SET key 

of the right touch pad.

In the window which now appears, "Copy from 

phase", "1 Normal" is selected ...

7

Copy from phase:

3

5

=>

=>

2

4

6

1

8

normal Thermal

Speed Launch

... and a subsequent brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad will change the display to 

"Copy to phase". Now the target is to be selected 

(initially "2 Thermal") and confi rmed by another tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad. After 

confi rmation of the subsequent safety query, all 

settings are copied according to the selection.

Proceed in the same manner with the other two 

phases ("1 Normal" to "3 Speed" and "1 Normal" to 

"4 Start").

4th Step 

Now three or four phases are programmed, the 

settings are also copied and there is even a "soft" 

transfer, but ... there are still no fl ight-phase specifi c 

settings.

Now, if applicable, in order to adapt the fl ap positions 

to the different requirements of the individual fl ight 

phases, in the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

... the standard default "GL" is fi rst changed to "PH" 

for "Phase" in the type column:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

PH

Normal

Then switch to the "Offset" column and make the 

settings deviating from the "Normal" fl ight phase for the 

ailerons. However, switch to the desired fl ight phase 

beforehand, whose name is shown at the bottom in 

the display, appropriate to the switch position. Both 

positive and negative throw changes are possible. 

These settings are to be made separately for each 

fl ight phase:

I5 +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ SEL

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr ---

fr

fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

PH

Thermal

–7%

5th Step 

Any necessary phase-specifi c trimming of the 

elevator is made with the help of the digital trimming 

of the elevator joystick. This requires that you have 

at least set the elevator trimming to "Phase" in the 

»Stick mode« menu – as already shown in this 

programming example.

Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the 

»Phase trim« menu ...



Normal 0%

Thermal EL

0% 0% 0%

AI WK WK2

Thermal

Speed

Launch

0% 0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0%

0%

QR2

0%

0%

0%

0%

6th Step 

In the menu ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... the fl ight phase name of the newly activated fl ight 

phase appears at the bottom edge of the display. If 

the switch position is now changed, the name of the 

fl ight phase selected with the switch appears, but 

with the previously copied settings of the fl ight phase 

"Normal". Here you set you values phase-specifi cally 

for the aileron differentiation, the share of the mixture 

of transverse to side, and if applicable, also a mixture 

of altitude to transverse. (The latter increases the 

agility over the transverse axis when "Turning".)

Aileron differential

Brake settings

+33%

Aileron +55%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal

Note:

The list of displayed options depends on the number 

of servos entered in the "Ailerons/fl aps" line in the 

»Model type« menu.

Now switch to the sub-menu ...
Programming examples - Using fl ight phases 291

Aileron differential

Brake settings

+33%

Aileron +55%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal

... and enter the raised height of aileron brakes for 

individual fl ight phases in the "Crow" line.

With "D.red" (differentiation reduction), you should 

enter the value previously set in the aileron 

differentiation line in order to suppress it again while 

breaking.

In the "Elevat curve" sub-menu, enter a correction 

value for the elevator, see page 150.

Note:

The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing 

mixers« menu is switched "off" when: for the "Motor 

at C1 front/rear" column of the »Model type« menu 

(page 94) AND for the "Motor" column of the »Phase 

settings« menu (page 142), a "yes" is entered for the 

currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, 

if applicable.
292 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases

Example 2 ...

Glider with four fl ap wings, two large fl aps and 

tow coupling

AI

FL

FL

AI

EL

RU

The following example is based on the assumption 

that you have already mechanically pre-adjusted the 

model and you have already ensured the correct 

defl ection of all rudders or checked this again in the 

scope of this programming and made adjustments, 

if applicable, through servo switching at the receiver 

and/or through the »Servo adjustment« menu.

This programming example is based on an 

assignment of the receiver connections in accordance 

with the following diagram:

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Rudder or elevator/rudder right

Left aileron

Elevator or elevator/rudder left

2nd airbrake or free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or 1st airbrake

Right aileron

Left flap

Right flap

Aero-tow release or free or aux. function

free or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16

S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

Begin with the new programming of the model in a 

free model memory location. 

Essentially, the »Basic settings, model« menu is 

used to bind the receiver to the transmitter. Enter a 

model name and select or review the selection of 

appropriate stick mode. Later on this menu will also 

be used to activate the range test before the start of 

fl ight operations.

In the menu ...

"Model type" (page 94)

... leave "Motor to C1" at "none" and the tail type at 

"Normal". Set "2 AIL 2 FL" into the "Aileron/camber 

fl aps" line.

In the "Brake" line, program or leave "In1", because 

the brake and spoiler fl ap servos connected to 1 + 8 

should be activated later with the corresponding C1 

joystick as the control:

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

none

Aileron/camber flaps 2AIL 2FL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +90%

STO SEL

The setting in the "Brake Offset" value fi eld defi nes 

the neutral position of all mixers specifi ed by the 

"Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« 

menu. Place this neutral point at approx. +90 %, 

insofar as the brake fl aps should be retracted in the 

front position of the C1 joystick. The remaining path 

between +90 % and the full throw of the joysticks, 

+100 %, is then assigned as idle travel. This assures 

that the rudders or fl aps addressed by the mixers of 

"Brake settings" remain in their "normal" positions 

even for slight deviations from the limit position of 

the C1 control. At the same time, the effective control 

path is automatically spread to 100 %.

In the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

... assign a switch, for example Input 9, to operate 

the aero-tow coupling. In order for this switch to work 

independently of the fl ight phase, leave the standard 

default "GL" in the "Type" column of this input. With 

"– Travel +" you can adjust the control travel for the 

switching of the switch:

Using fl ight phases
Programming examples - Using fl ight phases 293

I6 0% +100%

I7

I8

I9

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

--- 10

With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left 

touch pad, the setting can be checked in the »Servo 

display«.

Since the C1 control should actuate Servo 8 

simultaneously with Servo 1, establish this link by 

way of the »Control adjust« menu.

For this reason, also switch to the line before and 

assign "Control 1" to Input 8.

I6 0% +100%

I7

I8

I9

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

Cn1

---

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

10

SEL

However, please note in this connection, that a nonlinear control curve programmed in the »Channel 

1 curve« menu has as little effect on this input as 

brake offset set to less than 100 %, which you can 

check very easily in the »Servo display« menu. 

You can reach this from nearly every menu position 

with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left 

touch pad:

The travel, and if applicable also the direction of 

rotation, for spoiler servo 1 as well as the second 

spoiler servo connected to Output 8 can be adjusted 

in the menu ...

Servo adjustment (page 102)

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

In the Multi-fl ap menu of the ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... you now enter the fi rst mixer values for the four 

wing fl aps; for example:

FL-Pos.

Diff.

AI-Tr.

AI

Normal AI

+100%

WK2

FL

0%

+66% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% +33% 0% +33%

+100% +66% 0%

0%

FL 0% +100% +100%

Note:

The parameter values shown here are modeldependent and must be determined by test fl ights.

In the ...

AI determines the percentage share with 

which the two fl ap pairs "AI" and "FL" are 

to respond to aileron steering. Also check 

whether the ailerons are defl ected in the 

right direction during the adjustment of the 

parameter values.

 The adjustment range from -150 % ... 

+150 % enables the correct throw direction 

adjustment regardless of the direction of 

rotation of the servos.

AI-Tr. determines the percentage share with which 

aileron trimming should effect the AI and FL.

Diff. the entry to specify aileron steering 

differentiation for AI and FL fl aps is 

made here. Refer to page 161 about the 

signifi cance of differentiation.

 The adjustment range from -100 % ... 

+150 % enables the correct differentiation 

direction adjustment regardless of the 

direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap 

servos.

FL-Pos. The fl ight-phase specifi c positions for all 

camber fl aps present on the given model 

are set in this line. In the process, you can 

determine the positions the fl aps assume 

for each fl ight phase.

Note:

The values appearing in this line are based 

on the same data set as in the comparable 

position in the »Phase trim« menu, which 

is why changes always take effect in both 

directions.

FL Since all inputs in the »Control adjust« 

menu are set to "free" by default, neither 

the ailerons nor the camber fl aps can be 

operated with these default settings. In this 

respect, you also leave the default entry here.

 However, if fl ap positions are to be varied 

with a switch or proportional control by 

the position specifi ed in the "FL-Pos." line, 

assign the desired control to Input 6 in the 

»Control adjust« menu and set the desired 

reaction to the movement of the control 

selected for this purpose by way of 

a percentage in this line.

HRWK this mixer induces a partial reaction from 

aileron (AI) and camber fl aps (FL) during 

elevator activation.
294 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases

 The mixing direction is to be selected 

so that all fl aps are defl ected downward 

with the elevator pulled up and defl ected 

upward with the elevator pushed down (= 

hydroplane). The mix proportion is normally 

in the low double-digit range.

Now, within the »Wing mixers« menu, switch to the 

"Brake settings" ...

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AI

+22%

WK2

0%

FL

+66%

Diff. reduct.

WK2

+33% +33% 0%



Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor 

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu 

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase 

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the 

currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, 

if applicable.

Crow Further above in this text section, the C1 

joystick was set for brake fl ap steering.

 In this line you determine the share 

with which the AI and FL should be 

included on actuation of C1 in the 

manner that both ailerons are defl ected 

"slightly" upward and both fl aps are 

defl ected as far downward as possible.

 Now with a simultaneous tap on the 

 keys of the left touch pad, a 

change to the »Servo display« menu 

can be affected for observation of servo 

movements and, in particular, to ensure 

that no infl uence on the fl aps takes 

place above the adjusted brake offset, 

e.g. +90 % and beyond to the throw 

limit of the C1 control ("Idle travel" of 

the C1 joystick).

Diff. reduct. The value previously entered into 

the aileron differentiation line should 

also be entered in this "Differentiation 

reduction" line to fade this out during 

braking.

Elevat. curve This line is used for the entry of any 

correction factor that may be required 

for the elevator, see page 174.

Insofar as necessary, again check all fl ap throws and, 

by way of the »Servo adjustment« menu, adjust the 

servo center, the servo travel and the travel limit.

It may also be time to start the initial fl ight testing, 

insofar as all global settings – that is to say, all fl ightphase independent settings – are completed.

Two additional fl ight phases are now to be set 

up below, each of which requires a somewhat 

different fl ap position.

Therefore, switch to the menu ...

»Phase settings« (page 142)

... and activate the assignment of phase names in 

the "Name" column with a brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time

–

–

–

–



Now give Phase 1 – the "Normal phase" – that is also 

the phase which includes the previous settings, the 

name "Normal", which you select from a list with the 

selection keys.

Phase 2 is given the name "Thermal" and Phase 3 is 

given the name "Speed". Now conclude the entries 

with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad 

or the SET key of the right touch pad:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. SW. time

–

–

–

–

Normal 

Thermal

Speed

Now move the marker frame beyond the "Fl.ph.Tim" 

column to the right into the column "Sw. time" and set 

a "switching time" from any other phase into the given 

phase in order to avoid an abrupt phase change; in 

other words to avoid erratic changes of fl ap positions. 

Now try out different switching times. In this example 

we have specifi ed 1 s in each case:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

Phase 5

1.0s

1.0s

1.0s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.tim. Sw. time

–

–

–

–

Normal 

Thermal

Speed

Whether or not one of the phases 1 ... 8 currently has 

an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be 

seen in the "status" column at the far right.

Symbol Meaning

– No switch assigned

+ Phase can be called via switch

 Indicates the currently active phase

Since, except for phase 1, all other phases are still 

designated with a "-" symbol, now switch in the 

menu to ...
Programming examples - Using fl ight phases 295

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

... and assign the previously defi ned fl ight phases 

to appropriate switches with which a selection from 

among three phases is possible.

Since there is no particular priority here, assign 

for example switch "C" in the display to one of the 

two end settings of one of the two 3-way switches. 

Afterward put the selected switch again into its middle 

position, activate the switch assignment under "D" 

then move the selected 3-way switch again out of its 

middle position and into the other end position, as 

shown below:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

After the switch assignment is complete, use the 

selection keys to switch to the bottom right and 

activate the assignment of phase names with a brief 

tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

Now close switch "7" by moving the selected 3-way 

switch forward.

Assign the name "<2 Thermal>" to this switch 

position and leave the name of its "OFF" position 

as "<1 normal>".

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

2 Thermal

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

1 Normal

Finally, move the 3-way switch to the rear toward its 

"6 o'clock position" and assign this switch position the 

name "<3 Speed>":

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

3 Speed

The phase names selected in the programming are 

now shown, depending on the switch status, in all 

fl ight-phase dependent menus, see the table on 

page 140.

Since we have already made some settings in fl ightphase dependent menus, such as in the »Wing mixers« 

menu, we will now copy these settings to the «Thermal» 

fl ight phase. For this purpose, open the menu ...

»Copy / Erase« (page 72)

... and switch to the "Copy fl ight phase" line:

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD

=>



All eight possible fl ight phases are listed in "Copy 

from phase":

1. Select the fl ight phase to be copied, e.g. 

"1 Normal".

7

Copy from phase:

3

5

=>

=>

2

4

6

1

8

Normal Thermal

Speed

2. With a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, switch the window to entry of the target 

memory "Copy to phase".

3. Select phase "2 Thermal" as the target:

7

Kopieren to phase:

3

5

=>

=>

4

6

1

8

Normal

Speed

2 Thermal

4. with a brief tap on the center Confi rm the selection 

SET key of the right touch pad.

5. A security query follows, who should be confi rmed 

with "Yes":

Phase to:

to be copied?

NO

1 Normal 2 Thermal

YES

6. Then repeat the process with fl ight phase "3 Speed".
296 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases

Now we will program the required settings in the 

fl ight phase "Thermal" as an example.

In order to vary camber fl ap positions in the 

«Thermal» phase, it is merely necessary to switch 

over to the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

... then change Input 6 – as described beginning on 

page 108 – from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and fi nally 

assign it to an operating element. 

To do this, fi rst use the selection keys to switch into 

the "Typ" column for "I6" and change this setting from 

"GL" to "PH".

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

fr

Cn1

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

Thermal

PH

---

SEL

Thereafter change one column to the right into the 

column above SEL ...

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

fr

Cn1

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

PH

---

SEL

Thermik

... and now assign this input, as described in the 

section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and 

control switches" on page 56, the left proportional 

slider in the middle console to, for example:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL Cn1

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

PH

---

SEL

Sl1

Thermal

This control will allow the ailerons (2 + 5) and camber 

fl aps (6 + 7) to be continuously adjusted (as camber 

fl aps) with a mixer ratio yet to be set via the »Wing 

mixers« menu.

If you assign the still free second three-stage switch 

to Input 6 instead, you can call three different FL 

positions of the ailerons (AIL) and camber changing 

fl aps (FL) as well as three elevator positions (Elev) 

in the "Thermal" fl ight phase, see the following 

page. (These three switch positions correspond to 

the center position and the two limit positions of the 

previously mentioned proportional rotary control.)

Note:

The FL and AIL fl ap positions in the two limit switch 

positions or in the switch center depend on the value 

set in the column "- Travel +" as well as the offset 

value and the mixer proportion set in the "Multi-fl ap 

menu" of the »Wing mixers« menu, see further 

below.

Leave the (control) "- travel +" at its standard 

symmetric settings of + 100 % and the offset value at 

0 %. Specifying a symmetric or asymmetric time for 

smooth switching between the three switch positions 

- in the example "1.0 s 1.0 s" - in the column "- Time 

+" is recommended:

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100%

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL Cn1

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

PH

---

SEL

Sl1 1.0 1.0

In the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... menu, subsequently change only the values for 

"FL.pos" and "FL" in the «Thermal» fl ight phase:

FL.pos It is here that AI and FL positioning takes 

place during the «Thermal» fl ight phase 

in the event that the assigned control 

(proportional control or 3-way switch) is in 

its neutral or middle position.

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

AI

Thermal AI

+100%

WK2

FL

0%

+66% 0%

+100% –9% +100% +100%

0% +33% 0% +33%

+100% +66% 0%

0%

FL 0% +100% +100%

–11%

FL Enter in this line the the share of infl uence 

for aileron and camber fl ap servos, when 

used as camber fl aps, is to be produced by 

the selected control (see above) or 3-way 

switch. Be sure to set these values high 

enough that the fl aps can be controlled with 

appropriate sensitivity, for example:

Fl.pos

Diff.

AiI-tr.

AI

Thermal AI

+100%

WK2

FL

0%

+66% 0%

+100% –9% +100% +100%

0% +33% 0% +33%

+100% +66% 0%

0%

FL +20% +25%

–11%

+20% +25%
Programming examples - Using fl ight phases 297

A simultaneous tap on the  or  key 

combination of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset 

changed values back to their standard default values.

Note:

Due to the improved lift distribution, the degree of 

mix ratios should be set so that the camber fl aps are 

slightly "lower" than the ailerons.

With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left 

touch pad, the reaction of the AI and FL servos can 

be checked in the »Servo display« by actuation 

of the selected camber fl ap control. (Push the C1 

joystick to the front position so that the "AIL" and "FL" 

fl ap positions can be better followed on actuation of 

the corresponding control.) 

Caution:

With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo 

display« move in the same manner, for camber 

fl ap actuation they will move in the opposite 

manner.

• In the control's middle position, the – example's – 

"FL-pos." setting only has a -9 % effect for the AI 

and -11 % for the FL.

• In one transmitter control end-position, AI and FL 

are again closer to the neutral position because 

the mix ratio specifi ed in the example reduces the 

FL.pos setting, whereas ...

• ... in the other limit position, AIL and FL reach 

the maximum downward offset prescribed by the 

mixer percentage.

In order to set a – corrective – admix for the elevator, 

exit the "Multi-fl ap menu" and return to the base 

screen of the »Wing mixers« menu:

Brake settings 

Aileron +50%

WING MIXERS

Flaps aileron +5% +5%

–––

–––

2 rudder

6 4

3

Thermal

Multi-flap menu

In the two limit positions of the three-stage switch 

the elevator is moved symmetrically in this example 

with +5 % (true to side). If, on the other hand, you 

use a proportional control, the elevator is defl ected 

according to the degree for the control position.

Then make the settings for the "Speed" fl ight phase 

in the same manner.

Notes:

• The digital trimming of transverse, altitude 

and side work independently of these 

settings – depending on the setting selected in 

the»Stick mode« menu, page 104 – "global" or for 

each "phase".

• All setting values are model-dependent. Carry out 

the settings on your fi nished model and/or during 

the fl ight.
298 Programming examples - Eight-fl ap wing

Eight-fl ap wing

The standard features of the mc-32 HoTT support 

convenient control of up to 8 servos for aileron/

camber fl ap functions.

In the following we will consider a model without 

motor drive and without spoilers in the wings. The 

example is also based on the assumption that the 

model is already mechanically pre-adjusted, that 

the defl ection of all rudders to the correct side has 

been verifi ed, that these items will be checked again 

in the context of programming and that adaptations 

will be made as necessary via servo swapping at the 

receiver and/or in the Servo adjustment menu.

The servos should be connected to a suitable 

receiver as follows: 

2 11 6 7 12 5

3

4

9 10

Rudder Receiver output

Aileron 2 + 5

Aileron 2 11 + 12

Camber changing fl aps 

(exterior) 6 + 7

Camber changing fl aps 2 

(interior) 9 + 10

Elevator 3

Rudder 4

For the control of all fl aps, up to two additional 

proportional controls are required in addition to 

the two joysticks or, alternatively up to two 2-way 

switches.

In order to be able to control all servos, fi rst switch to 

the menu ...

"Model type" (page 94)

... and select "4AIL 4FL" in the "Ailerons/fl aps" line.

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

none

Aileron/camber flaps

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

4 AIL 4 FL

In order to also actuate camber fl ap servos 6 + 7 

(FL) and 9 + 10 (FL2) as ailerons, set the appropriate 

values in the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... menu, whereby aileron control of the two camber 

fl ap pairs is set in the "AI" line and the "Ail-tr." 

line is used to adapt aileron trimming.

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

AI

Normal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

+77% +55%

0% 0% 0%

0% 0%

+100% +77% +55%

0%

FL

AILE2 FLAP

+88%

+88%

0%

0%

EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

Any previous settings can be checked in the »Servo 

display« menu, which can be called from almost any 

menu position with a brief simultaneous tap on the 

 keys of the left touch pad. 

• The servos 6 + 7, 9 + 10 and 11 + 12 now move 

for the aileron control just like servos 2 + 5. Aileron 

trimming also affects all of these servos.

• The C1 joystick only actuates the servo connected 

to receiver output 1.

Caution:

With aileron actuation the bars of the "Servo 

display" move in the same manner and in the 

opposite manner with camber changing fl ap 

actuation.

The necessary fi ne-tuning of the servos is carried out 

in the ...

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

... if necessary.

In doing so, the basic programming of the eight-fl ap 

wing is completed.

Camber fl ap positioning and fl ight phases

First program two or more fl ight phases in the 

»Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus. 

Also take this opportunity to change the standard 

default "global" for trim in the »Stick mode« menu,

page 104 to "phase", thus allowing modifi cations to 

meet individual preferences. 

An example of fl ight phase programming can be 

found on page 288.

One camber changing fl ap setting per fl ight phase

If one camber fl ap position per fl ight phase is 

suffi cient, then in the Multi-fl ap meun" of the ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... menu, use the "FL.pos" line to adjust the camber 

fl ap position(s) of servo pairs "AILE" (2 + 5), "AIL2" 

(11 + 12), "FLAP" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) for each 

programmed fl ight phase to meet your preferences.
Programming examples - Eight-fl ap wing 299

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

AI

Thermal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

+77% +55%

–5% –7% –9%

0% 0%

+100% +77% +55%

0%

FL

AILE2 FLAP

+88%

+88%

0%

–12%

EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

Note:

Whether positive or negative values must be set in 

the "FL.pos" line depends on the installation of the 

servos, among other things.

However, if the alternative ...

variable camber fl ap positions per fl ight phase with 

a proportional rotary control setting is preferred,

... then the basic settings for all 8 fl aps can be 

additionally varied on a fl ight-phase basis by way of a 

single control.

This is accomplished via the ...

»Control adjust« (page 108)

... menu, by assigning the same transmitter control in 

every fl ight phase to inputs 5, 6 and 11, for example 

the proportional slider, and in parallel, reducing travel 

to about 50 % or even less so that the trimming of 

fl aps has appropriate sensitivity. Deviating throw 

travel for individual fl ap pairs can also be matched to 

one another on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis by way 

of travel settings in a menu. For this purpose, you 

only have to switch the corresponding inputs from the 

standard default "GL" (global) to "PH" (phase):

I5 0% +25%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+25% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +25% +25% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

PH Sl1

PH

---

SEL

 Sl1

Thermal

I10 0% +100%

I11

I12

I13

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +25% +25% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL fr

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

PH

---

SEL

Sl1

Thermal

Note:

With the use of a switch, set the respective 

"Deviation" of the offset point symmetrically or 

asymmetrically in the "- Travel +" column.

Elevator compensator with actuation of the 

camber changing fl aps

If it should become evident in the fl ight that a 

correction of the elevator is necessary after setting 

the fl aps, this correction can be made in the ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... For this purpose, select the line "FL  EL" and 

enter an appropriate fl ight-phase specifi c value, for 

example:

Brake settings 

Aileron +50%

WING MIXERS

Flaps aileron +5% +5%

–––

–––

2 rudder

6 4

3

Thermal

Multi-flap menu

If you have assigned the same control to the inputs 

5, 6 and 11 – as specifi ed above – all eight fl aps move 

simultaneously while the elevator follows the set 

degree of mixture.

Camber changing fl ap movement on elevator 

actuation

Camber changing fl ap movement on elevator 

actuation – normally only used in "High gear" to 

increase the agility over the transverse axis – is also 

carried out in the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... menu. Enter the desired fl ight-phase dependent 

values in the line "EL  FL":

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

AI

Thermal AILE

+100%

FL2

0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%

+77% +55%

–5% –7% –9%

0% 0%

+100% +77% +55%

0%

FL

AILE2 FLAP

+88%

+88%

0%

–12%

EL FL 5 5%+107+107% +9+ 9% +111+11%

In addition to the two camber changing fl ap pairs 

(servos 6 + 7 and 9 + 10), the two aileron pairs 

(servos 2 + 5 and 11 + 12) are now tracked with 

the degree of mixture corresponding to the camber 

changing fl aps – normally opposite the elevator.
300 Programming examples - Eight-fl ap wing

Brake settings

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor 

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu, 

page 94, AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase 

settings« menu, page 142, are set to "yes" for the 

currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, 

if applicable.

The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing 

mixers« menu is also fl ight-phase specifi c and can 

be used to extend aileron pairs (2 + 5) and (11 + 12) 

upward as well as camber fl ap pairs "FL" (6 + 7) and 

"FL2" (9 + 10) downward, whereas the elevator is 

trimmed in parallel to this, see page 174.

In order for the brake system to react to the C1 

joystick as desired, however, the mixer neutral 

point (offset) of the brake system must be adjusted 

accordingly. This takes place in the menu ...

"Model type" (page 94)

After selecting the "Brake Off." line, the C1 joystick is 

to be moved to the position at which the mixer for the 

brake system is to take effect – normally just before 

the forward limit position – and after selecting the 

appropriate value fi eld, the setpoint is defi ned with a 

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.

If the C1 joystick is not moved over this point toward 

the pilot, all mixers of the brake system are carried 

along according to their respective degree of mixing. 

Below this point the mixer remains inactive, whereas 

the selection of "dead travel" is possible.

If the model has additional brake fl aps or spoilers and 

your receiver has another free Output 1, you can also 

control this through the C1 joystick by connecting the 

spoiler servo to receiver Output 1. 

However, if you control the left and right spoiler each 

with its own servo, and not together, the receiver 

Output 8 is still available for the connection of the 

second spoiler servo. In this case, program the 

connection to the second spoiler servo as described 

in the section "Servos running in parallel" on 

page 286.

Reduction of the aileron and camber changing 

fl ap differentiation

For the improvement of the aileron effect in the crow 

position, you should automatically suppress any 

programmed aileron differentiation. 

For this purpose, use "differentiation reduction" in 

the "Brake settings" of the »Wing mixers« menu 

to continuously reduce the degree of the aileron 

differentiation within an adjustable range when 

rudders are brought into crow position with the C1 

joystick. For more about this, see text beginning on 

page 174.
Programming examples - Delta and fl ying wing 301

Of course, the general comments regarding the 

installation and the adjustment of the RC system 

to a model at the beginning of the wing model 

programming on page 268 also applies for delta and 

fl ying wing models! Similarly, the comments for test 

fl ying and fi ne-tuning the settings to the programming 

of fl ight phases also apply.

left

right

Delta and fl ying wing models differ signifi cantly 

from a "normal" fl ight model due to their unique 

characteristic shape and geometry. The differences in 

the servo arrangement, on the other hand, are more 

subtle. For example, with "classic" delta/fl ying wing 

models, only two rudders are normally provided. They 

are responsible for both "transverse" and "height/

depth", like the side rudder/elevator function on a 

V-tail unit.

With more elaborate designs, on the other hand, it 

may be the case that one (or two) interior rudders 

have only an elevator function and the exterior 

ailerons only support the height/depth function, under 

certain circumstances. Even with a 4, or indeed up 

to 8, fl ap wing the use of camber fl ap functions and/

or even a crow system is nowadays entirely possible. 

In all these cases, however, the following assignment 

of the receiver outputs should be used, see also 

page 61. Unneeded outputs a simply left free: 

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

Airbrake- or throttle servo

or speed controller (electric motor)

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL 

free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL 

free or aux. function

free or flap / left elevator

free or flap / right elevator

free or aux. function or flap2 / left EL

free or aux. function or flap2 / right EL

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

AIL / elevator left

AIL / elevator right

free or aux. function

free or rudder

According to the assignment of the receiver outputs, 

in the menu ... 

»Model type« (page 94)

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps 2 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Delt/fl.wing

Delta and fl ying wing

... the necessary settings are made:

"Motor an C1" "none" or "Throttle min front/rear"

"Tail type" "Delt/fl .wing"

"Aileron/camber fl aps"

"2AIL" (appears automatically).

 To the extent necessary, expand 

default "2 AIL" by 4 AIL or 1, 2 or 4 

camber fl aps ("1 FL", "2 FL" or "4 FL").

"Brake" stays as is, only interesting for a 

delta wing or fl ying wing of type 

"2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL". In this case, refer 

to the text under "Brake offset" on 

page 95.

These model type specifying settings primarily affect 

the functions made available in the »Wing mixers« 

menu. Therefore, the options are discussed separately 

for two-fl ap and multi-fl ap models in the following: 

Delta/fl ying wing of the type: "2AIL"

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Delt/fl.wing

2 AIL

By retaining the standard default "2 AIL" in the 

"Aileron/camber fl aps" line, elevator and aileron 

control, including the trim function, are automatically 

mixed by percentage on the software side. However, 

on the transmitter side, the percentage effect of the 

elevator and aileron joystick can be infl uenced in the 

»Dual Rate / Expo« menu, page 120.

Settings in the menu ...
302 Programming examples - Delta and fl ying wing

This is only then achieved for "2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL" 

when, in the "Multi-fl aps menu", the ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... menu is set appropriately in the "HR  WK" line to 

"Aileron, camber fl aps" or, if applicable, "Camber fl ap 2": 

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

AI

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP WK2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL

EL FL

0% 0% +100% +100% +100% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Note:

Contrary to the separately set aileron trimming, see 

below, the trimming is transferred proportionally to the 

set mixer value with the mixer "EL  FL".

The following settings are model-specifi c and 

may not be adopted without checking that they 

are correct!

In the top line of this "Multi-fl ap menu", analogous to 

"normal" four, six or eight fl ap wings, the effect of the 

aileron joystick will be set to aileron, camber fl ap and, 

if applicable to FL2. One line below, in the line "Ailtr." line, will set the infl uence of aileron trimming on 

ailerons and camber changing fl aps.

The setting of a differentiation is rather tricker due to 

the model type and should only take place based on 

a feel for the fl ight behavior of the model.

The line "FL" should then be set to the 

standard default of +100 % in the "FLAP" (or "FL2") 

column – as shown – to 0 %, just to be safe.:

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... are, if need be, advantageous with the "Aileron 

 Rudder" mixers and are "played' with a great deal 

of "feel" for fl ying behavior with minor differentiation 

values. 

Aileron differential

Brake settings

0%

Aileron 0%

WING MIXERS

Elevator aileron 0% 0%

–––

–––

2 rudder

3

4

5

Normal

Due to the specifi c idiosyncrasies of this model type, 

additional settings lead to moments which cannot be 

compensated.

Delta/fl ying wing of the type: "2 / 4 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL"

Tail type

Motor on C1 none

Aileron/camber flaps

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Delt/fl.wing

2 AIL 2 FL

With delta/fl ying wing constructions with more than 

two fl aps, more moments can be compensated for. 

For example, the "lifting" moment caused by the 

raising of the ailerons (= elevator effect) can be 

compensated for with camber changing fl aps lowered 

correspondingly wide ( = hydroplane effect).

If you decide in favor of this model type and have 

assigned the receiver outputs in accordance with the 

connection plan shown above, the aileron function of 

the two (exterior) aileron servos will function correctly 

immediately, but not the elevator function of the two 

aileron servos and, if applicable, the (interior) camber 

changing fl aps. 

FL.pos

Diff.

Ail-tr.

AI

Normal AILE

+100%

FLAP WK2

0%

0% 0%

+100% 0% +100% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0%

+100% 0% 0%

0%

FL

EL FL

0% 0% 0% 0% +100%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Even though all inputs are set to "free" by default 

in the »Control adjust« menu, should a control be 

assigned sometime by mistake ... then it will at least 

have no effect.

The last line, "EL  FL", was explained at the 

beginning of this section.

In principle, the author of this manual had 

programmed a delta model years ago operated 

with the mc-20 and a crow system as landing 

assistance ... entirely without tilting moments 

through correspondingly attuned wing mixers "Brake 

 Aileron" and "Brake  Camber fl ap", whereby 

"Aileron" refers to the exterior rudder pair and 

"Camber fl ap" refers to the interior rudder pair. 

To achieve this now with the mc-32 Hott also, switch 

to "Brake settings" in the ...

»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)

... menu, and enter the values for the ailerons to be 

raised and the "fl aps" to be lowered in the "Crow" 

line so that the occurring moments compensate 

one another and the altitude of the model remains 

stable. In the process, however, you should leave the 

fl aps with enough "play" for the elevator function!!! 

Therefore, do not utilize the entire servo travel for the 

crow alone; for example:
Programming examples - Delta and fl ying wing 303

Elevat. curve

BRAKE SETTINGS

Normal

Crow

AILE

+55%

WK2

0%

FLAP

+44%

Diff. reduct

WK2

0% 0% 0%

You can ignore all other settings in this menu.

Note:

The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor 

on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu 

(page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase 

settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the 

currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, 

if applicable.

Similarly, a modern, tapered fl ying wing air craft can 

also be operated. With some of these models there 

are also interior and exterior rudders: The prior is in 

front of the center of gravity and the latter is behind. 

A downward throw of the central rudder(s) increases 

the ascending forces and has an elevator effect. 

An upward throw has the opposite effect. On the 

exterior ailerons, on the other hand, the effect is just 

the opposite: A downward throw shows an elevator 

effect and vice versa. With appropriate adjustment of 

the "leading" mixer to the setting of curve mixers in 

order to achieve a supporting effect from the external 

rudder pair with only extreme joystick defl ection in the 

height/depth direction, "everything" is possible here. 

The author of this manual uses a curve mixer for his 

model, which is defi ned by a total of four points:

Curve MIX 9

Curve

Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

2

0%

EL 5

1

off 3

In this example the two interpolation points 1 and 2 

are each at 0 % as well as the left edge point at +60 % 

and the right edge point at -65 %. In conclusion, the 

curve was rounded.

In this case: Regardless of which type of servo 

arrangement was selected, any type of differentiation 

should be set with caution! On a tail-less model, 

differentiations show a single-sided height/depth 

elevator effect, so we urgently recommend beginning 

at least the initial fl ights with a setting of 0 %! Over 

the course of the further fl ight testing, under certain 

circumstances it may be advantageous to experiment 

with differentiations deviating from zero. 

With larger models, rudders in the winglets - the 

"ears" mounted on the wing ends - can be benefi cial. 

If these are controlled with two separate servos, with 

the use of one of the mixers in the menu ...

»Dual mixer« (page 206)

... the rudder signal can be "split" very easily and 

even differentiated, whereby the second rudder servo 

is connected to one of the still free receiver outputs. 

For a model with a "Delt/fl .wing" tail type, receiver 

output "5" should still be unoccupied and it can then 

be used as indicated below:

Diff.

DUAL MIXER

Mixer 1

Mixer 2

5 RU

Mixer 3

Mixer 4

?? ??

?? ??

?? ??

+66%

0%

0%

0%

Differentiation is necessary in this case because, 

when fl ying curves, the respective exterior rudders 

will have a greater curve radius than the interior 

rudders, so this is comparable to the front wheel 

positions on a car when driving in curves.

Note:

The rudder can only be differentiated as programmed 

above!

If these two rudders are also to defl ect outward upon 

actuation of a brake system with the C1 joystick, 

this can be achieved, for example, by setting an 

additional mixer "C1  5" with an appropriate travel 

setting. Set the mixer's offset according to personal 

preference, "front" (+100 %) or "rear" (-100 %), 

because the winglet rudder should defl ect outward 

only for proportional extension.

Independent of this, fi nish up by uncoupling the 

"false" control function from the control channel 

to which the second servo was connected – even 

though all inputs in the »Control adjust« menu 

are "free" by default – by way of the fl ight-phase 

independent menu ...

»MIX-only channel« (page 205)

... for safety's sake! In keeping with the above 

example, control channel 5 should therefore be set to 

"MIX only".
304 Programming examples - F3A model

F3A model

F3A models are a part of the group of motor-driven 

winged models. They are powered by a combustion 

or electric motor. Models with electric motors can be 

used in both the electric acrobatic class F5A and are 

also competitive in the international model acrobatic 

class F3A.

The basic comments and notices for the mechanical 

installation of a remote steering system, which was 

already referred to in the fi rst programming example 

on page 268, also applies, of course, for F3A models 

and does not need to be mentioned here again.

Faultlessly constructed F3A models exhibit a largely 

neutral fl ying behavior. Ideally, they react with a good 

nature but precisely to control movements without the 

individual fl ight axes infl uencing one another.

F3A models are controlled with ailerons, elevator 

and rudders. Normally, each aileron is actuated 

by a separate servo. There is also the regulation 

of the drive output of the motor (throttle function) 

and a retractable landing gear in many cases. The 

assignment of the channels 1 to 5, therefore, do not 

differ from the previously described winged models. 

The additional "Retractable landing gear" function is 

to be provided on one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 

9. It is best to actuate the landing gear with a switch 

without center position. In addition, another mix offset 

for the carburetor can – if necessary – be provided. 

You normally use one of the two proportional 

controls on the transmitter, which actuates one of the 

unassigned auxiliary channels.

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron

Elevator or 1st elevator

free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor)

Right aileron

free or landing gear or aux. function

free or fuel mixture or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

With the assignment of auxiliary channels at the 

transmitter, we recommend making sure that the 

operating elements required for this are easily 

within reach, because during fl ight – especially in 

competition – you have "very little time" to release the 

joystick.

Programming procedure

Since the basic programming of the transmitter was 

already described in detail on pages 268 ... 275, only 

F3A-specifi c tips are added here.

In the menu ...

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

... the settings for the servos are carried out. 

Experience has shown that working with at least 

100 % servo throw is benefi cial, because the control 

precision is signifi cantly better if greater servo travel 

is used. This should already be taken into account 

during the construction of the model in the design 

of the rudder linkages. Check the servo's direction 

of rotation. The servo center should be adjusted 

mechanically, insofar as possible. 

Any corrections can be made on the software side in 

the third column during the initial test fl ights. 

Through the menu ...

"Model type" (page 94)

... the idle trim is activated for Channel 1 (normally 

"rear", because full throttle is "front"). The trimming 

then only works in the idle direction:

Tail type

Motor on C1

Normal

Aileron/camber flaps 1 AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Offset Input 1 +100%

SEL

Thr. min rear

The remaining settings are made or left as shown in 

the fi gure.
Programming examples - F3A model 305

After the model is test-fl own and trimmed, we 

recommend reducing trim travel for the elevator and 

ailerons The model has signifi cantly less of a reaction 

to a movement of the trim wheel. "Over-trimming" 

can be avoided, because with full trim travel, under 

certain circumstances, the movement by just one 

trimming step can have too strong of an effect: 

Therefore, the model which previously pulled slightly 

to the left, hangs somewhat to the right after the 

trimming. For this purpose, switch to the menu ...

»Stick mode« (page 104)

... and reduce the number of trim steps in the "Tr.s 

tep" column appropriately:

Channel 1 global

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

Trim

0.0s

Tr.s tep – time +

global 0.0s

0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

Phase 4

2

It may also be necessary to assign appropriate 

operating elements and inputs for other model 

features, e.g. retractable landing gear, fuel-mix, etc. 

Make these assignments with the ...

»Control adjust« (page 108) 

... menu where a specifi c input can be assigned to an 

operating element, for example, the landing gear can 

be assigned to an ON/OFF switch on Input 6 and the 

fuel-mix can be assigned to one of the proportional 

sliders in the middle console, e.g. the center slider 

to Input 7. However, since it involves fl ight-phase 

independent settings, leave the standard default "GL" 

in the "Type" column: 

+33%

+33%

+33%

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder

DUAL

–––

SEL

–––

––– –––

100%

100%

100%

EXPO

SEL

Normal

–––

(Some experts even use up to a +60 % exponential 

ratio.)

Since (some) combustion motors do not react linearly 

to movements of the throttle joystick, through the 

menu ...

»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)

... a "bowed" or, in other words, non-linear throttle 

curve can be set. Four-cycle motors with Roots 

pumps, in particular, such as OS Max FS 120, require 

a steep ascension of the curve in the lower speed 

range. However, the corresponding values must be 

adapted. The C1 control curve for the motor could 

appear as follows:

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

Point

Output

Input –50%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Normal

on

1

Only three interpolation points, "L" at -100 %, "H" at 

+100 % and "1" at -50 % give the control travel the 

rounded curve above.

Basic procedure:

• Move the C1 joystick and, along with it the vertical 

line in the graph display, toward idle to about 

I5 0% +100%

I6

I7

I8

Typ

+100% 0.0 0.0

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL fr

Sl2

---

---

---

---

offset

GL fr

Normal

2

SEL

The control travel of the operating elements must be 

adapted and can also be reversed with a negative 

travel setting. 

Note:

A delay time can be specifi ed for raising and lowering 

the retractable landing gear, however, such a time 

delay is not effective for landing gear servo C 713 MG, 

order no. 3887.

F3A models fl y comparatively fast and thus react 

"harshly" to the control movements of the servos. 

However, since small control movements and 

corrections are not optically perceptible, because this 

results in inevitable point deductions in competition, 

we recommend setting an exponential control 

characteristic of the joystick. For this purpose, 

switch to the menu ...

»Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)

Experience has shown positive results with values of 

approx. + 30 % on the ailerons, elevator and rudders, 

which you set in the right column with the selection 

keys. In order to be able to control the F3A model to 

run smoothly and cleanly:
306 Programming examples - F3A model

-50 % of control travel then briefl y tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad.

• In order to attain the curve shape shown, raise this 

point with the selection keys to approx. 0 % in the 

inverse video value fi eld in the "Point" line.

• Finally, round the characteristic curve by moving 

the marker frame left, select with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad then change 

the value from "Off" to "On" with the selection 

keys.

If additional interpolation points between the left ("L") 

and right ("H") end are necessary, repeat Steps 2 and 

3 analogously.

Since F3A models normally have two aileron servos, 

experience has shown that it is benefi cial to move 

both ailerons upward somewhat when landing. In the 

process, the model usually approaches somewhat 

slower and, above all, more steadily for the landing. 

In order to do this it is necessary to program mixers 

through the menu ...

»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)

... accordingly.

The ailerons are extended as landing assistance 

depending on the position of the throttle stick, starting 

from approximately half throttle toward idle. The 

further the joystick is moved toward idle, the more 

the ailerons defl ect upward. Just the opposite applies 

when "throttling"; the ailerons are retracted again in 

order to prevent a sudden rise of the model. 

In order to prevent the model from climbing with the 

aileron landing fl aps extended, the elevator must be 

mixed in somewhat.

For this purpose, set the two linear mixers shown 

in the following display. The activation of the mixers 

takes place with one and the same switch, such 

as "8", to which both mixers must be assigned with 

identical switching direction.

LinearMIX 1 5

type

 C1

from – Begr. +

C1 EL

?? ??

?? ??

?? ?? ––––

LinearMIX 2

LinearMIX 3

LinearMIX 4

LinearMIX 5

to Adjust

Tr

––––

––––

Then switch to the second respective display screen 

in order to adjust the respective mixing degrees. In 

both cases the mixer neutral point is at the C1 control 

center.

Enter 0 % above the control center after selection of 

the ASY fi eld for both mixers and below the control 

center toward idle for:

MIX 1: -60 % ... -80 % and

MIX 2: -5 % ... -10 % ...

Example Linear MIX 1:

C1

Mix input

0%

Offset

0%

Linear MIX 1 5

–70%

SYM ASY STO SET

With this, the base setup model of an F3A model is 

concluded.

Compensation of model-specifi c errors

Unfortunately, there are nearly always minor modelspecifi c "errors" through the mixers of a computer 

remote control which must be compensated for. 

However, before you begin with these settings, 

it should be ensured that the model is faultlessly 

constructed, optimally balanced over the longitudinal 

and transverse axes and the down thrust and side 

thrust are correct.

Infl uence of longitudinal and transverse axes by 

the rudder

The actuation of the rudder often infl uences the 

behavior of the longitudinal and transverse axes. This 

is particularly disruptive in so-called knife-edge fl ying, 

in which the lift of the model with the rudder defl ected 

should be created by the fuselage alone. In the 

process, the model can rotate and change directions 

as though it were controlled with the ailerons and 

elevator. Therefore, a correction over the transverse 

axis (elevator) and/or the longitudinal axis (ailerons) 

must be made, if applicable.

This can also be done easily with the »Free mixers« 

available in the mc-32 HoTT system. For example, if 

the model drifts away to the right over the longitudinal 

axis with the rudder extended in knife-edge fl ying, the 

aileron can be defl ected slightly to the left with the 

mixer. Changes in direction over the transverse axis 

can be performed analogously with a mixer on the 

elevator:

• Correction over the transverse axis (elevator)

Linear MIX 3: "Rudd  Elev"

Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must 

be tested in fl ight.

• Correction over the longitudinal axis (aileron)

Linear MIX 4: "Rudd  AIL"

Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must 

be tested in fl ight.

Relatively small mixer values are usually suffi cient 

in this case, the range lies below 10 %, but can vary 

from model to model. With the use of curve mixers, 

the mix ratios can be adapted even more precisely 

to the corresponding throw of the rudder. Again, no 

values are indicated for this, because this would be 

model-specifi c.
Programming examples - F3A model 307

Vertical ascent and descent

Some models have a tendency to deviate from the 

ideal line in vertical ascents and descents. 

In order to compensate for this, it is necessary to 

have a center position of the elevator dependent 

on the throttle joystick position. If, for example, the 

model begins to hold off on its own in the vertical 

descent with a throttled motor, some elevator must be 

mixed in at this throttle position.

For this purpose, program a free mixer "C1  Elev". 

The corresponding mixer values are normally under 

5 % and must also be tested in fl ight. 

Turning away over the longitudinal axis in idle

If the throttle is reduced, the model may begin to turn 

away over the longitudinal axis in idle. This can be 

counteracted with the aileron. 

However, the more elegant solution is to correct this 

effect with a free mixer "C1  Ail". 

The input values here are usually very low (approx. 3 %) 

and the settings should be made in calm weather. 

It often suffi ces to only use the mixer between 

half throttle and idle. Therefore program the mixer 

asymmetrically, if applicable.

Turning away with the ailerons/landing fl aps 

extended

If you move the ailerons upward for the landing, the 

result is often a turning away over the longitudinal 

axis due to various servo paths of the aileron servos 

or due to design precisions. Therefore, the model 

begins to automatically hang the left or right wing. 

This is also easy to compensate for with a mixer 

"C1  AIL" depending on the position of the 

ailerons/landing fl aps. 

The mixer must be switched on and off with the 

same switch with which you can switch the aileron/

landing fl ap function on and off (see previous page). 

Therefore, it only works with the aileron/landing fl ap 

function activated. The appropriate value must be 

tested in fl ight. 

One additional comment regarding ...

"FAIL-SAFE setting"

You utilize the safety potential of this option by the 

safety potential by programming at least the motor 

throttle position for combustion models to idle and 

the motor function for electrically powered models to 

stop for a Fail-Safe case. If interference should occur, 

the model is then less likely to fl y off on its own and 

cause damage to property or even personal injury. If 

you additionally program the fail-safe positions of the 

rudders to that the model fl ies in gently sinking circles 

in the event of a failure, there is a good chance that 

the model even lands relatively gently on its own in 

the event of a continuing connection failure. You also 

have suffi cient time to re-establish the connection 

if the entire 2.4 GHz frequency band is temporarily 

disrupted. 

In the receiver's condition as supplied, however, 

the servos maintain their last validly recognized 

position ("hold") in the event of a fail-safe situation. As 

described on page 208, you can defi ne a "Fail-safe 

position" for each receiver servo output (Fail-safe 

mode).

Summary

The settings described on this page are especially 

useful for the "expert" who would like to have an 

entirely neutral, precisely fl ying F3A model acrobatic 

model at his or her disposal. 

It should be mentioned this takes a lot of time, effort, 

instinct and know-how. Experts even program during 

the fl ight. To do this, however, is not suggested 

for an advanced beginner who ventures into an 

F3A acrobatic model. It would be best to turn to an 

experienced pilot and carry out the settings step by 

step until the model has the desired neutrality in its 

fl ight behavior. Then the pilot can begin to learn the 

not always easy to perform acrobatic fi gures with a 

model which fl ies faultlessly.
308 Programming examples - Helicopter models

Helicopter models 

With this programming example, you must have 

already covered the description of the individual 

menus and you must be familiar with the use of the 

transmitter. In addition, the helicopter's mechanical 

construction should correspond exactly to the 

corresponding manual. The electronic capabilities 

of the transmitter should by no means be used to 

straighten out rough mechanical imprecision.

As is often the case in life, there are also various 

ways and possibilities to achieve a specifi c goal 

when programming the mc-32 HoTT. The following 

example should provide you with a clearer structure 

for logical programming. If there are multiple 

possibilities, the simplest and most clearly arranged 

solutions are recommended fi rst. In order for the 

helicopter to function faultlessly later on, you are, of 

course, free to try out other solutions which may be 

better for you.

The programming example is based on the 

clockwise-rotating STARLET 50 helicopter from 

Graupner with three pivot points each offset 120 ° 

of the swashplate type "3sv(2 Roll)", beginner 

adjustment without increased throttle curve; without 

heading-lock gyro system and without transmitterside gyro infl uence of the "normal operating mode" 

and without speed regulator. 

This simple program was also consciously selected 

to demonstrate that a helicopter which fl ies really 

well can also be attained with relatively little 

(programming) effort. 

However, we do not want to dispense entirely with the 

enhancement possibilities: Therefore, after the basic 

description, you will fi nd adjustment information for 

the gyro effect, the speed regulators and for the fl ightphase programming.

Note:

If you are not interested in the combustion helicopter 

described here, but a electric helicopter, please 

continue reading anyhow! With the exception of the 

omitted idle settings, you can practically adopt most 

of the settings described in the following unchanged.

In the scope of the initial commissioning of a new 

transmitter, in the selection menu ...

»General basic settings« (page 256)

Battery type

Battery warning

Touch Sense

Top LCD Contrast

Li-Io

Display light

Region

2

3.60V

0

EURO

unlim.

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners name H-J Sandbrunner

Pre-set stick mode 1

Pre-set DSC Output PPM10

Pre-set Pitch min rear

Stick warning: unlim.

Pre-set modulation

Own phase name

Own phase name

HoTT

2

10

Bottom LCD Contrast 0

Own phase name 1

Voice volume

Vario volume

Touch-beeps vol.

7 fr –––

SEL SEL

7 fr –––

7 fr –––

Power-on/off beep yes

... some basic information should be entered. This 

serves various purposes:

The fi rst three lines of this menu can be used to 

individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 

10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via 

the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset 

connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to 

record the transmitter owner's name Select the 

characters for this from an extensive character list on 

the second display screen, which can be reached via 
Programming examples - Helicopter models 309

the  symbol with a brief tap on the center SET key 

of the right touch pad:

 !"#$%&’()

Owners name

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

+,–./0123456789:; ?

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

H-J Sandb

The pre-set for "Stick mode" can be selected 

according to the criteria described on page 258.

The same applies to the pre-sets for "Modulation" 

and "DSC Output".

The pre-set for "Pitch min" is a matter of personal 

control habits. 

The pre-sets established here for "Stick mode", 

"Modulation", "DSC Output" and "Pitch forward/

back" will be initially adopted when a new model 

memory is created but they can also be freely 

changed within a given model memory location to any 

other available option.

The settings in the "Top/Bottom LCD Contrast" lines 

determine the legibility of the given displays under 

poor light conditions and the setting in the "Display 

light" line determines how long display lighting 

remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched 

on or after the last key actuation.

The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep" 

line determines whether the "recognition melody" is 

to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on 

again.

The "Battery type" line specifi es whether the 

transmitter is supplied with current from a "NiMH or a 

“Lith." battery, and the "Battery warning" line below it 

specifi es the voltage at which the transmitter's lowvoltage warning should trigger. Do not enter a value 

that is too low here, so you have enough time to land 

your helicopter.

The setting made in the "Stick warning" line 

determines how long the transmitter will wait after the 

last actuation of an operating element before issuing 

visual and acoustic warning signals to indicate it 

is still switched on. Following the warning, you still 

have about one minute to actuate the transmitter so 

the warning will abate. Otherwise the transmitter will 

switch itself off when this minute expires.

The value set in the "Touch Sense" line is a matter 

of adapting the transmitter to personal preferences. 

And, in the event the transmitter is to be operated in 

France, the setting in the "Region" line is important: 

The legal regulations in France require that the 

"FRANCE" option is selected instead of the default 

setting "EURO".

Later on, the ten "Own phase name" lines can be 

used to create one's own phase names if none of the 

pre-set phase names appear appropriate.

Once these settings have been taken care of, 

commissioning continues with the menu ...

"Model select" (page 69)

Use the selection keys to pick a free memory 

location ...

03

04

05

01

06

R16

 free 

 free 

 free 

 free 

00:12h

02  free 

... and call it up with a brief tap on the center SET

key of the right touch pad. In the display which then 

appears, use the  key of the left or right touch pad ...

Select model type (free model memory)

... to select the "helicopter" model type. The display 

immediately switches to the base screen if the 

selection is confi rmed by a brief tap on the center 

SET key of the right touch pad. 

Notes:

• If the "Select model type" option has been 

opened, the process cannot be canceled. Even 

if you switch off the transmitter, this selection 

must be made! In any case, you can undo this 

by subsequently deleting the respective model 

memory.

• If the "Throttle too high" warning appears, it can 

be erased by turning the right-side proportional 

rotary control to its forward limit.

• If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover 

cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An 

appropriate message will appear in the screen:

not possible now

voltage too low

Once this fi rst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the 

receiver built into the model at this model memory 

must be made in the menu ...
310 Programming examples - Helicopter models

... which must be assembled from characters available 

on the second page of the "Model name" line:

 !"#$%&’()

Model name Starle

@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_

+,–./0123456789:; ?

¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ

`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

After entering the "Model name", the settings 

adopted from »General basic settings« for "Stick 

mode" and "DSC Output" are to be checked and 

changed as necessary for the given memory location.

The entry fi eld in the "Info" line can be used if needed 

for a notice of up to 15 characters in length. This 

notice will then be helpful in the selection of models 

and so on.

Another option is to be activated in the 

"Autorotation" line. Even if you are not an advanced 

pilot, the autorotation switch should at least be set as 

an emergency shutoff switch for the motor. 

Do this by selecting the "Autorotation" line with a 

brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch 

pad, activate the switch assignment, assign a 2-way 

switch, e.g. "2", an put it in its "ON" position.

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

SET SET

RF transmit on

RF range test 99s

DSC Output PPM10

Autorotation 2I

The selected switch should be in a location on the 

transmitter which is easily within reach – without letting 

loose of a joystick – e.g. above the pitch joystick. 

»Basic settings, model« (page 84 ... 92)

... To this end, switch to the line "Module".

Model name

Stick mode

Module

1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a

Info

n/a n/a

Starlet

SEL

HoTT 

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

2345g/090911

Note:

After confi rmation of the model selection in the base 

screen, if you confi rm the message appearing in the 

screen for a few seconds ...

BIND. N/A

OK

... with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, 

this line will be accessed automatically.

The line "Module" initiates a binding process between 

model memory and receiver, as described in detail on 

page 88. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver.

Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right 

four-way pad to move up to the fi rst line and begin 

with actual model programming in the "Model name" 

line. Now give the model memory an appropriate 

name, ...

Model name

Stick mode

Module

1

n/a

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a

Info

n/a n/a

Starlet

SEL

HoTT 

BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4

2345g/090911

Note:

More more information about the setting of this 

"emergency shutoff", see the beginning of the second 

following double-page.

Another tip:

Make a habit of giving all switches a common switchon direction; then a quick glance over the transmitter 

prior to the fl ight should suffi ce – all switches off. 

Setting options for the "Autorotation C1 position", 

"Motor stop", "Marking" and "Stick warning" are not 

yet of particular interest ...

... and the "Auto Trim" line should only be assigned 

to a switch if "Initial trimming" is to be performed 

on the helicopter in the context of a trimming fl ight. 

Following such a fl ight, this switch should be erased 

once again, for reasons of safety.

Additional settings specifi c to helicopters are made in 

the menu ...

»Helicopter type« (page 98)

In the "Swashplate type" line, select control for 

swashplate or pitch function. In this example: 

"3Sv(2rol)".

The "Linearis. swashpl." line is not yet of interest.

In the "Rotor direction" line, it is established whether 

the rotor – as viewed from above – turns to the right 

(clockwise) or left (counter-clockwise). In other words, 

whether it rotates counterclockwise or clockwise. In 

this example "right". 

Check the default for "Pitch min", which was adopted 

from »General basic settings«, to confi rm that the 

entry "front" or "rear" is in keeping with personal 

preferences or should be changed.
Programming examples - Helicopter models 311

Linearis. swashpl.

Swashplate type

no

1 Servo

Rotor direction right

HELTYPE

Pitch min. rear

SEL

Both "Expo throttle lim." as well as "Thr. limit 

warning", in bottom line of this display, are currently 

of no interest.

By now, the servos should be plugged into the 

receiver in the intended sequence:

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

13 14 T 15 16 S 7 8 9 10 11 12

Receiver power supply

Telemetry connection

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

SUMO / SUMI-connection

Receiver power supply

Receiver power supply

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo

Pitch-axis 1 servo

free or speed governor or aux. function

Roll 2 servo

free or aux. function

Throttle servo or speed controller

Gyro gain

Note:

Please note that on the newer Graupner-mc- and 

mx- remote control systems, the fi rst pitch servo and 

the throttle servo are swapped in comparison to older 

systems.

Mix ratios and mix directions for swashplate pitch, roll 

and nick servos are already pre-adjusted to +61 % in 

the menu ...

»Swashplate mixer« (page 208)

SWASH MIXER

Pitch

Roll

Pitch ax.

+61%

+61%

+61%

SEL

. If the swashplate mixer should not follow joystick 

movements properly, fi rst change the mixing 

directions from "+" to "-" before changing servo 

directions in the menu ...

»Servo adjustment« (page 102)

Servo 1 0% 100%

Servo 2

Servo 3

Servo 4

Servo 5

Rev cent.

100% 150% 150%

– travel + – limit +

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

... This menu can also be used to adapt travel and 

direction for individual servos. However, one must 

attempt to retain 100 % servo travel so as to achieve 

the best possible resolution and control accuracy. The 

direction of travel is determined with "Rev." and, in 

the process, make sure that the direction is correct. 

The tail rotor servo must run so that the nose (!) of 

the helicopter follows the tail joystick direction. 

In the menu ...

»Stick mode« (page 106)

Pitch/thr Thr trim

Roll

Pitch ax

Tail rot.

Trim

0.0s

Tr. step – time +

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

global 0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

0.0s

4

4

4

4

... the column "Tr. step" is used to set the increment 

size of each "click" on the digital trim keys. 

The C1 trimming only affects the throttle servo for 

the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go 

into the particulars of this trimming ("cut-off trim") 

once again. Please read more about this on page 58. 

(Thanks to digital trimming, trim values can be saved 

automatically when a model change is affected. In 

the mc-32 HoTT system these can even be stored 

automatically when a change of fl ight phase takes 

place.).

An additional setting which is specifi c to helicopters 

can also be made in this menu in which you determine 

which function the trim slider on the pitch joystick 

should have. This is accomplished by selecting the 

"Throttle limit" setting in the "Throttle" line or leaving 

it as it is. This roughly corresponds to trim for the 

familiar idle trim function. If the trim indicator marker is 

moved all the way forward by "turning" the trim wheel 

(remember: "pitch min rear" = "throttle forward") the 

throttle limit will later take over the throttle limit for 

throttle enable seamlessly in the menu ...
312 Programming examples - Helicopter models

»Control adjust« (page 112 ... 119)

I13 +100% 0%

I14

I15

Tl16

Typ

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

Lv1

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

fr --- 0.0 0.0

SET

... where input "Tl16" is assigned and all other inputs 

are "fr(ee)" by default.

This "Tl16" input serves as the throttle limiter. Its 

effect is exclusively on output "6", where the throttle 

servo is connected. The throttle limiter is assigned by 

default to the right-side proportional rotary control.

Once again, as a reminder:

• With the user of the "throttle limiter" function, you 

do not have to program a fl ight phase "throttle preselection". 

• The throttle limiter does not control the throttle 

servo; it only limits the travel of the throttle servo 

in the full throttle direction according to its position. 

The throttle servo is generally controlled from 

the pitch joystick via »Helicopter mixer« menu 

setting/s for throttle curve/s, which is why input 

6 must absolutely remain "free". Refer to pages 

180 through 182 in this manual about this. 

• The C1 trimming also affects only the throttle servo 

for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to 

go into the particulars of this trimming once again. 

Please read more about this on page 58. (Thanks 

to the digital trimming, trim can be automatically 

saved values with a model changeover as well as 

with a change of the fl ight phase).

• A detailed description of the idle run base setup 

model and the adjustment of idle and throttle limit 

can be found beginning on page 117.

Then switch to the "travel" column with the 

selection key of the left or right touch pad and 

increase the now inversely highlighted value from 

+100 % to +125 % with a fully opened throttle limiter 

with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad:

I13 +100% 0%

I14

I15

Tl16

Typ

+100%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

fr

Lv1

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

fr --- 0.0 0.0

+125%

SET

In doing so, it is assured that the throttle limiter 

releases the entire throttle travel with the pitch 

joystick later during fl ight.

Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:

Since electric drive systems have no need for an 

idle setting, the basic confi guration of settings for 

an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves 

making sure that the control range of the throttle 

limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment 

range of the speed controller (usually -100 % to 

+100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore, 

the adjustment of the "travel" setting of the throttle 

limiter described above must be modifi ed accordingly, 

for example, to symmetric 110 %. The further 

adjustment, however, can take place analogously to 

the combustion helicopter described here.

With this process, you have not carried out the basic 

settings for the transmitter as they are needed again 

later for further model programming. 

The actual helicopter-specifi c settings take place 

primarily in the menu ...

» Helicopter mixer« (page 176 ... 191)

Channel 1

Channel 1

Pitch

Throttle

Tail rot.

Tail rot. 0%

Roll 0%

Throttle

Roll

Throttle

Tail rot.

Nick

Nick

Throttle

Tail rot.

Swashplate rotation

Swashplate limiter

0%

0%

0%

0°

off

Gyro suppression 0%



Gyro offset 0%

Normal

The "Pitch" function appears right in the fi rst line. A tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad will cause 

a switch to the corresponding sub-menu. The graphic 

representation of the pitch curve appears here; it is 

initially only defi ned by the points "L" and "H":

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–50%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Normal

Now place point "1" in the center with a brief tap on 

the center SET key of the right touch pad:
Programming examples - Helicopter models 313

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

0%

Normal

Always try to make due with these three points 

initially; more points can "over-complicate" the matter 

and are more of a burden at this point.

The reference point for the hovering should generally 

be the mechanical center position of the pitch joystick, 

because this position comes closest to the normal 

control feel. Although the curve adjustment enables 

other settings, you must know exactly what you 

are doing. First set the pitch joystick in the center. 

The servos which you had previously set according 

to manufacturer specifi cations have their levers at 

positioned perpendicularly to the servo housing 

(normally). A hovering pitch value of 4° to 5° is now 

mechanically set at the control rods to the rotor blades. 

In principle, all known helicopters fl y with this setting. 

Then move the pitch joystick towards maximum pitch 

until the limit position. (The vertical line shows you 

the current joystick position.) Now change the pitch 

curve's point "H" with the selection keys of the right 

touch pad such that the main rotor's blades have a 

maximum pitch of about 9°. A value of +50 % should 

be about right.

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input +100%

+50%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

+50%

Normal

Note:

A rotor blade adjustment gage, such as the Graupner 

pitch gage, order no. 61, is quite useful for reading 

the angle. 

Now move the pitch joystick toward the pitch 

minimum position until its limit position. Depending 

on the ability of the pilot, adjust the value of point "L" 

so that the blade angle of approach is 0 to -4°. Now a 

slightly pitched line arises at the hovering points, the 

so-called pitch curve, which can appear as follows:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –100%

–75%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

–75%

Normal

Now you can, if you like, move the marker frame 

upward with the selection keys to the "Curve" line 

and after activation of the value fi eld with a brief tap 

on the center SET key of the right touch pad, set the 

curve function of the mixer to "on".

Pitch

Curve

Point

Output

Input –100%

–75%

1 – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

–75%

Normal

on

If you now switch to autorotation phase – at the 

bottom left of the display the fl ight phase name 

"Autorot" appears – the "old" pitch curve is again:

Pitch

Curve

off Point

Output

Input –50%

–50%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

1

0%

Autorot

Now carry out the same setting as before in the 

normal phase. Only at point "H“ – at maximum 

pitch – is it possible to increase pitch angle by about 

2°. In doing so, you will have somewhat more of an 

angle to catch the model later on (1).

After setting pitch curve, move the autorotation 

switch back then return to the helicopter mixer menu 

selection with a brief tap on the center ESC key 

of the left touch pad. In that display, change to the 

"Channel 1  Throttle" line to set the throttle curve.

The adjustment range for idle trim must fi rst be 

matched to the throttle curve. Do this by putting the 

pitch joystick into its minimum position then set point 

"L" to about +15 %. 

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

+15%

L – + 100

 O U T P U T

Throttle

Normal

+15%

With the throttle limiter closed and idle trim completely 

open, move the pitch joystick back and forth somewhat 

at the minimum limit position. The throttle servo 

may not move with it in the process. No you have 

established a seamless transition from the idle trim to 

the throttle curve. The further settings along the throttle 

curve must be carried out later in fl ight. 
314 Programming examples - Helicopter models

If you switch from this graphic to the autorotation 

phase for testing purposes, the following appears 

instead of the accustomed representation:

off

C1 Throttle

Autorot

That means that this mixer is switched off and the 

throttle servo is switched to a fi xed value, which can 

be adjusted as follows: 

Return to the menu list with a tap on the ESC key. As 

long as you are still in the autorotation phase, new 

sub-menus are listed; specifi cally:

Pitch

–90%

Tail rot. offset AR 0%

Throttle position AR

Gyro suppression 0%

Gyro offset 0%

Autorot SEL

The line "Thr. setting AR" is important. Enter the value 

to the right, depending on servo direction, to either 

approximately +125 % or -125 %. 

Pitch

–125%

Tail rot. offset AR 0%

Throttle position AR

Gyro suppression 0%

Gyro offset 0%

Autorot SEL

In doing so, the motor is safely switched off in the 

autorotation phase (in case of emergency). Later, 

when you have gained enough experience to practice 

the autorotation fl ight, a more stable idle can be 

entered here.

Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:

Since the motor must also be shut off for electrically 

powered helicopters in case of an emergency, this 

setting is adopted without change. 

The further sub-menus are not important at the 

moment. By switching off "autorotation", it returns to 

the fi rst menu list.

Select the "Channel 1  Tail rot." settings page 

in order to set static torque compensation for the 

tail rotor. In this case, also work with a maximum of 

three interpolation points; everything else is reserved 

for the experienced pilot. Do this by changing the 

heading-lock systems from their intended uniform 

pre-setting of 0 % at point "L" (minimum pitch) to 

-30 % and at the opposite end, at point "H" to +30 % 

(maximum pitch). These values may have to be 

corrected in fl ight. It may also be necessary to set 

point "1" in the middle.

Channel 1

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

Tail rot.

Now, for testing purposes, switch back to the 

autorotation phase. Here the setting is also 

deactivated; the tail servo no longer reacts to pitch 

movements (no torque usually arises when the main 

rotor is not powered). All additional interpolation 

points are not currently of importance yet.

If, contrary to the default setting, the gyro has a 

transmitter-side sensitivity setting, another free 

proportional control will be needed. This can be 

assigned in the ...

»Control adjust« (page 112 ... 119)

... menu to "Gyr7" input. Activate the control 

assignment with a brief tap on the center SET key of 

the right touch pad then move the selected control 

until its control number appears in the display: 

I5 +88% 0%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

Typ

+111%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

Sl1

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

0.0 0.0

SET

fr ---

Conclude this entry with a brief tap on the ESC key of 

the left touch pad then change to the column "- travel 

+" with the  selection key of the left or right touch 

pad. After a tap on the center SET key of the right 

touch pad, the gyro's maximum sensitivity can be set 

in the value fi eld displayed in inverse video, e.g. to 

50 %. To this end, move the selected control into its 

middle position or, if applicable also to the side, such 

that only one value fi eld is displayed in inverse video:

I5 +88% 0%

Thr6

Gyr7

I8

Typ

+111%

– travel + –time+

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

0% 0.0 0.0

0% +100% +100% 0.0 0.0

GL

GL

GL

fr

Sl1

fr

---

---

---

offset

GL

Normal

0.0 0.0

SET

fr ---

+50% +50%

This produces a fi xed value for as long as the control 

remains at the right limit position. The correct value 

must be adjusted in fl ight. 
Programming examples - Helicopter models 315

In the process, however, always observe the 

adjustment instructions accompanying your gyro 

sensor, because your helicopter will not be able 

to fl y otherwise!

To conclude this initial programming, a few words 

should be mentioned about the menu ...

»Channel 1 curve« (page 131)

Channel 1 C U R V E

Curve

off Point

Output

Input 0%

0%

? – + 100

 O U T P U T

0%

This function is a type of "convenient exponential 

curve" for the throttle/pitch joystick and the mixer 

functions connected to it.

If ever, this curve should only be applied "cautiously" 

at the very end, when all adjustments have been 

made. It should never be used for the throttle/pitch 

adjustment! The over-lapping result in "nasty" effects.

With this, all helicopter-specifi c settings which can be 

made on the "workbench" are now completed. The 

further fi ne-tuning must take place in fl ight. The fl ighttested, (hopefully) minor (digital) trim settings are 

automatically saved. 

Larger deviations should fi rst be mechanically 

adjusted or adjusted according to the previously 

discussed settings.

Further settings

Following this programming example, you have 

provided a helicopter with a basic adjustment for the 

hovering training and simple trips. Depending on 

your knowledge and experience as a pilot, additional 

functions can, of course, also be activated. 

If you want to fl y at different speeds and with different 

trimming, you activate the so-called "fl ight phases", 

which can be called with assigned switches as 

an alternative to the previously described "normal 

phase". For this purpose, fi rst open the menu ...

»Phase settings« (page 146)

... whereby the symbols appearing in the second 

column, sometimes only after a switch assignment in 

the »Phase assignment« menu, have the following 

meanings:

"–": no phase switch present

"+": phase switch present

"": currently active phase

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time

–

–

–

–

Autorot Autorot 

However, consider in advance whether these are to 

be implemented with individual switches or, more 

reasonably, with 3-way switches because as many 

as 7 fl ight phases can be activated in addition to 

the autorotation phase. The latter possibility is more 

logical and usually more clearly laid out.

The "Autorot" line is already selected in the fi gure 

above. When activated, the autorotation phase 

always has precedence over any other phases you 

assign switches to. 

However, in the "Name" column you fi rst assign 

"meaningful" names to Phases 1 to 3, which are 

adopted from a list. These identifi cations serve for the 

better differentiation and are shown later in the base 

screen and for all fl ight-phase dependent menus, for 

example:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

–

–

–

–

Autorot Autorot 

Normal

Hover

Speed

Then, in the fourth column from the left, enter the 

switching time with which the FROM phase should 

switch TO the next respective phase. Approximately 

1 s should suffi ce:

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 4

1.1s

1.1s

1.1s

0.1s

Name Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

–

–

–

–

Autorot Autorot 

Normal

Hover

Speed 1.1s

This value can also be adjusted later according to 

your personal preferences. Please observe in the 

process that TO the autorotation phase, whose 

name is defi ned as "Autorot", is switched without a 

time delay. If necessary, enter the time with which a 

change FROM the autorotation phase to a different 

phase should be affected.

In order to be able to switch between the individual 

fl ight phases, the assignment of the individual 

switches or the three-stage switch is necessary.

The assignment of the switch takes place in the 

menu ...

»Phase assignment« (page 148)

Under "C" and "D", for example, assign the one of the 

two standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch 

panels, e.g.:
316 Programming examples - Helicopter models

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

C

1 Normal

combi

A B DEF

6 7

Now the given switch position must be assigned to 

the respective fl ight phase in the »Phase settings« 

menu. Since these phases already have names, 

the name «1 Normal» will initially appear at the right 

in the display. If the already assigned autorotation 

switch was activated, the following warning message 

appears in the display:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

C

1 Normal

Kombination

A B DEF

6 7

Autorot

As a reminder:

The autorotation phase has absolute precedence.

Therefore, move the autorotation switch back again 

then put the selected switch, in the example the 

three-stage switch connected to switch plug-in 

locations 6 and 7, initially to one of its limit positions. 

Now use the selection keys to change to the bottom 

right and activate this entry fi eld:

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

1 Normal

Now use the selection keys to select the desired fl ight 

phase for this – for example "2 Hover" ...

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

2 Hover

... and confi rm this selection with a brief tap on the 

center SET key of the right touch pad or go ahead 

and put the switch into its other limit position and 

defi ne the name for this new switch position, such as 

«3 Speed». 

PHASEASSIGNMENT

prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

3 Speed

The switch's middle position then receives the name 

"1 Normal":

PHASEASSIGNMENT

Prior.

C

combi

A B DEF

2 6 7

1 Normal

Note:

Exchanged or different name assignments for the 

three switch positions are, of course, also possible. 

Thus, for example, implementation of a programmed 

speed controller (as described beginning in the next 

column) can make a sequence like "normal / hover / 

acro" quite logical.

The model settings made before the assignment of 

a phase switch are now in the fl ight phase "Normal". 

This is the phase which is called after the above 

defi nition in the switch center position.

This normal setting, which was already tested in 

fl ight, can be copied to a different fl ight phase so that 

fl ying can take place in the same manner in every 

phase at fi rst. For this purpose, use the menu ...

»Copy / Erase« (page 72) 

Copy flight phase

Erase model

Copy model –> model

Export to SD

Import from SD

=>



With the operation of the fl ight phases, it is possible 

to carry out changes in the phase-dependent menu 

for each individual phase. Since the mc-32 HoTT 

system has digital trimming, in addition to the fl ightphase dependent menu settings in the helicopter 
Programming examples - Helicopter models 317

program, the trim positions of roll, nick and tail rotor 

joystick can also be selected for storage on a fl ightphase dependent basis, see »Stick mode« menu, 

page 106: 

0:00h

Stop watch

Flight tim

K78

0:00.0

4.1V

0:00.0

0 0 0 0

0:00h

M

V

H-J Sandbrunner

Normal

#02

Starlet

RX VOLT:4.9V

Enhancement recommendation: Rotational speed 

regulator

At some point in time you may want to install a 

rotational speed regulator in the helicopter, such as 

mc-Heli-Control, in order to be able to fl y with speeds 

automatically kept at a constant. In the process, it 

is logical to couple the individual rotational speeds 

with the fl ight phases so that further additional 

adjustments are possible.

It is mandatory for the transmitter-side programming 

that the rotational speed regulator was installed 

and programmed according to the manufacturer's 

instructions. Of course, the mc-32 HoTT here too 

offers multiple possibilities to realize various speeds 

in individual phases. A practical proposal which 

retains the throttle limiter function can be found 

beginning on page 181.

If you have adjusted your helicopter according to 

this programming principle, it is not yet a competition 

helicopter, but it already permits sophisticated fl ying. 

You should only activate additional functions if 

the model fl ies faultlessly so that the (desired) 

improvements are also easy to follow. Insofar as 

possible, activate individual functions on an individual 

basis so that you can actually recognize and attribute 

the change. Bear in mind that it is not the quantity 

of functions used that distinguishes good pilots, but 

what they can do in terms of fl ying with relatively little. 
318 FCC Information

FCC Information

Graupner mc-32 HoTT #33032

FCC ID: ZKZ-MC-32

FCC Statement

1. This device complies with Part 15C of the FCC 

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two 

conditions:

 (1) This device may not cause harmful 

 interference.

 (2) This device must accept any interference 

received, including interference that may 

cause un desired operation.

2. Changes or modifi cations not expressly approved 

by the party responsible for compliance could void 

the user‘s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This equipment has been tested and found to 

comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, 

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits 

are designed to provide reasonable protection against 

harmful interference in a residential installation. This 

equipment generates uses and can radiate radio 

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in 

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful 

interference to radio communications. However, there 

is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a 

particular installation. If this equipment does cause 

harmful interference to radio or television reception, 

which can be determined by turning the equipment 

off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct 

the interference by one or more of the following 

measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment 

and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a 

circuit different from that to which the receiver is 

connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV 

technician for help. 

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This equipment complies with FCC radiation 

exposure limits set forth for un uncontrolled 

envirionment. Thisequipment should be installed and 

operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between 

the antenna and your body.
Declaration of Conformity 319

Declaration of Conformity Konformitätserklärung gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekomunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal Equipment Act (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE) Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck erklärt, dass das Produkt: declares that the product

Geräteklasse: 2Equipment classden grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht. complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of theR&TTE Directive).Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:Harmonised standards applied

EN 60950-1:2006+A11:

2009+A1:2010+A12:2011 

EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2

EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1EN 300 328 V1.7.1 

 Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a)) Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b)) Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum § 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))

Kirchheim,07. August 2012 Stefan Graupner, Geschäftsführer 

Stefan Graupner, Managing Director

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck GermanyTel: 07021/722-0 EMail: info@graupner.de Fax: 07021/722-188

Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a)) 

Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetische 

Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))

Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums 

§ 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))

mx-10 HoTT - No. 33110, mx-12 HoTT - No. 33112, mx-16 HoTT - No. 33116, mx-20 HoTT - No. 33124,mc-16 HoTT - No. 33016, mc-20 HoTT - No. 33020,mc-32 - No. 33032

0678

GR-12S HoTT - No. 33505, GR-12 HoTT - No. 33506, GR-16 HoTT - No. 33508, GR-24 HoTT - No. 33512, GR-32 HoTT - No. 33516
320 Warranty Certifi cate

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96, 

D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck guarantees this product for 

a period of 24 months from date of purchase. The 

warranty is only valid for the material or functional 

defects already present at the time of the purchase 

of the product. Schäden, die auf Abnützung, 

Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder unsachgemäße 

Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der 

Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und 

Gewährleistunsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden 

durch diese Garantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie 

vor einer Reklamation oder Rücksendung das Produkt 

genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die 

entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 - 

96. D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees 

this product for a period of 24 months from date 

of purchase. The guarantee applies only to such 

material or operational defects which are present at 

the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to 

wear, overloading, incompetent handling or the use of 

incorrect accessories is not covered by the guarantee. 

The user ́s legal rights and claims under guarantee are 

not affected by this guarantee. Please check the product 

carefully for defects before you are make a claim or 

send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a 

charge for our cost if the product is found to be free of 

faults.

La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, 

Henriettenstraße 94-96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde 

sur ce produit une garantie de 24 mois à compter de la 

date d’achat. La garantie ne s’applique qu’aux défauts 

de matériel et de fonctionnement du produit acheté. Les 

dommages dus à une usure, à une surcharge, à l’emploi 

d’accessoires non compatibles ou à une manipulation non 

conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette garantie ne 

remet pas en cause les droits légaux des consommateurs. 

Avant toute réclamation ou retour de matériel, vérifi ez 

précisément les défauts ou vices constatés, car si le 

matériel est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été constaté 

par nos services, nous nous verrions contraints de 

facturer le coût de cette intervention.

Garantie-Urkunde

Warranty certifi cate / Certifi cat de garantie

mc-32 HoTT Set

 Order no. 33032

Übergabedatum:

Date of purchase/delivery:

Date d’achat :

Name des Käufers:

Owner ́s name:

Nom de I`acheteur :

Straße, Wohnort:

Complete address:

Adresse complète :

Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:

Stamp and signature of dealer:

Cachet et signature du détaillant :

Warranty Certifi cate

Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente

Graupner Zentralservice

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96

D-73230 Kirchheim

Service hotline

 (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*

Monday ... Friday

9:30 - 11:30 & 13:00 - 15:00

United Kingdom

Graupner Service

Brunel Drive

GB, NEWARK, Nottinghamshire

NG242EG

(+44) 16 36 61 05 39

Sverige

Baltechno Electronics

Box 5307

S 40227 Göteborg

(+46) 31 70 73 00 0

Schweiz

Graupner Service

Wehntalerstrasse 37

CH 8181 Hoeri

 (+41) 43 26 66 58 3

Luxembourg

Kit Flammang

129, route d’Arlon

L 8009 Strassen

(+35) 23 12 23 2

France

Graupner France

Gérard Altmayer

86, rue St. Antoine

F 57601 Forbach-Oeting

(+33) 3 87 85 62 12

Espana

Anguera Hobbies

C/Terrassa 14

E 43206 Reus (Tarragona)

 (+34) 97 77 55 32 0

info@anguera-hobbies.com 

Ceská Republika

Slovenská Republika

RC Service Z. Hnizdil

Letecka 666/22

CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne

(+42) 2 33 31 30 95

Belgie/Belgique/Nederland

Jan van Mouwerik

Slot de Houvelaan 30

NL 3155 Maasland VT

 (+31) 10 59 13 59 4

Italia

GiMax

Via Manzoni, no. 8

I 25064 Gussago

(+39) 030 25 22 73 2 * 0.14 cent / minute from a 

German Telecom landline. 

Calling price variations 

possible for calls from cell 

phones or from the landlines of other providers.

Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von

This product is warrantied for

Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de 24 Monaten

months

mois
For your notes 321
322 For your notes
For your notes 323
HOPPING.TELEMETRY.TRANSMISSION

GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG

POSTFACH 1242

D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK

GERMANY

http://www.graupner.de

Changes and delivery options reserved. Available only 

through dealerships. A directory of suppliers will be 

provided. No liability is accepted for print errors.

Printed in China PN.QH-01

Although the information provided in these instructions has 

been carefully scrutinized for viability, no form of liability can 

be accepted for errors, omissions or print errors. Graupner

reserves the right to change the described hardware and 

software features at any time without prior notifi cation.